Cell C Limited

$184,002,000 8.625% First Priority Senior Secured Notes due 2020

______

LISTING PARTICULARS

______

Not for general distribution in the United States

Cell C Limited $184,002,000 8.625% First Priority Senior Secured Notes due 2020 ISIN: XS1634003831 / Common Code: 163400383 Cell C Limited (formerly Cell C Proprietary Limited, having changed its name on 7 August 2017) (“Cell C” or the “Issuer” and, together with its consolidated subsidiaries, the “Group”), a public company incorporated in the Republic of , has issued (the “Issuance”) 8.625% first priority senior secured notes due 2020 in an aggregate principal amount of $184,002,000 (the “Notes”). The Notes have been issued, in part, in exchange for EUR400,000,000 in aggregate principal amount of our 8.625% first priority senior secured notes due 2018 (the “Existing Cell C Notes”) pursuant to terms and conditions of an “Arrangement” under Section 155 of the South African Companies Act 2008 (the “Arrangement”), which was approved by the requsite majority of holders of the Existing Cell C Notes on June 28, 2017 and sanctioned by the South Local Division of the High Court of South Africa sitting in on July 18, 2017. Unless previously redeemed in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, each Note bears interest at a rate of 8.625% per annum from (and including) the date of issue (the “Issue Date”) to (but excluding) 2 August, 2020 (the “Maturity Date”), payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1 in each year, commencing on December 1, 2017 (or if such date is not a Business Day (as defined in the “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”), then the applicable payment will be made on the next Business Day). The Notes will mature, and principal of the Notes is scheduled to be paid, on the Maturity Date. The Notes are senior obligations of the Issuer and are secured by first ranking security interests on an equal and rateable basis with the lender(s) under the CDB Facilities, the new ICBC Facility, the new Nedbank Facility and the DBSA Facility (each as defined herein), such lenders having acceded to the Amended and Restated Intercreditor Agreement (as defined herein) (such lenders, together, the “Senior Lenders”), and counterparties to certain hedging obligations (such counterparties having acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (the “Hedge Counterparties”), in collateral that consists of substantially all of the existing and acquired personal property and the other assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (as defined below), to the extent such assets are assignable (such rights and interests, together with all other rights, interests and assets that from time to time secure the Notes and the Guarantees (as defined below), the “Collateral”). The Notes (a) effectively are senior to all of the Issuer’s existing and future indebtedness that is unsecured or is secured on a basis junior to the security granted in respect of the Notes, in each case to the extent of the assets securing the Notes; (b) rank equally in right of payment with all existing and future indebtedness of the Issuer that is not subordinated in right of payment to the Notes; (c) rank senior in right of payment to any existing and future subordinated obligations of the Issuer; and (d) effectively are subordinated to any existing and future indebtedness of the Issuer that is secured by assets other than the Collateral), including the share capital of the Issuer, to the extent of the value of such assets (unless such assets also secure the Notes on an equal and rateable or prior basis). As of the date of these listing particulars (these “Listing Particulars”), the Issuer’s obligations under the trust deed governing the Notes dated 2 August, 2017 (the “Trust Deed”) and the Notes are fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed (the “Guarantees”), jointly and severally, on a senior secured basis, by Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited, Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited and any other subsidiary of the Issuer that is required to guarantee the Notes pursuant to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes (the “Guarantors”). The Notes are issued in denominations of $1,000 principal amount and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof. The Notes are initially represented by a global note in registered form without interest coupons attached. The Notes have been delivered to investors in book entry form through Euroclear Bank SA/NV and Clearstream Banking S.A.. See “Book Entry; Delivery and Form.” As of the date of these Listing Particulars, the Issuer is rated B- and Caa1 by S&P Global Ratings, acting through Standard and Poor’s Credit Market Services Europe Limited (“S&P”), and Moody’s Investors Services Ltd. (“Moody’s”), respectively. The Notes are rated B and Caa1 by S&P and Moody’s, respectively. Each of S&P and Moody’s is established in the European Union (“EU”) and is registered under Regulation (EC) No. 1060/2009 (as amended) of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 September 2009 on credit rating agencies (“CRA Regulation”). A credit rating is not a recommendation to buy, sell or hold securities and may be subject to revision, suspension or withdrawal at any time by assigning the rating agency. INVESTING IN THE NOTES INVOLVES RISKS. BEFORE INVESTING IN ANY NOTES, YOU SHOULD CONSIDER CAREFULLY EACH OF THE RISK FACTORS AS SET FORTH UNDER “RISK FACTORS” BEGINNING ON PAGE 52 OF THESE LISTING PARTICULARS. There is currently no public market for the Notes. An application has been made to the Irish Stoch Exchange plc for the Notes to be admitted to the Official List and to trading on the global exchange market of the Irish Stock Exchange (the “Global Exchange Market”). These Listing Particulars have been approved by the Irish Stock Exchange. References in these Listing Particulars to the

Notes being “listed” (and all related references) will mean that the Notes have been admitted to the Official List and have been admitted to trading on the Global Exchange Market. The Global Exchange Market is not a regulated market pursuant to the provisions of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (Directive 2004/39/EC). There is no assurance that the Notes will be listed and admitted to trade on the Global Exchange Market. The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or under the securities laws of any state or other jurisdiction of the United States, and may not be offered or sold within the United States or to, or for the account or benefit of, U.S. persons (as defined in Regulation S under the Securities Act, “Regulation S”) unless registered under the Securities Act or pursuant to an applicable exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and in compliance with any applicable securities laws of any state or other jurisdiction of the United States. Accordingly, the Notes are for sale outside the United States only to persons who are not U.S. persons (as defined in Regulation S), in compliance with Regulation S. Prospective investors will be deemed to have made or be required to make certain representations and warranties in connection with the purchase of the Notes. The Notes have not been approved or disapproved by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) or any other securities commission or other regulatory authority in the United States, nor have the foregoing authorities approved these Listing Particulars or confirmed the accuracy or determined the adequacy of the information contained in these Listing Particulars. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offence under the laws of the United States. The Notes will be subject to restrictions on transfer and resale. You should be aware that you may be required to bear the financial risks of an investment in the Notes for an indefinite period of time. See “Notices to Investors”. 20 September 2017

Table of Contents

Page

Important Information ...... 4 Notices to Investors ...... 5 Cautionary Note on Forward-Looking Statements ...... 9 Industry and Market Data ...... 10 Trademarks ...... 11 Presentation of Financial and Other Information ...... 12 Summary...... 19 Risk Factors ...... 51 The Cell C Recapitalization ...... 83 Capitalization ...... 94 Selected Consolidated Historical Financial Information ...... 96 Industry ...... 98 Our Business ...... 106 Certain Contracts Relating to the Operation of Our Business ...... 143 Regulation...... 147 Management ...... 157 Principal Shareholders ...... 163 Related Party Transactions ...... 164 Description of Other Indebtedness ...... 165 Terms and Conditions of the Notes ...... 170 Book-Entry; Delivery and Form ...... 197 Taxation ...... 198 Distribution Restrictions ...... 202 Disclosure in terms of the Commercial Paper regulations ...... 203 Transfer Restrictions ...... 204 Exchange Controls ...... 205 Service of Process and Enforceability of Civil Liabilities ...... 206 Listing and General Information...... 208 Terminology ...... 212 Index to Consolidated Financial Statements ...... 217

Cell C Limited (formerly Cell C Proprietary Limited, having changed its name on 7 August 2017) is a public company organized under the laws of South Africa as a profit company. It was incorporated on April 6, 1999 under Registration No. 1999/007722/06. Our website is accessible at http:// www.cellc.co.za. Neither our website nor the information contained on our website is incorporated by reference in these Listing Particulars.

3

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

These Listing Particulars have been prepared by us solely for use in connection with the implementation of the Arrangement.

These Listing Particulars are personal to each offeree and does not constitute an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to purchase by or on behalf of us to any other person or to the public generally to subscribe for or otherwise acquire any Notes (or beneficial interests therein). The distribution or delivery of these Listing Particulars and the offer or sale of the Notes (or beneficial interests therein) in certain jurisdictions may be restricted by law. The Issuer does not represent that these Listing Particulars may be lawfully distributed, or that the Notes may be lawfully offered, in compliance with any applicable registration or other requirements in any such jurisdiction, or pursuant to an exemption available thereunder, or assume any responsibility for facilitating any such distribution or offering. The Notes (and beneficial interests therein) may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, and these Listing Particulars may not be circulated, distributed or delivered in any jurisdiction except in accordance with legal requirements applicable to such jurisdiction.

Distribution of these Listing Particulars to any person other than the prospective investor and any person retained to advise such prospective investor with respect to the purchase of Notes is unauthorized, and any disclosure of any of the contents of these Listing Particulars, without the Issuer’s prior written consent, is prohibited. Each prospective investor, by accepting delivery of these Listing Particulars, agrees to the foregoing and to make no photocopies of these Listing Particulars or any documents referred to in these Listing Particulars. Persons into whose possession these Listing Particulars may come are required by the Issuer to inform themselves about and to observe any such restrictions. For a description of certain restrictions on offers, sales and deliveries of the Notes (or beneficial interests therein) and on the distribution or delivery of these Listing Particulars and other offering material relating to the Notes, see “Notices to Investors”. The Issuer has not authorized, nor does it authorise the making of any offer of Notes in circumstances in which an obligation arises for the Issuer or a Guarantor to publish or supplement a prospectus for such offer and, in particular, no action has been taken by the Issuer or a Guarantor that is intended to permit a public offering of the Notes or the distribution of these Listing Particulars in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required.

Each prospective investor that receives the Notes will be deemed to represent, among other things, that it is not a U.S. person as defined in Regulation S. Each prospective investor will also be deemed to represent that it is acquiring the Notes for its own account or, if it is acquiring the Notes for the account of one or more other persons over which it has investment discretion, it will be deemed to provide these representations for each such person.

The Issuer accepts responsibility for the information contained in these Listing Particulars. To the best of the knowledge and belief of the Issuer (which has taken all reasonable care to ensure that such is the case), the information contained in these Listing Particulars are in accordance with the facts and there are no other facts the omission of which would be likely to affect the import of such information. These Listing Particulars are to be read in conjunction with any amendments and with the Financial Statements (as defined in “Presentation of Financial and Other Information—Financial Statements”), which form part of these Listing Particulars and are included herein. By receiving these Listing Particulars, a prospective investor acknowledges that it has had an opportunity to request from the Issuer for review, and that it has received, all additional information it deems necessary to verify the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in these Listing Particulars.

Micawber 405 (RF) Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of South Africa, with registration no. 2005/000415/07 (the “Security SPV”) accepts responsibility for the information contained in these Listing Particulars relating to itself and its security guarantee, and to the best of the knowledge and belief of the Security SPV (which has taken all reasonable care to ensure such is the case), the information contained in these Listing Particulars are in accordance with the facts and does not omit anything likely to affect the import of such information.

The information set out in relation to sections of these Listing Particulars describing clearing and settlement arrangements is subject to change in, or reinterpretation of, the rules, regulations and procedures of Euroclear and Clearstream currently in effect. Such information has been sourced from the rules, regulations and procedures applicable to Euroclear and Clearstream as stated in their publicly available guidance and materials. Euroclear and Clearstream are not under any obligation to perform nor continue to perform under such clearing arrangements and such arrangements may be modified or discontinued by any of them at any time. The Issuer, the Trustee, the Transfer Agent, the Registrar and the Paying Agent (each as defined in the “Terms and

4

Conditions of the Notes”) will not, nor will any of its agents, have responsibility for the performance of the respective obligations of Euroclear and Clearstream or their respective participants.

No person is or has been authorized by us or the Notes in connection with the Arrangement (or beneficial interests therein) to give any information or make any representation not contained in or not consistent with, these Listing Particulars. Any such representation or information must not be relied upon as having been authorized by us.

Neither the delivery of these Listing Particulars nor the offer, sale or delivery of any Notes shall in any circumstances imply that there has been no change, or any event reasonably likely to involve any change, in our affairs and condition (financial or otherwise) or that the information contained herein is correct as of any time subsequent to the date hereof or that any other information supplied in connection with the Arrangement is correct as of any time subsequent to the date indicated in the document containing the same. These Listing Particulars may only be used for the purpose for which it has been published.

Neither these Listing Particulars nor any other information supplied in connection with the Arrangement (a) is intended to provide the basis of any credit or other evaluation or (b) should be considered as a recommendation by us that any recipient of these Listing Particulars or any other information supplied in connection with the Arrangement should purchase the Notes. Each person contemplating making an investment in the Notes must make its own investigation and analysis of the creditworthiness of the Issuer and its own determination of the suitability of any such investment, with particular reference to its own investment objectives and experience, and any other factors that may be relevant to it in connection with such investment. In particular, each potential investor should:

• have sufficient knowledge and experience to make a meaningful evaluation of the Notes, the merits and risks of investing in the Notes and the information contained in these Listing Particulars or any applicable supplement;

• have access to, and knowledge of, appropriate analytical tools to evaluate, in the context of its particular financial situation, an investment in the Notes and the impact such investment will have on its overall investment portfolio;

• have sufficient financial resources and liquidity to bear all of the risks of an investment in the Notes, including where the currency for principal and profit payments is different from the potential investor’s currency;

• understand thoroughly the terms of the Notes and be familiar with the behaviour of financial markets in which they participate; and

• be able to evaluate possible scenarios for economic, interest rate and other factors that may affect its investment and its ability to bear the applicable risks.

None of the Issuer or any of its representatives or agents is making any representation to any offeree or purchaser of the Notes (or beneficial interests therein) regarding the legality of any investment by such offeree or purchaser under applicable legal investment or similar laws. Each potential investor should consult with its own advisers as to the legal, tax, business, and accounting aspects of an investment in the Notes.

NOTICES TO INVESTORS

Notice to investors in the United States

The Notes have not been, and will not be, registered under the Securities Act or with any securities regulatory authority of any state or other jurisdiction in the United States, and the Notes may not be offered, sold or purchased within the United States or to, or for the account or benefit of, U.S. persons (as defined in Regulation S), except pursuant to an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and in compliance with any applicable securities laws of any state or other jurisdiction of the United States.

5

Each purchaser of Notes will be deemed to have made the representations, warranties and acknowledgements that are described under the “Transfer Restrictions” section of these Listing Particulars and the Notes are subject to the restrictions on transfer and resale as described therein.

Notice to certain European investors

European Economic Area. These Listing Particulars have been prepared on the basis that any offer of Notes in any Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a “Relevant Member State”) will be made pursuant to an exemption under the Prospectus Directive from the requirement to publish a prospectus for offers of Notes. Accordingly, any person making or intending to make an offer in that Relevant Member State of Notes that are the subject of the Arrangement may only do so in circumstances in which no obligation arises for the Issuer or any Guarantor to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive, in each case, in relation to such offer. Neither the Issuer nor a Guarantor has authorized the making of any offer of Notes in circumstances in which an obligation arises for the Issuer or any Guarantor to publish a prospectus for such offer. The expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC (and amendments thereto, including the 2010 PD Amending Directive, to the extent implemented in the Relevant Member State), and includes any relevant implementing measure in the Relevant Member State and the expression “2010 PD Amending Directive” means Directive 2010/73/EU.

United Kingdom. These Listing Particulars are for distribution only to, and is only directed at, persons who (i) are investment professionals, being persons having professional experience in matters relating to investments and who fall within the definition set out in Article 19(5) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Financial Promotion) Order 2005, as amended, (the “Financial Promotion Order”), (ii) are persons falling within Article 49(2)(a) to (d) (high net worth companies, unincorporated associations, partnerships or high value trusts, etc.) of the Financial Promotion Order or (iii) are persons to whom an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 as amended (“FSMA”)) in connection with the issue or sale of any Notes may otherwise lawfully be communicated (all such persons together being referred to as “relevant persons”). These Listing Particulars are directed only at relevant persons and must not be acted on or relied on by persons who are not relevant persons. Any investment or investment activity to which these Listing Particulars relate is available only to relevant persons and will be engaged in only with relevant persons.

Any person who receives these Listing Particulars but does not fall within one of the preceding categories of relevant persons should return it immediately to the Issuer.

Notice to investors in South Africa

These Listing Particulars do not constitute an “offer to the public” as defined in Section 95 of the South African Companies Act, 2008 (as amended) (the “Companies Act”), nor do they constitute a prospectus for purposes of the Companies Act and it is not, nor is it intended to be, a “registered prospectus” as defined in the Companies Act.

Offers not deemed to be offers to the public Offers for subscription for, or sale of, Notes are not deemed to be an offer to the public if: (a) made to certain investors contemplated in section 96(1)(a) of the Companies Act; or (b) the total contemplated acquisition cost of Notes, for any single addressee acting as principal, is equal to or greater than ZAR1,000,000, or such higher amount as may be promulgated by notice in the Government Gazette of South Africa pursuant to section 96(2)(a) of the Companies Act; or (c) it is a non-renounceable offer made only to: (i) existing holders of the company’s securities; or (ii) persons related to existing holders of the company’s securities.

The Notes may not be transferred directly or indirectly into South Africa or to any person or corporate or other entity resident in South Africa except in accordance with the Companies Act, the South African Banks Act, 1990 (as amended) (the “Banks Act”), the South African Exchange Control Regulations, 1961 promulgated pursuant to the Currency and Exchanges Act, 1933 (as amended), the JSE Limited’s listings disclosure requirement and/or any other applicable laws and regulations of South Africa in force from time to time.

6

In addition, the Issuer is required to make the disclosure set out in “Disclosure Relating to the South African Commercial Paper Regulations” pursuant to paragraph 3(5) of the exemption notice published in terms of the Banks Act under Government Notice 2172 in Government Gazette 16167 of 14 December 1994 (the “Commercial Paper Regulations”) exempting the designation of certain activities from falling within the meaning of “the business of a bank” (as that term is defined in the Banks Act).

Information made available in these Listing Particulars should not be considered as "advice" as defined in the South African Financial Advisory and Intermediary Services Act, 2002 (as amended), nothing in these Listing Particulars should be construed as constituting the canvassing for, or marketing or advertising of, financial services in South Africa.

Notice to investors in Switzerland

The Issuer has acknowledged that the Listing Particulars are not intended to constitute an offer or solicitation to purchase or invest in the Notes. Accordingly, the Issuer has represented and agreed that it has not publicly offered, sold or advertised, directly or indirectly, in, into or from Switzerland any Notes and that the Notes may not be and will not be listed on the SIX Swiss Exchange or on any other exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. Neither the Listing Particulars nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the Notes constitutes an issue prospectus as such term is understood pursuant to article 652a or article 1156 of the Swiss code of obligations or a listing prospectus within the meaning of the listing rules of the SIX Swiss Exchange or a simplified prospectus as such term is defined in the Swiss Collective Investment Scheme Act, and neither the Listing Particulars nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the Notes may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland. Neither the Listing Particulars nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the Arrangement, the Issuer or the Notes have been or will be filed with or approved by any Swiss regulatory authority. The Notes are not subject to the supervision by the Swiss Financial Markets Supervisory Authority (“FINMA”), and investors in the Notes will not benefit from protection or supervision by FINMA.

Notice to investors in Italy

The offering of the Notes has not been cleared by Commissione Nazionale per le Società e la Borsa, the Italian Securities Exchange Commission (“CONSOB”) pursuant to Italian securities legislation and, accordingly, no Notes may be offered, sold or delivered, directly or indirectly, nor may copies of these Listing Particulars or of any other document relating to the Notes be distributed in Italy, except:

(i) to qualified investors (investitori qualificati), as defined by Article 26, first paragraph, letter d) of CONSOB Regulation No. 16190 of October 29, 2007, as amended (“CONSOB Regulation on Intermediaries”), pursuant to Article 100 of Legislative Decree No. 58 of February 24, 1998, as amended (the “Italian Securities Act”), and Article 34-ter, first paragraph, letter b) of CONSOB Regulation No. 11971 of May 14, 1999, as amended (“CONSOB Regulation on Issuers”); or

(ii) in other circumstances which are exempted from the rules on public offerings pursuant to Article 100 of the Italian Securities Act and/or CONSOB Regulation on Issuers.

Any offer, sale, resale or delivery of the Notes or distribution of copies of these Listing Particulars or any other document relating to the Notes in Italy under (i) or (ii) above must be:

(a) made by an investment firm, bank or financial intermediary permitted to conduct such activities in Italy in accordance with the Italian Securities Act, CONSOB Regulation on Intermediaries and Legislative Decree No. 385 of September 1, 1993, as amended (the “Italian Banking Act”); and (b) in compliance with Article 129 of the Italian Banking Act, as amended, and the implementing guidelines of the Bank of Italy, as amended from time to time, pursuant to which the Bank of Italy may request information on the issue or the offer of securities in Italy; and (c) in compliance with any other applicable laws and regulations or requirement imposed by CONSOB or other competent Italian authority.

Notice to investors in Singapore

These Listing Particulars have not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, these Listing Particulars and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of the Notes may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the Notes

7

be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than: (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of the Singapore Statutes (the ‘‘SFA’’), (ii) to a relevant person pursuant to Section 275(1), or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA, or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.

Where the Notes are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 of the SFA by a relevant person which is:

(a) a corporation (which is not an accredited investor (as defined in Section 4A of the SFA)) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or

(b) a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary of the trust is an individual who is an accredited investor, securities (as defined in Section 239(1) of the SFA) of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest (howsoever described) in that trust shall not be transferred within six months after that corporation or that trust has acquired the Notes pursuant to an offer made under Section 275 of the SFA except: (1) to an institutional investor or to a relevant person defined in Section 275(2) of the SFA, or (in the case of such corporation) where the transfer arises from an offer referred to in Section 275(1A) of the SFA or (in the case of such trust) where the transfer arises from an offer referred to in Section 276(4)(i)(B) of the SFA, (2) where no consideration is or will be given for the transfer, (3) where the transfer is by operation of law, or (4) as specified in Section 276(7) of the SFA.

General

The distribution of these Listing Particulars in certain jurisdictions may be restricted by law. Persons into whose possession these Listing Particulars comes are required to inform themselves about, and to observe, any such restrictions. No action has been or will be taken in any jurisdiction by the Issuer or any other person that would permit a public offering of securities.

8

CAUTIONARY NOTE ON FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

These Listing Particulars contain statements that may be considered to be “forward-looking statements.” Forward-looking statements appear in a number of places throughout these Listing Particulars, including, without limitation, under “Risk Factors,” and “Our Business,” and include, but are not limited to, statements regarding our objectives, goals, strategies, future events, future revenue or performance, capital expenditures, financing needs, plans or intentions relating to acquisitions, competitive strengths and weaknesses, business strategy, the trends management anticipates in the telecommunications industry, the political and legal environment in which we operate and other information that is not historical information.

In some cases, forward-looking statements may be identified by words such as “believe,” “expect,” “estimate,” “anticipate,” “project,” “intend,” “plan,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “may,” “will,” “seeks,” “probability,” “target,” “goal,” “objective,” “future” or similar expressions or variations on such expressions. These forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties, assumptions and other factors that may cause our actual results of operations, financial condition or prospects to be materially different from any future results of operations, financial condition or prospects expressed or implied by such statements. All statements other than statements of historical fact included in these Listing Particulars, including, without limitation, those regarding our financial position, business strategy, management plans and objectives for future operations, are forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are based on numerous assumptions regarding our present and future business strategies and the environment in which we expect to operate in the future. Important factors that could cause our actual results, performance or achievements to differ materially from those in the forward-looking statements include, among other factors referenced in these Listing Particulars:

• our ability to implement successfully our growth strategies, including to increase market share and retain customers by reducing churn, to improve our customer base, to reduce our costs and to identify and grow new sources of revenue, including mobile data; • our ability to forecast and meet changes in demand for our products and services; • our ability to respond to trends in the South African telecommunications market, including changes in consumer preferences; • our ability to timely fund capital investments to meet our capital expenditure requirements, and otherwise meet our financial obligations, and the results of our investments and capital expenditures; • our ability to achieve and maintain cost savings and operational efficiencies; • changes in economic or political conditions in South Africa that impact employment levels, consumer confidence, the availability of consumer credit, and levels of disposable income of existing and potential customers for mobile telecommunications services; • changes in laws or regulations in South Africa governing or otherwise affecting our business and operations and those of our competitors; • the effects of increased competition in the South African mobile telecommunications market through consolidation or otherwise, including competition with companies that have greater resources and economies of scale than we do; • the outcome of litigation involving us and/or our competitors, • failure to maintain, or when needed, obtain, licenses (including access to spectrum) or other regulatory approvals to operate our business, and the effect of actions by regulators, or other developments (including the outcome of spectrum auctions) that may limit or otherwise affect our ability to operate or to operate at the levels of profitability that we envisage; • the potential development of alternate telecommunications technologies; • the cost and availability of equipment components, including handsets; • interruption or failure of information technology systems upon which operations are reliant, including interruption or failure resulting from security breaches, terrorist action, human error, natural disasters, failure by third parties to provide necessary support and network access and other factors beyond our direct control; • fixed assets becoming obsolete at a rate faster than anticipated;

9

• action by labor unions or otherwise affecting our employees; and • our ability to attract and retain qualified personnel. This list of important factors is not exhaustive. There may be other risks, including risks of which we are unaware, that could adversely affect our results or the accuracy of forward-looking statements in these Listing Particulars. When relying on forward-looking statements, you should carefully consider the foregoing factors and other uncertainties and events, especially in light of the political, economic, social and legal environment in which we operate. Such forward-looking statements speak only as at the date on which they are made. Accordingly, we do not undertake any obligation to update or revise any of them, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. The Issuer makes no representation, warranty or prediction that the results anticipated by such forward-looking statements will be achieved. Such forward-looking statements represent, in each case, only one of many possible scenarios and should not be viewed as the most likely or standard scenario.

The forward-looking statements contained in these Listing Particulars are based on the beliefs of our management, as well as the assumptions made by and information currently available to our management. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in such forward-looking statements are reasonable, no assurances can be given that such expectations will prove to be correct. Given these uncertainties, you are cautioned not to place undue reliance on such forward-looking statements. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from our management’s expectations are contained in cautionary statements in these Listing Particulars, including, without limitation, in conjunction with the forward-looking statements included in these Listing Particulars and specifically under “Risk Factors” and above. In addition, under no circumstances should the inclusion of such forward-looking statements in these Listing Particulars be regarded as a representation or warranty by us, or any other person with respect to the achievement of the results set out in such statements or that the underlying assumptions used will in fact be the case. If any of these risks and uncertainties materialise, or if any of these underlying assumptions prove to be incorrect, our actual results of operations or financial condition could differ materially from that described herein as anticipated, believed, estimated or expected.

All subsequent written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to us are expressly qualified in their entirety by reference to these cautionary statements.

INDUSTRY AND MARKET DATA

These Listing Particulars contain historical and forward-looking market and industry data, which have been obtained from industry publications, market research and other publicly available information. Such data consists of estimates based on data reports compiled by professional organizations and analysts, on data from external sources, on our knowledge of our sales and markets and on our own calculations based on such information. In particular, data relating to our share of the mobile communications market in South Africa are management estimates based on internal data and data published by other telecommunications operators and the Independent Communications Authority of South Africa (“ICASA”). Market data, statistics and information relating to the demographics and economy in South Africa and the South African telecommunications market have been derived from management estimates and data published by Statistics South Africa, Pyramid, EIU, the International Monetary Fund (the “IMF”), Ovum Ltd., the International Telecommunications Union, GeoPoll, World Wide Worx and Ipsos.

In many cases, there is no readily available external information, whether from trade associations, government bodies or other organizations, to validate market-related analyses and estimates, thus requiring us to rely on internally developed estimates. While we have compiled, extracted and reproduced market or other industry data from external sources, we have not independently verified the data.

Where third-party information has been used in these Listing Particulars, the information has been accurately reproduced and, as far as we are aware and have been able to ascertain from information published by such sources, no facts have been omitted which would render the reproduced information inaccurate or misleading. While we have compiled, extracted and reproduced market or other industry data from external sources which we believe are reliable, including third-party or industry or general publications, we have not independently verified all of the data. We cannot assure you of the accuracy and completeness of, and take no responsibility for, such data. Similarly, while we believe our internal estimates to be reasonable, they have not been verified by any independent sources, and we cannot assure you as to their accuracy.

10

In addition, in some cases we have made statements in these Listing Particulars regarding our industry and competitive position based on our experience and our investigation of market conditions. We cannot assure you that any of these assumptions are accurate or correctly reflect our competitive position within the industry, and none of our internal surveys or information has been verified by independent sources, which may have estimates or opinions regarding industry related data information which differ from our own.

We have made statements in these Listing Particulars regarding our market share and our competitors’ market share, based on service revenue and total active mobile subscribers. We have calculated such market share based on information published by our competitors. While Mobile Telecommunications Company Group (“MTN”) has published its service revenue and subscriber numbers on a quarterly basis, (Pty) Ltd (“Vodacom”) and SA SOC Limited (“Telkom”) have produced such information semi-annually, in September and March of each year. As such, our statements regarding our market share and our competitors’ market share as at or for the year ended December 31 each year, as applicable, are based on Vodacom and Telkom’s respective service revenue and subscriber numbers as at or for the twelve months ended September 30 each year.

TRADEMARKS

We own or have rights to trademarks, service marks, copyrights and trade names that we use in conjunction with the operation of our business, including the Cell C logo. These Listing Particulars also includes trademarks, service marks and trade names of other companies, including, without limitation, Telkom, Huawei Technologies Africa Proprietary Limited (“Huawei”), MTN, Nokia Siemens Networks Proprietary Limited (“NSN”), Vodafone Group plc, Vodacom, ZTE Corporation and/or ZTE Corporation South Africa Proprietary Limited (collectively, “ZTE”). Each trademark, service mark or trade name of any other company appearing in these Listing Particulars belongs to its holder. Use or display by us of other parties’ trademarks, service marks or trade names is not intended to and does not imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship by us of, the trademark, service mark or trade name owner.

11

PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL AND OTHER INFORMATION

On 2 August 2017 (the “Completion Date”), Cell C consummated an equity recapitalisation and restructuring of certain financial indebtedness, which included the issuance of the Notes. Prior to the Completion Date, we were wholly owned by 3C Telecommunications Proprietary Limited (“3C”), in which Oger Telecom Limited (“OTL”) had a 75% beneficial interest through (i) Lanun Securities S.A. (“Lanun”), a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that directly held 15% of 3C and (ii) Oger Telecom South Africa Holdings Limited (“OTSA”), a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that indirectly held 60% of 3C. CellSAf Proprietary Limited (“CellSAf”), a black economic empowerment (“BEE”) consortium in South Africa, owns the remaining 25% of 3C.

On the Completion Date,

• members of our senior management (investing individually (though collectively referred to herein as “M5”)) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class B ordinary shares);

• Albanta Trading 109 Proprietary Limited (through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which qualifies as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes) (“MS15”) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares);

• a third-party investor, Blue Label Telecoms Limited (“Blue Label”) (via a subsidiary, The Prepaid Company Proprietary Limited (“BLT”)), beneficially owns 45% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares);

• a third-party investor, Net1 Applied Technologies South Africa Proprietary Limited (“Net1”), beneficially owns 15% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares);

• three South African incorporated special purpose vehicles, Cedar Cellular Investment 1 (RF) Proprietary Limited (“SPV1”), Magnolia Cellular Investment 2 (RF) Proprietary Limited (“SPV2”) and Yellowwood Cellular Investment 3 (RF) Proprietary Limited (“SPV3”), beneficially own 11.8%, 16% and 2.2%, respectively, of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares); and

• each of SPV1, SPV2, and SPV3 are wholly owned by 3C, therefore, having diluted 3C’s indirect beneficial interest to 30%.

See “The Cell C Recapitalization” for further details about the two classes of ordinary shares following the Completion Date.

Prior to the Completion Date, our principal indirect shareholders included Saudi Oger Limited (“Saudi Oger”), one of the leading construction, facilities management service and infrastructure project development companies in Saudi Arabia and the Gulf region, and Saudi Telecom Company (“Saudi Telecom”), the incumbent telecommunications company in Saudi Arabia that also has operations in other markets. Between them, Saudi Oger and Saudi Telecom, directly or indirectly, held an 82.3% beneficial ownership interest in OTL.

As part of the Cell C Recapitalization, OTL disposed of all of the shares it held in Lanun to a non-South African resident and OTSA disposed of all the shares it held in Oger Telecom (South Africa) Proprietary Limited to MS15. Accordingly, following the Cell C Recapitalization, Saudi Oger and Saudi Telecom no longer hold a beneficial interest in us. See “Summary — Summary Corporate and Financing Structure” for further information.

Defined Terms

In these Listing Particulars, unless otherwise indicated, “Cell C” and the “Issuer” refer to Cell C Limited (formerly Cell C Proprietary Limited, having changed its name on 7 August 2017) and “we,” “us,” “our” and the “Group” refer to Cell C and its consolidated subsidiaries. Unless otherwise indicated, these Listing Particulars and, in particular, the discussion of our indebtedness, have been prepared as if the Cell C Recapitalization has occurred.

For a glossary of defined terms used in these Listing Particulars, see “Glossary.” In addition, certain technical terms used in these Listing Particulars, including capitalized terms and certain technical terms used in the

12

telecommunications, mobile and broadband industries, are defined and explained in the section of these Listing Particulars entitled “Glossary.”

References to “subscribers” and “customers” are made interchangeably, consistent with the way in which we analyse our business.

Reference to any statute or statutory provision includes a reference to that statute or statutory provision as from time to time amended, extended or re-enacted. The contents of any of our websites or of any website accessible through hyperlinks from our websites are not incorporated into, and do not form part of, these Listing Particulars.

Financial Statements

These Listing Particulars include the following historical financial statements (the “Financial Statements”), which, in each case, have been prepared and presented in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IFRS”) and the Companies Act, and have been presented in South African rand:

• our audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the year ended December 31, 2016 (including comparative financial information as at and for the year ended December 31, 2015) including the notes thereto (the “2016 Financial Statements”), and the audit report thereon; and • our audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the year ended December 31, 2015 (including comparative financial information as at and for the year ended December 31, 2014) including the notes thereto (the “2015 Financial Statements”), and the audit report thereon. The financial information included in these Listing Particulars is presented on the basis that the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization has occurred (including in our discussion of our indebtedness and the presentation of pro forma financial information showing the effects of the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization on our results of operations and financial condition). See “Summary—Summary Historical Financial and Operating Data.”

For certain comparisons relating to our operating expenditures, we use figures derived from our management accounts in lieu of figures from our statutory financial statements, because our management accounts provide a breakdown of key line items that we are not required to present under IFRS and do not present in our statutory financial statements or the notes thereto.

Unless otherwise indicated, the financial information presented in these Listing Particulars is extracted or derived from the Financial Statements, as applicable, which appear beginning on page F-1 of these Listing Particulars.

IFRS differs in various significant respects from generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“US GAAP”). In making an investment decision, you should rely upon your own examination of the terms of the Arrangement and the financial information contained in these Listing Particulars. You should consult your own professional advisors for an understanding of the differences between IFRS and US GAAP, and how those differences could affect the financial information contained in these Listing Particulars.

Our 2015 Financial Statements and 2016 Financial Statements have been audited by KPMG Inc., Registered Accountants and Auditors, Chartered Accountants (South Africa), our independent auditors (“KPMG”). KPMG is a member of the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants. References to “2015” and “2016” are to our financial years ended December 31, 2015 and 2016, respectively. Section 30(4) to (6) of the Companies Act requires us to disclose certain information in respect of remuneration for each individual holding any prescribed office in the Issuer.

In making an investment decision, you should rely upon your own examination of the terms of the Arrangement and the financial information contained in these Listing Particulars.

Non-IFRS Financial Measures

These Listing Particulars contain non-IFRS measures. These measures include, for example:

13

• EBITDA, which represents loss/profit for the period before net foreign exchange gains/losses, finance costs (which includes interest expense and other financial expenses), share of profit/loss from equity accounted joint ventures, income tax expense, depreciation and amortization, and impairment charges. • EBITDA margin, which represents EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. • Adjusted EBITDA, which represents EBITDA, adjusted for non-operational items, whether exceptional or recurring in nature, which adjustments, for the periods indicated in these Listing Particulars, include deferred revenue, profit from the sale of base transceiver stations (“BTSs”) to American Tower International, Inc. (“ATC”) and vendor credits. • Operating free cash flow, which represents EBITDA minus capital expenditures. • Capital expenditures, which represent expenditures for the purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles. • Capital expenditures margin, which represents capital expenditures as a percentage of revenue. • Total Debt, which represents our outstanding current and non-current loans and borrowings (including accrued and unpaid interest and prepaid upfront fees), but does not include our obligations under finance leases (including the interest component). • Net Debt, which represents Total Debt, minus our cash and cash equivalents (including restricted and unrestricted cash). • Pro Forma Net Debt, which represents Net Debt adjusted to give effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016. See “Capitalization” for further information about our Total Debt and adjustments thereto.

• Pro Forma Cash Interest Expense, which represents cash interest, using an assumed indicative interest rate and cost of hedging to manage our foreign currency exchange rate risk under the Notes, and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on January 1, 2016 (at an assumed interest rate of 17% (reflecting the contractual interest rates for 2016 plus the cost of hedging). New capex in 2016 are first funded by bridge vendor facilities to a maximum of $110 million (reflecting the average 6 month LIBOR plus a margin of 3.5%). Thereafter, capex is funded by new facilities of R1.4 billion (with an interest rate set at 17%).

We believe that EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are useful to investors in evaluating our operating performance and that operating free cash flow, capital expenditures, capital expenditures margin, Total Debt, Net Debt, Pro Forma Net Debt and Pro Forma Cash Interest Expense are useful to investors in evaluating our ability to incur and service our indebtedness.

Non-IFRS measures are used by different companies for different purposes and are often calculated in ways that reflect the differing circumstances of those companies. As such, these non-IFRS measures as reported by us in these Listing Particulars may not be comparable to similarly titled measures reported by other companies. They have limitations as analytical tools and an investor should not consider such items in solution of or as alternatives to, the applicable IFRS measures.

The non-IFRS measures presented in these Listing Particulars are not measurements of our performance or liquidity under IFRS or any other generally accepted accounting principles. They should not be considered as alternatives to operating profit or profit for the period or any other performance measures derived in accordance with IFRS or any other generally accepted accounting principles, or as alternatives to cash flow from or used in operating, investing or financing activities.

The principal non-IFRS measures used to evaluate our performance and liquidity include those discussed in the following section. See “Summary—Summary Historical Financial and Operating Data—Summary Statistical and Operating Data (unaudited).”

Key Performance Indicators

We present various key performance indicators in these Listing Particulars. These measures may not be comparable to similarly titled measures presented by others in our industry and, while the method of calculation may differ across the industry, we believe that these indicators are important to understanding our performance from period to period and they facilitate comparison with our peers. These indicators are not intended to be a

14

substitute for, or superior to, any IFRS measures of performance. These indicators are based on management estimates, are not part of our Financial Statements and have not been audited or otherwise reviewed by outside auditors, consultants or experts. The key performance indicators used to evaluate our performance include:

• Average Revenue per User (“ARPU”), which measures the average monthly revenue for a period generated for our services and which is determined for each month by dividing total service revenue (which, for this purpose, consists of revenue generated from outgoing and incoming calls, SMS (person-to- person), value-added services, monthly fees, data services, roaming subscriber revenue) by the average number of active mobile subscribers in the period net of expired subscribers. Total service revenue for purposes of calculating ARPU excludes equipment revenue.

The average number of active mobile subscribers during a period is calculated by adding the number of active mobile SIM cards at the beginning and end of each month during the period, dividing by two and then averaging the results from all months during the period. For purposes of calculating mobile ARPU, total mobile revenue consists of revenue generated from our subscription fees, usage fees for services that are incremental to the services allocated with our subscription fees and mobile termination rates (“MTRs”) (which are fees paid to us by other operators for calls terminated on our mobile network).

In these Listing Particulars, we also present ARPU across each of our customer segments, including prepaid ARPU, postpaid ARPU, hybrid ARPU and broadband ARPU, which measure average monthly revenue for a period generated for our prepaid, postpaid, hybrid and broadband services, respectively, and which are each determined for each month by dividing total service revenue in the applicable segment by the average number of active prepaid subscribers, active postpaid subscribers and active hybrid subscribers, or broadband subscribers, as applicable, in the period, net of expired subscribers.

• Blended ARPU, which is determined by dividing total service revenue across our customer segments, by the total number of subscribers across those segments.

• Average Spend per User (“ASPU”), which measures the average monthly spend for our services by our active mobile subscribers and which is determined for each month by dividing total service revenue (which, for this purpose, consists of revenue generated from outgoing and incoming calls, SMS (person-to-person), value-added services, monthly fees, data services, roaming subscriber revenue, but excluding interconnect revenue) by the average number of active mobile subscribers in the period, net of expired subscribers. Total service revenue for purposes of calculating ASPU excludes equipment revenue.

We believe that presenting ASPU is useful to investors in evaluating our revenue growth as it excludes the impact of declining MTRs year-on-year in accordance with the MTR glide path. See “Regulation— Regulatory Framework—Regulation of MTRs and Facilities Leasing”.

• Blended ASPU, which is determined by dividing total monthly spend for our services across our customer segments, by the total number of subscribers across those segments.

• Subscribers are determined by service type as follows:

• Mobile subscribers are determined by reference to the number of SIM cards (including voice and/or data) rather than number of users. For example, where a user has two SIM cards, this user would be considered two subscribers.

• Broadband subscribers are determined by reference to the number of postpaid subscribers and hybrid subscribers with a data-only subscription and prepaid subscribers who have purchased data- only bundles. These subscribers primarily use dongles and/or routers for broadband services.

• Wholesale subscribers are determined by reference to the number of MVNO customers that use our network.

In calculating subscribers, we count the number of subscribers by each service we provide. As a result, a single person would be counted as multiple subscribers in aggregate if they subscribed for more than one service.

15

When we refer to our active mobile subscriber base, we are referring to a so-called active 3-month mobile subscriber base, which includes prepaid voice (excluding customers whose only activity was a call forward to voicemail) and prepaid broadband customers that have generated a minimum of one revenue event in the 90 days preceding the measurement date and all post-paid voice, post-paid broadband, hybrid voice, hybrid broadband and post-paid community service telephone service (“CST”) customers with an active contract, but excludes wholesale subscribers. We note in this respect that, even among our competitors, there is no consistent approach to subscriber figures. While we historically have disclosed our active mobile subscriber base by reference to our active 4-month mobile subscriber base (with the difference being the inclusion of prepaid voice (excluding customers whose only activity was a call forward to voicemail) and prepaid broadband customers that have generated a minimum of one revenue event in the 120 days preceding the measurement date), we believe that presenting certain data by reference to our active 3-month mobile subscriber base is useful to investors in evaluating the growth and value of our prepaid customer segment, which constituted our largest customer segment as at December 31, 2016.

In these Listing Particulars, we also present our prepaid subscribers, postpaid subscribers, hybrid subscribers and broadband subscribers calculated on the same basis as described above for each customer segment.

• Core prepaid subscriber base, which includes the number of prepaid subscribers who have generated revenue of R10 or more over the course of a month.

• Churn rate (being the rate at which subscribers churn), which we also refer to as “blended churn,” and which we calculate as the sum of monthly cancellations and migrations out to other segments, excluding intra-contract migrations (subscriber churn) divided by the average monthly active mobile subscriber base. This includes both voluntary churn (customers who choose to cancel and migrate) and involuntary churn (customers who are unable to continue using our services for some reason or other, including due to failures to pay).

• Prepaid churn refers to those prepaid voice customers who become inactive and eligible for deactivation during the month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of total customers during such month. Prepaid customers become eligible for deactivation when they have not generated a revenue event in the preceding 90 days, while prepaid broadband customers become eligible for deactivation when they are no longer within their airtime window, and when they have not generated a revenue event in the preceding 90 days.

• Postpaid churn refers to those postpaid voice customers who have been disconnected from our network or migrated to prepaid services in a given month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of postpaid voice customers during such month.

• Hybrid churn refers to those hybrid voice customers who have been disconnected from our network or migrated to prepaid services in a given month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of hybrid voice customers during such month.

• Contract broadband churn refers to those postpaid broadband and hybrid broadband customers, respectively, who have been disconnected from our network or migrated to prepaid broadband services in a given month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of postpaid broadband and hybrid broadband customers during such month.

• Prepaid broadband churn refers to those prepaid broadband customers who become inactive and eligible for deactivation during the month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of total prepaid broadband customers during such month. These customers become eligible for deactivation when they are no longer within their airtime window, and when they have not generated a revenue event in the preceding 90 days.

• Total broadband churn refers to those postpaid broadband and hybrid broadband customers, respectively, who have been disconnected from our network or migrated to prepaid broadband services in a given month, and those prepaid broadband customers become inactive and eligible for deactivation during the month, expressed as a percentage of the average base of postpaid broadband, hybrid broadband and prepaid broadband customers during such month.

16

• Net additions, the difference between the active mobile subscriber base and wholesale subscriber base at the beginning and end of any given period.

We also present net additions for each of our prepaid, postpaid, hybrid, broadband and wholesale customer segments, which for our prepaid, postpaid, hybrid and broadband customer segments reflects the difference between the active prepaid mobile subscribers, active postpaid mobile subscribers, active hybrid subscribers and active broadband subscribers at the beginning and end of any given period, respectively, and for our wholesale customer segment, reflects the difference between our wholesale subscriber base at the beginning and end of any given period.

• Core net prepaid additions, the difference between the core prepaid subscriber base at the beginning and end of any given period.

• Gross additions, which we define as the number of new connections to a network generating an incoming or outgoing event (excluding call forwarding to voicemail) in a given period as well as migrations in from other segments.

• Minutes of Use (“MoU”), which we determine as the sum of actual voice traffic (in minutes, including free and charged minutes) in a certain period divided by the average number of active mobile subscribers for the period divided by the number of months in that period. The average number of active mobile subscribers during a period is calculated by adding together the number of active mobile SIM cards at the beginning and end of each month during the period, dividing by two and then averaging the results from all months during the period.

In these Listing Particulars, we also present MoUs for each of our prepaid, postpaid, hybrid and broadband customer segments, which we determine for each month using actual voice duration generated by customers in the relevant segment, including free and charged minutes.

• Wholesale traffic in minutes and data MBs, which we determine for each month using total minutes and data MBs billed to our wholesale subscribers. We bill for all minutes and data MBs.

• Data Megabytes (MBs), which we also refer to as “blended Data MBs” and which we determine as the sum of actual megabytes of data used per customer in a certain period divided by the average number of active mobile subscribers for the period divided by the number of months in that period. The average number of active mobile subscribers during a period is calculated by adding together the number of active mobile SIM cards at the beginning and end of each month during the period, dividing by two and then averaging the results from all months during the period.

In these Listing Particulars, we also present Data MBs for each of our prepaid, postpaid, hybrid and broadband customer segments, which we determine for each month using actual megabytes consumed by customers in the relevant segment.

The methodology for calculating key performance indicators in the telecommunications industry varies substantially among operators and is not standardized across the industry. As such, our reported performance measures vary from those that would probably result from the use of a single methodology. In addition, subscriber numbers in the mobile communications sector may be difficult to calculate as a result of individuals having more than one SIM card or SIM cards being removed due to periods of inactivity. The differing methodologies for calculating these performance indicators make it difficult to draw comparisons between these figures for, and determining the relative market share of, different mobile operators.

Rounding

Percentages and certain amounts included in these Listing Particulars have been rounded to the nearest whole number or the nearest decimal point. Therefore, the sum of the numbers in certain tables may not conform exactly to the total figure given for that column. In addition, certain percentages presented in the tables in these Listing Particulars reflect calculations based upon the underlying information prior to rounding and, accordingly, may not conform exactly to the percentages that would be derived if the relevant calculations were based upon the rounded numbers.

17

Currency Presentation

We publish our financial statements in South African rand. References in these Listing Particulars to “rand”, “R”, “ZAR” and “cents” are to the South African rand and cents, the lawful currency of South Africa, references to “U.S. dollars”, “dollars”, “USD” and “$” are to the lawful currency of the United States and references to “€”, “euro” and “EUR” refer to the currency introduced at the start of the third stage of European economic and monetary union pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Community, as amended.

For convenience purposes, certain financial information in these Listing Particulars as at and for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016 has been translated from rand into dollars at a rate of R13.7372 = $1.00.

18

SUMMARY

This summary highlights certain information from these Listing Particulars. It does not contain all the information that may be important to prospective investors. Before making an investment decision, you should read the entire Listing Particulars carefully, including the Financial Statements and the other financial information contained in these Listing Particulars, as well as the risks described under “Risk Factors.”

Overview

We are the third largest of four mobile network operators in South Africa, with a market share of 11.6% based on service revenue for the year ended December 31, 2016 and a market share of 16% based on our total active mobile subscriber base of 14.0% million (12.0% million prepaid, 0.5 million postpaid, 0.9 million hybrid and 0.6 million broadband subscribers) at December 31, 2016. As at the same date, we had approximately 1.4 million wholesale subscribers.

We offer a comprehensive array of mobile voice and data communication services and a wide range of devices to individual consumers, businesses, small- and medium-sized enterprises (“SMEs”), corporates, the South African government and wholesale (to our partners, predominantly mobile virtual network operators (“MVNOs”) such as First National Bank (South Africa) (“FNB”), Virgin Mobile South Africa (“Virgin Mobile”) and MVN-X), with a focus on the consumer market and wholesale (MVNOs), through our long-term evolution (“LTE”), LTE-Advanced, high speed packet access, 3G and 2G networks. In 2016, we expanded into the fixed-line market with the launch of our fibre-to-the-home (“FTTH”) offering, C-Fibre.

Our mobile voice services include prepaid, contract (postpaid and hybrid) airtime offerings, as well as international calls and roaming services. In addition, we provide interconnection services to other telecommunications networks. Our mobile data services include mobile messaging services, including basic short message service (“SMS”) and multimedia messaging service (“MMS”) capabilities enabling customers to send media including music, photographs and video from their handsets, as well as access to the Internet and over-the-top (“OTT”) applications such as WhatsApp and Facebook. We also offer unstructured supplementary service data (“USSD”) services (including callback and balance enquiries). Our devices include mobile handsets, routers, data cards, dongles, PCs, tablets and USB modems. In recognition of the global trend toward significant demand for data at the expense of voice services, we are looking to expand our mobile data services to include content-based services (both exclusive and non-exclusive content) and to grow our FTTH offering to support customers demand for higher speed connectivity, as well as less expensive access to data as demand for content and streaming grows. We anticipate the launch of our content-based services to take place in late 2017.

We market our offerings and services primarily through our nationwide distribution network of informal channels. These include super dealers and regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and unique partnerships with select entities, including most significantly, one of our principal indirect shareholders, Blue Label Telecoms Limited (“Blue Label”). Blue Label is a leading distributor of prepaid airtime, data and starter packs in South Africa. We also market our offerings and services through 196 Cell-C branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises), approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national retail chains, telesales (including our internal inbound and outbound call centres and, to a lesser extent, external call centres), online sales and MVNOs.

We employ our “Cell C” brand, which was recognized as one of South Africa’s top 50 leading brands overall (as rated by Brand South Africa for 2015 and 2016), across all of our offerings. We also market our mobile services by hosting MVNOs with their respective brands on our mobile network to target different customer segments.

While in the first decade of our operations we faced challenges in growing revenue and EBITDA, following the appointment of a new management team in 2012 and the implementation of our new customer-oriented turnaround strategy (as detailed below), we have reported growth in revenue quarter-on-quarter for 15 of the past 16 consecutive quarters ended December 31, 2016 (when comparing each quarter to the corresponding quarter in the prior year).

In 2016, we generated revenue of R14,646 million and we reported EBITDA of R3,106 million compared to the twelve months ended December 31, 2015, where we generated revenue of R13,228 million and we reported EBITDA of R1,948 million. See “—Summary Historical Financial and Operating Data.”

19

The following chart sets forth a breakdown of our revenue by segment(1) for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016.

December 2016 Revenue by Segment

Prepaid

20% Contract

3% 49% Wholesale

28% Equipment

(1) For purposes of our revenue segmentation, we have four reportable segments that are differentiated and grouped by means of the nature of the product and services offered; we group postpaid and hybrid services as a single item (contract); equipment and other revenue includes revenue from the sale of equipment, CSTs and unsegmented revenue. We also elsewhere breakdown our revenue as between total revenue and service revenue. Our revenue segmentation differs from the segmentation of our subscriber base, which we group into prepaid, hybrid, postpaid, broadband and wholesale (predominantly MVNO subscribers) segments. While we have a separate FTTH customer base, its contribution to revenue is immaterial on a consolidated basis and we do not include it as a stand-alone reportable segment.

Between 2012 and 2016, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, we grew our market share from approximately 11% to 16%, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, we grew our market share from approximately 9.2% for 2012 to 11.6% for 2016. Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, the other three significant mobile operators in the South African market, had approximately 44.6%, 35% and 4.3% market share, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, respectively, at December 31, 2016, and approximately 50.8%, 34.2% and 3.4% market share, in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2016.

Our History and Turn-Around Strategy

In July 2001, our then principal indirect shareholder, Saudi Oger, commenced operations in the telecommunications industry when it originally established a 60/40 joint venture with a black economic empowerment (“BEE”) consortium, CellSAf, to participate in the tender for the third mobile license in South Africa. It won the tender, and we commenced commercial operations in November 2001 (as the third entrant in the South African market).

2001 – 2012. Since our inception through to 2012, we pursued a challenger operator strategy to grow market share, with a strong focus on voice communication services, particularly in the prepaid segment. We also focused on introducing data-centric offers, including mobile broadband services. We launched new products and services and began to undertake significant capital expenditures in upgrading our network. We experienced challenges in growing our postpaid and hybrid subscriber base and revenue in our contract segment, in large part due to the inadequate capitalization of our business (see “—The Cell C Recapitalization.”), legacy issues around management of vendors and network rollout delays, issues with handset availability, over-reliance on outsourcing relationships, particularly on network vendors and turnkey solutions, and an undefined marketing strategy.

20

2012 – to date. A new management team was appointed in 2012 to implement a customer-oriented turnaround strategy, centered around quality, service, innovation and human capital, with a focus on building a sustainable platform for growth. We were able to leverage OTL’s equity contribution (R2.6 billion in 2013 and R2.0 billion in 2014) together with incremental debt funding in local and foreign currency in 2013, and 2014, to implement this strategy (see “Risk Factors—Risks relating to our business and industry— In the past we have sought and obtained equity injections from our shareholder, OTL. We may not receive future equity injections from our new shareholders, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.”)

We actively sought to establish ourselves as a “consumer champion” and a “value for money” brand, adopting a transparent and simple approach to pricing, in an effort to attract low-income price sensitive consumers and promote the porting of subscribers as a means for consumers to save money.

Between 2012 and 2015, we pursued aggressive pricing against our competitors, introducing value offerings and promotions targeted at further developing our prepaid subscriber base so as to increase our scale and reach in the South African market. In 2015, we shifted our previously strong focus away from aggressive pricing. As a challenger operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market, we increased our outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts with our regulators to obtain more pro-competitive regulatory treatment, including a greater degree of asymmetry in respect of mobile termination rates (“MTRs”), as well as challenging the incumbents’ practices of charging less for on-net calls than for off-net calls and roaming services. In a series of studies funded by the South African National Treasury, the Centre for Competition, Regulation and Economic Development (CCRED) at the University of Johannesburg found that the asymmetrical reduction in MTRs in our favour, which we had lobbied for, enabled us to be more effective competitors and saved consumers approximately R47 billion between 2010 and 2016.

Over this period, we focused on building an innovative product portfolio and undertaking significant capital expenditure to improve the stability, quality, capacity and coverage of our network. In this regard, we have insourced our network design services, optimized our costs through the redeployment of less profitable BTSs to higher revenue-generating areas, invested in higher quality equipment, reviewed our rollout strategy and further expanded our rollout into LTE and LTE-Advanced networks and the deployment of fibre across our network. Our capital expenditures margin was 13.5%, 19.7%, 19.0%, 19.6% and 19.5% for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015 and, 2016. In addition, we increased our focus on our marketing strategy and distribution channels, undertaking extensive promotions of mobile data services in an effort to capture growing demand, as well as aligning ourselves strategically with operators of OTT applications and services. We incentivized our channel partners to promote our products and services over those of our competitors and, in 2014, we successfully developed a hosting platform for MVNOs. This has enabled us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization, and significantly grow revenue from our wholesale business. We currently are the only mobile network operator that provides services via MVNOs, although certain of our competitors have publicly indicated that they are exploring such opportunities.

Over this period, our new management team focused on achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies in an effort to increase our operating margins.

Our key strategic initiatives during this period included:

• strengthening our close partnership with Blue Label (which dates back to 2011). Blue Label is the largest distributor of prepaid airtime, data and starter packs in South Africa (with approximately 700,000 SIM connections a month in South Africa and revenue of approximately R26 billion based on its reported results for the year ended May 31, 2016). Blue Label boasts a local footprint of approximately 30,000 touch points (which extends to the foremost retailers, petroleum forecourts, independent retailers and wholesalers in South Africa). We incentivized Blue Label to promote our prepaid airtime and starter packs, which contributed significantly to our subscriber and revenue growth in the prepaid market: approximately 80% of our airtime recharges for the year ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them; • increasing our focus on network quality and customer experience, including the launch of our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks in 2015 and 2016, respectively, insourcing of our call centres, insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own (providing us with greater control over marketing of our products and services, availability of handsets in-store, employee training and enabling us to improve customer service and experience); we experienced a 67% increase in total data consumption in 2016 compared to 2015, which we believe stems from our improved network and rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks;

21

• aligning ourselves strategically with operators of OTT applications and services, such as Facebook and WhatsApp, including a Facebook promotional campaign for prepaid users that facilitated net additions of approximately 410,000 subscribers over the promotional period and the two months thereafter. We also provided customers with free WhatsApp messaging from October 2014 to end of August 2015, which facilitated the acquisition of new subscribers. The campaign drove further growth of data traffic on our network and generated incremental revenue growth once we started to charge for this service following the end of the promotional period; • increasing our outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts with our regulators to obtain more pro- competitive regulatory treatment, including a greater degree of asymmetry in respect of MTRs, as well as challenging the incumbents’ practices of charging less for on-net calls than for off-net calls and roaming services; • launching our operational efficiencies programme in 2014, which included, among others, a retrenchment process and the rationalization of under-performing BTSs, resulting in reduction of our operational expenditures (including the reduction in the amount paid to the incumbent operators for site rentals) and general administration costs despite the continued rollout of our network; • renegotiating our national roaming agreement with Vodacom in South Africa that allows us to route a portion of our customer traffic over Vodacom’s GSM mobile telephone network (the “Vodacom National Roaming Agreement”), to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) and extend the minimum term until 2020, which has enabled us to offer 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we are not able to, or do not wish to, provide coverage through our own network (typically because it is relatively more expensive for us to deploy our own network than rely on the roaming agreement due to relatively lower cost of roaming) and to be selective in our deployment of capital and strategically focus capital expenditures. This initiative resulted in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality; • launching Wi-Fi calling in 2015, the first offering of its kind in South Africa, allowing us to turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into a Cell C base station and enabling prepaid, postpaid and hybrid customers to use their Cell C line over a Wi-Fi network connection even when phone coverage is absent (locally or abroad) or when they are outside of South Africa. The service enables our customers to make and receive calls, send/receive SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even purchase bundles, within their plan rates. We believe Wi-Fi calling contributed to an increase in net additions and reduced churn in the prepaid segment and enabled us to churn high-value customers from our competitors who may otherwise have spent significant amounts on roaming services on other networks in South Africa; • entering into a new third-party handset financing arrangement with an external vendor, which became effective on August 6, 2015 (the “Handset Financing Arrangement”), which has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets (where we were previously unable to do so) and offer higher value handsets to support growth in our postpaid segment, while freeing up an average of approximately R196.4 million of working capital per month since August 9, 2015 to December 31, 2016; and

• launching our buy-out offering in 2015, offering to buy out existing contracts of subscribers from Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, paying up to R20,000 to customers towards the costs of cancelling their contract, which has contributed to an increase in net additions in this segment.

The Cell C Recapitalization

Overview

Despite the improvement in our operational performance and the growth that we have achieved since 2012, as well as the benefits of R4.6 billion of equity contributions from OTL (R2.6 billion in 2013 and R2.0 billion in 2014), we remained constrained by our previously highly leveraged capital structure. We have recapitalized ourselves, which included raising approximately R16.3 billion of incremental equity (the “Equity Contribution”), which includes the benefit from the discharge of certain financial indebtedness, by way of an upliftment of certain financial indebtedness to SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3, respectively, in an aggregate amount of the equivalent of R8.8 billion. We believe these actions greatly mitigated our balance sheet constraints and have better positioned us for future growth.

22

We have used the proceeds of the Equity Contribution to partially repay all of our pre-existing debt facilities and settle our existing hedging arrangements. We refer to all of the foregoing as the “Cell C Recapitalization.” We also entered into new hedging arrangements to mitigate foreign exchange risk in respect of the Notes following the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization (the “Completion Date”). At the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization, our Net Debt was reduced to a maximum of R6.0 billion, and our Pro Forma Net Debt to EBITDA was reduced from 5.66x, for the 12 months ended December 31, 2016, to 1.93x.

As a consequence of the Cell C Recapitalization, our historical principal shareholder, OTL, reduced its beneficial interest in us in favour of MS15. At the same time, new shares were subscribed for by:

• Blue Label, via subsidiary BLT (through a combination of cash and settlement of existing trade payables); • Net1; • M5; • MS15, through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which qualifies as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes; and • SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 (on behalf of 3C).

M5’s investment in our share capital is designed to incentivise members of senior management and retain them for at least five years by virtue of the restrictions on their right to convert their Class B ordinary shares into Class A ordinary shares (see “The Cell C Recapitalization” for the rights and restrictions attributed to M5’s Class B ordinary shares). MS15’s investment in our share capital is designed to incentivise our employees.

Our equity structure immediately following the Completion Date, which was approved by the board of directors of Cell C (the “Board of Directors”) and 3C’s board of directors, is as indicated below.

Pre-Cell C Post-Cell C Recapitalization Recapitalization beneficial beneficial ownership ownership interest(2) Equity injection interest(1) SPV1 R 3.6 billion(7) 11.8% SPV2 R4.5 billion (8) 16.0% SPV3 R0.7bn(9) 2.2% Blue Label R5.5 billion(4) 45.0% Net1 R2.0 billion 15.0% MS15(5) Nominal amount (R2,500) 5.0% M5 (6) Nominal amount (R2,500) 5.0% Total 100% R16.3 billion(3) 100% ______(1) At closing of the Cell C Recapitalization. (2) Prior to the Cell C Recapitalization, we were owned by 3C, in which OTL had a 75% beneficial interest through (i) Lanun, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that directly held 15% of 3C and (ii) OTSA, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that indirectly held 60% of 3C. CellSAf, a BEE consortium in South Africa, owned the remaining 25% of 3C. 3C held Class A ordinary shares. (3) The “Total Equity Injection” is the sum of the equity injection of Blue Label and Net1, plus the nominal contributions made by SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 by way of an upliftment to them of certain financial indebtedness from Cell C for an aggregate amount of the equivalent of R8.8 billion. (4) Reflects R3,000 million of equity injected in cash, paid by Blue Label at the Completion Date,. The remaining portion of Blue Label’s equity injection has been offset by the settlement of a projected outstanding amount of R2,500 million owing to Blue Label as at the Completion Date, which is accounted for as abnormal working capital and which will be converted into equity at the Completion Date. (5) MS15 now holds Class A ordinary shares, which were subscribed for a nominal amount of R2,500 (see “The Cell C Recapitalization.”). (6) Members of senior management now hold Class B ordinary shares, which they (acting in concert) can elect to convert into Class A ordinary shares five years from the Completion Date, or upon the occurrence of certain other events, and which were subscribed for a nominal amount of R2,500 (see “The Cell C Recapitalization”). (7) SPV1 issued the U.S.$279,849,000 8.625% Notes due 2022 (the “2022 Notes”) which have been used, in part, to discharge Cell C’s liability in relation to the Existing Cell C Notes for the equivalent of R3.6 bn and in consideration received 59,000,000 Class A ordinary shares in Cell C (8) SPV2 assumed the SPV2 Loan which was used to discharge Cell C’s liability in relation to the existing CDB Facilities and existing ICBC Facilities for the equivalent of R4.5bn and in consideration received 80,000,000 Class A ordinary shares in Cell C. (9) SPV3 assumed the SPV3 Loan and we paid in consideration to SPV3 an amount equal to the value of the SPV3 Loan which amount has been left outstanding on loan account.

23

As a consequence of the Cell C Recapitalization, CellSAf has retained an indirect 7.5% beneficial ownership in us.

Key anticipated benefits of the Cell C Recapitalization

The Cell C Recapitalization provided a compelling value proposition to us, to our debt and equity providers, our management and employees, our shareholders, our customers and to other stakeholders.

The refinancing of our pre-existing debt deleveraged our capital structure, significantly reduced our financing costs in absolute terms and significantly reduced our exposure to foreign exchange risk. While the Notes have foreign exchange risk, we have mitigated it through hedging arrangements. The significant deleveraging achieved through the Cell C Recapitalization has improved our operating cash flow as well as our profitability, better positioning us for sustainable growth and providing us with greater scope to further align our interests with our suppliers and distributors and forge strategic relationships with third parties, including potentially our competitors, to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies. We expect to have greater capacity to invest in growth initiatives, including capital expenditures to fund network improvements. Our improved balance sheet will reduce management’s focus on addressing our capital structure and on fund-raising efforts, enabling them to instead focus on achieving our strategies.

M5’s and MS15’s investment in our share capital has incentivised management and our employees and is designed to retain members of our senior management for at least five years to support the implementation of our strategy.

We also believe that the Cell C Recapitalization has provided a compelling value proposition for Blue Label and us. Approximately 80% of our airtime recharges for the year ended December 31, 2016 were generated via our partnership with them. Blue Label, in turn, represents a large portion of the mobile data and airtime retail market in South Africa. Our enhanced relationship with Blue Label, as our shareholder following the Cell C Recapitalization, should further align our interests and facilitate greater revenue growth and operational efficiencies, incentivizing Blue Label to promote our products and services (better positioning us to accelerate our growth in market share and revenue in the prepaid segment), and providing us with opportunities to realise synergies in product distribution and market positioning. The strategic partnership with Blue Label is also likely to better position us to understand and influence more of the steps required to take an innovative product or service to market and be able to offer innovation that is relevant, timely and more responsive to our customers’ needs.

Following the Completion Date, our effective BEE ownership has exceeded the 25% target threshold set by ICASA, making us the only mobile operator in South Africa to exceed this threshold. We believe this should be a positive factor for purposes of future bids for spectrum and more generally in securing business contracts from governmental entities.

Our New Balance Sheet

The following table sets forth our indebtedness:

• on an actual basis as at December 31, 2016; and • as adjusted, to give effect to the Arrangement, and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each occurred on December 31, 2016, and any other changes to our consolidated cash and cash equivalents and capitalization since December 31, 2016.

The foregoing adjusted figures would differ at current exchange rates from the exchange rates that were effective on the Completion Date.

As at December 31, 2016 Actual As adjusted As adjusted (unaudited) (R in millions) ($ in millions)(1) (2) (2) (2) Total debt (pro forma) ...... 17,867 6,143 447 Unsecured debt...... 1,696 - -

24

Secured debt ...... 16,171 6,143 447 Notes ...... 6,035 2,476 180

Existing/New CDB Facilities 6,379 1,724 125 Existing/New ICBC Facilities 3,757 997 73 New DBSA Facility - 181 13 New Nedbank Facilty - 767 56 (3) Existing Hedging Arrangements ...... 506 - - Capitalized Finance Costs – borrowings ...... (136) (-) (-)

(1) Converted into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate of R13.7372 = $1.00. (2) Total debt represents our consolidated current and non-current borrowings, including accrued and unpaid interest. (3) Assumes a cost of €35 million (R506 million) to unwind our pre-existing hedging arrangements that were settled pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

Strengths

We believe that the following strengths will support the execution of our growth strategy.

Our status as a challenger mobile operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market positions us to take advantage of opportunities others may not.

As a challenger operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market, we believe that we are best positioned to take advantage of opportunities in our operating environment through our focus on innovation and agility, combined with our willingness to pursue outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts. These opportunities have presented themselves in the past and we expect further opportunities to present themselves in the future, including:

• our ability to proactively engage with our regulators and avail ourselves of regulatory and judicial remedies to help improve our competitive position in the South African mobile market, such as in respect of MTRs (as at October 1, 2016, the rates were 19 cents for calls terminating on our network and Telkom’s network and 13 cents for calls terminating on Vodacom and MTN’s networks, compared to 24 cents for calls terminating on our network and Telkom’s network and 16 cents for calls terminating on Vodacom and MTN’s networks as at October 1, 2015), pricing asymmetry, pricing of and access to infrastructure, roaming rates, handset subsidies and transparency of pricing, and access to spectrum; • our ability, as a result of our smaller scale relative to our principal competitors, to react quickly to opportunities and take advantage of new opportunities, including in our distribution and product offering, and to react in a timely and dynamic way to changing market demand; • our ability to innovate and introduce disruptive products and services in the South African market, such as Wi-Fi calling, which allows us to turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into a Cell C base station and enables customers to make and receive calls, send/receive SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even purchase bundles, within their plan rates, over a Wi-Fi network connection even when cell phone coverage is absent (locally or abroad) or when they are abroad, reducing their usage of roaming services locally and abroad; • our partnerships with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook, which positions us to drive data traffic on our network and serves as a customer acquisition tool notwithstanding the concomitant reduction in voice revenue, in respect of which we have a smaller market share than some of our competitors, allowing us to acquire customers from our competitors; • our ability to take advantage of bilateral roaming arrangements with other mobile network operators that have already deployed network coverage in outlying areas with lower population density, where it is more expensive for us to deploy our own network due to relatively lower costs of roaming, which enables us to be selective in our deployment of capital and strategically focus capital expenditures in major metropolitan areas in South Africa. This provides us with cash flow flexibility, as well as cost savings on energy, transmission, site rental and maintenance costs, and enables us to focus on providing the latest technologies and services to our subscribers; • our MVNO hosting platform, which allows us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams, with relatively low incremental administrative costs, and allow us to reach a more diverse base

25

of subscribers; currently, we are the only mobile network operator that provides services via MVNOs, although certain of our competitors have publicly indicated that they are exploring such opportunities; and

• our ability to participate in passive infrastructure sharing, including sharing our fibre backhaul and site infrastructure with other operators, including the incumbent operators, with each operator managing and controlling their own network, which would facilitate cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we may be permitted to do so in the future, active infrastructure sharing (combining BTSs and site equipment and sharing of spectrum with another operator), which would facilitate greater cost savings and operational efficiencies. We operate in a market with attractive telecommunications sector dynamics and are well positioned to take advantage of anticipated growth in demand for data services.

South Africa is one of the most developed economies in Africa, with one of the most advanced telecommunications sectors on the continent. Historical growth in telecommunications services in South Africa has been driven primarily by the mobile sector. Unlike other telecommunications markets, South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed-line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2016 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow. We believe that this is largely due to an under-developed fixed line telecommunications infrastructure due to infrastructure investment challenges, which affects a large proportion of the population living in non-urban areas. This has led to the leapfrogging of the development of a reliable nationwide fixed network infrastructure, moving straight on to mobile voice and mobile broadband. Consequently, this has supported, and we expect will continue to support, revenue growth in the mobile market without requiring deployment of significant capital resources to develop nationwide fixed-line networks. The total number of mobile subscribers grew from approximately 68.9 million as at December 31, 2012 to approximately 89.9 million as at December 31, 2016 (source: Pyramid), implying a penetration rate of 165%. South Africa’s mobile penetration rate is expected to continue growing to 193% in 2020, according to Pyramid. The high penetration rate reflects the practice by the majority of active mobile users to carry multiple SIM cards (a practice that has been encouraged by operators that actively push sales and discounting starter packs). We believe that actual penetration is lower when comparing the number of mobile users to the total population, and there is still potential room for growth as we estimate approximately 15% of the population does not have a SIM card. The potential for growth is supported by the prevalence of prepaid contracts in the subscriber mix, with an 80% / 18% split between prepaid and post paid subscribers as at December 31, 2016.

The following chart reflects the evolution of total mobile market spend (which reflects consumer outlay on mobile services, including voice, data and SMS) in South Africa between 2006 and 2016. Recovery CAGR: 8.0% Price War CAGR: 1.0% High Growth Phase CAGR: 10.5%

Source: Company.

The South African mobile market has shown strong growth in the recent past in terms of market spend, which has continued to grow since the inception of the mobile telecommunications market in South Africa in 1993 and is expected to continue to grow across the various segments despite some of the economic headwinds affecting

26

the country. Market spend in the South African mobile appears to be gradually improving, having grown in 2016 by a compound annual growth rate (“CAGR”) of approximately 8.0%, following the softening of the aggressive price competition between 2012 and 2014. This trend is largely driven by increasing demand for data services, which is expected to more than offset the decline in voice revenue and SMS services as all-inclusive tariffs and OTT services become more prevalent. It is anticipated that total mobile market spend will increase at an average CAGR of 4.1% per year between 2015 and 2020, a more conservative rate of growth when compared to past growth rates (approximately 8% CAGR between 2005 and 2015).

According to Statistics South Africa’s mid-year population estimates dated August 25, 2016, the South African population, which exceeds 55 million, is expected to grow by 10% between 2015 and 2030 and by 20% between 2015 and 2050. According to Statistics South Africa, two-thirds of the population is under 35 years of age, 55% of whom are aged between 15 and 34 years old and highly technologically engaged, with widespread access to landlines, mobile phones or the Internet. We believe that these favourable youth demographics are a key driver in growing smartphone penetration and demand for mobile data and broadband services. The following chart presents a breakdown of the demographics of South Africa’s population, by age.

6%

30% ≤ 14 years 28% 15 - 34 years

35 - 64 years

≥ 64 years 36%

Source: Statistics South Africa.

The number of mobile handsets sold is expected to more than double between 2012 to 2020, with smartphones forming a larger percentage of these sales each year according to management estimates, Pyramid and EIU. In addition, according to a survey by GeoPoll and World Wide Worx in April 2015, South Africa amongst African countries in the number of application downloads, reflecting the high rate of smartphone adoption in the country. Digital commerce is also on the rise in South Africa, supported by growing internet penetration. Consumer research carried out by Ipsos in March 2015 showed that 22% of South African internet-enabled device owners have made purchases online in the past year and 48% expect to do so in the future (source: Ipsos study conducted on behalf of PayPal and FNB). In addition, South Africa is one of the early-adopter markets on the African continent, in which 4G/LTE technology is gaining traction. Moreover, in 2014, the South African government published a national broadband plan setting a penetration rate target for the South African market of 90% broadband penetration rate by 2020 at speeds of 5Mbps and 50% penetration rate at speeds of 100 Mbps, compared to total broadband penetration rate of 34% in 2013. This policy reflects the government’s commitment to enabling the rollout of broadband infrastructure. The projected growth in mobile subscribers is greater than the projected growth of South Africa’s population, which translates into an upward trend in mobile penetration forecasts. It is expected that demand in South Africa for data services will continue to grow as a result of increasing levels of social media engagement and the increasing popularity of non-traditional voice services utilizing Voice over Internet Protocol (“VoIP”), or alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging (SMS/MMS) becoming increasingly popular, such as Skype, Facebook and iPhone/iPad Messenger. These OTT applications are capable of providing mobile-only data users with voice and messaging services, typically at a substantially lower cost than traditional voice and messaging services, are often offered free of charge, are accessible via smartphones and tablets, and allow their users to have access to potentially unlimited messaging and voice services over the Internet, thus bypassing more expensive traditional voice and messaging

27

services but contributing to significant data traffic on our network and driving growth in our data services and revenue.

Our revenue from data services as well as our broadband subscriber base have grown consistently since our broadband services were introduced in 2010, at a CAGR of 97% in terms of the volume of data traffic between 2010 and 2016, and we expect revenue from data services to exceed our voice revenue by 2018. We believe that we are well positioned to take advantage of anticipated further growth in demand for data and value-added services in South Africa. Our LTE-Advanced network, which overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks, coupled with 3G voice and data roaming services provided over Vodacom’s network, and our attractive spectrum (in respect of which we are not presently constrained) are capable of supporting high-volume data traffic at high speeds, including streaming services (such as radio and video streaming) and access to content. In addition, we believe that we are well positioned to meet growing demand for mobile data services through our continually evolving competitive data-focused offerings across all of our customer segments, such as our range of contract (postpaid and hybrid) tariff options, which are focused on more data heavy usage and targeted to smartphone users, as well as our data bundles and certain voucher options, which provide flexibility for prepaid customers that are looking to use greater amounts of data. Our strategic alignment with operators of OTT services positions us to drive data traffic on our network and serves as an acquisition tool, notwithstanding the concomitant reduction in voice revenue, in respect of which we have a smaller market share than some of our competitors, allowing us to acquire customers from our competitors.

We benefit from our extensive and integrated distribution network and strategic partnerships, particularly with Blue Label and our wholesale channel.

We believe that we are well positioned for growth, having achieved significant scale since our inception, through our focus on achieving a broad distribution reach and focus on incentivizing our channel partners to promote our products and services. We believe our potential for subscriber growth has significantly increased as a result of a number of partnerships and strategic alliances, such as with key distributors (particularly, Blue Label), MVNOs, operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook and our external vendor in respect of the Handset Financing Arrangement, to improve handset availability and selection.

Our distribution network principally comprises our informal channels (including super dealers and regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and third party distributors), 196 Cell-C branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises), approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national retail chains, telesales (including our internal inbound and outbound call centres and, to a lesser extent, external call centres), online sales and MVNOs. In addition, from 2015 to December 2016, we increased the number of our stores from 160 to 196 (including independently-owned stores and franchises), and we plan to further increase our independently-owned store network in the medium term, to provide us with greater control over availability of handsets and employee training to improve customer service and experience.

Prepaid:

• In our prepaid segment, we have increased our overall subscriber base and core prepaid subscriber base significantly since 2012, following the implementation of our customer-oriented turnaround strategy, with a CAGR of 18% for our prepaid subscriber base and a CAGR of 12% for our core prepaid subscriber base, from 5.3 million prepaid subscribers and 3.2 million core prepaid subscribers as at December 31, 2012 to 12.0 million prepaid subscribers and 6.3 million core prepaid subscribers as at December 31, 2016. We believe that we have developed an effective distribution strategy and strategic alliances in our prepaid segment, through the distribution of SIM packs on a large scale predominantly via informal and retail channels, as well as via the wholesale channel, which has significantly expanded our presence across South Africa and contributed to our strong subscriber growth. The informal channels have enabled us to add mobility to our traditional retail channels and bring customers closer to the point of purchase, resulting in increased volume and growth opportunities via our distributors’ footprint. Most significantly, our partnership with Blue Label has contributed significantly to our growth in the prepaid market (approximately 80% of our airtime recharges for the six months ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them). As our primary distributor of airtime vouchers to the prepaid segment, our distribution arrangement with Blue Label ensures that customers are able to top up their phones with relative ease. Blue Label is also able to take advantage of a network of resellers, retailers and informal points of sale across South Africa, adapted to the market purchasing habits of our target subscribers. Their presence in township and low income areas is key to reaching our prepaid subscriber base and their presence in the wholesale channel allows for access to a larger number of potential contract subscribers. Blue Label has become a significant investor in our share

28

capital following the Completion Date and the resulting alignment of interests is expected to yield further advantages, particularly in respect of distribution. See “—Strategy—Optimise and strengthen our distribution networks, strategic relationships and key partnerships.”

• We believe the growth in our prepaid subscriber base has also benefited from partnerships and strategic alliances with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook.

Postpaid and hybrid:

• We believe that we have developed an effective distribution strategy in our postpaid and hybrid segments, through the distribution of contract products and services in our franchise channel (which accounted for approximately 47% of postpaid sales by value as at December 31, 2016), our retail channel and our wholesale channel, with a growing focus on direct sales through our own in-house sales force.

• Our entry into the Handset Financing Arrangement in August 2015 has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets (where we were previously unable to do so) and offer higher value handsets, increasing net additions in contract subscribers.

• We believe the growth in our postpaid and hybrid subscriber bases has also benefited from partnerships and strategic alliances with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook.

Wholesale:

• As at December 31, 2016, we had six MVNOs and 1.4 million MVNO subscribers active on our network. We have put significant effort into expanding our reach to customers through relationships with MVNOs, like FNB, Virgin Mobile and MVN-X. MVNOs contract directly with subscribers to provide mobile services hosted on our mobile network. We have also created a successful hosting platform for MVNOs, which allows us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization. The MVNO partnerships allow us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks, allowing us potentially to reach a more diverse base of subscribers. For example, our MVNO relationship with FNB provides targeted access to more than 600,000 subscribers and our MVNO relationship with Virgin Mobile provides us with targeted access to more than 460,000 subscribers. We believe that the investments we have made in our focused approach to MVNO partnerships will provide us with a competitive advantage as the market continues to diversify.

We believe that there are opportunities to further increase our market share in the South African mobile market, including as a result of expected growth in demand for data services, and we intend to leverage our extensive and integrated distribution network and strategic partnerships to achieve market share growth.

Our selective deployment of capital expenditures on our nationwide networks, supported by roaming agreements and our spectrum portfolio, enable us to offer, or benefit from, attractive and competitive services.

Our selective deployment of capital and strategically focused capital expenditures enable us to provide mobile voice and data services through a combination of our own LTE-Advanced network that overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks, as well as under national and international roaming agreements with telecommunications operators to allow such operators’ customers to roam on our network and our customers to roam on their networks. Our investment in developing our network has been strategically focused in major metropolitan areas in South Africa. At the national level, we benefit from the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, which enables us to route, especially in outlying areas, our customer traffic (voice and data roaming) on Vodacom’s network. We renegotiated our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement in June 2015, which has no maximum term but may be terminated no earlier than 2020 by either party subject to two years’ prior notice, to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) with significant reductions in unitary pricing per megabyte and per minute. This has enabled us to offer more cost-effective 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we do not have network coverage, resulting in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality. Our roaming

29

arrangements with Vodacom enable us to provide national coverage in areas with lower population density, where it is more expensive for us to deploy our own network due to relatively lower costs of roaming. This provides us with cash flow flexibility, as well as costs savings on energy, transmission, site rental and maintenance costs and enables us to focus our investments on providing the latest technologies and services to our subscribers, such as the introduction of LTE and LTE-Advanced services. As at December 31, 2016, we carried approximately 90% of all traffic (85% of voice traffic and 90% of data traffic) on our own network; the balance was routed on Vodacom’s network.

Over the last few years, we have implemented various initiatives to improve the stability, quality, capacity, speed and coverage of our network with the rollout of an LTE-Advanced network that overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks. We believe these initiatives have resulted in an improvement in the stability, quality, capacity, speed and coverage of our network, with fewer network-related service complaints year-on-year. Our call drop rates have declined from 1.37% of all calls as of January 2014, to 0.79% of all calls as at December 31, 2016. In addition, we experienced a 67% increase in total data consumption in 2016 compared to 2015 and a 67% increase in total data consumption in the twelve months ended December 31, 2016, compared to the twelve months ended 31 December, 2015, which we believe stems from our improved network and rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks.

• Following a period of significant capital expenditure since 2010 (R11.6 billion between 2010 and December 31, 2016), which was funded by a combination of equity contributions from OTL and debt, our network has been upgraded and expanded to include 4,992 BTSs as at December 31, 2016 (up from 2,961 as at December 31, 2010), 4,882 of which were 3G-enabled. As at December 31, 2016, our 3G network covered 81% of the population. In addition, as at December 31, 2016, we had access to 42 base station controllers (“BSCs”) and 41 radio network controllers (“RNCs”) across 18 locations in South Africa, respectively.

• We believe that we have optimally managed the timing of our rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks, with 1,027 sites having been upgraded for LTE in 2015, as against our planned upgrade of 550 sites for the year (2,573 sites as at December 31, 2016), and 2,130 sites having been upgraded for LTE-Advanced as at December 31, 2016. Our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks cover 18.5% of the South African population as at December 31, 2016. We initially focused our LTE rollout efforts in Gauteng, KwaZulu-Natal and the Western Cape, as these areas have large urban populations and represent some of the most affluent neighbourhoods in South Africa, with coverage across these three key metropolitan areas. We also initially focused our LTE-Advanced rollout efforts in Gauteng and Cape Town, two key metropolitan areas, and KwaZulu-Natal, with such rollout currently ongoing.

• The implementation of a regional network strategy enables us to provide coverage where it is needed most and to benefit from economies of scale. We also benefit from flexible supply arrangements with Huawei and ZTE, our principal suppliers, which we believe facilitates accelerated growth in our LTE and LTE-Advanced rollout strategy.

We have implemented further initiatives, including capacity and resiliency upgrades of our transmission network, and we have begun deploying a “dark fibre,” network, which provides us with unlimited bandwidth and leased line capacity (subject to the type of equipment used on the network), including the rollout of fibre on all LTE and LTE-Advanced sites (74% and 90% of LTE and LTE-Advanced sites, respectively, as at December 31, 2016). We have undertaken a significant rationalization exercise, including the assessment of our network and decommissioning of under-performing BTSs, thereby reducing site rental and maintenance costs and transmission expenses, and allowing for the redeployment of BTSs in higher revenue generating areas.

Moreover, we have access to 76MHz of duplex spectrum, comprising 2x11MHz (900 MHz), 2x12 MHz (1,800 MHz) and 2x15 MHz (2,100 MHz) bands. We also have access to a 7 GHz fixed radio frequency spectrum license and 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network. We believe that our relative extra spectrum availability as compared to our competitors (we have the same amount of spectrum as our larger competitors, but with fewer customers, as a result of which we have more spectrum available per customer) enables us to actively promote data services to capture growing mobile data demand and gives the us flexibility required to accommodate the technology shift in subscriber handsets and other devices from 2G through 3G to LTE devices.

In order to position ourselves for future growth in the fixed broadband market, we have targeted new investments in our network to allow for the launch of our FTTH offering, C-Fibre, which offers fixed broadband services over FTTH connections. We maintain a disciplined approach to expanding our fibre network and

30

adhere to stringent project acceptance criteria, maintaining a maximum level of cost incurred per household passed before committing to a fibre build-out. Our FTTH build-out consists of a mix of fibre to the building (“FTTB”) and FTTH technology, which is ultimately implemented depending on the economics and density of the area. We began our FTTH rollout in 2016 and we believe that this fixed-line network provides us with an attractive value proposition, enabling us to benefit from the ongoing shift from other broadband technologies to FTTH as customers demand higher speed technologies, as well as cheaper access to data as demand for content and streaming grows. We see opportunities to drive revenue growth as a result of low broadband penetration in South Africa and the laying of national and international cables (South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed- line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2015 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow.

We have a track record of implementing initiatives to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies.

We have improved our earnings and cashflows in recent years by reducing our operating costs within our business through a number of measures, including, most significantly, proactively engaging with our regulators and more generally with industry players, as a challenger mobile operator, to achieve greater asymmetric regulatory treatment (which resulted in the evolution of asymmetric MTRs) and more pro-competitive regulatory treatment (which, for example, led to a reduction in the amount paid to incumbent operators for site rentals), as well as launching our operational efficiencies programme in 2014, which we continued to implement in 2016, pursuant to which we:

• rationalized our network expenditures, which included a programme of rationalizing under-performing BTSs and decommissioning such sites, reducing site rental and maintenance costs, substantially reducing site rentals on other sites (including via renegotiation of existing contracts and moving contracts from legacy suppliers to new suppliers), and implementing cuts in transmission expenses. We achieved a reduction in our network expenses from R1,909 million in 2014 to R1,851 million in 2015 and R1,793.9 million in, 2016; • rationalized our procurement process, including setting up a committee for consideration and approval of operational expenditures, which has contributed to the reduction of operating expenses from 128.2% of our service revenue in 2014 to 124.0% in 2015 and 115.4%in 2016; • renegotiated roaming costs under our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement; • rationalized our incentivization programme in our distribution channels which led to a review of the ongoing revenue and upfront connection bonuses, introduced performance measures in respect of annual volume rebates and increased the period during which we could clawback incentive bonuses to reduce subscriber acquisition costs (“SAC”) and bad debt customers. We achieved a reduction in our bad debt expense from R268.8 million in 2014 to R174.3 million in 2015 and R92.7 million in 2016; • gradually reduced ongoing revenue payable on the device portion of monthly subscription fees to zero percent across all of our distribution channels; • discontinued our offer of high-end handsets on low-end entry-level packages; • eliminated subsidies on prepaid handsets; • rationalized our headcount, thereby increasing our total personnel costs (excluding bonuses and incentives) from R481 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2015 to R560 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016. Excluding performance bonuses (which were not made available in 2014), our total administrative expenses slightly increased from R1,896 million to R1,988 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016 compared to the twelve months ended December 31, 2015, due to the decline in salaries and wages; and

• implemented a range of measures to reduce our SAC as a percentage of our total revenue (from 8% in 2014 to 5% in 2015 and 4% in 2016), including offering lower subsidies on handsets and reallocating SAC and bad debts due to the Handset Financing Arrangement.

We have an experienced management team with a proven industry track record and further aligned interests.

We have a dedicated and experienced management team with significant prior experience in operating and managing telecommunications businesses locally and internationally, who have effectively achieved growth in revenue quarter-on-quarter for 15 of the past 16 consecutive quarters ended December 31, 2016 (when

31

comparing each quarter to the corresponding quarter in the prior year), achieved a turnaround of our EBITDA margin from 7.4% in 2013 to 14.7% in 2015 and 21.2% in 2016, as well as successfully grown our market share between 2012 and 2015, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, from approximately 11.6% to 16%, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, from approximately 9.2% for 2012 to 11.6% for 2016.

Our Chief Executive Officer, Jose Dos Santos, has over 20 years of leadership and experience in the telecommunications industry, having served as part of the Vodacom management team for 8 years. Our Chief Financial Officer, Tyrone Soondarjee, joined us on 1 July 2017 and has 30 yeas of experience in the financial services industry. Our Chief Strategy Officer, Robert Pasley, has experience in finance and telecommunications since before the launch of mobile communications in South Africa, having served at Vodacom for 11 years. Our management team played a pivotal role in devising and implementing our customer-oriented turnaround strategy and have focused on innovative ideas and taking swift action to allow these ideas to flow to the market quickly.

While we believe that our experienced management team has already demonstrated its ability to grow our business, for example, through rebranding, innovation, distribution channel expansion, strategic partnerships, network improvements and achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies, their investment in our shares as part of the Cell C Recapitalization has further aligned our interests and incentivised them to achieve our growth strategies.

Strategy

We intend to enhance revenue and cash flows by strengthening our position in the South African mobile telecommunications market and focusing on profitable growth opportunities, with the objective of becoming a profitable third operator in our market. We aim to significantly increase our share of the market by drawing customers from our competitors through strong subscriber growth and stable ARPUs, as well as achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies to improve our profitability. Based on the strengths discussed above, we believe that we are well positioned to deliver on the following strategies. We intend to continue to focus on value leadership (rather than price leadership) and innovation, providing our subscribers more content (minutes, SMS, MMS, Data) than what our competitors offer for the same price, while keeping our ARPU comparable to that of our competitors. We also intend to continue to improve the quality, capacity, speeds and coverage of our network, increase our focus on higher margin segments and our data offering, optimise our distribution channel and strategic relationships with operators of OTT services and MVNOs in particular, implement initiatives to encourage customer retention and improved customer experience and focus on maintaining and achieving further cost savings and operational efficiencies. We believe that certain segments of the mobile communications market in South Africa are largely saturated in terms of users and that increasing our market share will necessarily involve churning customers away from our competitors.

We believe the Cell C Recapitalization, both in terms of the improvement to our balance sheet and the prospective strategic relationship with our new principal shareholder, provides us with a compelling value proposition that we were unable to achieve with our historical balance sheet position. We expect that the significant deleveraging that we achieved pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization will improve our operating cash flow as well as our profitability. We also expect it to better position us for sustainable growth and provide us with greater scope to further align our interests with our suppliers and distributors and forge strategic relationships with third parties, including potentially our competitors, with the ultimate objective of growing our revenue and achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies. We expect to have greater capacity to invest in growth initiatives, including capital expenditures to fund network improvements. Our improved balance sheet has reduced management’s focus on addressing our capital structure and on fund-raising efforts, enabling them to instead focus on achieving our strategies. We believe M5 and MS15’s investment in our share capital has incentivised management and our employees and in the case of management is designed to retain executives for at least five years to support the implementation of our strategy. OTL will no longer guarantee our debt obligations following the Completion Date. We also believe the Cell C Recapitalization has provided a compelling value proposition for Blue Label and us.

Leverage our position as a challenger operator to improve our competitive position.

We intend to leverage our position as a challenger operator in South Africa to continue to react quickly to opportunities and take advantage of new opportunities, including in our distribution and product offering, and to react in a timely and dynamic way to changing market demand. In addition, we propose to pursue opportunities to further align our interests with third parties, including operators of OTT services and content providers, to drive revenue growth and profitability.

32

We will seek to drive further improvements in the shape and contours of the South African mobile market, to enable us to be more effective competitors and better serve consumers. To this end, we will continue to proactively engage with our regulators and avail ourselves of regulatory and judicial remedies to help improve our competitive position in the South African mobile market, such as in respect of MTRs, pricing asymmetry, pricing of and access to infrastructure and spectrum, roaming rates, handset subsidies and transparency of pricing.

Increase revenue market share by further developing our product offerings and evolving our revenue mix, with a focus on higher margin segments while continuing to grow our prepaid segment.

In terms of mobile service revenue, we had an estimated 11.6% market share for 2016. Our goal is to increase our revenue market share to 15-18% in the medium term and 18-20% in the longer term, by focusing on quality, service, innovation and human capital. We intend to focus on continuing to increase the quality of our subscriber base mix and achieve revenue growth in our higher margin segments, including our contracts and wholesale segments, that provide higher ARPU, lower churn and longer term revenue streams, while continuing to pursue revenue growth in our prepaid segment. We have also set up new business units and a dedicated salesforce, together with targeted marketing and distribution initiatives, aimed at acquiring high-end consumers.

Prepaid. We intend to pursue revenue growth in our prepaid segment, which has historically underpinned our revenue growth and been the central pillar of our business, accounting for 52% and 54% of our revenue (excluding equipment revenue) for the year ended December 31, 2015 and the year ended December 31, 2016, respectively. To achieve this, we will focus in particular on value leadership (rather than price leadership) and innovation, providing our subscribers more content (minutes, SMS, MMS, Data) than what our competitors offer for the same price, targeting a small increase in ARPU, and capitalizing on the anticipated increase in demand for data services, which we expect will result in small increase in ARPU in the short-to-medium term and more than offset the anticipated decline in voice and SMS traffic. We will seek to leverage our relationships and aligned interests with distributors, particularly with our incoming shareholder, Blue Label, whose interests we expect to be significantly further aligned with ours following the Cell C Recapitalization, to drive growth in this segment, and we will also seek to continue to leverage our relationships with operators of OTT services to drive data traffic. By providing high levels of service to prepaid subscribers, we aim to increase their loyalty to our brand and to migrate them to contract tariff plans. At the same time, we believe that the prepaid market, due to its attractive low entrance price will continue to remain popular in South Africa and we will continue to offer products and services that will attract new prepaid subscribers, with a particular focus on growing our core prepaid subscriber base.

Contract. We historically have suffered significant churn in our postpaid subscribers, in large part due to unfavourable customer experience with our network. With a renewed focus on growing our contracts segment, we will seek to reduce churn of postpaid subscribers from 47% as at December 31, 2016, to 17% by 2020, and churn of hybrid subscribers from 34.3% as at December 31, 2016, to 15% by 2020, through a series of initiatives. These initiatives include anticipated reductions in prices, improvements to our customer service (including through dedicated customer service initiatives such as our VIP exclusive customer service for high- spend customers) and improvements to our network to support our services (particularly in our core metropolitan areas) and improve customer perception of our network. In addition, we will seek to further optimise our distribution channels to enhance our physical presence in the market (including insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own, providing us with greater control over marketing of our products and services, availability of handsets in-store, employee training and enabling us to improve customer service and experience), leverage the Handset Financing Arrangement to improve availability of higher-end handsets (and create a more level playing field with our principal competitors), and leverage our relationships with operators of OTT services to drive data traffic (to offset expected loss of voice revenue) and churn subscribers away from our competitors.

While we will focus more on the postpaid component of our contract segment, we also intend to improve performance in our hybrid segment following weaker historical performance in an up-selling sales initiative to new and existing prepaid customers. We anticipate that changing consumer habits and increasing price consciousness within the South African mobile market may encourage potential customers to shift to hybrid products instead of pure postpaid products. We will focus on seeking to acquire hybrid subscribers from our competitors by offering better value and to grow our core base by shifting our focus away from the less valuable on-seller model to targeting retail customers.

Wholesale. We intend to significantly grow revenue in our wholesale segment, which is a highly profitable business for us due to relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks associated with wholesale

33

arrangements. We will continue to deploy our hosting platform for MVNOs to add new MVNOs to our network and leverage their brands to access greater revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks.

Equipment. We expect our revenue from the sale of equipment (principally smartphones and tablets) to grow as we grow our contracts revenue, which we expect to be supported by the Handset Financing Arrangement.

Focus on further improving and expanding our network and improving customer satisfaction through operational excellence.

We believe we have a strong network infrastructure and have plans to further develop our mobile and fixed-line networks to meet the growing demand for data services, to improve customer experience and to continue to change customer perception of the quality of our network. We intend to achieve this by deploying significant further investment towards strengthening and expanding our network as well as further aligning our interests with key suppliers or our network equipment and maintaining the flexibility to tailor our investments depending on our operational performance. In the coming years, we expect to continue the historical levels of capital expenditures (though we expect these to reflect a smaller percentage of revenue as a result of our targeted revenue growth), as we transition to LTE and LTE-Advanced technology, including building 1,350 new sites by 2019 that will be active with LTE-Advanced, LTE, 3G and 2G technology; completing our targeted fibre build- out at our sites that is expected to be provided with LTE and LTE-Advanced equipment (currently 22% of our sites would require fibre to be deployed before going on air with LTE) and on our fixed-line network, and replacing existing architecture with new architecture to achieve synergies in our transmission network. We intend to continue to focus on providing LTE and LTE-Advanced coverage in key metropolitan areas where it is needed most and to benefit from economies of scale, while leveraging our existing 3G network and roaming agreements to provide coverage in outlying areas. We will consider further roaming arrangements as a function of our coverage plan while we maintain the plan of disabling access to roaming in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality.

In addition, we intend to consider suitable arrangements to further rationalise and optimise our network, including for example, further decommissioning of under-performing BTSs as well as possible passive infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we are permitted to do so in the future, active network infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in more significant cost savings and operational efficiencies as well as increased speeds. We may also consider bilateral roaming arrangements with other operators to improve network capacity.

We also intend to continue optimizing our spectrum. With the decline in traffic from 2G handsets on our 2G network (65% of all data traffic on our 2G network was generated by 3G devices as at December 31, 2016), we intend to refarm our existing 2G spectrum and reallocate it in LTE and LTE-Advanced areas and, to a lesser extent, 3G areas, to support growing demand for data services. On July 15, 2016, ICASA issued an invitation to apply (“ITA”) by way of an auction for wireless broadband spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range (the “Spectrum Auction”). This spectrum would allow us to cost-effectively increase capacity on our network, although we do not envisage requiring the spectrum in the short-to-medium-term. As we expand our range of services, we may require additional capacity. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our business and industry – Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.” The Spectrum Auction was challenged by the Minister of Telecommunications and Postal Services (the “TPS Minister”) and us in August 2016 when we both launched urgent review applications in the High Court in South Africa. The applications sought to interdict ICASA from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction (“Part A of the proceedings”) pending the determination by the High Court of the legality of the ITA (“Part B of the proceedings”). Judgment in the Part A of the proceedings was handed down on September 30, 2016; the TPS Minister and we were successful in our applications and ICASA was interdicted from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction pending a determination of Part B of the proceedings. We expect Part B of the proceedings to be heard by the High Court in the second or third quarters of 2017. On February 9, 2017, ICASA published a notice in the Government Gazette whereby it indefinitely deferred the timetable for the Spectrum Auction. On October 3, 2016, the TPS Minister issued a National Integrated ICT Policy White Paper (“White Paper”) that deals with the issuing of high demand spectrum and does not appear to favour an auction process. ICASA will have to consider any policies contained in the White Paper or any policies or policy directives that flow from the White Paper when it eventually issues the high demand spectrum. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating. Our ability to obtain the additional spectrum may be limited by competition or financial constraints.

34

A key part of our strategy involves continuing to improve customer satisfaction through operational excellence, so as to reduce churn. We will continue to strive to provide consistent, high-quality services for our customers. We will continue our brand repositioning efforts and make further investments in our customer service, implementing a number of further measures to improve customer service and experience. For example, we intend to increase our points of sale across South Africa, in particular insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own, to ensure that we have greater control over the availability of handsets and employee training, and to ensure close customer proximity. Likewise, we will continue to focus on improving the experience at all customer touch points, including contact centres, billing and end-to-end processes. Moreover, we will continue to implement and develop our churn programme (which currently comprises 21 short, medium and long-term initiatives based on an empirical root cause analysis of churn) to address both voluntary and involuntary churn in our postpaid and hybrid subscriber bases. We also deploy various tools and retention deals in an effort to retain our customers. We will continue to implement our upgrade plan for priority BTS sites that suffer from the highest rates of churn.

Continue to improve our data offering to capture projected demand.

While non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP, and OTT applications as alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging (SMS/MMS), are expected to continue putting pressure on our historical voice-led model of revenue generation, we aim to capitalize on the fast-growing penetration of smartphones and tablets in South Africa, the increased popularity of social networks, non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP, and OTT applications, and the accompanying increased mobile data usage.

In South Africa, we have seen a strong uptake by subscribers of smartphones, and for the year ended December 31, 2016 approximately 82% of handsets sold to our contract subscribers were smartphones. In addition, we believe that the decline in prices of smartphones over time will continue to drive smartphone penetration, in a market where historically smartphones were unaffordable for a majority of our subscriber base. Smartphone users typically add a data plan to their voice and SMS packages and we expect this trend to continue. We historically have been under-represented in this segment (during 2016, we believe we had the lowest proportion of total service revenue attributed to data of the four market participants), due to our low penetration of the commercial market and limited ability to offer smartphones in the period prior to our recent Handset Financing Arrangement. We expect to grow our mobile data revenue from 37% of our service revenue as at December 31, 2016, with a target of reaching approximately half of our service revenue across all products by 2020. The growth in demand for data services will be critical to the profitability of our postpaid services, with data expected to shift from ARPU of approximately R100 per month in 2016 to a target of approximately R140 per month by 2020.

We will seek to enhance our position as a leading data provider by offering new Internet of things (“IOT”) and value-added services for both the consumer and enterprise markets, streaming content services for all market segments (including content that is exclusive to us), achieving price sustainability for data, introducing entry level data-enabled devices and continuing to offer a wide range of affordable and high end smartphones and non-handset devices ranges, such as tablets, dongles and wearables, which will be facilitated by the recent Handset Financing Arrangement. For example, we recently launched our “Break The Net Cell C Reality” digital reality show proposition, which enables customers to upload videos through the “Break The Net Cell C Reality” mobile application and which designates weekly tasks to be achieved by the top 30 contestants (based on number of views). Contestants are positioned based on the number of times that their content is viewed. This proposition is the first of its kind in the South African telecommunications market and reflects our entry into the content space, as part of our efforts to produce our own unique content that is differentiated from other content providers in the market. Further, we will seek to launch our own entertainment platform in the latter part of 2017, which will bring us into the video on demand space and allow us to engage with our customer base and offer relevant content. These initiatives should provide us with an additional revenue stream and the ability to leverage mobile advertising opportunities.

In addition, we aim to capitalize on fixed line and fixed mobile substitution trends, including growing demand for higher speed technologies as well as less expensive access to data, and the accompanying increased data usage over fixed-lines. We believe that FTTH represents a potentially significant opportunity for growth, as currently only approximately 150,000 fibre lines are deployed in South Africa. We intend to leverage our partnerships with infrastructure providers to promote and extend our FTTH offering, with the aim of increasing our market share in this market. Moreover, we will continue to launch promotional and social media campaigns in an effort to drive customer acquisitions and encourage greater demand for data services. We also are seeking to leverage our LTE and LTE-Advanced technologies to tap into the fixed market, by introducing packages as

35

an alternative to FTTH where it is not available and higher speeds and uncapped data are required to access streaming and digital services.

The trend towards growing demand for mobile data and fixed broadband is expected to stimulate the growth of mobile unique user penetration, a change in the mix of ARPU with a saturation-based reduction in voice mobile revenue and increase in data and value-added services revenue.

Optimise and strengthen our distribution networks, strategic relationships and key partnerships.

We intend to further optimise our distribution channels, with our principal focus on our distribution relationship with Blue Label and the optimization of our retail channel. The addition of Blue Label as one of our principal shareholders provides Blue Label with significant incentive from a distribution perspective. We intend to work closely with Blue Label to facilitate greater operational efficiencies and provide us with opportunities to realise synergies in product distribution and market positioning, as well as information sharing. We believe the strategic partnership with Blue Label is also likely to better position us to understand and influence more of the steps required to take an innovative product or service to market and be able to offer innovation that is relevant, timely and more responsive to our customers’ needs. In addition, we would seek to benefit from their connectivity within the postpaid environment in South Africa. We also intend to further develop and leverage our telesales channel, including our internal inbound and outbound call centres, as well as our online sales channel, to increase the sale and visibility of all of our offerings. We plan to enhance our new website over the coming months, to improve customer experience with the aim of increasing conversion of online sales.

In the retail channel, we intend to rationalise our franchise model and increase our store footprint, with the aim of having approximately 20% of stores in our retail channel owned and managed by us by the end of 2016. This will improve our physical presence in the South African market and ensure that we have greater control over the availability of handsets and employee training and better proximity to our customers, enabling us to better manage customer experience and improve customer access to, and knowledge of, our product and service offerings.

In the wholesale channel, we intend to leverage our hosting platform for MVNOs to develop new strategic relationships, with the aim of significantly growing revenue in our wholesale segment.

We plan to nurture our existing partnerships, including with operators of OTT services and to continue to explore additional partnership opportunities, including with content providers, targeted at developing an innovative product and services offering, and capitalizing on anticipated growth in demand for data services.

Focus on operating our business in a lean and cost-efficient manner.

We are focused on maintaining and achieving further cost savings and operational efficiencies in our business in an effort to increase our operating margins. We plan to continue conducting a systematic review of our cost base at all levels and to implement operational efficiencies where appropriate.

Our cost structure is largely variable in nature, with approximately 30% of our cost base being fixed, 40% being partially variable and 30% being fully variable. In an effort to reduce our costs, we intend to focus on reducing the level of variable costs associated with incentivizing our distribution channels and strategic partners by leveraging our improved capital position and, in particular, our relationship with Blue Label, following the Cell C Recapitalization. We will also seek to further optimise our distribution network; we expect that our distribution model will remain focused on our informal channel, with shops that utilize their footprint and dedicated instore concept, thereby minimizing our operational costs, as well as the retail channel, where we intend to increase our store footprint, with cost savings achieved in the rationalization of our franchise model being deployed towards expanding our store footprint. In addition, we will continue to further optimise and rationalise our network, principally targeting the reduction in our spend on property and site rentals, which has been significant, as well as further rationalization of under-performing BTSs and network equipment. We intend to continue actively building our own infrastructure to reduce our reliance on third-party infrastructure and, consequently, our long-term spend on property and site rentals. We may also consider suitable arrangements such as passive infrastructure sharing with other operators, to target cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we are permitted to do so in the future, active network infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in more significant cost savings and operational efficiencies. Should our revenue growth not meet our expectations, we may consider scaling back on our network capital expenditures in the medium term.

36

We intend to control our SAC (including through growth in our wholesale channel using MVNOs to acquire and up-sell to customers at a relatively low cost to us) and continue to implement initiatives to improve our debt collection function and engagement with customers in respect of involuntary churn (to reduce our level of bad debt net of recoveries (which amounted to 2% of our service revenue in 2016)). We currently spend a significant amount on roaming arrangements (we spent R853 million on roaming arrangements for the year ended December 31, 2016) and we intend to explore alternatives to that infrastructure investment and options to reduce unitary national roaming pricing. We anticipate that we should be able to achieve further cost savings, in part driven by the shift from voice services to data services, which should reduce roaming costs.

Moreover, while we intend to continue growing our marketing and advertising spend to support our growth initiatives, we intend to reduce the share of marketing and advertising as a proportion of our service revenue (which amounted to 7% of our service revenue in 2016), which have historically been high as a result of our efforts to change market perception of our brand over the past few years, by focusing increasingly on our presence in the online market.

We are on the last year of the MTR glide path for the reduction of wholesale MTRs and wholesale fixed termination rates, which provide us, as a challenger operator in the mobile market, with the advantage of asymmetric MTRs above the MTRs charged by the incumbent operators. We intend to proactively engage with our regulators when they revisit wholesale rates, and will continue to engage with ICASA to push for continued asymmetry as one of several pro-competitive measures.

We expect that the Cell C Recapitalization will also help us improve and align our interests with our partners, suppliers and distributors, including further aligning our interests with Blue Label, and forging strategic relationships with third parties to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies.

Recent Trading

For the year ended December 31, 2016, we continued to experience growth in our revenue compared to the year ended December 31, 2015. Growth in our mobile service revenue was driven by continued growth in prepaid revenue and a particularly strong performance from the wholesale segment, which more than offset the marginal decline in revenue from our contracts segment. Growth in our equipment revenue was driven by an increase in our margins on handset sales.

For the year ended December 31, 2016, we experienced a small increase in our operational expenses compared to the year ended December 31, 2015 (including as a percentage of our service revenue) as a result of an increase in dealer support, shop rental expenses, network site maintenance and salaries.

The EBITDA target for 2016 was achieved and we believe that we are on track to deliver our budgeted EBITDA for the year ended December 31, 2017.

37

Summary Corporate and Financing Structure

The diagram below illustrates, in simplified form, our corporate and financing structure after giving effect to the Cell C Recapitalization and the Arrangement.

Final Transaction Structure:

(1) MS15 (through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which is expected to qualify as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares) following the Completion Date. See “The Cell C Recapitalization.”

(2) Members of our senior management (M5) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class B ordinary shares) following the Completion Date. See “The Cell C Recapitalization.”

(3) 3C Telecommunications Proprietary Limited is a holding company in which OTL has a 75% beneficial interest through (i) Lanun, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that directly holds 15% of 3C, and (ii) OTSA, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that indirectly holds 60% of 3C. CellSAf, a BEE consortium in South Africa, owns the remaining 25% of 3C. Following the Completion Date, 3C beneficially owns 30% of our ordinary shares through SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3, which will each hold Class A ordinary shares. See “The Cell C Recapitalization.”

(4) Blue Label, via a subsidiary, invested R5.5 billion in our equity as part of the Cell C Recapitalization. Following the Completion Date, Blue Label beneficially owns 45% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares).

(5) Net1 invested R2 billion in our equity as part of the Cell C Recapitalization. Following the Completion Date, Net1 beneficially owns 15% of our ordinary shares (in the form of Class A ordinary shares).

(6) The Notes are guaranteed on a senior secured basis by the Guarantors. As of the Completion Date, all of our Subsidiaries are Guarantors. As at December 31, 2016, the Issuer and the Guarantors, collectively, represented 100% of our total assets on a consolidated basis and 100% of our total liabilities on a consolidated basis. The Guarantees are subject to certain limitations under applicable law.

BD-#27827850-v10 38

(7) Due to South African law governing the creation and perfection of security interests, the security interests in the Collateral was not granted directly to the Holders, but was granted only in favor of a special purpose vehicle formed under the laws of South Africa, Micawber 405 (RF) Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of South Africa, with registration no. 2005/000415/07 (the “Security SPV”), on an equal and rateable basis for the benefit of the Notes, the Senior Lenders under the Senior Facilities and the Hedge Counterparties under the Hedging Arrangement (each as defined below). The Security SPV guarantees each of the foregoing and will be indemnified by us in respect of such guarantee, which indemnity is secured by the Collateral.

(8) The Notes are the senior secured obligations of the Issuer and are guaranteed on a senior secured basis by the Guarantors. As of the Completion Date, the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Trust Deed and the Guarantees, as applicable, are secured by first ranking security interests (the “First Ranking Security Interests”) on an equal and rateable basis with the lender(s) under the CDB Facilities, the ICBC Facilities, the Nedbank Facility and the DBSA Facility (such facilities, together, the “Senior Facilities” and such lenders, together, the “Senior Lenders”) and counterparties to certain hedging obligations (as such counterparties have acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (such hedging obligations the “Hedging Arrangement” and such counterparties, the “Hedge Counterparties”), in collateral that consists of substantially all of the existing and after- acquired personal property and the other assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (as defined below), to the extent such assets are assignable (such rights and interests, together with all other rights, interests and assets that from time to time secure the Notes and the Guarantees (as defined below), the “Collateral”).

BD-#27827850-v10 39

The Notes

The summary below describes the principal terms of the Notes. Certain of the Terms and Conditions of the Notes described below are subject to important limitations and exceptions. The “Terms and Conditions of the Notes” section of these Listing Particulars contains a more detailed description of the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, including the definitions of certain terms used in this summary.

Issuer ...... Cell C Limited (Registration No. 1999/007722/06) (formerly Cell C Proprietary Limited, having changed its name on 7 August 2017).

Notes ...... $184,002,000 in aggregate principal amount of 8.625% First Priority Senior Secured Notes due 2 August 2020.

Issue date ...... 2 August 2017 (the “Issue Date”).

Issue price ...... 100%.

Maturity date ...... 2 August 2020 (the “Maturity Date”).

Interest rates and payment dates ...... The Notes bear interest at, a rate of 8.625% per annum, payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1 of each year, beginning on 1 December 2017. Interest on the Notes accrue from the Issue Date.

Denomination ...... The Notes have been issued in global form in minimum denominations of $1,000 and in integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof and are maintained in book-entry form. See “Book-Entry; Delivery and Form.”

Ranking of the Notes ...... The Notes: • are general senior obligations of the Issuer; • as of the Issue Date, are secured on a first ranking basis (as described below under the caption “Security”); • are secured on a first ranking basis by the Collateral; • are fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed, jointly and severally, on a senior secured basis, by the Guarantors (as described below under the caption “Guarantees”); • are effectively senior to all of the Issuer’s existing and future Indebtedness that is unsecured or is secured on a basis junior to the security granted in respect of the Notes, in each case to the extent of the value of the Collateral; and • rank equally in right of payment with all existing and future Indebtedness of the Issuer that is not subordinated in right of payment to the Notes.

As of December 31, 2016, after giving pro forma effect to the issue of the Notes and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016, we would have had $447 million of long-term debt, all of which would have been secured, and with no debt incurred by our subsidiaries. See “Risk Factors— Risks relating to the Notes, the Guarantees, our Indebtedness and the Structure.”

BD-#27827850-v10 40

Guarantees ...... As of the Completion Date, the Issuer’s obligations under the Trust Deed and the Notes are fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed, on a senior first ranking secured basis, jointly and severally, by Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008017/07), Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008003/07) and Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2009/04432/07) (the “Guarantors”), our wholly owned subsidiaries as of the Completion Date (each, a “Guarantee” and together, the “Guarantees”). Pursuant to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, the Issuer undertakes to procure that any new subsidiary of the Issuer becomes a Guarantor, subject to certain exceptions. See “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”.

As of the Completion Date, all of our Subsidiaries are Guarantors. The Guarantors represent all of our subsidiaries other than the Cell C Foundation, established as a registered non-profit company in 2013, through which we support strategic community service initiatives. Cell C Foundation has no significant assets and does not generate revenue that is consolidated on our balance sheet. As at December 31, 2016, the Issuer and the Guarantors, collectively, represented 100% of our total assets on a consolidated basis and 100% of our total liabilities on a consolidated basis. The Issuer may in the future be required to designate one or more subsidiaries as a Guarantor. The Guarantees are subject to certain limitations under applicable law.

The Guarantees may be released under certain circumstances. See “Terms and Conditions of the Notes.”

Ranking of the Guarantees ...... As of the Completion Date, the Guarantees:

• are the senior obligations of the Guarantors; • are secured on a first-ranking basis (as described below under the caption “Security”); • rank equally in right of payment with all existing and future Indebtedness of each Guarantor that is not subordinated in right of payment to its Guarantee, including any guarantee of the Issuer’s obligations under the Senior Facilities; and • rank senior in right of payment to any and all of the existing and future Indebtedness of each Guarantor that is subordinated in right of payment to its Guarantee. Security ...... As of the Completion Date, the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Trust Deed and the Guarantees, as applicable, are secured by first ranking security interests (the “First Ranking Security Interests”) on an equal and rateable basis with the lender(s) under the Senior Facilities ((such facilities, together, the “Senior Facilities” and such lenders, together, the “Senior Lenders”) and counterparties to certain hedging obligations (such counterparties having acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (such hedging obligations the “Hedging Arrangement” and such counterparties, the “Hedge Counterparties”), in collateral that consists of substantially all of the existing and after-acquired personal property and the other assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (as defined below), to the extent such assets are assignable (such rights and interests, together with all other rights, interests and assets that from time to time secure the Notes and the Guarantees (as defined below), the “Collateral”).

Under the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders will

BD-#27827850-v10 41

receive proceeds from enforcement of the Collateral on a pro rata basis with the Senior Lenders and the Hedge Counterparties in respect of obligations owed to them under the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement, respectively. See “Description of Other Indebtedness—Intercreditor Agreement.”

The First Ranking Security Interests may be limited by applicable law or subject to certain defenses that may limit its validity and enforceability. The Collateral will not include a security interest in the shares of the Issuer. See “Risk Factors—Risks relating to the Notes, the Guarantees, our Indebtedness and the Structure — You will not have a security interest in certain assets, including the shares of the Issuer, and you may be prevented from selling our business as a going concern.”.

Security SPV ...... Due to South African law governing the creation and perfection of security interests, the security interests in the Collateral have not been granted directly to the Holders, but are granted only in favour of a special purpose vehicle formed under the laws of South Africa, the Security SPV, on an equal and rateable basis for the benefit of the Notes, the Senior Lenders and the Hedge Counterparties. The Security SPV guarantees each of the foregoing and is indemnified by us in respect of such guarantee, which indemnity is secured by the Collateral.

The Trustee is not entitled to take any enforcement action with respect to the security interests in our assets other than through the guarantee from the Security SPV. The Security SPV is instructed exclusively in this regard by the Trustee.

Intercreditor Agreement ...... Each Holder, by accepting a Note, is deemed to have agreed to and be bound by the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement. The Trust Deed is subject to the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, including, subject to certain exceptions, payment blockage, standstill and turnover provisions, and the rights and benefits of the Holders are limited accordingly and subject to the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement. In addition, the Issuer’s obligations in respect of the Notes may be released in certain circumstances. See “Description of Other Indebtedness—Intercreditor Agreement”.

Optional Redemption ...... The Notes are redeemable at the Issuer’s option, in whole or in part, at any time prior to the Maturity Date, at 100% of their principal amount, with any accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Amounts, if any, to (but excluding) the date of redemption.

Additional Amounts; Tax Redemption ...... All payments in respect of the Notes will be made without withholding or deduction for any taxes or other governmental charges, except to the extent required by law. If withholding or deduction is required by law, subject to certain exceptions, we pay additional amounts (“Additional Amounts”) so that the net amount you receive is no less than that you would have received in the absence of such withholding or deduction.

If certain changes in the law of any relevant taxing jurisdiction become effective that would impose withholding taxes or other deductions on the payments on the Notes, we may redeem the Notes in whole, but not in part, at any time, at a redemption price of 100% of the principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, and Additional Amounts, if any, to the date of redemption.

Certain Covenants ...... The trust deed governing the Notes (the “Trust Deed”) limit the

BD-#27827850-v10 42

Issuer ability to, among other things:

• incur or guarantee additional debt if certain financial ratios are not satisfied;

• create or incur liens; and

• make certain restricted payments in respect of the common share capital of Cell C, including dividends or other distributions.

Each of the covenants is subject to a number of important exceptions and qualifications. See “Terms and Conditions of the Notes.”

Listing and admission to trading ...... There is currently no public market for the Notes. Application has been made to have the Notes admitted to the Official List of the Irish Stock Exchange and to trading on the Global Exchange Market. The Global Exchange Market is not a regulated market pursuant to the provisions of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (Directive 2004/39/EC). There is no assurance that the Notes will be listed and admitted to trade on the Global Exchange Market.

Ratings ...... As of the date of these Listing Particulars, the Notes have been rated B and Caa1 by S&P and Moody’s respectively. Each of S&P and Moody’s is established in the EU and is registered under the CRA Regulation. A credit rating is not a recommendation to buy, sell or hold securiites and may be subject to revision, suspension or withdrawal at any time by the assigning rating agency.

Selling and transfer restrictions ...... The Notes and the Guarantees have not been, and will not be, registered under the Securities Act or the securities laws of any other jurisdiction. The Notes are subject to restrictions on transfer and resale. For a description of certain restrictions on transfers of the Notes, see “Notices to Investors” and “Transfer Restrictions.”

No prior market ...... The Notes are new securities for which there is no existing market. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to the Notes, the Guarantees, our Indebtedness and the Structure—There may not be an active public trading market for the Notes an active trading market for the Notes may not develop.”

Governing Law ...... The Trust Deed, the Notes and the Guarantees are governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales.

The security agreements in respect of the Collateral are governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

The Intercreditor Agreement is governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales.

Trustee ...... BNY Mellon Corporate Trustee Services Limited.

Paying Agent ...... The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch.

Transfer Agent ...... The Bank of New York Mellon SA/NV, Luxembourg Branch

Registrar ...... The Bank of New York Mellon SA/NV, Luxembourg Branch.

Listing Agent ...... Arthur Cox Listing Services Limited.

BD-#27827850-v10 43

Risk Factors ...... Investing in the Notes involves substantial risks. You should carefully consider all the information in these Listing Particulars, and, in particular, you should evaluate the specific risk factors set forth in the “Risk Factors” section in these Listing Particulars before making a decision whether to invest in the Notes.

BD-#27827850-v10 44

Summary Historical Financial and Operating Data

The tables below present our summary historical financial data as at and for the years ended December 31, 2016, 2015, 2014 and 2013. The summary historical financial data are derived from, should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified in their entirety by reference to, our Financial Statements. We also present below certain pro forma financial information giving effect to the Cell C Recapitalization. See “Presentation of Financial and Other Information” for further details.

You should read the summary financial data presented below in conjunction with the information contained in the “Presentation of Financial and Other Information,” “Risk Factors” and “Capitalization”

Currency is in millions of rand, unless otherwise indicated.

Consolidated Income Statement Data for the Group

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Revenue ...... 14,646 13,228 11,634 11,502 Other income ...... 247 243 144 1,394 Operating expenses ...... (13,541) (13,016) (12,491) (13,119)

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets ...... 17 (380) (576) (67)

Profit/(Loss) before equity accounted earnings, net finance cost and tax ...... 1,336 75 (1,289) (290) Finance income ...... 3,102 774 526 245 Finance costs ...... (3,897) (6,493) (3,170) (3,434) Share of gains/(loss) of investment in joint ventures ...... (72) 149 110 (59) Profit/(loss) before tax ...... 541 (5,644) (3,823) (3,538) Tax income/(charge) ...... 0 - (1,044) -

Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive profit/(loss) for the period ...... 541 (5,644) (4,867) (3,538)

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data for the Group

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Cash and cash equivalents(1) ...... 279 776 1,249 632 Total current assets ...... 4,118 4,660 5,712 5,978 Total assets ...... 15,762 14,903 15,476 16,006 Total liabilities (including obligations under finance 27,450 leases) ...... 27,131 22,117 19,849 Total equity ...... (11,687) (12,228) (6,642) (3,843)

(1) Restricted cash (which relates to short term cash balances blocked for guarantees for handset purchases and lease agreements) amounting to R39,451 as at December 31, 2013 was presented in 2013 under “cash and cash equivalents.”

Statement of Cash Flow Data for the Group

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

BD-#27827850-v10 45

(R in millions)

Net cash from/(used in) operating activities ...... 3,993 2,471 1,482 (1,841) Net cash used in investing activities ...... (2,627) (2,442) (2,157) (1,966)

Net cash (utilized)/generated by financing activities .... (1,863) (502) 1,292 3,774

Other Financial Information (unaudited) for the Group

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (unaudited) (R in millions other than ratios) EBITDA(1) ...... 3,106 1,948 424 846 EBITDA margin(2) ...... 21.2% 14.7% 3.6% 7.4% Adjusted EBITDA(3) ...... 3,031 1,844 352 (666) Capital expenditures(4) ...... 2,855 2,559 2,215 2,264

Capital expenditures margin(5) ...... 19.5% 19.6% 19.0% 19.7% Operating free cash flow(6) ...... 251 (401) (1,739) (1,417) Total Debt(7) ...... 17,867 19,093 13,485 12,232 Net Debt(8)...... 17,588 18,317 12,236 11,600 Pro Forma Net Debt(9) ...... 6,000 - - -

Pro Forma Cash Interest Expense ...... 1,064 - - - Ratio of Pro Forma Net Debt to EBITDA ...... 1.93 - - -

Ratio of EBITDA to Pro Forma Cash Interest Expense ...... 2.92 - - - Finance lease liabilities (audited; period end)(10) ...... 1,644 1,437 1,395 1,318

(1) We define EBITDA as (loss)/profit for the period, before net foreign exchange (losses)/gains, finance costs (which includes interest expense and other financial expenses), share of (loss)/profit from equity accounted joint ventures, income tax expense, depreciation and amortization, and impairment charges. EBITDA is not a recognized term under IFRS and does not purport to be an alternative to operating income or cash flow from operations or an indicator of operating and financial performance. We believe that EBITDA is a relevant measure for assessing operating performance because it eliminates variations caused by the effects of differences in taxation, the amounts and types of capital employed and amortization policies and is intended to help investors evaluate the performance of our underlying businesses. Because companies do not calculate EBITDA identically, the presentation of EBITDA may not be comparable to similarly titled measures of other companies. See “Presentation of Financial and Other Information—Non-IFRS Financial Measures.” The following table provides a reconciliation of our IFRS (loss)/profit to EBITDA for the periods indicated.

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Profit/(Loss) for the period ...... 540 (5,644) (4,867) (3,538) Income tax expense ...... - - 1,044 - Net foreign exchange (gains)/losses ...... (2,203) 3,593 1,361 2,309 Finance costs ...... 2,998 2,126 1,281 879 Share of (profit)/loss from equity accounted joint - ventures ...... 0 (110) 59 Depreciation and amortization...... 1,754 1,493 1,138 1,070 Impairment ...... 17 380 576 67 EBITDA (unaudited) ...... 3,106 1,948 424 846

(2) EBITDA margin represents EBITDA as a percentage of revenue.

(3) We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted for non-operational items, whether exceptional or recurring in nature, which adjustments, for the periods indicated, include deferred revenue, profit from the sale of BTSs to ATC and vendor credits.

BD-#27827850-v10 46

Adjusted EBITDA is not a recognized term under IFRS and does not purport to be an alternative to operating income or cash flow from operations or an indicator of operating and financial performance. We believe that Adjusted EBITDA is a relevant measure for assessing operating performance because it eliminates variations caused by the effects of non-operational items, whether exceptional or recurring in nature, and is intended to help investors evaluate the performance of our underlying businesses. The Adjusted EBITDA measure presented in these Listing Particulars is unlikely to be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other companies. See “Presentation of Financial and Other Information—Non-IFRS Financial Measures.” The following table provides a reconciliation of our EBITDA to Adjusted EBITDA for the periods indicated.

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (unaudited) (R in millions) EBITDA ...... 3,106 1,948 424 846 Vendor Credits(a) ...... (75) (104) - (1,105) Deferred Revenue(b) ...... - (72) (261) Profit on disposal of BTSs to ATC(c) ...... - - (146) Adjusted EBITDA ...... 3,031 1,844 352 (666)

(a) Reflects credits provided to us by various network infrastructure vendors due to their underperformance or failure to perform under the relevant supply arrangements, which credits were recognized as revenue.

(b) Management reconsidered the appropriateness of the recognition of deferred revenue of vouchers that are never utilized by customers (breakage), given the high levels of unearned revenue compared to industry standards, as well as, changes to legislation (enactment of the CPA) where vouchers have no expiration date. It was therefore assessed that breakage would be recognized based on a percentage of voucher sales, and the corresponding unearned revenue would be adjusted to align to industry norms; R261 million of unearned revenue was released in 2013 and R72 million was released in 2014 as a result of this reassessment.

(c) Reflects non-recurring profit generated on the disposal of BTSs to ATC in 2013.

(4) Capital expenditures represent expenditures for the purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles.

(5) Capital expenditures margin represents capital expenditures as a percentage of our revenue.

(6) Operating free cash flow represents EBITDA minus capital expenditures.

(7) Total Debt represents our outstanding current and non-current loans and borrowings (including accrued and unpaid interest and prepaid upfront fees), but does not include our obligations under finance leases (including the interest component).

(8) Net Debt represents Total Debt, minus our cash and cash equivalents (including restricted and unrestricted cash).

(9) Pro Forma Net Debt represents Net Debt, adjusted to give effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016. See “Capitalization” for further information about our Total Debt and adjustments thereto. The following table provides a reconciliation of our Total Debt and Net Debt to Pro Forma Net Debt as at December 31, 2016.

As at December 31, As at December 31, 2016 2016 (unaudited) ($ in millions) (R in millions) Total Debt ...... 1,300 17,867 Cash and cash equivalents ...... (20) (279) Net Debt ...... 1,280 17,588 Offering ...... 174 2,474

Capitalized finance costs - borrowings ...... - - Cash and cash equivalents (pro forma) ...... (7) (100) Settlement of existing Cell C debt ...... (836) (13,962) Pro Forma Net Debt ...... 437 6,000

(10) Finance lease liabilities represent our obligations under finance lease contracts for the acquisition of network equipment and buildings (including the interest portion), based on the present value of payments as at the relevant date.

BD-#27827850-v10 47

Summary Statistical and Operating Data (unaudited)

For information as to how we define and calculate our statistical and operating data, see “Presentation of Financial and Other Information—Key Performance Indicators.”

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

Active mobile subscribers(1) Prepaid ...... 11,987,133 10,060,305 8,834,168 7,311,695 Postpaid ...... 493,756 488,542 524,082 507,801 Hybrid ...... 920,859 1,006,677 1,059,514 1,190,211 Broadband ...... 621,687 622,147 391,466 290,829 Total active mobile subscribers(2) ...... 14,023,435 12,177,671 10,809,230 9,300,536 Wholesale subscribers ...... 1,372,283 722,427 475,551 444,035

(1) Does not include wholesale subscribers.

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

Core prepaid subscribers ...... 6,329,362 5,534,680 5,012,074 4,425,229

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

Net additions Prepaid ...... 1,926,828 1,226,137 1,522,473 1,966,960 Postpaid ...... 5,214 (35,540) 16,281 62,169 Hybrid ...... (85,818) (52,837) (130,697) 97,128 Broadband ...... (460) 230,681 100,637 61,290 Wholesale ...... 649,856 246,876 31,516 37,066 Total ...... 2,495,620 1,615,317 1,540,210 2,224,613

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

Core net prepaid additions ...... 794,682 522,606 586,845 1,260,934

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013

Gross additions ...... 14,936,389 11,546,996 9,001,702 6,863,763

BD-#27827850-v10 48

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (%) Churn Prepaid ...... 99.7 95.2 78.3 64.7 Postpaid ...... 47.0 29.2 27.5 27.5 Hybrid ...... 34.3 24.1 34.7 23.6 Contract broadband ...... 29.8 35.7 27.0 17.2 Prepaid broadband 124 106.8 104.6 77.7 Total broadband ...... 81.2 82.1 70.4 52.9 Blended churn ...... 90.4 85.3 70.6 56.2

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (rand) ARPU Prepaid ...... 57.97 61.99 63.34 72.08 Postpaid ...... 301.80 282.34 284.37 319.45 Hybrid ...... 143.40 139.12 128.92 126.24 Broadband ...... 68.36 69.98 99.48 82.86 Blended ARPU ...... 75.89 78.38 82.74 95.21 Core Prepaid ARPU ...... 108.24 113.89 109.66 119.96

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (rand) ASPU Prepaid ...... 52.85 54.88 53.06 61.07 Postpaid ...... 284.83 260.73 254.22 289.12 Hybrid ...... 134.11 127.52 114.07 110.51 Broadband ...... 66.89 68.05 97.22 81.96 Blended ASPU ...... 70.03 70.53 71.25 82.70 Core Postpaid ASPU ...... 98.69 100.84 91.89 101.57

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (minutes) MoU (voice) Prepaid ...... 60.37 71.98 87.14 95.79 Postpaid ...... 198.03 203.1 216.6 204.3 Hybrid ...... 102.91 108.7 102.8 87.7 Broadband ...... 14.46 14.88 9.26 6.36 Total ...... 68.07 77.85 92.44 97.87

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (megabytes) Data MBs Prepaid ...... 234.87 159.55 107.93 53.45 Postpaid ...... 689.70 528.55 354.25 155.28 Hybrid ...... 388.31 311.94 209.12 81.33 Broadband ...... 1 397.44 733.83 941.80 1 034.87 Blended data MBs ...... 329.36 214.44 158.99 96.30

BD-#27827850-v10 49

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (minutes and Data MBs) Wholesale traffic ...... 474,191,698 216,924,021 214,227,346 8,055,254 (1)

(1) Does not include data traffic as we were unable to track this data via our MVNOs in 2013. Wholesale data traffic for 2013 was included within our data MBs for 2013.

BD-#27827850-v10 50

RISK FACTORS

An investment in the Notes involves certain risks and uncertainties. Prior to making a decision whether to invest in Notes, you should carefully consider all of the information in these Listing Particulars and, in particular, the following factors, risks and uncertainties associated with any such investment, our business, strategy and the industry in which we operate, together with all other information contained in these Listing Particulars, including, in particular, the risk factors described below as well as your own financial circumstances and investment objectives. Any of the risk factors could impact our business, financial condition or results of operations. The market price of the Notes could decline if one or more of these risks and uncertainties develop into actual events. You may lose all or part of your investment. We believe that the factors described below represent the principal risks inherent in investing in the Notes, but make no representation that the statements below regarding the risks of holding any Notes are exhaustive.

These Listing Particulars also contain forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause our actual results or outcomes to differ materially from those expressed in any such forward-looking statements, as a result of any factor or combination of factors, including but not limited to the risks we face as described below and elsewhere in these Listing Particulars. For more information about forward-looking statements, see “Cautionary Note on Forward-Looking Statements.”

Risks relating to our business and industry

We have a history of substantial losses and may be unable to grow our revenue or improve our profitability in the future.

We have incurred substantial losses since our inception. We reported net losses in 2013, 2014 and 2015 of R3,538 million, R4,867 million and R5,644 million, respectively. For the year ended 31 December, 2016, we reported a net profit of R541 million. While we were nominally EBITDA positive during these periods (reporting EBITDA of R846 million, R424 million, R1,948 million and R3,106 million in 2013, 2014, 2015 and 2016 respectively), our substantial foreign-currency denominated debt burden, together with depreciation and amortization, led to our historical reported net loss figures. Our growth strategies (discussed below) are designed to increase revenue and improve profitability, and the Cell C Recapitalization has strengthened our balance sheet and improved our operating cash flow as well as profitability. Nonetheless, we may be unable to achieve our growth targets, which would have a corresponding adverse effect on revenue, and/or we may be unable to maintain at current levels, let alone reduce, our cost base, due to capital expenditure requirements, debt service requirements, failure to achieve operational efficiencies and synergies or otherwise, and as a result may continue to report net losses, which could be substantial.

On 7 August 2017, Standard and Poor’s Global Ratings (“S&P”), following the completion of the restructuring, raised its long-term corporate credit rating of Cell C from D to B-. The outlook is negative. At the same time, S&P assigned a B rating to the Notes. The Recovery Rating on the Notes is “2”, reflecting S&P’s expectation of a substantial recovery rate (70-90%). Further, on 7 August 2017, Moody’s Investors Services issued a new ratings notice, noting that the restructuring undertaken by Cell C should be viewed as a distressed exchange and affirmed its Caa1 corporate rating, which was however upgraded to a positive outlook.

The independent auditor’s report in respect of the 2016 Financial Statements and the 2015 Financial Statements contain an emphasis of matter in relation to the Issuer’s ability to continue as a going concern, and should be assessed in conjunction with the financial information disclosed in these Listing Particulars

The auditor’s reports in respect of the 2016 Financial Statements (“2016 Auditor’s Report”) and the 2015 Financial Statements both contain an emphasis of matter. The emphases of matters stated that, should the Cell C Recapitalization not be implemented, there would be material uncertainty as to whether the Issuer could continue as a going concern. At the time the 2016 Auditor’s Report was being prepared, the Issuer was in the process of finalising the terms of the umbrella agreement in respect of the Cell C Recapitalization. The Cell C Recapitalization has since been finalised and was implemented on the Closing Date. As such, the 2016 Financial Statements and 2015 Financial statements should be assessed in conjunction with the disclosure on certain financial information set out in these Listing Particulars. (See “The Cell C Recapitalization”; “Presentation of Financial and Other Information” and “Selected Consolidated Historical Financial Information” for further information).

BD-#27827850-v10 51

In the past we have sought and obtained equity injections from our shareholder, OTL. We may not receive future equity injections from our new shareholders, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

Over time, we have benefitted from significant equity injections from OTL. Most recently, R2.6 billion was injected in 2013 and R2 billion in 2014, to complement incremental debt funding in local and foreign currency in 2013 and 2014. Pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization, Blue Label and Net1 have injected new equity, amounting to, in aggregate, approximately R16.3 billion which includes the benefit from the discharge of certain financial indebtedness, by way of an upliftment of such financial indebtedness to SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3, for an aggregate amount of the equivalent of R8.8 billion. The proceeds of such equity injections have been used partially repay our existing debt facilities and settle our existing hedging agreements. Following the Cell C Recapitalization, OTL has reduced its benefit interest in us, and if we are unable to generate sufficient cash flow to meet our business plan and to meet our financial obligations as they fall due, we may be unable to obtain further equity injections.

If we are unable to deploy new or enhanced technologies or timely fund capital investments to meet our significant capital expenditure requirements, our business could be adversely affected. We intend to participate in an upcoming auction for spectrum and if we were awarded any frequencies in this auction, our capital expenditures would increase.

We operate in a capital-intensive industry that requires significant amounts of capital to fund operations, acquire network equipment, and maintain, expand and upgrade our network infrastructure. Maintaining uninterrupted and high-quality service over our network infrastructure is critical to attract and retain customers, particularly high-value customers in our postpaid segment.

Our industry is also technology-intensive by nature, characterized by rapidly changing technology with related changes in customer demands for new products and services at competitive prices. Our ability to maintain and grow market share depends to a large extent on our ability to successfully introduce and market new products and services (whether variants of existing, or newly developed, products and services). Many of the products and services offered by us are technology-intensive and accordingly, investment in new infrastructure and technologies is required to remain competitive. In particular, we expect certain communication technologies that have recently been developed or are currently under development, namely LTE and LTE-Advanced (of which we commenced rollout in 2015 and 2016, respectively), to become increasingly important in our market, particularly with the anticipated further growth in demand for data services.

Providing a competitive service level depends, to a large extent, on our ability to maintain and upgrade our network in a cost-effective and timely manner, while delivering the coverage, quality and speeds that customers expect. We may also require significant amounts of capital to invest in license and spectrum rights, including any additional spectrum rights. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating (see “Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.”). If we were awarded any additional frequencies, our capital expenditures relating to the license costs and deployment costs to meet the associated investment requirements (such as to meet any coverage obligations that may be imposed by ICASA) could be substantial. However, it is uncertain at this point what the process will entail, when it will be carried out and what the implications will be for us.

We have undertaken significant capital expenditure since 2010 (R11.6 billion between 2010 and December 31, 2016) and we expect to continue the historical levels of capital expenditures (though we expect these to reflect a smaller percentage of revenue as a result of our targeted revenue growth), for our network, fibre, LTE and LTE- Advanced and fixed-line rollout programs and upgrades. The deployment of new products and services and investments in additional technologies may also require substantial expenditures and commitment of human resources. If, for example, subscribers use more data in the future than we currently anticipate, we may require greater capital investments in shorter time frames than we anticipate and we may not have the capital to make such investments. In addition, in order to position ourselves for future growth in the fixed broadband market, we have targeted new investments in our network to allow for the launch of our FTTH offering, C-Fibre, which offers fixed broadband services over FTTx connections. As at December 31, 2016, we have approved R2.6 billion for capital expenditure during 2017, which includes the amounts committed as at December 31, 2016, though we expect to incur lower expenditures of between R2 billion and R3 billion in 2017. We have historically funded our capital expenditures through a combination of cash flows, equity contributions from OTL, and debt funding and we aim to finance current and future capital expenditures through a combination of cash flows and vendor financing. If our capital expenditure requirements exceed the expectations of

BD-#27827850-v10 52

management, including as a result of exchange rate fluctuations, we may be required to seek additional external financing, which may include supplier credit, bank financing and/or further debt offerings, to fund our capital and other expenditures, including any potential acquisitions, spectrum licenses, working capital and debt service requirements.

Our ability to replace vendor financing with long-term financing and/or to obtain additional financing on favourable commercial terms will depend on a number of factors, including our financial condition, the condition of the local economy, the mobile telecommunications industry in South Africa, the cost of financing and conditions in financial markets. In particular, disruptions experienced in the international capital markets at certain times in the past several years have led to periods of reduced liquidity and increased credit risk premiums for certain market participants and have resulted in a reduction of available financing. Furthermore, companies located in emerging markets, such as South Africa, may be particularly susceptible to disruptions and reductions in the availability of credit or increases in financing costs. If we are, for any reason, unable to obtain adequate funding as required, we may need to limit our network improvement and expansion plans.

Failure to generate sufficient cash flow to meet our capital expenditure commitments and/or failure to secure funding for our capital expenditures, on commercially acceptable terms, could jeopardise our expansion plans and harm our competitive position. As a result, we could lose customers, fail to attract new customers or incur substantial acquisition and retention costs, which could disrupt our business operations and could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We may not accurately forecast demand for our products and/or services or achieve the revenue growth anticipated by management in connection with our capital expenditures and, as a result, we may have excess resources or suffer from resource shortages.

The level of resources required in our business is sensitive to changes in the actual demand for our services compared to forecasts of such demand. Accurate forecasting of demand in volatile and dynamic telecommunications sectors can be very difficult, particularly in times of rapidly changing economic conditions and uncertain consumer demand. In addition, due to the rapid evolution of technology, we may be unable to correctly predict and therefore devote appropriate amounts of capital and resources to develop the necessary technologies that satisfy existing subscribers and attract new subscribers. As a result, new or enhanced technologies that we introduce may fail to be developed according to anticipated schedules or perform according to our expectations and may fail to achieve sufficient commercial acceptance or experience technical difficulties. In such circumstances, we may be unable to compete and maintain or grow our existing market share in South Africa. In addition, we may not recover the investments we have made or may make to deploy these technologies and we may be unable to do so in a cost efficient manner, which would also reduce our profitability. To the extent that the products and services we introduce or the technologies that we develop are unsuccessful or fail to meet expectations, we may incur substantial losses and may be required to record impairments in respect of the expenditures incurred.

If widespread demand for our LTE and LTE-Advanced technology in South Africa does not develop as we expect or at all for reasons such as competing technologies or the LTE and LTE-Advanced offerings by our competitors, our future growth and profitability may be materially and adversely affected.

Our future growth and profitability will depend to a large extent on our ability to successfully roll-out and sell mobile broadband services using our LTE and LTE-Advanced technology. We anticipate that our revenue growth and profitability will be driven, to a large extent, by increased usage by our subscribers of this new technology to access data services. If demand for such services does not grow as anticipated in South Africa, we may not be able to generate the rate of revenue and subscriber growth that we expect from our LTE and LTE- Advanced rollout and our growth prospects from the increased use of such technologies may suffer. In addition, if we do not rollout our LTE and LTE-Advanced services on a scale comparable with that of our competitors, we may not be able to effectively compete with other mobile network operators in South Africa who offer these services.

Demand for LTE and LTE-Advanced services may also be impacted if alternative technologies offer equivalent or better services, or similar services for a lower price. For example, various telecommunications network operators, including converged telecommunications network operators are providing customers with access to the Internet via LTE and LTE-Advanced technologies and expanding their footprint of LTE and other wireless access technologies. In addition, while fixed-line infrastructure is largely underdeveloped in South Africa, we may face increasing competition from fixed-line services, including fixed-line broadband, in the future, if other operators were to develop such infrastructure more quickly and efficiently. This could adversely impact our

BD-#27827850-v10 53

position in the broadband market and the fixed-line market if we are unable to adapt in a timely manner, or at all. Increasing usage of fixed-line services (in particular fixed-line broadband) may decrease our ability to grow our mobile broadband business, may lead us to lose subscribers and may lead to a decrease in the services that we are able to offer on our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

If we are unsuccessful in implementing our growth strategy, we may be unable to fulfil our obligations with respect to our indebtedness, including the Notes.

We seek to enhance revenue and cash flows by strengthening our position in the South African mobile communications market and focusing on profitable growth opportunities. We aim to significantly increase our share of the market through strong subscriber growth and stable ARPUs, and to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies to improve our profitability. To achieve our objectives, we intend to improve the quality, capacity, speeds and coverage of our network, expand our network to offer FTTH services, increase our focus on higher margin segments and our data offering, optimise our distribution channel and strategic relationships with operators of OTT services and MVNOs in particular, implement initiatives to encourage customer retention and improved customer experience and focus on maintaining and achieving further cost savings and operational efficiencies. We believe that certain segments of the mobile communications market in South Africa are largely saturated in terms of users and that increasing our market share will necessarily involve churning customers away from our competitors.

The success of our growth strategy depends, to a large extent, on the stability, quality, capacity, coverage and scope of our network. Our ability to reduce network-related service complaints, reduce churn and change consumer perception of our network quality (particularly in the high-value postpaid segment, in which we have historically suffered significant churn due to adverse customer experiences with our network), as well as our ability to capitalise on the anticipated growth in demand for data services, will depend upon the success of our initiatives, including the rollout of new technological advances that are well received by our customers.

We expect that data services will be an important source of future growth, and we expect this to more than offset an anticipated slowdown in new subscriptions and a decline in consumption of voice and SMS services. We anticipate demand for data services in South Africa to continue to grow, driven by the increasing popularity in of internet-based services, including online commerce, social networks, news content and entertainment, as well as the availability of affordable consumer devices (including smartphones and tablets), together with mobile content and applications. The success of our growth strategy will therefore depend on our ability to effectively implement various initiatives, including offering and marketing new products and services and improving on existing products and services that address customer demand, achieving price sustainability for data, introducing entry level data-enabled devices, and offering smartphones and non-handset devices ranges, as well as capitalizing on fixed line and fixed mobile substitution trends. In addition, we expect that offering higher data speeds and larger data packages will need to be accompanied by lower unit prices to customers, including in the postpaid segment, requiring us to adapt to a new business model characterized by lower margins with a corresponding need to increase volumes. If demand for data services in South Africa does not continue to grow, at the anticipated rate of growth, or at all, this will adversely affect our results of operations.

We intend to further optimise our distribution channels, including our distribution relationship with Blue Label and the optimization of our retail channel, to increase the sale and visibility of all of our offerings. Our success in implementing our optimization of our distribution channels could be affected by a number of factors beyond our control, including:

• operating difficulties or constraints; • delays in implementing capital expenditure programmes and other initiatives; • difficulties in obtaining financing to fund our capital expenditure, working capital or other business needs, or in refinancing debt as it matures; • changes in consumer preferences, which may reduce our ability to attract new customers or retain existing ones; • increased competition from existing competitors or from new market entrants; • general reduction in market prices for services not balanced by a corresponding increase in usage; • national roaming costs, which could increase our costs; • general economic, demographic or industry conditions; or • other factors that we may not be able to anticipate.

BD-#27827850-v10 54

If we are unsuccessful in implementing our growth strategy, in a timely and cost-efficient manner, or at all, we may be unable to maintain our cash flows or become profitable and, accordingly, may be unable to fulfil our obligations with respect to our indebtedness, including the Notes.

As part of our efforts to increase profitability we may be unsuccessful in reducing costs.

Our ability to achieve profitability will depend as much on the cost side as the revenue side. We will seek to achieve and maintain further cost savings and operational efficiencies in our business, in an effort to increase our operating margins. Given the aggressive pricing competition in our industry, we have shifted our strategy to focus on improving operational efficiencies as opposed to aggressive pricing against our competitors. Our success will largely depend on our ability to reduce our variable costs and, to a lesser extent, our fixed costs, by rationalizing our network expenditures (including via renegotiation of existing contracts), continuing to rationalise under-performing BTSs and decommissioning such sites, reducing site rental and maintenance costs, renegotiating roaming costs, further rationalizing our incentivization programme in our distribution channels, reducing our dependence on the share of our sales to which commissions apply, controlling our subscriber acquisition costs (“SAC”) and reducing our bad debt. We also intend to proactively engage with our regulators when they revisit wholesale rates, and will continue to engage with ICASA to push for continued asymmetry, as one of several pro-competitive measures, but we cannot guarantee such efforts will be successful.

In addition, as part of our efforts to increase profitability, we may consider suitable arrangements such as passive infrastructure sharing with other operators, to target cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we are permitted to do so in the future, active network infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in more significant cost savings and operational efficiencies. However, should we be unable to participate in such arrangements, due to regulatory restrictions or otherwise, we may be unsuccessful in reducing costs.

If we are unable to realise anticipated cost savings and/or operational efficiencies, and/or if our operational expenses were to increase due to factors beyond our control, this would have a material adverse effect on our profitability. Should our revenue growth not meet our expectations, we may need to scale back on our network capital expenditures in the medium-term.

We have experienced and may continue to experience a high rate of churn, which could adversely impact our business.

Mobile network operators, including us, experience varying rates of customer disconnections or suspensions of service, also known as “churn.” Customers change or leave mobile network operators on the basis of, or at least on the basis of perceptions of, call quality, coverage area, service offerings, handset and plan pricing, attractive promotions, availability and accessibility of products and services and customer service. A significant number of customers purchase services from two or more mobile operators, switching usage at a later point to what they perceive is a more affordable product and service and/or on the basis of call quality and coverage area.

Churn is a significant factor in income and profitability for our industry. Our churn rate historically has been significantly higher than that of our competitors. As at December 31, 2013, 2014, 2015 and 2016, our blended churn rate was 56.2%, 70.6%, 85.3% and 90.4%, respectively. As at December 31, 2016, approximately 87% of our active mobile subscribers were prepaid, 5% were postpaid and 8% were hybrid subscribers. Although prepaid customers generate bulk traffic, high unit profit margins and do not incur bad debt, the non-contractual customer relationship and corresponding higher churn levels reduce fixed annuity income to cover fixed costs. If we are unable to retain prepaid customers or successfully increase the number of our postpaid customers and hybrid customers relative to prepaid customers, we may continue to experience a greater degree of churn than our competitors. In addition, our growth strategy depends in part on our ability to reduce churn in higher margin segments such as the postpaid segment.

As part of our initiatives to reduce our churn rate, we entered into the Handset Financing Arrangement in 2015, which has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets and offer higher value handsets, increasing net additions in contract subscribers. We also launched our buy out offering in 2015, offering to buy out existing contracts of subscribers from Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, paying up to R20,000 to customers towards the costs of cancelling their contract, which has contributed to an increase in net additions in this segment. There can be no assurance that these arrangements will be available or commercially feasible for us to undertake in the future, and we may not be able to recover all of our upfront customer acquisition costs.

BD-#27827850-v10 55

We believe that further growth of our business in the maturing South African market, in terms of penetration rates, will be driven primarily by our ability to increase existing subscriber usage, continue to convince subscribers to switch from competing operators to our services and to limit rates of subscriber churn. While we plan to implement various initiatives to manage both voluntary and involuntary churn going forward, our initiatives to reduce churn may not achieve the desired effect or be sufficient to retain our existing customers or retain future customers. As such, we may be unable to increase subscriber loyalty or maintain our current churn rate. In addition, if we fail to successfully offer appealing and differentiated products and services ahead of, or no later than, our competitors, we may experience increased churn rates. A high rate of churn may have a material adverse effect on our business, prospects, results of operations and financial condition through loss of revenue and high costs of acquiring new customers, which generally include a connection bonus and/or a handset subsidy. If we are unable to successfully manage our churn, we may need to rapidly reduce our costs in order to preserve our margins or take alternative measures that would increase our SACs/SRCs which could, in turn, result in a decrease in our cash flows.

There is intense competition for mobile communications services in South Africa, which may result in lower ARPU, increased churn or a decrease in our market share.

We operate in the highly competitive market for mobile communications services in South Africa and face strong competition for subscribers from established competitors. The South African mobile network telecommunications market is concentrated among four operators – Vodacom, which is owned by Vodafone Group Plc; MTN, which is owned by MTN Group Limited; Telkom SA (which operates Telkom, formerly Telkom); and us. As at December 31, 2016, Vodacom, MTN, Telkom and we had an estimated 44.6%, 35%, 4.3% and 16% market share of the total South African active mobile subscriber base of 88 million, respectively, based on our estimates and reported numbers, and an estimated 50.7%, 33.1%, 4.6% and 11.6% service revenue market share based on total service revenue of approximately R97 billion as at December 31, 2016. Competitors such as Vodacom and MTN have significant market presence, operating capabilities and other resources that are substantially greater than our own. To the extent we were to lose market share to any of these competitors, our revenue may decline.

Our ability to compete effectively is largely dependent on our ability to successfully adapt and respond to changing technologies, improve our brand image, anticipate customer demand for products and services and respond to various competitive factors affecting our market segments, such as the introduction by competitors of new products and services, new value added services (for example, content download, mobile TV and location- based services) and offerings geared towards SMEs, customer loyalty trends, demographic trends, changes in consumer preferences and general economic, political and social conditions. Our ability to complete is also dependent on our distribution partners’ ability to compete. Our competitors may introduce products and services before we do, more successfully penetrate attractive market segments (for example, postpaid and business customers), offer products and services on better terms (including by offering what is perceived by customers as better network quality and better levels of customer service or by lowering their prices to increase market share), and capitalise on economies of scale to improve operational efficiencies and achieve cost savings (such as sourcing network equipment at cheaper rates than we do due to their global scale). Our inability to compete effectively on the foregoing bases may impact our market share, increase our acquisition and retention costs, cause our growth rates and revenue to decline and net losses to increase, with a consequent material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

In addition, the mobile communications industry is characterized by intense pricing pressure. Our competitors have in the past, and may in the future, adopt aggressive pricing strategies, such as below-cost tariffs, or increasing the commissions and incentives they pay across distribution channels, which could result in a loss of our market share or a reduction of our profit margins should we choose to compete on the basis of such pricing strategies as we have historically done.

Moreover, it is possible that a new mobile network operator could successfully enter the mobile market in South Africa. A new entrant could roll out nationwide infrastructure, although it is more likely that such an entrant would develop and operate a network infrastructure focused on one or more geographical regions and subsequently obtain coverage over the rest of the country by entering into roaming agreements. If any new mobile network operator were to successfully enter the South African mobile market as a major competitor, it could materially reduce our market share and have a corresponding effect on our revenue. Such new mobile network operator may also be granted asymmetrical MTRs, which could adversely affect our results of operations. In addition, a change in the business model of mobile network operators in South Africa or consolidation of operators resulting in joint ventures, new corporate groups or strategic alliances between competing telecommunications providers or the introduction of new types of services, offerings and

BD-#27827850-v10 56

technologies as a result of such cooperation or strategic alliances could have a material adverse effect on us (see “Our operations have been, and may continue to be, materially adversely affected by consolidation or practices that exploit pre-existing positions by our competitors.”).

More generally, we increasingly face competition from new technologies and alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging in South Africa, such as IPTV, VoIP, Wi-Fi, wire-band wireless, converged offers, which provide an alternative to mobile, for both voice and data transmission, which could have an adverse effect on our results of operations. The licensing framework included in the Electronic Communications Act 26 of 2005 of South Africa, which came into effect in July 2006, as amended by the Electronic Communications Amendment Act 1 of 2014, which came into force in May 2014 (the “EC Act”), has resulted in the market becoming more horizontally layered with a number of separate licenses being issued for electronic communications network services, electronic communications services and broadcasting services. This in turn has resulted in increasing competition in our data communications business. Providers of VoIP and OTT services and applications such as Skype, Facebook and WhatsApp are capable of providing mobile-only data users with voice and messaging services, typically at a substantially lower cost than traditional voice and messaging services, and are often offered free of charge, allowing users to have access to potentially unlimited messaging and voice services over the Internet. This may increasingly result in the bypassing of more expensive traditional voice and messaging services, as we are only able to charge for the Internet data required to use such services. Providers of such VoIP and OTT services also benefit from a number of advantages, such as the ability to leverage existing infrastructures (thereby avoiding the need for the capital-intensive business models like ours) to provide users with mobile and video services and landline Internet-only users with fixed retail voice and video services, allowing them to render services at a much lower cost than traditional voice and data services. Should such services continue to increase in popularity, they could cause a decrease in our ARPU and a reduction of our subscriber base across all of our services, other than data traffic. In addition, we expect to face competition in the future from providers of services supported by communication technologies that are currently under development or that will be developed in the future. In addition, following the launch of 3G, LTE and LTE-Advanced networks in South Africa, mobile customers are able to browse the Internet on a broadband platform, which increases competition in data services. The launch of such networks has also created a growth in instant messaging and social media communication, which has decreased and is expected to decrease our revenue derived from SMS and voice communications. Further, our ability to successfully leverage our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks and capitalise on anticipated growth in demand for data services in the medium-to- long term, may be dependent on our ability to compete for future spectrum.

Any of the foregoing may materially adversely impact our growth rates, operating revenue and cash flows.

Our operations have been, and may continue to be, materially adversely affected by consolidation or practices that exploit pre-existing positions by our competitors.

Our competitors may merge or form alliances to capitalise on economies of scale and strengthen their dominant position in the South African market. As competition continues to intensify and given the maturity of the mobile market in South Africa, there have been various attempts among dominant operators over the last few years towards strategic partnership and consolidation, to either acquire or enter into agreements that would improve their access to network infrastructure or create other competitive advantages. This has in the past and may in the future hinder smaller operators, such as us, from gaining market share and may also reduce competition in the market. Concentration of spectrum in the hands of too few operators may result in those operators building scale, introducing services, improving service quality and capturing synergies, lowering prices quicker and more effectively than us, which could adversely affect our competitiveness. Consolidation in the South African mobile market could materially adversely affect our ability to compete, and have a material adverse effect on our market share, our results of operations and financial condition.

We depend on the reliability, quality, capacity and coverage of our network and information systems. If we do not maintain, upgrade and expand our network and information systems in a cost-effective and timely manner, or if we experience system disruption or failure or a breach of security measures, we could lose customers and incur liability.

We are able to deliver services only to the extent that we can protect our network and critical systems and the networks of other operators upon which we rely against damage, disruption, failures, computer viruses and unauthorized access. In the ordinary course of our business, we collect and store sensitive data, including intellectual property, our proprietary business information and that of our customers and business partners, and personally identifiable information of our customers and employees, in our data centres and on our network. The secure processing, maintenance and transmission of this information is critical to our operations and business

BD-#27827850-v10 57

strategy and we are required to comply with applicable regulations, including the Protection of Personal Information (POPI) Act in South Africa, which requires us to conduct ourselves in a responsible manner when collecting, processing, storing and sharing others’ personal information and holding us accountable should we abuse or compromise their personal information. The operation and growth of our network and the implementation of new technologies and services involve operating risks that may disrupt our services and cause unforeseen losses. Like other telecommunications operators, our network and information systems are vulnerable to interruption and damage from security breaches (including cyber-attacks), database piracy, corruption of data, hardware failure, software malfunction, terrorist action, vandalism, power outages, fire, flood or other natural disasters, human error or other factors outside our control, which could result in the leakage and unauthorized dissemination of information about our subscribers. This could materially adversely impact our reputation, prompt lawsuits against us by individual and corporate subscribers, lead to violations of data protection laws and adverse actions by our regulators and other authorities, lead to a loss in subscribers and hinder our ability to attract new subscribers. If severe customer data security breaches are detected, our regulators may impose penalties for violating certain terms of our licenses.

Our network and information systems are also vulnerable to interruption as a result of equipment failures, particularly for ageing equipment. In addition, new technologies or different ways of using existing technologies may place undue stress on the capacity of existing networks. For example, potential exponential take-up of data services may result in saturation of some parts of our network.

Our infrastructure and telecommunications equipment, such as cables and fibre optics, may be subject to theft or intentional destruction and may not be able to withstand a major natural disaster in which emergency response time may be significant (such as the recovery of operations of undersea cables). In such events, prolonged recovery time could be required to resume operations. While we have in place business continuity and disaster recovery plans, including redundant network architecture, contingency equipment and suppliers, and network monitoring and resilience plans, there can be no assurance that such plans and systems will be fully effective in the event that they need to be activated.

Maintaining an uninterrupted and high-quality service and network capacity over the network infrastructure is critical to our ability to attract and retain customers, particularly customers in our postpaid segment. Providing a competitive service level depends in part on our ability to maintain and upgrade our network in a cost-effective and timely manner. See “If we are unable to deploy new or enhanced technologies or timely fund capital investments to meet our significant capital expenditure requirements, our business could be adversely affected. We intend to participate in an upcoming auction for spectrum and if we were awarded any frequencies in this auction, our capital expenditures would increase.” In particular, our BTSs, where our radio equipment is located, are particularly important to our business. With respect to BTSs installed on certain structures, we also require building permits when we construct and install our BTSs, which take some time to obtain, and, if we were unable to obtain these, our installation of BTSs could be delayed or halted. In addition, our permits may be revoked, even after commissioning of our BTSs. Further, part of our network infrastructure is located on the premises of third parties, which means that if this infrastructure were to encounter any disruptions, it may take longer to resolve the problem, which could result in delays to address operational issues.

If we are unable to replace network assets at the end of their useful lives or if we are unable to perform necessary maintenance on network assets, in each case, in a cost-effective and timely manner, or at all, our network may experience disruption and operational failures. The failure or interruption of all or part of our network and/or information systems would restrict our ability to continue to operate at our current performance levels and may result in our inability to provide services, loss of customers and increased churn, the inability to bill our customers for services rendered and potential exposure to claims from customers and distribution channels based on loss of service and billing capabilities, as well as reputational harm, penalties and costly repairs. For example, in 2013 we experienced service performance issues in Gauteng province, which prompted us to allocate R203 million to improve the level of service, including upgrading network equipment. We have also experienced operational issues resulting from the migration of data from our previous billing and customer care system to a Huawei platform. There is no assurance that such issues will not re-appear in the future.

Any future system disruption, failure, accident, force majeure event or security breach that causes interruptions in operations, including due to failures by third party service providers and natural disasters, could impair our ability to provide services to our customers and we may be unable to adequately address any such interruption. To the extent that any such disruption, failure or security breach compromise our network and results in a loss of or damage to customer data or applications, or inappropriate disclosure of confidential information, we may incur liability and reputational damage as a result. We may also incur significant additional costs to remedy the

BD-#27827850-v10 58

damage caused by these disruptions, failures or security breaches. Any insurance maintained to protect against certain of these risks may not be adequate to cover losses suffered, including lost sales or increased expenses.

Any of the foregoing could have a material adverse effect on our business, reputation, financial condition and results of operations.

We are dependent on the effectiveness of our distribution network and strategic alliances, and we are exposed to some level of concentration risk with our distribution partners.

We market our offerings and services primarily through our nationwide distribution network of informal channels. These include super dealers and regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and unique partnerships with select entities, including most significantly, one of our principal indirect shareholders, Blue Label. We also market our offerings and services through our branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises), approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national retail chains, telesales (including our internal inbound and outbound call centres and, to a lesser extent, external call centres), online sales and MVNOs. As at December 31, 2016, we operated only 196 Cell-C branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises). As such, the success of our business is largely dependent on our relationships with our sales and distribution partners and we rely on such partners’ performance of their contracted obligations.

Over time, we have increased our focus on our distribution channels, incentivizing our channel partners to promote our products over those of our competitors. We incentivise our sales partners with a variety of bonus schemes, including connection bonuses, voucher discounts, ongoing revenue share, annual volume rebates, marketing support and handset subsidies. However, these activities may not be sufficient to maintain our existing arrangements with our sales partners and such partners may instead choose to enter into exclusivity agreements with our competitors. Further, due to increased competition with other mobile network operators, we may be forced to increase the commissions we pay to our dealers, expand our distribution network or alter our distribution channels, which could adversely impact our profitability. As part of our growth strategy, we intend to reduce our historical dependence on outsourcing and will seek to further optimise our distribution channels, including our distribution relationship with Blue Label and the optimization of our retail channel. If we are unable to reduce our dependence on outsourcing or efficiently optimise our distribution channels, if our key partners were to face financial difficulties or decide to no longer partner with us, or if their performance is not satisfactory, this could have a material adverse effect on our ability to retain and attract subscribers for our services, our results of operations and profitability.

We rely heavily on our partnership with Blue Label, the largest distributor of prepaid airtime and starter packs in South Africa, for distribution of our airtime vouchers to our prepaid segment. Blue Label contributed significantly to our growth in the prepaid market (80% of our airtime recharges for the year ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them). We expect that our relationship with Blue Label, as one of our shareholders following the Cell C Recapitalization, should further align our interests and facilitate greater revenue growth and operational efficiencies. However, we are nonetheless subject to concentration risk; loss of the business provided through our distribution relationship with Blue Label could have a material adverse effect on our future subscriber growth and results of operations.

In addition, we have formed a number of partnerships and alliances with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook, as well as MVNOs. If we are unable to further align our interests with existing partners, if our key partners were to face financial difficulties if they become subject to regulatory restrictions, if their performance is not satisfactory, or if they choose to partner with our competitors, this could have a material adverse effect on our ability to retain and attract subscribers for our services, our results of operations and profitability. In addition, currently, we are the only mobile network operator that provides services via MVNOs, although certain of our competitors have publicly indicated that they are exploring such opportunities. Should our competitors decide to partner with MVNOs, this may have a material adverse effect on our revenue growth.

We are dependent on certain suppliers, some of whom are our competitors, for network equipment and for the provision of certain core services, and could be adversely affected should any of our suppliers fail to supply equipment at the level of quality we require, fail to perform their obligations under our contracts or increase the prices we pay for equipment and services.

Like all telecommunications operators, we purchase network equipment, including our core switching system, radio network controllers (“RNCs”), base station controllers (“BSCs”), BTSs, transmission equipment and the software required to operate such equipment, as well as certain support activities, from most of the major

BD-#27827850-v10 59

suppliers. As part of our growth initiatives, we have rolled out a significant amount of LTE-Advanced and LTE sites and fibre on our network, and in order to continue to do so we will rely heavily on our suppliers. For example, we have acquired most of our network equipment from ZTE and Huawei, under the terms of our supply agreements and we rely on continued maintenance and supply services rendered by these manufacturers of equipment. Continued operations with these suppliers and other equipment suppliers are important for us to maintain our operations without disruption. Our reliance on these suppliers exposes us to risks related to delays in the delivery of their services. We also rely on agreements with suppliers of handsets and modems and providers of IT services.

We do not have direct operational or financial control over our key suppliers and have limited influence with respect to the manner in which they conduct their businesses. Our results of operations would likely be adversely affected if our suppliers were to fail to provide us with adequate supplies of equipment, including spare parts to maintain our legacy network assets, as well as ongoing maintenance support, and to do so on a timely basis and in accordance with agreed upon terms. If such equipment cannot be obtained from our major suppliers on commercially acceptable terms, on a timely basis or at all, we may need to seek alternative suppliers, or this could cause us to incur additional costs or result in delays in network maintenance or expansion plans. To the extent we are required to source equipment from alternative suppliers, such equipment may not always be compatible with existing equipment or the supplier may fail to integrate the equipment to our satisfaction. We may also be unable to obtain equipment from one or more alternative suppliers. In addition, we may be unable to operate equipment sourced from alternative suppliers, in part because our employees may not be familiar with the technical specifications and maintenance requirements of such equipment or because such equipment may not be compatible with our existing equipment. This could occur if, for example, the growth in demand for more advanced network equipment exceeds the ability of suppliers of such equipment as a whole to meet such demand. Any of the foregoing could result in a disruption of service or unexpected additional costs that could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects.

In addition, we outsource certain support activities to third parties, including certain field maintenance activities in portions of our network and management services in respect of our billing platform. In the event that suppliers fail to deliver contracted activities and services and the service we provide to our customers is interrupted, or in the event that such suppliers increase the prices of their services, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, reputation, financial condition and results of operations. We also may not be able to recover monies paid to such third parties for their services or obtain contractual damages to which we may be entitled in such an event.

We are dependent on roaming agreements and we may be unable to keep pace with changes in the roaming regulatory landscape or negotiate favourable roaming agreements.

We are dependent upon international and national roaming agreements with telecommunications operators to allow such operators’ customers to roam on our network and our customers to roam on their networks, which is particularly important from a costs and infrastructure perspective, given the geography of South Africa. International roaming enables our postpaid subscribers to make and receive calls and SMS, and use GPRS roaming services, when traveling outside South Africa by using the networks of operators with whom we have entered into international roaming agreements. As at December 31, 2016, we had international roaming agreements with approximately 654 mobile network operators in 205 countries. We also currently provide services in South Africa through our own network and through routing calls over Vodacom’s network under the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, which was renegotiated in June 2015 to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) and extend the minimum term until 2020, enabling us to cover parts of South Africa which we are not able to, or do not wish to, provide coverage through our own network (typically because it is relatively more expensive for us to deploy our own network than rely on the roaming agreement due to relatively lower cost of roaming). As at December 31, 2016, we carried approximately 10% of our total traffic (15% of voice traffic and 10% of data traffic) on Vodacom’s network. If Vodacom or other telecommunications operators fail to provide roaming services, our own services would be disrupted. Moreover, under the terms of the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, we are required to make minimum payments to Vodacom, which represents a fixed cost to us. If the volume of traffic or tariff rates are lower than we anticipate, our profit margin may be reduced (while having a fixed cost as a result of the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement), which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

We may in the future enter into roaming agreements with other telecommunications operators, including direct competitors, in order to be able to provide national coverage. It is possible that any of our roaming agreements may be terminated earlier than their scheduled termination date or that the relevant operators may become

BD-#27827850-v10 60

insolvent or go into liquidation. If we are unable to enter roaming alliances or negotiate favourable roaming agreements or renew our existing roaming agreements, on terms that are favourable to us, or at all, this could have a material adverse effect on our revenue and profitability. In the event that this disrupts our network access or coverage in a manner that we cannot resolve through other roaming agreements, we may have to substantially increase our capital expenditures in order to extend our network infrastructure and we may lose subscribers, particularly those high-value customers who we believe rely more heavily on international roaming services. Additionally, we would be adversely affected if such telecommunications operators were to deploy technologies that are incompatible with our network.

Disruptions in our interconnections with other telecommunications networks could create disruptions in our services.

Our network must interconnect with other telecommunications networks for us to be able to offer our services to customers. For example, in order to provide commercially viable mobile services, we must be able to interconnect with the telecommunications networks of existing and future fixed-line and mobile operators in South Africa as well as internationally. We have entered into interconnection agreements with other mobile operators, including Vodacom, MTN and Telkom for mobile services, with Telkom and Ltd (“Neotel”) for fixed-line services, to enable us to provide full geographic coverage in South Africa, and with Telestream and Liquid Telecom for international interconnection. To diversify the providers and minimise the risks of disconnection, we are seeking to enter into further similar agreements in the future with other operators. We cannot control the quality or the investment and maintenance activities that are required for these operators to provide us with interconnection to their networks. Any difficulties or delays in interconnecting with these networks, or failure by one of our contractual partners to fulfil its obligations in a timely fashion, could have a material adverse effect on our business, and results of operations.

Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.

The volume of the traffic and the number of customers on a mobile network is constrained by the amount of spectrum allocated to the operator. The spectrum is a continuous range of frequencies within which the waves have certain specific characteristics. We currently offer mobile data services through GSM, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (“UMTS”) and LTE licenses in South Africa and we currently have access to 76MHz of duplex spectrum, comprising 2x11MHz (900 MHz), 2x12 MHz (1,800 MHz) and 2x15 MHz (2,100 MHz) bands. We also have access to a 7GHz fixed radio frequency spectrum license and 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network. While these licenses enable us to offer GSM-, UMTS- and LTE-based mobile data services today, as technology develops and customer needs change, it may become necessary in the future for us in the medium-to-long term to acquire new licenses to provide us with additional capacity and/or to allow us to use new technology to offer new services.

While we believe that our relative extra spectrum availability (we have the same amount of spectrum as our larger competitors, but with fewer customers, as a result of which we have more spectrum available per customer) enables us to promote data services to capture growing mobile data demand, we may require additional capacity in the medium-to-long term as we expand our range of services and/or use new technology to offer new services.

On July 15, 2016, ICASA issued an invitation to apply (“ITA”) by way of an auction for wireless broadband spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range (the “Spectrum Auction”). This spectrum would allow us to cost-effectively increase capacity on our network, although we do not envisage requiring the spectrum in the short-to-medium-term. As we expand our range of services, we may require additional capacity. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our business and industry – Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.” The Spectrum Auction was challenged by the Minister of Telecommunications and Postal Services (the “TPS Minister”) and us in August 2016 when we both launched urgent review applications in the High Court in South Africa. The applications sought to interdict ICASA from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction (“Part A of the proceedings”) pending the determination by the High Court of the legality of the ITA (“Part B of the proceedings”). Part A of the proceedings was heard by the High Court on September 27 and 28, 2016 and judgment was handed down on September 30, 2016. The TPS Minister and we were successful in our applications and ICASA was interdicted from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction pending a determination of Part B of the proceedings. We expect Part B of the proceedings to be heard by the High Court in the second or third quarters of 2017. On February 9, 2017, ICASA published a notice in the Government Gazette whereby it indefinitely deferred the timeframe for the Spectrum Auction. On October 3, 2016, the TPS Minister issued a National Integrated ICT Policy White

BD-#27827850-v10 61

Paper (“White Paper”) that deals with the issuing of high demand spectrum and does not appear to favour an auction process. ICASA will have to consider any policies contained in the White Paper or any policies or policy directives that flow from the White Paper when it eventually issues the high demand spectrum. Our ability to obtain the additional spectrum may be limited by competition or financial constraints. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating and we would expect to finance the costs associated with this from operating cash flows or through debt and equity financing, which could be substantial.

If due to competition, regulatory hurdles, lack of financing or otherwise, we were unsuccessful in the pursuit of additional spectra and/or licenses for new services or products, or were unable to do so on commercially viable terms, we could find ourselves at a competitive disadvantage, particularly in the longer-term, which would have a material adverse effect on its business, competitive position in the market, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, if we were to fail to make required payments for any spectra that we might acquire in the future, we could lose our right to use the frequencies. Moreover, while we can employ a number of techniques to increase the effective carrying capacity of a given allocation of spectrum, beyond a certain point, we may be required to build additional BTSs and consequently bear the related capital expenditure.

We may record bad debt expenses and recognise less revenue as a result.

There is an inherent risk of non-payment of monthly fees in providing postpaid services, which may reduce our cash flow in any given period. As at December 31, 2016, December 31, 2015, December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, we recorded bad debt expenses of R92.7 million, R174.3 million, R268.8 million and R220.4 million, respectively. Although we have recently undertaken various initiatives to improve debt collections, including revising our management structure, implementing automated collection systems with an integrated dialler system, implementing additional payment channels, credit limits and new retail and telesales vetting scorecards, changing first debit timing and implementing the Handset Financing Arrangement, these measures and efforts may not be successful in limiting our bad debt exposure. Moreover, as we operate in a fairly saturated market, deeper penetration may expose us to an increasing number of less creditworthy customers. If we have a significant number of customers that are unable to pay their bills on time, or at all, this could have an adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

In the event of expiration, non-renewal or termination of our authorizations, licenses or other regulatory approvals, we may be unable to operate our business, in whole or in part.

We conduct our operations under various licenses issued by our South African regulator, ICASA, including a general service and network license, an individual Electronic Communications Network Services (“ECNS”) license, valid until January 2029, an individual Electronic Communications Service (“ECS”) license, valid until January 2029, and spectrum licenses (see “Regulation—Regulatory Framework”). Together with our ECNS and ECS licenses, we received our Individual Radio communications licences in 2009 to use assigned channels in the 900MHz and 1,800MHz bands and thereafter received our Individual Radio Communications license to use assigned channels in the 2,100MHz band. These spectrum licenses were issued under the EC Act and are renewed annually upon the payment of annual spectrum licensing fees. The radio communications licenses contain universal service obligations that were imposed on the grant of the licences, and additional obligations imposed pursuant to a licence amendment process undertaken by ICASA in 2014. We advised ICASA that these amendments were not lawfully made and ICASA has agreed to remove the additional obligations and undertake an assessment to determine what obligations should be attached to ECNS and ECS licenses instead. We expect this process to be completed by March 31, 2017, failing which, we will take necessary legal steps to accomplish this. It is also expected that going forward ICASA will strictly monitor usage of assigned frequency spectrum and may impose a “use it or lose it” approach. If our licenses are not renewed or are terminated, we may be unable to operate our business, in whole or in part, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects.

Developments in the telecommunications sector may result in substantial write-downs of the carrying value of certain assets.

We review on an annual basis, or more frequently where the circumstances require, for impairment purposes, the value of each of our assets and cash generating units to assess whether their carrying values can be supported by future cash flows expected to be derived from such assets and cash generating units, including in some case synergies included in their acquisition costs. Changes in the regulatory, business, economic or political environment in South Africa may require us to recognize an impairment charge on our goodwill, intangible assets or fixed assets. Although the recognition of impairments of tangible, intangible and financial assets results

BD-#27827850-v10 62

in a non-cash charge on the income statement, such charge could materially adversely affect our results of operations and, consequently, our ability to achieve growth targets.

Operating a mobile telecommunications network involves inherent risk of fraudulent activities and potential abuse of our services, which may cause loss of revenue and non-recoverable expenses.

There is an inherent risk in operating a mobile telecommunications network due to potential abuse or non- payment by individuals, groups, businesses or other organizations that use our mobile telecommunications services and avoid paying for them, or subscribe to our services to finance their handsets over time without contributing to our service revenue. We are susceptible to, among other things, fraud by employees or outsiders, including unauthorized transactions and operational errors, clerical or record-keeping errors and errors resulting from faulty computer or telecommunications systems. Given our high volume of transactions, fraud or errors may be repeated or compounded before they are discovered and rectified.

Fraudulent activities could expose us to liability and have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. The effects of such fraudulent activities may be, among others, the loss of revenue, leaks of private information, reputational risk, as well as incurring out-of-pocket expenses that we will have to pay to third parties in connection with those services, such as interconnect fees, payments to international operators overseas and payments to content providers. Such payments may not be recoverable. Although we have implemented fraud management and revenue assurance procedures, these procedures may not be adequate or fully effective. Any inadequacy of our internal processes or systems in detecting or containing such risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects.

We rely on a third party for access to BTSs, which we cannot guarantee will continue.

As at December 31, 2016, our network in South Africa consisted of 4,992 BTSs. We transferred to ATC the passive network infrastructure (including the related land leases) on which 1,364 of our BTSs are built. As part of the same transaction, we entered into a further agreement with ATC in terms of which we transferred ownership and management rights in respect of 473 additional newly built sites until June 2015 (the “Tower Transactions”). As a result, ATC became the lessee of 1,837 sites and assumed the rights, duties and obligations under the relevant ground lease agreements. Since June 2015, we have no longer been obligated to transfer any further BTSs that we construct pursuant to our arrangement with ATC though we have actively been constructing our infrastructure.

Any default by ATC as lessee under the ground leases at sites where any of our BTSs are installed could adversely impact our ability to continue to use those BTSs. In addition, as a result of the Tower Transactions, ATC provides a range of site services to us, including hosting our BTS equipment. Any default by ATC as a service provider in relation to such services could adversely impact on our ability to use those BTSs. In addition, following the announcement in June 2015 of the sale by Eaton Towers Group, a leading tower company, of its South African towers to ATC, we believe that competition in the market may be reduced, which could have an adverse impact on our operating expenditures.

If we are unable to maintain a positive brand image or generate brand affinity, we may be unable to attract new customers or retain existing customers, leading to loss of market share and revenue.

Our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers depends in part on our ability to maintain a positive brand image and generate brand affinity. We believe that our brand has recognition in South Africa and maintaining our reputation with consumers, suppliers and trading partners is critical to our business. We continuously make efforts to maintain and improve the position of our brand in the market, including through advertising, sponsorship, brand campaigns and ensuring that overall performance in terms of service provision and management are subject to regular review and improvement initiatives.

However, our brand image and reputation may be affected by various factors, including deterioration in product quality and service inconsistencies. If we fail to effectively communicate the quality, reliability or other benefits of our network through marketing and advertising efforts, or to successfully market our brand as having a reputation for network quality and reliability, we may not be able to attract new subscribers or reduce churn, and our marketing and advertising efforts may cost more than the incremental revenue attributable to such efforts, which in turn, may decrease our profitability. Reputational and branding risks may also arise with respect to the perception of the quality of our network and complaints made about our network, as well as the methods and practices of third parties that are part of our supply chain, including labour, health, safety and environmental standards, raw material sourcing and ethical standards in the countries in which we operate. Perceived or actual

BD-#27827850-v10 63

concerns related to our network, products, services, our supply chain or the industry more generally, have been and may in the future be widely disseminated online, on consumer blogs or other social media sites or through print and broadcast media. Similarly, any litigation that we face or challenges to our marketing and advertising efforts, such as the recent successful challenge by Vodacom of our claims in a recent advertising billboard that we offer the widest network coverage of any operator in South Africa, may subject us to increasing negative attention in the press and result in withdrawal of our advertising campaigns.

If our efforts to maintain and improve our brands are not successful, if customers do not relate to our brands, or if brand promotion efforts by our competitors are more successful, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations.

If we lose key personnel or if we are unable to hire and retain highly qualified employees, our business operations could be disrupted and our ability to compete could be affected.

Our ability to maintain our competitive position and to implement our business strategy depends to a large degree on the services of our senior management teams and other key personnel. We compete with other telecommunications operators for qualified operating, sales, marketing, administrative, financial and technical personnel. We expect that competition for employees in the South African telecommunications industry will increase. Although we have formal employment agreements with a majority of the members of our senior management, they may terminate their employment with us at any time. In addition, a small number of key management and operational personnel manage our business. If we lose key members of our senior management and certain operational personnel, our operations could be disrupted and our ability to compete could be affected. The loss of our key personnel or the failure to successfully recruit qualified employees could impair our ability to execute our business plan, which would have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We may be affected by labour laws and work stoppages.

Since 1995, South Africa has enacted various labour laws that enhance the rights of employees, which have imposed costs on us. The enactment of highly restrictive employment laws may impose further costs on us and limit our flexibility and ability to implement workforce reductions. At this stage we cannot anticipate if these will have a material impact on our business or results of operations or when such reforms will be finalized. Significant labour disputes, work stoppages, increased employee expenses as a result of the collective bargaining and the cost of compliance with labour laws could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations.

Certain changes in accounting or financial reporting standards could have a material effect on our reported financial results.

We prepare our financial statements in accordance with IFRS. IFRS is revised from time to time and new accounting pronouncements, as well as new interpretations of existing accounting pronouncements, may have material effects on our financial condition and results of operations. For example, the recent changes to IFRS lease accounting rules issued by the IASB in January 2016 (IFRS 16), which takes effect as of January 1, 2019 (though a company can choose to apply IFRS 16 prior to that date, but only if it also applies IFRS 15), will in effect eliminate the differences in accounting treatment between operating leases and capital (or finance) leases, and instead introduces a single lessee accounting model requiring balance sheet recognition of assets and liabilities for all leases with a term of more than 12 months (unless the underlying asset is of low value) and depreciation of lease assets separately from interest on lease liabilities in the income statement. This will increase the liabilities on our balance sheet. IFRS 15, which takes effect for reporting periods beginning on or after January 1, 2018 (though early adoption is permitted), establishes a new revenue recognition model.

In general, changes in IFRS could have a significant impact on the amount or timing of our reported earnings, valuation of liabilities or assets, and classification of financial instruments between equity and liability on either a retrospective or prospective basis.

Our ability to provide commercially viable telecommunications services depends, in part, upon various intellectual property rights owned by, and standards managed by, third parties.

We rely on third-party licenses and other intellectual property arrangements to conduct our business. Intellectual property rights owned by us or licensed to any of us may be challenged or circumvented by competitors or other third parties. In addition, the relevant intellectual property rights may be or may become invalid, unenforceable

BD-#27827850-v10 64

or may not be broad enough to protect our interests or may not provide it with any competitive advantage. Any loss or withdrawal of intellectual property rights granted to us could affect our ability to provide services and could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operation or prospects. We may be sued by third parties for infringement of proprietary rights, including for copyright or trademark infringement for purchasing and distributing content through various fixed-line or wireless communications and other media, such as through our portals. Any such claims or lawsuits, irrespective of their merit, could be time-consuming, result in costly litigation and diversion of technical and management personnel, cause delays in the granting of patent applications or require us to develop non-infringing technology or to enter into royalty or licensing agreements.

In addition, we make use of international standards and protocols used to deliver communication services. The operation of our business depends on the efficient and uninterrupted operation of communication networks. Our mobile networks are predominantly based on GSM, UMTS and LTE standards, which are managed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the 3rd Generation Partnership Project governing bodies. These networks could be compromised due to various factors, including power loss, telecommunications failures, attacks, data corruption, security breaches, software malfunction, natural disasters or other events beyond our control. If any of the principal standards were to be compromised, for example, in the case of GSM, the breach of encryption codes, customers could lose faith in the integrity of the affected mobile networks. Any compromise in these standards and protocols could result in customers moving to providers with alternative delivery methods, which could have a material adverse effect on the business, reputation, financial condition or results of operations of the affected telecommunications companies, including us.

Our business may be adversely affected by any alleged health risks relating to wireless communications devices, which could lead to a decline in voice and data traffic, litigation, stricter regulation and/or increased difficulty in obtaining sites for BTSs.

From time to time concerns have been raised about alleged health risks of mobile telecommunications devices or transmission towers. Press reports about such risks, consumer litigation or regulatory action alleging harm from mobile phone usage or proximity to BTSs or other focus in public forums on such risks could adversely affect the size or growth rate of our subscriber base and result in decreased mobile usage, increased litigation or other liabilities, increased difficulty in obtaining sites for BTS, or increased costs resulting from potential new regulations addressing these perceived health risks.

In addition, these alleged health risks may cause our regulators to impose more onerous regulations on the construction of BTSs or other telecommunications network infrastructure. In particular, public concern over alleged health effects related to electromagnetic radiation may result in increased costs related to our networks, which may hinder the completion or increase the cost of network deployment, reduce the coverage of our network and hinder the commercial availability of new services. If these alleged health risks were to result in decreased mobile voice and data usage, increased consumer litigation or stricter regulation, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Risks Relating to South Africa

Our results of operations may be adversely impacted by prevailing economic and demographic conditions affecting the South African market.

We are incorporated in South Africa and derive substantially all of our revenue from customers in South Africa. As a result, our performance has been, and will continue to be, influenced by macroeconomic, political, demographic and other market conditions and developments in South Africa. Our future revenue and profitability are dependent on, and may be affected by, a number of factors, including the levels of, and growth rates in, GDP and per capita GDP, growth of the market for telecommunications services in South Africa, the evolution of average spending by customers on telecommunications services, as well as inflation, unemployment and demographics.

As GDP increases, we generally experience an increase in demand for our mobile telecommunications services, whereas adverse economic and demographic conditions that reduce consumer spending could affect subscriber numbers and our ARPU. South Africa’s economy has been impacted by the global recession, among other factors, resulting in two years of negative GDP growth in 2012 and 2013. In 2014, economic growth resumed, although recovery was slower than expected and hampered by protracted mining industry labour strikes and infrastructure bottlenecks, leading to revisions in the country’s growth forecast in 2014 by the IMF from 2.9% to 1.4%; real GDP growth was 1.6% in 2014 according to EIU. In 2015, economic growth declined to 1.3%

BD-#27827850-v10 65

according to EIU, hampered by slowdown in agriculture (due to severe drought conditions, which resulted in an 8.4% contraction in the industry, the largest annual fall in agricultural production since 1995) and the electricity, gas and water supply industries, with a flat manufacturing industry. In 2016, according to the 2016 Budget Review, growth is forecast to slow to 0.9% as a result of lower commodity prices, higher borrowing costs, diminished business and consumer confidence, and drought. The economy is expected to experience weak growth in the near term, with the IMF estimating growth in real GDP of 1.0% for 2017 amid an array of domestic and global constraints, including a severe drought, softer demand and lower prices for key mineral exports (stemming from a slowdown in China), tighter fiscal policy, rising interest rates and policy uncertainty (which is inhibiting private investment). According to EIU, real GDP growth is expected to edge up in 2017, helped by a recovery from drought, but is expected to remain sluggish, at an estimated 2.2%, in part because of heightened global uncertainties surrounding the decision by the UK to leave the European Union and the economic slowdown in China. South Africa’s economy continues to face important structural challenges, including a high unemployment rate (26.5% in 2016 according to the SARB), poverty and crime, which, in part have hindered investments in South Africa, prompted emigration of skilled workers and impacted economic growth negatively. Large parts of the South African population do not have access to adequate education, health care, housing and other services, including water, electricity and telecommunications services. For example, in the beginning of 2009, South Africa experienced a national electricity emergency and was forced to endure regular power outages. In 2014 and 2015, South Africa experienced national power outages again, though on a smaller scale compared to 2009, as a result of the national electricity supply coming under pressure again. While we have invested in backup generators for IT equipment and batteries at BTSs, the risk that load shedding might reoccur remains a possibility until new power plants are built and operationalized.

In addition, inflation and interest rate hikes can have an adverse impact on growth and business confidence, which, in turn, may have a material adverse impact on our business and results of operations. As from 2009, the South African Reserve Bank (“SARB”) stated its intention to seek to keep year-on-year headline consumer price inflation within a 3-6% range. As of December 31, 2016, however, year-on-year inflation was 6.3% and has thus exceeded the SARB’s 6% ceiling. There have also been extended periods since 2009 where inflation has exceeded this ceiling. An average annual inflation of 5.7% for 2016 (according to EIU) is mostly driven by a sharp rise in food prices due to severe drought, together with the rand depreciation and increased electricity tariffs. Post 2016, EIU expects inflation to decrease to 5.5% - 5.8% in 2017 - 2020 driven by more prudent monetary policy, efficiency gains arising from infrastructure investments, stricter competition laws and a progressively slower pace of rand depreciation. If inflation increases in the future, our customers may have less disposable income available for telecommunications services, in particular our prepaid customers, many of whom tend to be more sensitive to overall price increases. As a result, our revenue and our margins, as well as demand for mobile telephone services generally, may not grow at rates that we currently anticipate, or could decrease.

South Africa’s economy has also been adversely impacted by climate change. In 2015 and 2016, large parts of South Africa were hit by the most severe droughts in over 30 years, which affected farmers and food production, and lead to insolvencies, food shortages and price increases. Future droughts or other climate related events, such as above average rainfalls, may, especially if they occur repeatedly or over long periods of time, have a material adverse effect on South Africa’s economy and, as a result, on our business and operations.

If economic conditions in South Africa were to worsen, or if demographic and consumer patterns change within the major consumer clusters we have identified, or fail to react as anticipated, this could fuel further competition among existing operators for subscribers, resulting in pricing pressure, a reduction in consumer spending and greater risk of churn. In addition, a significant proportion of the potential mobile phone customer base in South Africa is subject to credit rating “blacklisting” due to poor credit scores and therefore unable to obtain postpaid contracts. The absence of broad-based improvement in economic conditions could continue to have a limiting effect on our customer base and, therefore, on our results of operations. Furthermore, South Africa continues to remain vulnerable to other external financial and economic factors such as the effect of monetary policy in the United States, which may impact economic and financial conditions. South Africa may not be able to remain economically stable during any periods of renewed global economic weakness.

Our operations could be adversely impacted by political or geopolitical developments in South Africa.

South Africa has been subject to ongoing political and security concerns. Political uncertainty historically has been one of the potential risks associated with an investment in securities issued by companies with significant or all of their operations in South Africa.

BD-#27827850-v10 66

Negative changes in the government and political environment, including the failure of the South African government to devise or implement appropriate economic programs, may adversely affect the stability of the economy, and in turn our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects. Until recently, policymakers in South Africa have reiterated their commitment to reform strategies roughly in line with those they have pursued since 1996. This commitment involves tighter control of spending in light of weaker revenue prospects and higher debt. However, the South African political scene has been more volatile in recent years, heightening uncertainty about the direction of economic policy. The ruling African National Congress (“ANC”) suffered a setback in the most recent municipal elections held in August 2016, as its share of votes reached an all-time low of 53.9% in local ballots (compared to 60-70% of the vote in every election since it came to power in 1994). In Johannesburg, the commercial capital, the ANC received only 44% of the vote, losing its majority even though the municipality encompasses the vast vote bank of Soweto, Alexandra and other black townships. The main opposition, the Democratic Alliance, and the Economic Freedom Fighters (“EFF”) gained significant votes. Inequality, high levels of unemployment, lack of basic services and corruption, among others, remain pressing issues, subject to frequent complaint and criticism. This criticism is reflected in deepening dissent within the ANC and challenges to the government from both the EFF as well as threats to the traditional tripartite alliance that underpins the ANC from splits in the National Union of Metal Workers and the Congress of South African Trade Unions, and concerns over the level of corruption and ongoing allegations of fraud and racketeering in government. Investor confidence was affected by the abrupt reshuffling of the Minister of Finance and other cabinet ministers in March 2017; the subsequent political upheaval in the government and the ruling ANC may continue to impact investor confidence. The predictability that has underpinned the macroeconomic policy framework – a fundamental component of the institutional strength ascribed to South Africa – has been brought into question. This has resulted in, among other things, financial and currency market instability, with downgrades in April 2017 by S&P and Fitch Ratings of the sovereign credit rating to sub- investment grade, and by Moody’s Investor Services in July 2017 to the lowest investment grade of Baa3 while maintaining a negative outlook.

Adverse changes in the government and political environment, including the failure of the South African government to devise or implement appropriate economic programs and allegations or findings of corruption and fraud in government, may adversely affect the pace of economic growth and could have a material adverse effect on the investment climate. As a result, our financial condition, results of operations and prospects may be materially adversely affected.

The market for securities issued by companies with operations in emerging markets, such as Cell C, is subject to volatility due to developments and perceptions of risks in other countries.

In general, investing in the securities of issuers that have operations primarily in emerging markets involves a higher degree of risk than investing in the securities of issuers with substantial operations in the United States, the countries of the EU or other similar jurisdictions. Such risks include:

• adverse changes in economic and governmental policy in South Africa; • relatively low levels of consumers disposable income; • relative instability of new institutions; • political or labour unrest; • shifts in regulation that cannot be predicted; • inconsistent application of existing laws and regulations; and • slow or insufficient legal remedies.

The market for our securities is influenced by economic and market conditions in South Africa, as well as, to varying degrees, market conditions in other emerging market countries, and the United States. Although economic conditions differ in each country, the reaction of investors to developments in one country may cause capital markets in other countries to fluctuate. Developments or economic conditions in emerging market countries have at times significantly affected the availability of credit to those and other emerging markets such as South Africa, and resulted in considerable outflows of funds and declines in the amount of foreign investments. Crises in other emerging market countries may also diminish investor interest.

Moreover, financial turmoil in any emerging market country tends to adversely affect the prices of equity and debt securities of issuers in all emerging market countries, such as South Africa, as investors move their money to more stable, developed markets. An increase in the perceived risks associated with investing in a specific

BD-#27827850-v10 67

emerging economy could dampen capital flows to South Africa and adversely affect its economy, as well as diminish investor interest in the Notes.

Our results of operations could be adversely affected if growth in the South African mobile telecommunications market slows.

Future growth and improvement in our financial performance is dependent on the growth of the market for mobile telecommunications services and the evolution of average spending on mobile telecommunications by consumers in South Africa. Penetration of mobile telecommunications services in South Africa has increased in the past several years. As penetration levels increase, it may become more difficult for us to expand our active mobile subscriber base and, to the extent we do, we would be churning customers from our competitors. As a result, our future revenue growth may be dependent upon growth in spend per customer rather than an overall increase in the number of customers, and such growth may not occur as anticipated. This may be particularly challenging as our postpaid ASPU has declined from 2013 to 2016, from R289.12 in 2013, to R254.22 in 2014, though increasing to R260.73 in 2015 and R284.83 for the year ended December 31, 2016.

If growth in the South African telecommunications markets is slower than anticipated, our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects could be materially adversely affected. See “—Our results of operations may be adversely impacted by prevailing economic and demographic conditions affecting the South African market.” and “Our operations could be adversely impacted by political or geopolitical developments in South Africa.” for further information on risks relating to economic, political and demographic considerations in South Africa that may impact growth levels in the mobile telecommunications markets.

Depreciation or fluctuation in the value of the rand have adversely affected, and could adversely affect, our ability to service our debt and our financial condition or results of operations.

We are subject to both transactional and translational currency risk resulting from fluctuations in foreign exchange rates. We realise substantially all of our revenue, and incur a significant portion of our costs and expenses, in rand. A substantial portion of our debt is denominated in foreign currencies (principally the U.S. dollar and the euro). While we intend to reduce the portion of our debt that is denominated in foreign currencies such that all of our debt, other than the Notes, is denominated in rand following the Completion Date, we may incur further debt that is denominated in foreign currencies in the future. In addition, a significant proportion of our capital expenditures are denominated in foreign currencies. As at December 31, 2016, 46% and 45% of our Total Debt was denominated in U.S. dollars and euro, respectively. From 2010 to December 31, 2016, R11.6 billion of our capital expenditures were incurred in foreign currencies, predominantly in U.S. dollars and we expect our capital expenditures to continue to be predominantly incurred in U.S. dollars going forward. As a result, to the extent that the rand declines in value against the currency in which our indebtedness is denominated or in which capital expenditure is to be paid, the effective cost of servicing such indebtedness or paying such capital expenditure may be higher. In addition, foreign exchange rate movements have in the past affected, and may in the future affect, the headroom in respect of certain financial covenants pertaining to our outstanding debt and affect our ability to comply with such covenants.

In recent years, the value of the rand as measured against the euro and the U.S. dollar has fluctuated considerably (see “Exchange Rates”). While movements in foreign exchange rates resulted in net foreign exchange gains of R2.9 billion as at December 31, 2016, they resulted in net foreign exchange losses of R3.8 billion as at December 31, 2015 (2014: R1.3 billion; 2013: R2.2 billion), as a result of the depreciation of the rand against the U.S. dollar on the revaluation of the foreign currency denominated borrowings. In addition, the devaluation of the rand against the U.S. dollar has had in prior years, and may continue to have, an impact on our margins from customer spend on international calling and roaming. For example, the devaluation of the rand against the U.S. dollar in 2014 placed significant financial pressure on our dealers that focus on the international calling market, which attract price-sensitive international callers to Cell C. Such dealers are responsible for the international calling termination costs which are priced in U.S. dollars and, in 2014, we made virtually no margin on almost 50% of their customer spend which is for international calls.

The rand may continue to weaken or fluctuate significantly in the future against the U.S. dollar and the euro. Further significant depreciation of the rand will have a direct impact on our financial position, liquidity and results of operations and may result in disruption in the international currency markets and limit our ability to transfer or convert such currencies into U.S. dollars and euro. This would affect our ability to fund our capital expenditures and service any future foreign currency denominated debt that we might incur, and may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

BD-#27827850-v10 68

Laws and regulations and the manner in which they and our authorizations are interpreted, have had and may in the future have, an impact on us, and non-compliance with such laws and regulations and authorizations could give rise to fines and other adverse consequences.

We operate in an industry that is subject to extensive regulation in South Africa, including in respect of licensing, construction and operation of our network and the conduct of our business.

In South Africa, the telecommunications industry is subject to an evolving regulatory environment (in large part due to technological change, government ownership of key industry operators and resources, a need for increased local ownership and control, and the industry’s contribution to state tax revenue), and final regulations addressing a number of significant matters have not yet been issued. A number of far reaching changes have been implemented to the legislation governing our industry over the last decade, with much of the detail left to ICASA’s implementation. ICASA is entitled to continuously revise policies, may impose new or different regulations at any point in the future and has a history of policy changes. The White Paper proposes that governance and regulation across the ICT value chain (including the Internet value chain) will be consolidated into one entity, whereby the integrated regulator will have sole responsibility for overseeing and promoting Internet governance, licensing and regulation of networks, services, spectrum and other scarce ICT-related resources, to achieve the objectives set in policy and law.

If changes are made to existing legislation or if new legislation is adopted or new regulations are promulgated covering our operations and other activities, they could increase the cost of doing business, reduce access to liquidity, limit the scope of permissible activities or affect the competitive balance. In particular, decisions by ICASA or the integrated regulator concerning the granting, amendment or renewal of licenses and/or spectrum to us or third parties, or decisions relating to tariffs, or consolidation in the South African mobile market, or efforts by regulatory and/or licensing bodies to expand new markets, to require the accessibility of our network to MVNOs or other entrants, or to deny us access to third-party networks could have an adverse effect on our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

In addition, we could be adversely impacted by changes in interpretations by regulators of existing or new regulations or by the imposition of new requirements by regulators based on discretionary authority or otherwise. The interpretation of existing regulations or the adoption of new policies or regulations that are unfavourable to us, could disrupt our business operations and could have an adverse effect on our results of operations.

Significant policy decisions on a range of regulatory changes that could affect us and our operations remain undecided. We cannot predict whether and, if so, which changes will be forthcoming or the effect of any such changes on our business, financial condition and results of operations. It is also difficult to predict whether any such changes would impact only new business or have a broader effect. For example, the ITA for the Spectrum Auction has been successfully challenged by the TPS Minister and us (see “—Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.”).

Regulatory liberalization and initiatives could lead to greater competition, which could lead to a reduction in our market share or have an adverse effect on our results of operations.

All telecommunication services in South Africa have been liberalized or are in the process of being liberalized. The only restriction on entry into the market is the requirement to hold a license issued by ICASA to provide telecommunications services or operate a network. We believe that a significant contributor to increased competition could be the further liberalization of the South African telecommunications industry. The EC Act, which came into effect in 2006, made it possible for all licensees covered by the legislation to interconnect with each other and/or lease the facilities of Communications Network Services licensees (which currently includes Vodacom, MTN, us and Telkom, and in the future may include other network operators). As a result, new entrants into the telecommunications market and alternative communication services may compete with us. Increased competition could result in a reduction in our average tariffs and market share, and increase customer acquisition and retention costs, which could cause growth rates and revenue to decline and operating costs to increase.

ICASA is entitled to issue, and has issued, regulations and practice notes relating to interconnection and facilities leasing. Pursuant to the EC Act, licensees, including Cell C, must, on request, interconnect with and lease electronic communications facilities to any other licensee, unless such request is unreasonable, and must enter into interconnection agreements and facilities leasing agreements for this purpose. Where the parties are unable to reach an agreement, the EC Act confers on ICASA the power to intervene and propose, or impose,

BD-#27827850-v10 69

terms and conditions for the interconnection agreement or the facilities leasing agreement, or refer the matter to the Complaints and Compliance Committee for resolution. ICASA must review any interconnection agreement and any facilities leasing agreement to determine whether it is consistent with the regulations and, if the agreed terms are not consistent with the regulations, direct the parties to agree on new terms and conditions. The EC Act also empowers ICASA to impose pro-competitive conditions on operators found to have significant market power in a market or market segments that have ineffective competition, which may affect the manner in which facilities are leased by such operators, and the charges thereof, including the leasing of facilities at or near the long run incremental cost of those facilities. If we are unable to negotiate favourable terms and conditions for the provision of interconnection services and facilities leasing services or if ICASA imposes unfavourable terms and conditions on us, our business operations could be disrupted and our results of operations could be adversely affected.

The evolution of MTRs set by ICASA has adversely impacted and may continue to adversely impact our revenue and profitability. ICASA regulates MTRs and has required local telecommunications providers to gradually reduce MTRs as a result of new regulations promulgated on September 29, 2014 (see “Regulation— Regulatory Framework—Regulation of MTRs and Facilities Leasing.”). The declining MTRs and degree of asymmetry afforded to us under the new regulations will negatively impact our overall margin. Further changes to MTRs in South Africa could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects, particularly if the asymmetric MTR regime that benefits us were to change.

In addition, we believe that there is an overarching trend of regulators seeking to regulate tariffs and pricing in the telecommunications markets, in an effort to lower prices to end-consumers. If this approach was meaningfully pursued by our regulators in South Africa, this could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

Risks Relating to the Cell C Recapitalization

The subscription agreements with each of the investors that have subscribed in our shares pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization, and the indemnity agreement with OTL, to which we are a party, potentially expose us to liability.

The subscription agreements that we have entered into with each of the investors that have subscribed in our shares pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization, expose us to liability for any potential claims that may be brought for breach of our representations and warranties, which claims may be brought by each investor until 60 days after such investor has received our annual consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2017, signed by our auditors.

The subscription agreement entered into with The Prepaid Company Proprietary Limited, a subsidiary of Blue Label (the “Blue Label Subsidiary”), also includes indemnification provisions, under which we have agreed to irrevocably and unconditionally indemnify Blue Label and hold it harmless, pro rata and in proportion to its shareholding in Cell C, against any losses incurred by it or imposed on us in connection with any assessments arising, directly or indirectly, from, or in connection with, any costs or taxes arising, including any reduction of tax losses, from the deduction of interest which is found to be non-deductible, in respect of any period prior to the Completion Date, which claim for losses must be made by the fifth anniversary of the Completion Date. Our liability under this indemnification provision is limited to R75 million.

The indemnity agreement between OTL and Cell C (the “OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement”) is conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement (as defined under “The Cell C Recapitalization— Certain Contracts relating to the Cell C Recapitalization—Equity Implementation Agreement”). Cell C and ATC, among others, entered into an amended and restated master lease agreement on March 7, 2011, pursuant to which we were granted certain rights and incurred certain obligations in respect of certain electronic communications network towers. As security for our obligations owed to ATC under the master lease agreement (the “ATC Master Lease”), OTL has guaranteed the due and proper performance of our obligations (the “ATC Guarantee”), which guarantee falls away once our debt to EBITDA leverage ratio reaches or falls below 3.75x. Following the Completion Date, OTL has the benefit of an irrevocable and unconditional indemnity from Cell C under the OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement, for any and all claims that ATC may bring against OTL under the ATC Guarantee.

Our liability under the subscription agreements, to each investor, for breach of warranty, representation, or otherwise (other than with regard to our indemnification obligations under the subscription agreements) does not

BD-#27827850-v10 70

exceed the subscription price that the relevant investor paid to subscribe for its shares in us pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

If we are required to make large indemnity payments, our business, results of operations and financial condition could be materially adversely affected and our ability to satisfy our debt service obligations under the Notes could be adversely affected.

We may be unable to realise the expected benefits and synergies from our relationship with Blue Label.

We expect that a closer relationship with Blue Label, as one of our principal indirect shareholders should further align our interests and facilitate greater revenue growth and operational efficiencies, incentivizing Blue Label to promote our products and services (thereby enabling us to accelerate our growth in market share and revenue in the prepaid segment), and providing us with opportunities to realise synergies in product distribution and market positioning, as well as information sharing. We believe the strategic partnership with Blue Label is also likely to better position us to understand and influence more of the steps required to take an innovative product or service to market and be able to offer innovation that is relevant, timely and more responsive to our customers’ needs. If we are unable to benefit from the anticipated synergies with Blue Label, including expected cost and revenue synergies, operational efficiencies and other benefits, or if we experience a delay in achieving expected benefits, this may adversely affect our revenue growth or we may incur higher than expected costs, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

CellSAf and/or its shareholders or representatives may take actions to frustrate the Cell C Recapitalization.

CellSAf, which currently owns a 25% unencumbered stake in 3C, has publicly stated that it intends to resist the Cell C Recapitalization. We refute CellSAf’s claim that it was not consulted on the terms of the Cell C Recapitalization. On November 24, 2016 CellSAf issued a summons in the High Court in South Africa against Cell C, Blue Label and various other parties involved in the Cell C Recapitalization. CellSAf has asked the Court to set aside the agreements signed to date regarding the Cell C Recapitalization as well as the board resolutions authorising 3C to enter into those agreements. Cell C and various other defendants have filed a notice claiming that CellSAf’s summons is vague and incomplete, or do not disclose a cause of action. As a consequence, CellSAf has indicated that it intends to amend its claims. Once this process has run its course, Cell C and the other defendants will have the opportunity to file a plea setting out their defence, whereafter the matter may only proceed to trial. If this occurs, it is likely to only happen in 2018. CellSAf may attempt to launch some other legal proceedings but apart from the summons, it has not done so.

Risks relating to the Notes, the Guarantees, our Indebtedness and the Structure

We have been unable to comply with certain covenants under certain of our historical debt facilities. If we are unable to comply with any covenants under our existing or future debt facilities and unsuccessful in amending the relevant covenants or obtaining waivers, we will default under such debt facilities.

We have in the past sought and obtained waivers to avoid a default under the financial covenants under our historical debt facilities. In the event we are again unable to comply with financial covenants or again procure required amendments or waivers under our existing or future debt facilities or should we otherwise be unable to comply with financial covenants, we may default under our various facilities and trigger cross-default or cross acceleration provisions under other indebtedness, including the Notes, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

Our leverage and debt service obligations could have a material adverse effect on our business and may make it difficult for us to service our debt, including the Notes, and operate our business.

As part of the Cell C Recapitalization, we have raised approximately R16.3 billion of incremental equity (the amount of which correlated with the amount required to reduce our Net Debt to a maximum of R6.0 billion, and which also depended on the applicable exchange rates) (the “Equity Contribution”). We have used the proceeds of the Equity Contribution, to partially repay all of our existing debt facilities and settle our existing hedging arrangements, as well as new hedging arrangements to mitigate foreign exchange risk in respect of the Notes.

As at December 31, 2016, our Pro Forma Net Debt after giving pro forma effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016, would have been R6,000 million ($437 million) and our Pro Forma Net Debt to EBITDA on a consolidated basis would have been 1.93x, based on an

BD-#27827850-v10 71

indicative exchange rate of R13.7372 = $1.00. Our level of indebtedness could have important consequences for investors in the Notes. For example, it could:

• make it more difficult for us to satisfy our obligations with respect to our indebtedness;

• increase our vulnerability to adverse economic and industry conditions;

• require us to dedicate a substantial portion of cash flow from operations to payments on our indebtedness, which could reduce the availability of cash flow to fund working capital needs, capital expenditures, future acquisitions and other general corporate needs;

• limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and the industry in which we operate;

• place us at a competitive disadvantage compared to our competitors with less debt; and

• limit our ability to borrow additional funds and increase the cost of any such borrowings, particularly because of the financial and other restrictive covenants contained in our financing arrangements, including the Notes.

Any of these or other consequences or events could have a material adverse effect on our ability to satisfy our debt obligations, including the Notes. Our ability to make payments on and refinance our indebtedness and to fund working capital expenditures and other expenses will depend on our future operating performance and ability to generate cash from operations. Our ability to generate cash from operations is subject, in large part, to general economic, competitive, legislative and regulatory factors and other factors that are beyond our control. We may not be able to generate sufficient cash flow from operations nor obtain enough capital to service our debt or fund our planned capital expenditures.

Despite our level of indebtedness, we and our subsidiaries may still be able to incur significant additional amounts of debt, which could further exacerbate the risks associated with our substantial indebtedness.

We and our subsidiaries may be able to incur substantial additional indebtedness in the future. Although the Trust Deed and existing credit facilities contain restrictions on the incurrence of additional indebtedness, these restrictions are subject to a number of significant qualifications and exceptions, and, under certain circumstances, the amount of indebtedness that could be incurred in compliance with these restrictions could be substantial. Under the Notes, there is a permitted debt basket in respect of capital expenditure and working capital related financing and other specific instances in which additional debt can be incurred by Cell C and/or its subsidiaries and Cell C and its subsidiaries will be able to incur additional debt, if, inter alia, certain financial ratios are satisfied (see “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”). If new debt is added to our and our restricted subsidiaries’ existing indebtedness levels, the risks associated with our substantial indebtedness described above, including our possible inability to service our indebtedness will increase.

Our ability to generate sufficient cash depends on many factors, some of which are beyond our control.

We will require a significant amount of cash to service our debt obligations. Our ability to meet our cash obligations, including our obligations under the Notes, and to fund working capital requirements, capital expenditures or business opportunities that may arise, such as acquisitions of other businesses, depends on our operating performance and ability to generate cash, as well as our subsidiaries’ ability to make cash distributions to us in the form of dividends or otherwise. In addition, each of the Guarantor’s ability to meet its obligations under the Guarantees depends in material part upon its operating performance and financial condition, including the requirements of any such Guarantor to service its own financing arrangements (if any).

We may not generate sufficient income and cash flow or future borrowings may not be available to us in an amount sufficient to enable us to service and pay our indebtedness, including the Notes and the Guarantees, when due, or to fund our other capital requirements or any operating losses. The ability of a subsidiary to make such distributions could be affected by a claim or other action brought by a third party, including a creditor, or by the laws and regulations of its jurisdiction of incorporation which regulates the payment of distributions and repatriation of funds outside of the jurisdiction. If our future cash flows from operations and other capital resources are insufficient to pay our obligations as they mature or to fund our liquidity needs, we may be forced to:

BD-#27827850-v10 72

• reduce or delay our business activities and capital expenditures;

• sell assets;

• obtain additional indebtedness or equity capital;

• restructure or refinance all or a portion of our indebtedness, including the Notes, on or before maturity; or

• forego opportunities such as acquisitions of other businesses.

We may not be able to accomplish any of these alternatives on a timely basis or on satisfactory terms, if at all. In addition, the terms of our existing and future indebtedness, including the Notes, may limit our ability to pursue any of these alternatives, and the state of the debt capital markets and the bank lending market may severely restrict our ability to incur additional indebtedness were we to decide to seek to do so. Any refinancing of our debt could be at higher interest rates and may require us to comply with more onerous covenants, which could further restrict our business operations. There can be no assurances that any assets which we could be required to dispose of can be sold or that, if sold, the timing of such sale and the amount of proceeds realized from such sale will be acceptable.

If any of the above limitations or any other limitations were to impede materially the flow of cash to Cell C and the Guarantors, such fact would materially and adversely affect our ability to service and repay our obligations, including our obligations under the Notes and/or the Guarantees.

We are subject to restrictive debt covenants, which limit our operating flexibility, our ability to finance our future operations and capital needs and our ability to pursue business opportunities and activities.

The Notes and Trust Deed will, and any future debt instrument we may enter into may, contain covenants that significantly restrict our ability to, among other things:

• incur or guarantee additional debt;

• create or incur liens; and

• make certain restricted payments in respect of the share capital of Cell C, including dividends or other distributions.

These covenants could limit our ability to finance our future operations and capital needs and our ability to pursue acquisitions and other business activities that may be in our interest.

Our credit facilities that we entered into at the Completion Date require, and any future working capital facility or other debt instrument may also require, us to maintain specified financial ratios. Our ability to meet these financial ratios may be affected by events beyond our control and, as a result, we cannot assure you that we will be able to meet these ratios and tests. Events of default or certain other defaults under agreements may result in the acceleration of payments under such agreements without accelerating payments under the Notes, or the need for lender consents or amendments (which we have obtained in the past and are likely to need to obtain in the future), in each case based on measures tied to results of operations and levels of indebtedness. Such lenders would also have the right in these circumstances to terminate any commitments they have to provide further borrowings and, if we are unable to repay the relevant borrowings when due, the lenders would also have the right to claim against the collateral granted to them to secure the relevant indebtedness. In addition, a default under the Trust Deed could result in a cross default or cross acceleration under any future financing agreements. Our assets and cash flow may not be sufficient to fully repay these debts, including the Notes, in such circumstances. See “—We have been unable to comply with certain covenants under certain of our historical debt facilities. If we are unable to comply with any covenants under our existing or future debt facilities and unsuccessful in amending the relevant covenants or obtaining waivers, we will default under such debt facilities.”

There is no active public trading market for the Notes and an active trading market for the Notes may not develop.

Application has been made to have the Notes admitted to the Official List of the Irish Stock Exchange and to trading on the Global Exchange Market, however, we cannot assure you that the Notes will be approved for

BD-#27827850-v10 73

listing or that such listing will be maintained. There can be no assurance regarding the future development of a market for the Notes or the ability of holders to sell their Notes or the price at which holders may be able to sell their Notes. If such a market were to develop, the Notes could trade at prices that may be higher or lower than the initial offering price depending on many factors, including prevailing interest rates, our operating results, the market for similar securities and other factors, including general economic conditions, performance and prospects, as well as recommendations of securities analysts. The liquidity of, and the trading market for, the Notes may also be adversely affected by a decline in the market for high yield securities generally. Such a decline may affect the liquidity and trading of the Notes independently of our financial performance and prospects.

The market price of the Notes is subject to a high degree of volatility.

The market price of investments in the Notes could be subject to significant fluctuations in response to actual or anticipated variations in our operating results, adverse business developments, changes to the regulatory environment in which we operate, changes in financial estimates by securities analysts and the actual or expected sale by us of other debt securities, as well as other factors, including the trading market for notes issued in South Africa. In addition, in recent years the global financial markets have experienced significant price and volume fluctuations that, if repeated in the future, could adversely affect the market price of investments in the Notes without regard to our financial condition or results of operations.

The value of the Collateral securing the Notes may not be sufficient to satisfy the obligations under the Notes and may decrease due to various factors.

No appraisal of the value of the Collateral has been made and the fair market value of the Collateral may be subject to fluctuations based on factors that include, among others, general economic conditions, industry conditions and similar factors. The value of the Collateral and any amount to be received upon a sale of or foreclosure on the Collateral would be dependent on numerous factors, including, but not limited to, the actual fair market value of the Collateral at such time, the timing and the manner of the sale (such as whether our business is sold as a going concern and the ability to sell the Collateral in an orderly sale), the availability of buyers, the jurisdiction in which the enforcement action or sale is completed, the condition of the Collateral, whether telecommunications licenses required to operate a GSM network would be available to a buyer of the Collateral, changes in the South African telecommunications market, and exchange rates. Moreover, certain key elements of our network, such as the BTSs we use, are not owned or leased directly by us, but rather are available to us through contractual rights of access. In the event of a foreclosure, liquidation, bankruptcy or similar proceeding, the Collateral may not be sold in a timely or orderly manner, or at all. Given our competitive position in, and the nature of, the South African mobile telecommunications market, there may not be any buyer willing and able to purchase our business as a going concern, or willing to buy a significant portion of our assets in the event of an enforcement action. Each of these factors could reduce the likelihood of an enforcement action as well as reduce the amount of any proceeds in the event of an enforcement action.

In addition, the value of the Collateral, including our telecommunications network, may be adversely affected by obsolescence, changes in technology in our industry or business, changes in equipment or certain casualty events. The security documents do not require us to improve the Collateral. In addition, our existing Collateral may become obsolete or be replaced by new assets that may not be part of the Collateral. Although we are obligated under the security documents to maintain insurance with respect to the Collateral, the proceeds of such insurance may not be sufficient to repurchase adequate replacement Collateral or may be used for other business purposes. Our insurance policies also may not cover all events that may result to damage to the Collateral.

The value of the Collateral may be insufficient to satisfy Cell C’s obligations under the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement, and the Collateral securing the obligations under the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement and may be reduced or diluted under certain circumstances, including the issuance of other permitted pari passu secured indebtedness and the disposition of assets comprising the Collateral, subject to the terms of the Trust Deed and the Intercreditor Agreement.

It may be difficult to realise the value of the Collateral securing the Notes.

The Collateral securing Cell C’s obligations under the Notes will be subject to any and all exceptions, defects, encumbrances, liens and other imperfections permitted under the Trust Deed and/or the Intercreditor Agreement. The existence of any such exceptions, defects, encumbrances, liens and other imperfections could adversely affect the value of the Collateral securing the obligations under the Notes and the ability of the Security SPV to realise or foreclose on such Collateral. Furthermore, the first-priority ranking of the First Ranking Security

BD-#27827850-v10 74

Interests can be affected by a variety of factors, including, among others, the timely satisfaction of perfection requirements, statutory liens or re-characterization under the laws of certain jurisdictions.

The Security SPV may not have the ability to foreclose upon those assets and the value of the Collateral may significantly decrease. The laws of certain jurisdictions do not generally permit an appropriation of pledged assets by the pledgee upon the occurrence of an enforcement event and usually require the sale of the relevant collateral through a formal disposal process involving a public auction. Certain waiting periods and notice requirements may apply to such disposal process.

In addition, we operate a regulated business and beneficial ownership of our assets would be subject to regulatory approval. In the event of foreclosure, regulatory approval could be required, which approval may be delayed or ultimately not be forthcoming.

You will not have a security interest in certain assets, including the shares of Cell C, and you may be prevented from selling our business as a going concern.

Provisions in contracts to which we are a party and regulations governing our operations may prohibit us from granting security interests in some of our assets or adversely impact enforcement of security interests. For example, prior approval of ICASA would be required in order for any remedies to be exercised against our licenses that would constitute or result in any assignment thereof.

In addition, some or all of our network agreements, leases and other contracts (including agreements in respect of use of our BTSs) may prohibit assignment entirely or may require consent from the counterparties in order to grant a security interest in those contracts. We do not intend to obtain such approvals or consents, and our failure to do so may result in such agreements not being included in the Collateral and prevents the Security SPV from exercising remedies with respect to those contracts. Certain of our assets such as our network equipment, our bank accounts, trade receivables, our share of capital stock in the Guarantors and our trademarks (are, or will be, once certain registration requirements are fulfilled) specifically pledged to secure the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement, and will secure the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement, pursuant to perfected First Ranking Security Interests. Our remaining assets are subject only to a general notarial bond, which does not confer any priority to the beneficiary thereof and which generally does not perfect the security interests granted thereby. Consequently, the general notarial bond, unless perfected in a court proceeding or otherwise, merely confers a preferred right, such right ranking in priority only to the rights of concurrent creditors, to the beneficiary thereof in respect of our assets that have not been otherwise pledged.

Certain shares of Cell C are pledged to relevant security trustee or, as the case may be, trustee in respect of the 2022 Notes issued by SPV1 and the SPV2 and SPV3 lenders, to secure such SPV’s obligations under such 2022 Notes and secured credit facilities, respectively. As a result, either the shareholders of Cell C, or if such share collateral is enforced, the relevant security trustee or, as the case may be, trustee on behalf of the holders of the 2022 Notes and the pari passu lenders under the SPV2 and SPV3 secured credit facilities, will have the ability to vote in any liquidation or business rescue proceedings in relation to the Issuer and they may vote in a way that may be adverse to the interests of Holders. For a description of the insolvency laws and business rescue proceedings see “—The insolvency laws of South Africa may not be as favourable to you as the bankruptcy laws of the jurisdiction with which you are familiar.”

The ability of Holders to realize the maximum value from an enforcement of the Collateral may be negatively impacted. Specifically, on an enforcement of the Collateral outside of a liquidation of the Issuer, the Security SPV would not be able to sell the business of the Issuer as a going concern by disposing of the shares in the Issuer to a third party. Accordingly, the enforcement action may not realise the maximum value of the business of the Issuer as a whole as the Security SPV would have to enforce each separate asset over which it has security. The value of the sum of the parts may be less than the value of the whole.

In addition, in order to enforce certain types of security, a court order must be obtained first, whereas no such court order is required in order to enforce a share pledge.

The First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral will not be granted directly to the Holders.

Due to the applicable provisions of South African law governing the creation and perfection of security interests, the security interests in the Collateral for our obligations will not be granted directly to Holders, but will be granted only in favour of the Security SPV, acting as parallel creditor in respect of the Notes. The Security SPV will provide a guarantee to the Trustee as a means of providing the Trustee with the benefit of any

BD-#27827850-v10 75

sale of the Collateral upon an enforcement action and will be indemnified by us in respect of such guarantee, which indemnity will be secured by the Collateral.

In addition, other secured parties may be entitled to take enforcement action with respect to the Collateral for the Notes and the Guarantees. While the Trustee has exclusive authority to direct enforcement of such Collateral through the Security SPV, the Security Trustee may only act on instructions from the Instructing Creditors, as set out in the Intercreditor Agreement, which may comprise the Senior Lenders and/or include other pari passu creditors such as the Hedge Counterparties, who may instruct the Security Trustee to take enforcement action in respect of the Collateral in a way that may be adverse to the interests of Holders.

The rights against the Collateral will not be granted directly to Holders or directly in favour of the Trustee. As a consequence, neither the Holders nor the Trustee will have direct security or will be entitled to take enforcement action in respect of the Collateral other than through the Security SPV.

The grant of Collateral to secure obligations under the Notes or the contractual subordination of the claims of certain of our creditors might be challenged or voidable in an insolvency proceeding.

The grant of Collateral and the contractual subordination of certain claims in favour of the Security SPV under the Intercreditor Agreement may be voidable by the grantor or by an insolvency trustee, liquidator, receiver, practitioner or administrator or by other creditors, or may be otherwise set aside by a court if certain events or circumstances exist or occur, including, among others, if the grantor is deemed to be insolvent at the time of the grant, or if the grant or contractual subordination permits certain parties to receive a greater recovery than if the grant or contractual subordination had not been given and an insolvency proceeding in respect of the grantor is commenced within a legally specified “clawback” period following the grant or if a grant constitutes a disposition without value or was intended to prefer certain creditors above others.

Under the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders will be required to share recovery proceeds with other secured creditors, have limited ability to enforce the Security Documents and have agreed that the Collateral may be released in certain circumstances without their consent, reducing the pool of assets servicing the Notes.

The Intercreditor Agreement governs the enforcement of the Security Documents, the sharing in any recoveries from such enforcement and the release of the Collateral by the Security Trustee. The Intercreditor Agreement provides that the Security Trustee may release the Collateral in connection with sales of assets pursuant to a permitted disposal or enforcement sale and in other circumstances permitted by the relevant financing documents. Therefore, the Collateral available to secure obligations under the Notes could be reduced in connection with the sales of assets or otherwise, subject to the requirements of the financing documents and the Trust Deed governing the Notes. Any recovery will need to be shared on a pro rata basis with the Senior Lenders under the Senior Facilities and the Hedge Counterparties under the Hedging Arrangement.

The Notes may not be a suitable investment for all investors.

As a potential investor in the Notes, you should:

• have sufficient knowledge and experience to make a meaningful evaluation of the Notes, the merits and risks of investing in the Notes and the information contained or incorporated by reference in these Listing Particulars;

• have access to, and knowledge of, appropriate analytical tools to evaluate, in the context of your particular financial situation, an investment in the Notes and the impact the Notes will have on your overall investment portfolio;

• have sufficient financial resources and liquidity to bear all of the risks of an investment in the Notes, including where the currency for principal or interest payments is different from your currency;

• understand thoroughly the terms of the Notes and be familiar with the behaviour of any relevant financial markets; and

• be able to evaluate possible scenarios for economic, interest rate and other factors that may affect your investment and your ability to bear the applicable risks.

BD-#27827850-v10 76

You should not invest in Notes which are complex financial instruments unless you have the expertise to evaluate how the Notes will perform under changing conditions, the resulting effects on the value of the Notes and the impact this investment will have on the potential investor’s overall investment portfolio.

It may not be possible for the Trustee to take certain actions on your behalf in relation to the Notes, which would require you to take action directly.

The Trust Deed provides for the Trustee to take action on your behalf in certain circumstances, but only if the Trustee is indemnified and/or secured and/or prefunded to its satisfaction. It may not be possible for the Trustee to take certain action in relation to the Notes and accordingly, in such circumstances, notwithstanding the provisions of an indemnity or security, it will be for you to take action directly.

The insolvency laws of South Africa may not be as favourable to you as the bankruptcy laws of the jurisdiction with which you are familiar.

In the event of our insolvency, the claims of holders would be subject to the insolvency laws of South Africa. Any creditor, or the debtor itself, may initiate insolvency proceedings in South Africa. After the initiation of liquidation proceedings, the debtor must refrain from any actions that are not in the ordinary course of business and which would reduce its assets. Once a company is liquidated, all of its assets vest in a liquidator and the company can no longer manage or dispose of any of its assets.

Under South African insolvency law, there are three types of creditors:

• Preferred creditors, who are entitled to payment out of the free residue of the estate (that portion which is not subject to any security interests) and rank in right of payment before concurrent creditors. An unperfected general notarial bond provides creditors only with preferred rights.

• Secured creditors, who hold security for their claims in the form of a registered special notarial bond (post perfection), registered mortgage bond, landlord’s legal hypothec, pledge, security cession or right of retention. They are entitled to be paid out of the proceeds of the property subject to the security, after payment of certain expenses. If the proceeds of the encumbered property are insufficient to cover the secured creditor’s claim, secured creditors have a concurrent claim for the balance.

• Concurrent creditors, who do not enjoy any advantage over other creditors of the insolvent company. Should the free residue be insufficient to meet their claims each receives an equal portion of its claim by way of a dividend.

Under the Insolvency Act 24 of 1936, as amended (the “Insolvency Act”), a court may set aside a disposition of property not made for value by an insolvent company. The test for “insolvency” in this case is not a cash flow test, but whether or not the company’s liabilities exceed its assets. A court will set aside such a disposition if:

• the disposition was made two years before the liquidation of the insolvent company’s estate, and it is proven that, immediately after the disposition was made, the liabilities of the insolvent company exceeded its assets; or

• the disposition was made within two years of the liquidation of the insolvent company’s estate, and the person who benefited by the disposition is unable to prove that, immediately after the disposition was made, the assets of the insolvent company exceeded its liabilities.

In either case, if it is proven that “at any time after the making of the disposition” the liabilities of the insolvent company exceeded its assets by an amount less than the “value of the property disposed of”, the disposition may be set aside only to the extent of such excess.

The Insolvency Act provides for the setting aside of all dispositions in terms of which the insolvent company, prior to insolvency and in collusion with another person, disposed of property belonging to the company in a manner which had the effect of prejudicing its creditors or of preferring one creditor over another. There is legal authority that states that in order for any transaction to be set aside under this provision, the transaction must have been concluded with a fraudulent intention. This applies equally to actions by creditors under South African common law.

BD-#27827850-v10 77

The Insolvency Act also provides that if a disposition made by an insolvent, within six months before the date of sequestration, that has the effect of preferring one creditor above another, and immediately after the disposition the liabilities of the insolvent exceeded the value of its assets, may be set aside. The setting aside of such disposition may be avoided if it can be proven that such disposition was made in the ordinary course of business. Further, any disposition made by a company at a time when it liabilities exceeded its assets with the intention of preferring one creditor, may be set aside as an undue preference.

Moreover, the Insolvency Act provides that if a company transfers any business belonging to it or the goodwill of such business or any goods or property forming part thereof (save in the ordinary course of that business or for the purpose of securing the payment of a debt) and such company has not published a notice of the intended transfer in the Government Gazette within a period of not less than 30 and not more than 60 days prior to the date of such transfer, the transfer shall be void as against the creditors of the seller for a period of six months after such transfer and in addition shall be void against the Trustee if the estate of the seller is liquidated within such time period.

If an insolvency proceeding were to be commenced by or against us or any of our subsidiaries prior to the Security SPV having repossessed and disposed of the Collateral or otherwise completed the reorganization of the Collateral, the realization of the Collateral over which the Security SPV holds security will occur in terms of the provisions of the Insolvency Act. In terms of the Insolvency Act, a secured creditor such as the Security SPV is prohibited from repossessing its security from a debtor after the commencement of the winding up of the debtor. In terms of the 1973 Companies Act, (which per the Companies Act still applies to the liquidation of companies), the winding up of a debtor is deemed to commence at the time of the presentation to the court of the application for the winding up, with the result that the commencement of the winding up (provided that a winding up order is ultimately granted) is retrospective to the time that the application was first presented to the court. The liquidator will then realise the property in question and pay the Security SPV (as secured creditor) in priority to any other claim from the proceeds of the realization of the Collateral property constituting the security after deduction from such proceeds of certain costs of realization, including the liquidator’s remuneration. The liquidator may also, with creditors’ authorization, if the secured creditor has valued the security when proving its claim, “take over” the property at such value within three months from the date of his appointment or from the date of the proof of claim, whichever is the later. The parties may also agree to allow the Security SPV to realise the Collateral without an order of court (parate executie). Should such a right be agreed upon the Security SPV will have a right to take over the Collateral itself or to sell the Collateral by public auction to the highest bidder. Accordingly, it is impossible to predict how long payments under the Notes could be delayed following the commencement of insolvency proceedings and whether or to what extent Holders would be compensated for any delay in payment.

In addition, the Companies Act in South Africa has brought significant changes to the corporate law of South Africa, including introducing a new regime of “business rescue” for financially distressed companies, which has significantly affected the rights of creditors. We summarize certain relevant provisions below:

• Compromise with Creditors. The Companies Act contemplates a “compromise with creditors”, which may be proposed by the board of directors or, if a company is being wound-up, by the liquidator. To become effective, the compromise with creditors must be supported by a majority in number, representing at least 75% in value, of the creditors at a meeting called for that purpose. A proposal or a compromise with creditors may be submitted to court by the company for an order approving the proposal. A court may sanction the compromise if it considers it “just and equitable to do so” having consideration to the facts set out in the Companies Act. A court sanctioned compromise is binding on all creditors of the company or class of creditors, as the case may be. A compromise with creditors may involve the subordination of payment to certain creditors, the dilution of a creditor’s claim or other situations which may adversely affect a creditor’s claim. Since the Companies Act does not place an obligation on a company to obtain court approval of the proposal, on the literal meaning of the section, it is possible that all dissenting creditors will be bound by the compromise notwithstanding the absence of a court order sanctioning the proposal. As such, as long as a majority in number representing 75% in value of the creditors approve the proposed compromise, the compromise will be binding on all dissenting minority creditors without any court scrutiny to ensure that the proposal is just and equitable.

• Business Rescue. The concept of “business rescue” is similar to Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings in the United States. Business rescue is a non-judicial, pre-insolvency commercial process that allows a company that is “financially distressed” (defined as occurring where it seems reasonably likely that the company will not be able to pay its debts as they become due and payable during the ensuing six months or it seems reasonably likely that the company will become insolvent in the ensuing six months) and that appears to

BD-#27827850-v10 78

have a “reasonable prospect” of rescue to avoid liquidation by implementing a business rescue plan. Business rescue proceedings may be instituted by the board of directors of a company or by any affected person (including a shareholder, creditor, registered trade union or employee), on application to court or by the court of its own accord at any time during the course of any liquidation proceedings or proceedings to enforce any security against the company.

After initiating business rescue proceedings, the board of directors of a company or the court, as the case may be, must appoint a business rescue practitioner, who will assume full management control of the company in substitution for its board and pre-existing management. The business rescue plan must be approved by creditors and, if the plan alters the rights of the holders of the company’s securities, such holders must also approve the proposed business rescue plan.

A provision of an agreement relating to security granted by a company would, notwithstanding suspension of the same by a practitioner, continue to apply for the purposes of the disposal of the asset forming the subject matter of such security in respect of any proposed disposal of property by the company.

Practitioners’ powers have significant implications for claims of, and security held by, creditors. A practitioner may, for example, have the power to suspend provisions relating to creditors’ rights, while maintaining provisions relating to creditors’ performance obligations; however, as any cancellations will be part of the business rescue plan they will be subject to creditor approval.

During business rescue proceedings, a general moratorium is placed on legal proceedings against the Company and no legal action, including enforcement action, against the company, or in relation to property of the company, may be commenced except with inter alia the written approval of the practitioner or leave of court. The only recourse provided for the affected creditor whose agreement with the company, or any provision thereof, has been suspended either entirely, partially or conditionally, during the course of business rescue proceedings is to institute a claim for damages against the company.

The Companies Act provides a degree of protection of property interests of a party that has security over, or title interest in, property held by the company. It states that if the company wishes to dispose of any property in which another person has any security over, or title interest in, the company must obtain the prior consent of that other person, unless the proceeds of the disposal would be sufficient to fully discharge the indebtedness protected by that person’s security or the title interest and, following the disposal, either promptly pays to that person the sale proceeds attributable to that property up to the amount of the company’s indebtedness to that other person or provide security for the amount of those proceeds, to the reasonable satisfaction of that other person.

Once under business rescue, claims against the company will rank as follows: (a) the practitioner’s remuneration and expenses; (b) amounts due and payable to employees during business rescue proceedings; (c) post-commencement financing which is secured (in the order of preference in which they were incurred); (d) post-commencement financing which is unsecured (in the order of preference in which they were incurred); (e) secured financing which was incurred prior to the commencement of business rescue proceedings; (f) unsecured financing incurred prior to the commencement of business rescue proceedings; (g) all other unsecured claims against the company; and (h) shareholder claims against the company. No mention is made of secured claims prior to commencement of the business rescue proceedings in this section of the Companies Act. However, the Companies Act does state that to the extent that the practitioner’s remuneration and expenses are not fully paid, the practitioner’s claim for those amounts will rank in priority before the claims of all other secured and unsecured creditors. The business rescue regime is an entirely new regime and significant interpretive questions remain unanswered. Many of the important concepts are untested, and as such, it is impossible to predict what the impact of the regime ultimately will be.

• Reckless Trading. A company is prohibited from carrying on its business recklessly, with gross negligence, with intent to defraud any person or for any fraudulent purpose or to trade under insolvent circumstances. Directors who allow their companies to trade under such circumstances may be held personally liable for any loss or damages sustained by the company as a consequence of allowing the company to trade recklessly or under insolvent circumstances. The Companies and Intellectual Property Commission may issue a notice to a company where it has reasonable grounds to believe that the company is carrying on its business in a reckless manner or under insolvent circumstances to show cause why the company should be permitted to continue carrying on its business. If the company to whom the notice has been issued fails, within 20 business days, to satisfy the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission

BD-#27827850-v10 79

that it is not engaging in reckless trading, the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission is empowered to issue a compliance notice to the company requiring it to cease carrying on its business or trading.

Impeachable statutes under South African law may limit your rights as a holder of the Notes to enforce any security provided by the Guarantors.

Our obligations under the Notes are guaranteed by the Guarantors, and the Guarantees may be subject to review under the “impeachable transactions” provisions of the laws of South Africa, where we conduct our operations.

• In an insolvency proceeding, it is possible that creditors of the Guarantors may challenge the Guarantees and intercompany obligations as impeachable transactions. If so, such laws may permit a court, if it makes certain findings, to:

• avoid or invalidate all or a portion of the applicable Guarantor’s obligations under the Guarantees;

• direct that Holders return any amounts paid under the Guarantees to the applicable Guarantor or to a fund for the benefit of its creditors; or

• take other action that is detrimental to you.

If we cannot satisfy our obligations under the Notes and the Guarantees are found to represent an impeachable transaction, we cannot assure you that we will ever be able to repay in full any amounts outstanding under the Notes. In addition, the liability of each Guarantor under its Guarantee of the Notes is limited to the amount that will result in the Guarantee not constituting an impeachable transaction and there can be no assurance as to what standard a court would apply in making a determination of the maximum liability of such Guarantor under the Guarantee. For a description of certain impeachable transactions, see “—The insolvency laws of South Africa may not be as favourable to you as the bankruptcy laws of the jurisdiction with which you are familiar.”

The transfer of the Notes will be restricted, which may adversely affect the value of the Notes.

The Notes and the Guarantees have not been registered under the Securities Act or any U.S. state securities laws. Consequently the Notes may not be offered or sold in the United States unless registered under the Securities Act or pursuant to an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws, and Holders may be required to bear the cost of their investment in the Notes until their maturity. It is the obligation of each Holder to ensure that its offer and sale or resale of the Notes within the United States and other countries comply with applicable securities laws. See “Important Information” and “Notices to Investors”.

The Notes will initially be held in book-entry form and therefore you must rely on the procedures of the relevant clearing systems to exercise any rights and remedies.

The Notes have initially only been issued in global certificated form and held through Euroclear and Clearstream. Interests in the Global Notes (as defined below) trade in book-entry form only and Notes in definitive registered form, or definitive registered notes, will be issued in exchange for book-entry interests only in very limited circumstances. Owners of book-entry interests will not be considered owners or Holders. The common depositary, or its nominee, for Euroclear and/or Clearstream will be the sole registered holder of the Global Notes representing the Notes. Payments of principal, interest and other amounts owing on or in respect of the Global Notes representing the Notes will be made to the Paying Agent, which will make payments to Euroclear and Clearstream. Thereafter, these payments will be credited to participants’ accounts that hold book-entry interests in the Global Note representing the Notes and credited by such participants to indirect participants. After payment to Euroclear and Clearstream, the Issuer will have no responsibility or liability for the payment of interest, principal or other amounts to the owners of book-entry interests. Accordingly, if investors own a book-entry interest, they must rely on the procedures of Euroclear and Clearstream, and if investors are not participants in Euroclear and Clearstream, on the procedures of the participant through which they own their interest, to exercise any rights and obligations of a Holder under the applicable Trust Deed.

Unlike the Holders themselves, owners of book-entry interests will not have the direct right to act upon the Issuer’s solicitations for consents, requests for waivers or other actions from Holders. Instead, if an investor owns a book-entry interest, it will be permitted to act only to the extent it has received appropriate proxies to do

BD-#27827850-v10 80

so from Euroclear and Clearstream. The procedures implemented for the granting of such proxies may not be sufficient to enable such investor to vote on a timely basis.

Similarly, upon the occurrence of an event of default under the applicable Trust Deed, unless and until definitive registered notes are issued in respect of all book-entry interests, if investors own book-entry interests, they will be restricted to acting through Euroclear and Clearstream. The procedures to be implemented through Euroclear and Clearstream may not be adequate to ensure the timely exercise of rights under the Notes. See “Book-Entry; Delivery and Form.”

The Issuer is incorporated in South Africa and you may not be able to enforce foreign judgments against the Issuer

The Issuer is a company incorporated in, and under the laws issued by, South Africa. Our headquarters are located in South Africa and substantially all of our assets are located in South Africa. Most of the Issuer’s directors and executive officers reside in South Africa. As a result, you may have difficulties effecting service of process in the United Kingdom upon the Issuer or its directors and officers in connection with any lawsuits related to the Notes, or enforcing against any of them judgments obtained in English courts. In addition, there is doubt as to the enforceability in South Africa, in original actions or actions for the enforcement of judgments of English courts.

Subject to the permission of the South African Minister of Trade and Industry in terms of the Protection of Businesses Act, 1978 (the “PB Act”), any judgment obtained in respect of the Notes in a court of competent jurisdiction outside South Africa will be recognized and enforced in accordance with ordinary procedure applicable under South African law for the enforcement of foreign judgments, provided that:

• the judgment was final and conclusive, was not obtained by fraud or in any manner opposed to natural justice that the enforcement of the judgment is not contrary to public policy and that the foreign court in question had jurisdiction and competence according to applicable principles of South African law;

• a foreign judgment will probably not be recognized in South Africa if the foreign court exercised jurisdiction over the defendant solely by virtue of an attachment to found jurisdiction or on the basis of domicile alone; and

• the South African courts will not enforce foreign revenue or penal laws.

The interests of controlling shareholders may be inconsistent with the interests of Holders.

The interests of principal shareholders, in certain circumstances, may conflict with your interests as Holders. Principal shareholders will have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day to day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve any other changes to our operations. For example, principal shareholders could vote to cause us to incur additional indebtedness, to sell certain material assets or make dividend distributions, in each case, so long as the Trust Deed, the Senior Facilities and the Intercreditor Agreement so permit. The interests of principal shareholders could conflict with interests of holders of Notes, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Principal shareholders could also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings, dividend distributions or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments although such transactions might involve risks to the holders of Notes. In addition, principal shareholders may come to own businesses that directly compete with our business.

Credit ratings may not reflect all risks

As of the date of these Listing Particulars, the Notes are rated B and Caa1 by S&P and Moody’s respectively. One or more other independent credit rating agencies may from time to time assign credit ratings to the Notes. The ratings may not reflect the potential impact of all risks related to the structure, market, additional factors discussed above, and other factors that may affect the value of the Notes. A credit rating is not a recommendation to buy, sell or hold securities and may be revised or withdrawn by the rating agency at any time.

Generally, European regulated investors are restricted under the CRA Regulation from using credit ratings for regulatory purposes, unless such ratings are issued by a credit rating agency established in the EU and registered

BD-#27827850-v10 81

under the CRA Regulation (and such registration has not been withdrawn or suspended), subject to transitional provisions that apply in certain circumstances while whilst the registration application is pending. Such general restriction will also apply in the case of credit ratings issued by non-EU credit rating agencies, unless the relevant credit ratings are endorsed by an EU-registered credit rating agency or the relevant non-EU rating agency is certified in accordance with the CRA Regulation (and such endorsement action or certification, as the case may be, has not been withdrawn or suspended). The list of registered and certified rating agencies published by the European Securities and Markets Authority (“ESMA”) on its website in accordance with the CRA Regulation is not conclusive evidence of the status of the relevant rating agency included in such list, as there may be delays between certain supervisory measures being taken against a relevant rating agency and the publication of the updated ESMA list.

BD-#27827850-v10 82

THE CELL C RECAPITALIZATION

Overview of the Cell C Recapitalization

On December 10, 2015, we announced a proposed recapitalization that intended to reduce our Net Debt to a maximum of R8.0 billion, including through the refinancing of all of our existing debt facilities and the redemption in full of our outstanding 8.625% First Priority Senior Secured Notes due 2018 (“Existing Cell C Notes”).

Also on December 10, 2015, Blue Label, our employees and members of our senior management team submitted conditional binding offers to co-invest in us along with 3C. On December 18, 2015 and December 29, 2015, the Board of Directors and the board of directors of 3C (our immediate parent company), respectively, accepted conditional binding offers from Blue Label, our employees and members of our senior management to subscribe for our outstanding shares. Subsequently, the structure of the proposed transaction was amended by the parties thereto.

On October 10, 2016 the final terms of the Cell C Recapitalization were announced and on November 15, 2016 the terms of the Cell C Recapitalization were amended to reduce our Net Debt upon the implementation of the Cell C Recapitalization to R6.0 billion from R8.0 billion with existing (but reduced) debt facilities remaining at the Issuer. We also entered into new hedging arrangements to mitigate foreign exchange risk in respect of the Notes following the Completion Date. On February 27, 2017 we entered into a binding umbrella restructure agreement with our key lenders, a majority of holders of our Existing Cell C Notes and our new equity investors.

As a consequence of the Cell C Recapitalization, our historical principal shareholder, OTL, reduced its beneficial interest in us in favour of MS15. At the same time, new shares were subscribed for by:

• Blue Label, via subsidiary BLT (through a combination of cash and settlement of existing trade payables); • Net1; • members of our senior management (collectively, “M5”); • MS15, through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which is expected to qualify as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes; and • SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 (on behalf of 3C).

M5’s investment in our share capital is designed to incentivise members of senior management and retain them for at least five years by virtue of the restrictions on their right to elect to convert their Class B ordinary shares into Class A ordinary shares (see “—Equity Structure”) for the rights and restrictions attributed to M5’s Class B ordinary shares). MS15’s investment in our share capital is designed to incentivise our employees. Our equity structure immediately following the Completion Date, which was approved by the Board of Directors and 3C’s board of directors, is as indicated below.

Pre-Cell C Post-Cell C Recapitalization Recapitalization beneficial beneficial ownership ownership interest Equity injection interest(1) SPV1 R3.6 billion (7) 11.8% SPV2 R4.5 billion (8) 16.0% SPV3 R0.7 billion (9) 2.2% Blue Label R5.5 billion(4) 45.0% Net1 R2.0 billion 15.0% MS15(5) Nominal amount 5.0% M5(6) Nominal amount 5.0% Total 100% R16.3 billion(3) 100% ______(1) At closing of the Cell C Recapitalization. (2) Prior to the Cell C Recapitalization, we were wholly owned by 3C, in which OTL has a 75% beneficial interest through (i) Lanun, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that directly holds 15% of 3C and (ii) OTSA, a wholly owned subsidiary of OTL that indirectly holds 60% of 3C. CellSAf, a BEE consortium in South Africa, owns the remaining 25% of 3C. 3C holds Class A ordinary shares. (3) The Total Equity Injection is the sum of the equity injection of Blue Label and Net1, plus the nominal contributions made by SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 by way of an upliftment of to them of certain financial indebtedness from Cell C, for an aggregate amount of the equivalent of R8.8 billion.

BD-#27827850-v10 83

(4) Reflects R2,800 million of equity injected in cash, paid by Blue Label at the Completion Date,. The remaining portion of Blue Label’s equity injection has been offset by the settlement of a projected outstanding amount of R2,700 million owing to Blue Label as at the Completion Date, which is accounted for as abnormal working capital and which will be converted into equity at the Completion Date. (5) MS15 holds Class A ordinary shares, which have been subscribed for a nominal amount of R2,500 (see “The Cell C Recapitalization.”). (6) Members of senior management hold Class B ordinary shares, which they (acting in concert) can elect to convert into Class A ordinary shares five years from the Completion Date, or upon the occurrence of certain other events, which have been subscribed for a nominal amount of R2,500 (see “The Cell C Recapitalization”). (7) SPV1 has issued the 2022 Notes which have been used to discharge part of Cell C’s liability in relation to Existing Cell C Notes for the equivalent of R3.6 bn and in consideration have received 59,000,000 Class A ordinary shares in Cell C. (8) SPV2 has assumed the SPV2 Loan which has been used to discharge Cell C’s liability in relation to existing CDB Facilities and ICBC Facilities for the equivalent of R4.5bn and in consideration has received 80,000,000 Class A ordinary shares in Cell C. (9) SPV3 has assumed the SPV3 Loan and we have paid in consideration an amount equal to the value of the SPV3 Loan which amount has been left outstanding on loan account.

The Cell C Recapitalization was conditional upon, among other things: • customary regulatory approvals being obtained; • the shareholders of Blue Label (which is a public company in South Africa) approving the transaction, Blue Label and the other shareholders funding their respective equity injections in exchange for Cell C shares; • our Net Debt reducing to a maximum of R6.0 billion by the repayment of existing indebtedness; • our entering into new financing arrangements with CDB, ICBC, Nedbank and DBSA; and

• OTL, Blue Label, Net1, M5, MS15, SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 delivering or ensuring that there is delivered to each subscriber in Cell C’s shares, various approvals, corporate documents, announcements and/or resignation letters, as applicable.

Debt structure

As part of the Cell C Recapitalization:

• SPV1 issued the 2022 Notes and accordingly partially assumed part of our obligations under the Existing Cell C Notes. In consideration for SPV1 issuing the 2022 Notes, we paid a consideration to SPV1 equal to the value of the 2022 Notes which amount has been left outstanding on loan account (the “SPV1 Consideration Loan”). SPV1 subscribed for shares in Cell C constituting 11.8% of Cell C’s entire ordinary issued share capital immediately following Completion (“SPV1 Shares”). The subscription price payable by SPV1 for the SPV1 Shares was an amount equal to the amount of the SPV1 Consideration Loan (“SPV1 Subscription Price”) which amount has been left outstanding on loan account. The SPV1 Consideration Loan owing by Cell C to SPV1 has been set-off against the SPV1 Subscription Price owing by SPV1 to Cell C;

• SPV2 assumed from each of our existing debt with CDB and ICBC a loan (the “SPV2 Loan”) and in consideration thereof we paid consideration to SPV2 equal to the SPV2 Loan, which amount has been left outstanding on loan account (the “SPV2 Consideration Loan”). SPV2 subscribed for shares in Cell C constituting 16% of Cell C’s entire ordinary issued share capital immediately following Completion (the “SPV2 Shares”). The subscription price payable by SPV2 for the SPV2 Shares was an amount equal to the amount of the SPV2 Consideration Loan (the “SPV2 Subscription Price”) which amount has been left outstanding on loan account. The SPV2 Consideration Loan owing by Cell C to SPV2 has been set-off against the SPV2 Subscription Price owing by SPV2 to Cell C. The above mechanics will repay the existing debt of CDB (other than a cash payment which was made to CDB on the Completion Date) under our €240 million facility in full (as amended and restated, the “CDB Refi Facility”), our $360 million credit facility partially (as amended and restated, the “CDB Capex Facility”) and our $131 million credit facility in full (as amended and restated, the “CDB Second Capex Facility” and, together with the CDB Refi Facility and the CDB Capex Facility, the “Existing CDB Facilities”) with the remaining existing debt being refinanced by way of an amendment and restatement of the CDB Capex Facility (the “New CDB Facilities”);

• The remaining existing debt of ICBC (other than a cash payment of approximately ZAR954 million which was made to ICBC on the Completion Date) under our $197 million term facility and our $240

BD-#27827850-v10 84

million and ZAR1.3 billion term facility has been refinanced by way of a new facility between ICBC and Cell C (the “New ICBC Facilities”);

• SPV3 subscribed for shares in Cell C constituting 2.2% of Cell C’s entire ordinary issued share capital immediately following Completion (the “SPV3 Shares”). The subscription price paid by SPV3 for the SPV3 Shares (the “SPV3 Subscription Price”), financed by way of a new term facility provided to SPV3 by Nedbank. Cell C used the SPV3 Subscription Price to partially repay the debt owed by Cell C to Nedbank. The remaining existing debt of Nedbank (other than a cash payment which was made to Nedbank on the Completion Date) under term and revolving credit facilities was refinanced by way of a new term facility in an amount of R756 million (the “New Nedbank Facility”); and

• other than a cash payment of R60 million, our R325 million bilateral facility with DBSA has been amended and restated.

The refinancing of our pre-existing debt has deleveraged our capital structure, significantly reduced our financing cost in absolute terms and significantly reduced our exposure to foreign exchange risk. While the Notes have foreign exchange risk, we have mitigated this through hedging arrangements following the Completion Date. The significant deleveraging that was achieved pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization will improve our operating cash flow as well as our profitability, better positioning us for sustainable growth and providing us with greater scope to further align our interests with our suppliers and distributors and forge strategic relationships with third parties, including potentially our competitors, to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies. We expect to have greater capacity to invest in growth initiatives, including capital expenditures to fund network improvements. Our improved balance sheet has reduced management’s focus on addressing our capital structure and on fund-raising efforts, enabling them to instead focus on achieving our strategies. We believe M5 and MS15’s investment in our share capital will incentivise management and our employees and in the case of management is designed to retain executives for at least five years to support the implementation of our strategy. OTL will no longer guarantee our debt obligations following the Completion Date. We also believe that the Cell C Recapitalization provided a compelling value proposition for Blue Label, Net1 and us.

Notes Hedging Arrangement

The Issuer will use its commercially reasonable efforts to hedge its currency risk in respect of the principal and interest on the Notes and the CDB Facilities (the “Hedge”). The Hedge has been concluded with one or more relevant counterparties (the “Hedge Counterparties”) under certain trade confirmations (the “Hedge Agreement”).

The ability of the Hedge Counterparties to take certain actions under the Hedge Agreement, including the ability to terminate the Hedge and to enforce the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral is limited in certain circumstances in accordance with the provisions of the Intercreditor Agreement.

The Hedge Counterparties will share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

Security and Guarantees

The Issuer’s obligations under the Trust Deed and the Notes are fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed, by Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008017/07), Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008003/07), Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2009/04432/07) (the “Guarantors”) (each, a “Guarantee” and together, the “Guarantees”). Pursuant to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, the Issuer undertakes to procure that any new subsidiary of the Issuer becomes a Guarantor, subject to certain exceptions. See “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”.

The obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Trust Deed and the Guarantees, as applicable, are secured by first ranking security interests (the “First Ranking Security Interests”) granted in favour of the Security SPV on an equal and rateable basis with the lender(s) under the New CDB Facilities, the New ICBC Facilities, the New Nedbank Facility and the New DBSA Facility (such facilities, together, the “Senior Facilities” and such lenders, together, the “Senior Lenders”) and counterparties to certain hedging obligations (such counterparties having acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (such hedging obligations the “Hedging Arrangement” and such counterparties, the “Hedge Counterparties in collateral that consist of

BD-#27827850-v10 85

substantially all of the existing and after-acquired personal property and the other assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors, to the extent such assets are assignable (such rights and interests, together with all other rights, interests and assets that from time to time to indirectly secure the Notes and the Guarantees, the “Collateral”).

The Senior Lenders, the Hedge Counterparties, the Trustee and certain other senior finance parties (“Secured Creditors”) also share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with Holders.

The First Ranking Security Interests were not granted directly to the Holders or the Trustee for the Holders. Instead, the security interests have been granted to a special purpose vehicle, the Security SPV, and the Security SPV in turn provided a guarantee to the Trustee, the Senior Lenders and the Hedge Counterparties, guaranteeing the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement (“SPV Guarantee”). The Trustee is not, therefore, entitled to take any enforcement action with respect to the security interests in our assets other than through the guarantee from the Security SPV.

The Issuer and the Guarantors have entered into an amended and restated counter indemnity agreement in terms of which they have agreed, among other things, to indemnify the Security SPV against all and any claims which may be made against the Security SPV by the Security Trustee under the SPV Guarantee (the “Counter Indemnity”).

The First Ranking Security Interests have been granted by way of:

• Special Notarial Bond(s), which hypothecate specified network equipment in favour of the Security SPV and provide a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

• a Cession and Pledge in Security, which pledge and cede all of the Issuer’s rights to and interests in the shares of the Guarantors held by the Issuer, as well as the shareholder claims against the Guarantor, in favour of the Security SPV and provide a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

• Cessions in Security, which cede in security and provide the Security SPV with a first-ranking security interest in, inter alia, the following assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (to the extent such assets are assignable): authorizations and licences; leases; agreements; trade receivables; insurance proceeds; bank accounts; investments and contractual claims. Our licenses may not be assigned without the consent of ICASA and many of our network agreements, leases and other agreements may prohibit assignment entirely or require the consent of the counterparty in order to grant a security interest in the agreements.

• General Notarial Bonds, which hypothecate all moveable and incorporeal assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors. The General Notarial Bonds merely confer a preferred right, such right ranking in priority only to the rights of unsecured creditors, to the Security SPV in respect of the assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors that have not otherwise been pledged.

• a Trademark Deed of Security in terms of which the Issuer will pledge all its registered, pending and future trademarks in favour of the Security SPV and provide a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

For further information regarding the security package granted in respect of the Notes, see “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”.

Intercreditor Agreement

The Issuer, the Trustee, the Security SPV and the Security Agent (as defined below) have entered into an intercreditor agreement with, inter alios, the agents and lender(s) under the New CDB Facilities, the New ICBC Facility, the New Nedbank Facility and the New DBSA Facilities and the Security Agent that governs the relationships and relative priorities among, inter alia, the Senior Lenders and the Trustee on behalf of itself and the Holders (the “Intercreditor Agreement”).

The Intercreditor Agreement sets out, among other things, the relative ranking of and priority of payment of the Issuer’s indebtedness, the relative ranking and priority of the First Ranking Security Interests, when payments can be made in respect of certain indebtedness, when enforcement actions can be taken in respect of such indebtedness, when enforcement actions can be taken in respect of the Collateral, the terms pursuant to which

BD-#27827850-v10 86

subordinated liabilities will be subordinated and when security and guarantees will be released to permit a sale of the Collateral.

The Intercreditor Agreement contains provisions relating to future indebtedness that may be incurred by the Issuer, provided that such payments are made in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the relevant Senior Debt Documents. The Intercreditor Agreement provides, subject to the provisions regarding permitted payments and application of proceeds following an enforcement event, that the right and priority of payment of all present and future liabilities and obligations in respect of, inter alia, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement, rank pari passu in right and priority of payment without any preference between them. These liabilities rank ahead of any subordinated liabilities. The Issuer and the Guarantors may not make any payments of the subordinated liabilities at any time prior to the full discharge of all senior liabilities, including under the Senior Facilities and Hedging Arrangement and the Notes. The Intercreditor Agreement does not purport to rank the subordinated liabilities among themselves.

Under the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders are required to share recovery proceeds with the other secured creditors and are subject to restrictions on their ability to enforce the First Ranking Security Interests. In the event of enforcement of the Collateral, the Holders will receive proceeds from the Collateral on a pro rata basis with the lender(s) under each Senior Facility. Any additional Senior Lenders and Hedge Counterparties that become parties to the Intercreditor Agreement would also share in the Collateral on a pari passu basis to the extent of obligations owed under the Secured Credit Facilities or Hedging Arrangement to which they are party. The senior creditors may take any security other than the Collateral or any guarantee, indemnity, surety or other assurance against loss from the Group if such security or other assurance against loss is shared with all senior creditors pari passu. The subordinated creditors may not take any security or any guarantee, indemnity, surety or other assurance against loss from the Group at any time prior to the full discharge of all senior liabilities. The Intercreditor Agreement also provides for the passage of an agreed standstill period for certain enforcement actions relating to the Collateral and agreed voting thresholds based on one or more percentages of the aggregate amount of indebtedness secured thereby. In addition, under the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders will receive proceeds from the enforcement of the Collateral only after certain amounts owing to the Security Agent, the Trustee, any receiver and certain creditor representatives have been repaid in full.

As a result of the voting provisions set out in the Intercreditor Agreement, certain amendments and waivers under the Intercreditor Agreement and in relation to the Collateral have to be consented to by the required majority of Senior Creditors (which, inter alia, includes the Senior Noteholders and the Senior Lenders). The required consent varies with the type of amendment or waiver being sought. The Intercreditor Agreement provides that the Security Trustee will serve as the security agent (the “Security Agent”) for the secured parties under the Notes, the Revolving Facility, and any additional secured debt permitted to be incurred, and will act only as provided for in the Intercreditor Agreement.

In accordance with the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Security Agent shall act or, as the case may be, shall instruct the Security SPV to act in accordance with any instructions given to it by the relevant Senior Creditors or, if so instructed by the relevant Senior Creditor, refrain or, as the case may be, instruct the Security SPV to refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Security Agent or, as the case may be, Security SPV.

By accepting a Note, a Holder is deemed to have agreed to and accepted the terms and conditions of the Intercreditor Agreement, any supplements, amendments or modifications thereto, and any future intercreditor agreement required under the Trust Deed, and to have authorized the Trustee to enter into it on its behalf. The preceding description is a concise summary of certain provisions that are contained in the Intercreditor Agreement. It does not restate the Intercreditor Agreement in its entirety nor does it describe provisions relating to the rights and obligations of holders of other classes of the Issuer’s or Guarantors’ debt. As such, we urge you to read the Intercreditor Agreement because it, and not the preceding discussion, defines the rights of the Holders.

Equity Structure

Prior to the Completion Date, we were wholly owned by 3C, in which OTL has a 75% beneficial interest. Our principal indirect shareholders included Saudi Oger and Saudi Telecom. Between them, Saudi Oger and Saudi Telecom, directly or indirectly, had an 82.3% beneficial ownership interest in OTL and an indirect 75% beneficial interest in us. Saudi Oger and Saudi Telecom no longer hold a beneficial interest in us following the Cell C Recapitalization. CellSAf, a BEE consortium in South Africa, owns the remaining 25% of 3C.

BD-#27827850-v10 87

Immediately following the Completion Date,

• members of our senior management (collectively, M5) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 25,000,000 Class B ordinary shares);

• MS15 (through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which is expected to qualify as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes) beneficially owns 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 25,000,000 Class A ordinary shares);

• Net1 beneficially owns 15% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 75,000,000 Class A ordinary shares);

• Blue Label (via a subsidiary) beneficially owns 45% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 225,000,000 Class A ordinary shares); and

• three South African incorporated special purpose vehicles, SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3, beneficially own 11.8%, 16% and 2.2%, respectively, of our ordinary shares (in the form of 150,000,000 Class A ordinary shares); and

• each of SPV1, SPV2, and SPV3 are wholly owned by 3C, therefore, diluting 3C’s indirect beneficial interest to 30%.

Our two classes of ordinary shares have the following rights:

Class A ordinary shares. Each Class A ordinary share entitles the holder to (i) vote on any matter to be decided by a vote of shareholders, (ii) participate in any distribution to the shareholders and (iii) participate in the distribution of the residual value of Cell C upon its dissolution.

Class B ordinary shares. Each Class B ordinary share entitles the holder to participate out of the profits of Cell C, in any distribution by it to holders of shares on a pari passu basis including, without limitation, in the distribution of the residual value of Cell C upon its dissolution. Any distributions (including dividends) declared by Cell C will accrue to the holders of Class B ordinary shares but will not be paid at the time of the declaration by Cell C. Payment of any accrued distributions (including dividends) will be made on the date that the Class B ordinary shares are converted into Class A ordinary shares. At every shareholder meeting of Cell C at which M5 is entitled to exercise voting rights, each Class B ordinary share entitles the holder to vote on any matter to be decided by a vote of shareholders and the provisions of our Amended Memorandum of Incorporation (as defined below) relating to shareholders meetings shall apply mutatis mutandis. M5 may not dispose of its Class B ordinary shares to any other person although they can be converted into Class A ordinary shares as follows:

• M5 can elect (i) five years after the Completion Date, (ii) on the business day prior to the day on which it is obligated to dispose or all or some of its shares under the Cell C Shareholders Agreement or (iii) on the business day prior to the day on which it is entitled to dispose of all or some of its shares under the Cell C Shareholders Agreement or (iv) on written notice on termination of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement, to have its Class B ordinary shares converted into an equivalent number of Class A ordinary shares.

• Upon termination of employment of a member of M5, that member will be entitled, but not obligated, to convert all of its Class B ordinary shares to Class A ordinary shares and (i) in the event of a no fault termination (as set out in the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation), no consideration will be payable upon conversion, but (ii) in the event of a fault termination (as set out in the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation), consideration for each Class B ordinary share will be due and payable by such member to 3C upon conversion, provided that if such member does not make payment within 30 days of its shares being converted, those shares will be repurchased by Cell C for an aggregate consideration of R1.

Certain Contracts relating to the Cell C Recapitalization

We have negotiated various agreements in connection with the Cell C Recapitalization, including (i) a master implementation agreement (the “Master Implementation Agreement”); (ii) an equity implementation

BD-#27827850-v10 88

agreement (the “Equity Implementation Agreement”); (iii) seven subscription agreements; (iv) a shareholders agreement; (v) a service level agreement; and (vi) an indemnity agreement.

In addition, Cell C has amended and restated its memorandum of incorporation, principally to reflect or be consistent with the terms of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement. The amended and restated memorandum of incorporation (the “Amended Memorandum of Incorporation”) also sets out the authorized share capital of Cell C, including the rights and restrictions attributable to each class of its ordinary shares, as well as procedures with respect to board meetings and shareholder meetings and composition of the Board of Directors.

Master Implementation and Funds Flow Agreement

The Company has entered into a Master Implementation and Funds Flow Agreement with various parties (see below), pursuant to which such parties agreed to implement inter alia the following simultaneous steps on the Completion Date:

• the release of any and all security, guarantees and other forms of credit granted by any members of the OTL group to any creditors in relation to the Company’s debt (excluding any security provided under new security documents), and the realisation of certain assets of OTL, in favour of SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3;

• the subscription by Net1 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the Net1 Subscription Agreement;

• the subscription by M5 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the M5 Subscription Agreement;

• the subscription by M15 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the M15 Subscription Agreement;

• the subscription by Blue Label (via BLT) for shares in the Company, pursuant to the BLT Subscription Agreement;

• the subscription by SPV1 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the SPV1 Subscription Agreement, and the payment of the subscription price (partly by way of set-off) by SPV1, pursuant to the Bondholders Repayment and Interest Payment Agreement;

• the subscription by SPV2 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the SPV2 Subscription Agreement, and the payment of the subscription price (partly by way of set-off) by SPV2, pursuant to the CDB and ICBC Repayment and Interest Payment Agreement;

• the subscription by SPV3 for shares in the Company, pursuant to the SPV3 Subscription Agreement, and the payment of the subscription price (partly by way of set-off) by SPV3, pursuant to the Nedbank Repayment and Interest Repayment Agreement;

• the assumption by the Company of the obligation to pay SPV1 certain amounts, to remain outstanding on loan account as between the Company and SPV1, pursuant to the Bondholder Repaymnet and Interest Payment Agreement;

• the assumption by the Company of the obligation to pay SPV2 certain amounts, to remain outstanding on loan account as between the Company and SPV2, pursuant to the terms of the CDB and ICBC Repayment and Interest Payment Agreement;

• the assumption by the Company of the obligation to pay SPV3 certain amounts, to remain outstanding on loan account as between the Company and SPV3, pursuant to the terms of the Nedbank Repayment and Interest Payment Agreement;

• the advancement of loans by CDB and ICBC to SPV2, pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalisation;

• the advancement of a loan by Nedbank to SPV3, pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalisation;

• the issue of the Notes and the 2022 Notes by the Company and SPV1 respectively, in accordance with the terms of the relevant Transaction Documents; and

BD-#27827850-v10 89

• the repayment of certain amounts outstanding and payment of interest to Bondholders under the Bondholder Repayment and Interest Payment Agreement.

Subscription Agreements

SPV1 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and SPV1, relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class A ordinary shares in Cell C by SPV1, was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, provided for SPV1’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing approximately 11.8% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date. The subscription price was paid by SPV1 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Master Implementation Agreement (which will amount to the SPV1 Consideration Loan).

SPV2 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and SPV2, relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class A ordinary shares in Cell C by SPV2, was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, provided for SPV2’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing approximately 16% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date. The subscription price was paid by SPV2 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Master Implementation Agreement (which will amount to the SPV2 Consideration Loan).

SPV3 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and SPV3, relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class A ordinary shares in Cell C by SPV3, was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, provided for SPV3’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing approximately 2.2% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date. The subscription price was paid by SPV3 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Master Implementation Agreement (which will amount to the SPV3 Consideration Loan).

Blue Label Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and the Blue Label Subsidiary, relating to, inter alia, the subscription of shares in Cell C by the Blue Label Subsidiary (on behalf of Blue Label), was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement and provided for the Blue Label Subsidiary’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing approximately 45% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date. The subscription price was paid by the Blue Label Subsidiary to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Equity Implementation Agreement and the Master Implementation Agreement (which provide for the payment of R5.5 billion at the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization).

Net1 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and Net1 relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class A ordinary shares in Cell C by them, was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, and provided for Net1’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date subject to the terms and conditions contained in the Net1 Subscription Agreement, the Equity Implementation Agreement and the Master Implementation Agreement. The subscription price was paid by Net1 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Equity Implementation Agreement and the Master Implementation Agreement (which provide for the payment of R2 billion at the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization).

M5 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and M5 relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class B ordinary shares in Cell C by them, is conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, and provides for M5’s obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class B ordinary shares representing 5% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date subject to the terms and conditions contained in the M5 Subscription Agreement, the Equity Implementation Agreement and the

BD-#27827850-v10 90

Master Implementation Agreement. The subscription price was paid by M5 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Master Implementation Agreement (which provide for the payment of a nominal amount at the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization).

MS15 Subscription Agreement

The subscription agreement between Cell C and MS15 (through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which is expected to qualify as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes) relating to, inter alia, the subscription of Class A ordinary shares in Cell C by them was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement, and provided for their obligation to subscribe for, and Cell C’s obligation to issue, Class A ordinary shares representing 5% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Cell C following the Completion Date subject to the terms and conditions contained in the MS15 Subscription Agreement, the Equity Implementation Agreement and the Master Implementation Agreement. The subscription price was paid by MS15 to Cell C at the time and in the manner provided for in the Master Implementation Agreement (which provides for the payment of a nominal amount at the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization.

OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement

Cell C and ATC, among others, entered into an amended and restated master lease agreement on March 7, 2011, pursuant to which Cell C was granted certain rights and incurred certain obligations in respect of certain electronic communications network towers. As security for the obligations of Cell C owed to ATC under the master lease agreement (the “ATC Master Lease”), OTL has guaranteed the due and proper performance of Cell C’s obligations (the “ATC Guarantee”), which guarantee falls away at the end of the second quarter following Cell C’s debt to EBITDA leverage ratio reaching or falling below 3.75x. Cell C’s debt to EBITDA leverage ratio has reached or fallen below 3.75x following the Completion Date. Following the Completion Date, OTL has the benefit of an irrevocable and unconditional indemnity from Cell C under the OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement, for any and all claims that ATC may bring against OTL under the ATC Guarantee. The OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement is conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement.

Potential Cell C liability

The subscription agreements that we have entered into with each of the investors that are subscribing in our shares pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization, expose us to liability for any potential claims that may be brought for breach of our representations and warranties, which claims may be brought by each investor until 60 days after such investor has received our annual consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2017, signed by our auditors.

The subscription agreement entered into with the Blue Label Subsidiary and Net1 also includes indemnification provisions, under which we have agreed to irrevocably and unconditionally indemnify Blue Label and Net1, respectively, and hold them harmless, pro rata and in proportion to their shareholding in Cell C, against any losses incurred by it or imposed on us in connection with any assessments arising, directly or indirectly, from, or in connection with, any costs or taxes arising, including any reduction of tax losses, from the deduction of interest which is found to be non-deductible, in respect of any period prior to the Completion Date, which claim for losses must be made by the fifth anniversary of the Completion Date. Our liability under this indemnification provision is limited to R75 million.

Our liability under the subscription agreements for breach of warranty, representation, or otherwise (other than with regard to our indemnification obligations under the subscription agreements) will not exceed the subscription price that the relevant investor will pay to subscribe for its shares in us pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

Cell C Shareholders Agreement

The shareholders agreement between Cell C, the Blue Label Subsidiary, Net1, M5, MS15, SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 relating to the holding of Cell C shares by each of them (the “Cell C Shareholders Agreement”), was conditional on the effectiveness of the Equity Implementation Agreement. Certain provisions of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement are described below.

The Cell C Shareholders Agreement prescribes certain limitations on borrowings, such that our leverage:

BD-#27827850-v10 91

• from the effective date of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement to December 31, 2017, may not exceed a level where its net debt (as defined therein) exceeds 4.0x of our last 12 months EBITDA (“LTM EBITDA”), calculated quarterly; and

• after December 31, 2017, may not exceed 3.5x of our LTM EBITDA, calculated quarterly.

The Cell C Shareholders Agreement sets out a dividend policy for us, including restrictions on our ability to pay dividends. Subject to our working capital requirements and investment commitments for the following 12 months, as well as any additional restrictions that may be contained in our Amended Memorandum of Incorporation, we are to declare the maximum amount of dividends semi-annually with effect from 2017; provided that if our net debt (following the proposed dividend)/LTM EBITDA (as evidenced by a certificate duly issued by our auditors at the relevant time of declaring the dividend) would be:

• equal or greater than 4.0x, then no dividend shall be paid;

• greater than 3.5x but less than 4.0x, then the dividend cannot exceed R100 million (gross of applicable dividends tax);

• greater than 3.0x but less than 3.5x, then the dividend cannot exceed R200 million (gross of applicable dividends tax); and

• less than or equal to 3.0x, then the maximum dividend shall be paid (which amount will not be less than R200 million, gross of applicable dividends tax).

The EBITDA measure presented in the Cell C Shareholders Agreement is unlikely to be directly comparable to the calculation of EBITDA in these Listing Particulars.

Under this agreement, we may not declare dividends until all claims by any shareholder that has advanced loans to us have been repaid in full (unless otherwise agreed) and, its ability to pay dividends is subject to its restrictions on leverage.

The Cell C Shareholders Agreement sets out our funding policies, which shall be determined by our Board of Directors from time to time. To the extent that we require funding, (i) we shall firstly look to our own cash resources; (ii) secondly, if our own cash resources are insufficient for the purposes in question, we shall seek out third-party funding to the extent required, based on our creditworthiness and upon such terms and conditions as the Board of Directors may think fit, and/or (ii) thirdly, if we are unable to source third-party funding on terms reasonably acceptable to the Board of Directors and within such reasonable time period as may be acceptance in the circumstances, we shall seek out shareholder loans in accordance with the provisions of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement, though none of the shareholders are obligated to provide any such loans to us.

The Cell C Shareholders Agreement regulates the transfer and disposal of our shares, including pre-emption, tag-along, drag-along and forced disposal rights. No shareholder may dispose of any of our shares except as specifically provided or permitted under the Cell C Shareholders Agreement. Pre-emptive rights apply to all shareholders wishing to dispose of their shares in Cell C. The Blue Label Subsidiary is permitted to sell its shares in Cell C to another wholly owned subsidiary of Blue Label or to merge its interest into Blue Label as part of an internal restructuring in good faith without triggering pre-emptive rights. Blue Label and Net1 have a reciprocal right of first refusal on any shares in Cell C that the other of them wishes to dispose of, before they are is permitted to offer it to a third party. Should any shareholder, other than M5, agree to acquire more than 50% of the shares of Cell C, M5 will be entitled to put its entire shareholding to that shareholder at a price determined in accordance with the Cell C Shareholders Agreement. Also, should any shareholder, other than M5, agree to acquire more than 50% of the shares of Cell C, that shareholder will have the option to call upon M5’s shares and oblige M5 to sell its shares to that shareholder, also at a price determined in accordance with the Cell C Shareholders Agreement.

Should our current CEO cease to be employed as CEO for reasons resulting in him qualifying as a good leaver, he shall be entitled to put the number of shares he owns in Cell C to us at a price determined in accordance with the Cell C Shareholders Agreement.

It is the stated intention of the shareholders to the Cell C Shareholders Agreement to pursue, in good faith, an initial public offering or listing for trading on a recognized stock exchange of our shares within a reasonable time following the conclusion of the Cell C Shareholders Agreement. The Board of Directors may, at any stage ,

BD-#27827850-v10 92

resolve to pursue a listing. In the event that no listing has taken place or has been triggered or commenced under the Cell C Shareholders Agreement within five years from the Completion Date, M5 is entitled to require a listing of Cell C by giving written notice to Cell C and the other shareholders within 60 days after the expiry of such five-year period, provided that certain conditions are met. Should Cell C for any reason wish not to pursue a listing following receipt of M5’s listing notice, Cell C shall be obliged to acquire M5’s shares for certain consideration.

MS15 undertakes that for a period of seven years following the Completion Date, MS15 and any transferee of its shares shall retain its status as a company that is rated as having 100% of its shares, interests or beneficial entitlement held or deemed to be held by black people as determined by the application of the modified flow through principle in accordance with the BEE Codes as they apply at the date of signing the Cell C Shareholders Agreement.

The Cell C Shareholders Agreement will terminate on an initial public offering or listing of our shares or, in respect of any shareholder, upon such shareholder ceasing to hold any our shares; provided that such shareholder will remain bound by certain provisions of the agreement.

BD-#27827850-v10 93

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our consolidated cash and cash equivalents and capitalization:

• on an actual basis as at December 31, 2016; and

• as adjusted, to give effect to the Arrangement, the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016, and any other changes to our consolidated cash and cash equivalents and capitalization since December 31, 2016.

The foregoing adjusted figures would differ at current exchange rates from the exchange rates that were effective on the Completion Date.

The foregoing adjusted figures do not reflect changes in our total debt and cash and cash equivalents between December 31, 2016 and the Completion Date, including accrued interest and forex losses of R1,058 million ($77 million) and the interest paid of R1.5 million ($0.109 million) that we paid on certain existing debt on the Completion Date (which would have impacted our Total Debt and cash and cash equivalents, but not our Net Debt as at the Completion Date).

You should read this table together with our Financial Statements, along with the Notes thereto.

As at December 31, 2016 Actual As adjusted As adjusted (unaudited) (R in millions) ($ in millions)(1) (2) Cash and cash equivalents ...... 279 1,135 83 (3) (3) Total debt (pro forma) ...... 18,237 6,143 447 Unsecured debt OTL – current account...... 10 - - Nedbank Revolving Facility ...... 1,178 - - DBSA Term Loan ...... 243 181 13 Nedbank Term Loan ...... 265 767 56 Secured debt Notes offered hereby ...... - 2,474 180 Revolving Facility ...... - - - (4) Existing Hedging Arrangements ...... 506 - - Existing Cell C Notes ...... 6,035 - - CDB Capex Facility ...... 3,739 1,724 125 CDB Second Capex Facility ...... 638 - - CDB Refi Facility ...... 2,002 - - ICBC Term Loan ...... 2,397 1,997 73 ICBC Capex Loan ...... 1,360 - -

(5) Capitalized Finance Costs – borrowings .... (136) - - Total equity ...... (11,687) 867 63 (6) Total capitalization ...... - 12,554 914 (7) Finance lease liabilities ...... 1,644 1,644 120

(1) Converted into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate of R13.7372 = $1.00. You should not view such translations as a representation that such rand amounts actually represent such converted dollar amounts, or could be or could have been converted into dollars at the rate indicated or at any other rate. In particular, the exchange rate at which the proceeds of the Arrangement will be converted into rand may be materially different. (2) Reflects our consolidated cash and cash equivalents. pro forma for the Arrangement, and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016, our cash balance at the Cell C level was approximately R1 billion. (3) Total debt represents our consolidated current and non-current borrowings, including accrued and unpaid interest. For a more detailed split and summary of our borrowings, see “Description of Other Indebtedness.” (4) For purposes of this calculation, we have assumed a cost of $35 million (R506 million) to unwind our existing hedging arrangements that will be settled pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

BD-#27827850-v10 94

(5) In accordance with IFRS, fees and expenses relating to the Cell C Recapitalisation will be deducted from total borrowings and amortised to interest expense over the life of the Notes relevant borrowings. (6) The total capitalization includes the upliftment of loans of R9,159 million, the cash settlement R4,105 million (R3.599 million on existing debt balances and R506 million for the settlement of the hedge) and the realization of R136 million of capitalized finance costs.

(7) The Total Debt does not include our obligations under finance leases (including the interest component).

As at December 31, 2016, our total liabilities exceeded our total assets, calculated in accordance with IFRS.

As of December 31, 2016, our finance lease liabilities, which represent our obligations under finance lease contracts for the acquisition of network equipment and buildings (including the interest portion), based on the present value of payments as at the relevant date, totalled $120 million.

Our Financial Statements have been prepared on the basis of accounting policies applicable to a going concern. The Issuer and its shareholders have demonstrated that funds will be available to finance future operations and that the realization of assets and settlement of liabilities will occur in the ordinary course of business.

On a fair value basis, the Board of Directors is confident that the value of our assets exceed the value of our liabilities as at December 31, 2016, as Cell C holds intangible assets relating to spectrum and other assets that cannot be recognised in financial statements in accordance with IFRS.

BD-#27827850-v10 95

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED HISTORICAL FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The tables below present our selected historical financial data as at and for the years ended December 31, 2016. 2015, 2014 and 2013. The selected historical financial data are derived from, should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified in its entirety by reference to, our Financial Statements. See “Presentation of Financial and Other Information” for further details.

You should read the summary financial data presented below in conjunction with the information contained in the “Presentation of Financial and Other Information,” “Risk Factors” and “Capitalization”.

Currency is in millions of rand, unless otherwise indicated.

Consolidated Income Statement Data for the Group

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Revenue ...... 14,646 13,228 11,634 11,502 Other income ...... 247 243 144 1,394 Operating expenses ...... (13,541) (13,016) (12,491) (13,119)

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets ...... 17 (380) (576) (67)

Profit/(Loss) before equity accounted earnings, net finance cost and tax ...... 1,336 75 (1,289) (290) Finance income ...... 3,102 774 526 245 Finance costs ...... (3,897) (6,493) (3,170) (3,434) Share of gains/(loss) of investment in joint ventures ...... (72) - 110 (59) Profit/(loss) before tax ...... 541 (5,644) (3,823) (3,538) Tax income/(charge) ...... 0 - (1,044) -

Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive profit/(loss) for the period ...... 541 (5,644) (4,867) (3,538)

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data for the Group

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Cash and cash equivalents(1) ...... 279 776 1,249 632 Total current assets ...... 4,118 4,660 5,712 5,978 Total assets ...... 15,762 14,903 15,476 16,006 Total liabilities (including obligations under finance leases) ...... 27,450 27,131 22,117 19,849 Total equity ...... (11,687) (12,228) (6,642) (3,843)

(1) Restricted cash (which relates to short term cash balances blocked for guarantees for handset purchases and lease agreements) amounting to R39,451 as at December 31, 2013 was presented in 2013 under “cash and cash equivalents.”

Statement of Cash Flow Data for the Group

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions)

Net cash from/(used in) operating activities ...... 3,993 2,471 1,482 (1,841)

96

For the year ended December 31, 2016 2015 2014 2013 (R in millions) Net cash used in investing activities ...... (2,627) (2,442) (2,157) (1,966)

Net cash (utilized)/generated by financing activities ... (1,863) (502) 1,292 3,774

97

INDUSTRY

This section contains information, including expectations as to future developments, derived from industry sources and from our internal surveys. Certain statements in this section are forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties and should be read together with the section entitled “Cautionary Note on Forward-Looking Statements.” You should also read the section entitled “Risk Factors” for a discussion of certain risk factors that may affect our business, results of operations or financial condition. For more information regarding the sources of and methods for calculating industry and market data, see “Industry and Market Data.”

Macroeconomic Environment

South Africa is one of the most developed economies in Africa, with one of the most advanced telecommunications sectors on the continent. According to Statistics South Africa’s mid-year population estimates dated August 25, 2016, the South African population, which exceeds 55 million, is expected to grow by 10% between 2015 and 2030 and by 20% between 2015 and 2050. According to Statistics South Africa, two- thirds of the population is under 35 years of age, 55% of whom are aged between 15 and 34 years old and highly technologically engaged, with widespread access to landlines, mobile phones or the Internet. We believe that these favourable youth demographics are a key driver in growing smartphone penetration and demand for mobile data and broadband services. The following chart presents a breakdown of the demographics of South Africa’s population, by age.

6%

30% ≤ 14 years 28% 15 - 34 years

35 - 64 years

≥ 64 years 36%

Source: Statistics South Africa.

The number of mobile handsets sold is expected to increase over two-fold between 2012 and 2020, with smartphones forming a larger percentage of these sales each year according to management estimates, Pyramid and EIU. We expect the strong take-up of smartphones reported by operators to remain high as manufacturers launch increasingly affordable devices in the market. In addition, according to a survey by GeoPoll and World Wide Worx in April 2015, South Africa leads amongst African countries in the number of application downloads, reflecting the high rate of smartphone adoption in the country. Digital commerce is also on the rise in South Africa, supported by growing internet penetration. Consumer research carried out by Ipsos in March 2015 showed that 22% of South African internet-enabled device owners have made purchases online in the past year and 48% expect to do so in the future (source: Ipsos study conducted on behalf of PayPal and FNB). In addition, South Africa is one of the early-adopter markets on the African continent, in which 4G/LTE technology is gaining traction.

The economy grew significantly between 2003 and 2011, with nominal GDP expanding at a CAGR OF 9.7% to reach USD417 billion as of December 31, 2011, and GDP per capita growing at 10.1% CAGR over the same period to approximately USD 7,839 in 2011 (source: EIU). More recently, South Africa’s economy has been impacted by the global recession, amongst other factors, resulting in two years of negative GDP growth in 2012 and 2013. In 2014, economic growth resumed, although recovery was slower than expected and hampered by

98

protracted mining industry labour strikes and infrastructure bottlenecks, leading to revisions in the country’s growth forecast in 2014 by the IMF from 2.9% to 1.4%; real GDP growth was 1.6% in 2014 according to EIU. In 2015, economic growth declined to 1.3% according to EIU, hampered by a slowdown in agriculture (due to severe drought conditions, which resulted in an 8.4% contraction in the industry, the largest annual fall in agricultural production since 1995) and the electricity, gas and water supply industries, with a flat manufacturing industry. In 2016, according to the 2016 Budget Review, growth is forecast to slow to 0.9% as a result of lower commodity prices, higher borrowing costs, diminished business and consumer confidence, and drought. The economy is expected to experience weak growth in the near term, with the IMF estimating growth of 0.1% in real GDP for 2016 and 1.0% for 2017, amid an array of domestic and global constraints, including a severe drought, softer demand and lower prices for key mineral exports (stemming from a slowdown in China), tighter fiscal policy, rising interest rates and policy uncertainty (which is inhibiting private investment). According to EIU, real GDP growth is expected to edge up in 2017, helped by a recovery from drought, but is expected to remain sluggish, at an estimated 1.4%, in part because of heightened global uncertainties surrounding the outcome of the June 2016 UK referendum in favor of withdrawing from the European Union and the economic slowdown in China. Prospects for 2018 to 2020 are better, with the GDP growth rate expected to rise to an average of 1.8% a year, as major infrastructure and power projects are scheduled to be completed during this period. A pick-up in job creation and real wages is expected to spur consumer outlay on goods and services. In spite of a relatively high unemployment rate of 26.5% in 2016 (the SARB), private consumption is expected to continue growing, fuelled by increasing disposable incomes, an expanding middle class and a young and sizeable population, which we expect to continue driving demand for telecommunication services.

An average annual inflation of 5.7% for 2016 (according to EIU) is mostly driven by a sharp rise in food prices due to severe drought, together with the rand depreciation and increased electricity tariffs. Post 2016, EIU expects inflation to decrease to 5.5% - 5.8% in 2017 - 2020 driven by more prudent monetary policy, efficiency gains arising from infrastructure investments, stricter competition laws and a progressively slower pace of rand depreciation.

The following table presents key statistics for the periods indicated. 2016E 2015 2014 2013 2012 2011 2010 Population (million) ...... 55.9 55.0 54.0 53.2 52.3 51.6 50.8

Real GDP growth (%) ...... 0.1 1.3 1.6 2.3 2.2 3.2 3.0

Consumer Price Inflation (%) ...... 6.4 4.6 6.1 5.8 5.7 5.0 4.3

Exchange rate rand:$ (average) ...... 15.1 12.8 10.8 9.6 8.2 7.3 7.3

Source: IMF World Economic Outlook Database, February 2017, and IMF World Economic Outlook Update, July 2016 (GDP growth based on constant prices, CPI based on average consumer prices); exchange rate based on EIU.

While efforts have been taken to reduce the gap, there is still a strong revenue and wealth divide in the South African economy. In addition, large parts of the South African population do not have access to adequate education, health care, housing and other services, including water, electricity and telecommunications services.

Telecommunications Market

Historical growth in telecommunications services in South Africa has been driven primarily by the mobile sector. Unlike other telecommunications markets, South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed-line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2015 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow. We believe that this is largely due to an under- developed fixed line telecommunications infrastructure due to infrastructure investment challenges, which affects a large proportion of the population living in non-urban areas. This has led to the leapfrogging of the development of a reliable nationwide fixed network infrastructure, moving straight on to mobile voice and mobile broadband. Consequently, this has supported, and we expect will continue to support, revenue growth in the mobile market without requiring deployment of significant capital resources to develop nationwide fixed- line networks.

99

The fixed-line infrastructure is mostly operated by the incumbent operator Telkom in voice, with some competition from other providers in broadband. According to Pyramid, Telkom had a market share of 92% in voice telephony lines, followed by Neotel with 7% as at December 31, 2016. The broadband market is more fragmented, with Telkom’s broadband internet accounts market share at 30%, followed by MWEB at 16%, Neotel at 14% and other smaller players.

The total number of mobile subscribers grew from approximately 68.9 million as at December 31, 2012 to approximately 89.9 million as at December 31, 2016 (Pyramid), implying a penetration rate of 165%. South Africa’s mobile penetration rate is expected to continue growing to 193% in 2020, according to Pyramid. The high penetration rate reflects the practice by the majority of active mobile users to carry multiple SIM cards (a practice that has been encouraged by operators that actively push sales and discounting starter packs). We believe that actual penetration is lower when comparing the number of mobile users to the total population, and there is still potential room for growth as we estimate approximately 15% of the population does not have a SIM card. The potential for growth is supported by the prevalence of prepaid contracts in the subscriber mix, with an 80% / 18% split between prepaid and post paid subscribers as at December 31, 2016.

The market for mobile communications is more competitive and has benefitted from rising standards of living and fixed-to-mobile substitution trends. Rising standards of living, combined with the implementation of lower MTRs by ICASA and improved network coverage, is expected to lead to a moderate increase in post-paid contracts relative to prepaid contracts.

The following chart presents mobile penetration and Internet penetration in South Africa between 2012 and 2016.

South Africa - Mobile and Internet Penetration

164.9% 152.6% 131.5% 136.0%

26.8% 26.2% 26.3% 26.3%

2012 2013 2014 2015

Mobile Penetration Internet Users Penetration

Source: Pyramid.

The table below presents historical and forecast data on the South African total mobile market (including broadband and wholesale) for the periods indicated.

2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 Mobile subscribers (millions) ...... 80.3 79.4 73.9 67.1 65.2

Prepaid (in %) ...... 83% 82% 82% 82% 81%

Contract and Other (incl wholesale)(in %) ...... 17% 18% 19% 18% 19%

Monthly blended mobile ARPU (rand) ...... 102.2 103.1 106.4 117.1 125.8

Source: Company.

100

Profitability in the South African mobile industry has been adversely impacted by steadily declining mobile-voice revenue. However, the pace of decline of blended mobile ARPU has been stabilizing over the past three years as growth in revenue from other services offset the decline in voice revenue, including growing demand for high-value data services and broadband Internet access (best served by the large 3G- and LTE-enabled networks deployed by mobile network operators).

From 2012 to 2014, the South African telecommunications market experienced a decline in revenue for mobile services, largely due to a decline in interconnect and voice revenue, principally driven by changes in Vodacom and MTN pricing practices. We estimate that the total revenue for mobile services, including voice, data, interconnect, SMS and other revenue, amounted to approximately R95 billion, R93 billion, R91 billion and R96 billion in 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015, respectively. The improvement in revenue in 2015 is partially attributable to a softening of the increased price competition among providers from 2012 to 2014. At the same time, we estimate that the total mobile market spend (which reflects consumer outlay on mobile services, including voice, data and SMS) in South Africa was approximately R83 billion, R84 billion, R85 billion and R91 billion in 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015, respectively. It is anticipated that total mobile market spend will increase at an average rate of 4.1% per year between 2015 and 2020, a more conservative rate of growth when compared to past growth rates (approximately 8% CAGR between 2005 and 2015).

The following chart presents the evolution of total mobile market spend in South Africa.

Source: Company.

The following chart presents a breakdown of historical mobile service revenue in the South African market by type of service for the periods indicated.

101

Mobile Service Revenue Market (rand in billions)

3.4 4.9 4.1 CAGR 6.3 4.1 5.0 5.7 5.2 5.0 Other: 13.4% 11.8 9.1 6.4 Messaging: 7.3% Interconnect: 24.8%

16.9 34.0 20.9 24.9

Data: 26.2%

56.4 52.8 49.9 47.1 Voice: 5.8%

2012 2013 2014 2015

Voice Data Interconnect Messaging Other

Source: Company. Mobile service revenue in the South African telecommunications market remained relatively flat between 2012 and 2016, growing at a CAGR of 0.4%, hampered by lower revenue from voice, interconnect and messaging, which more than offset the growth in revenue from data services, which grew at a CAGR of 26.2%, as illustrated in the chart above.

Voice revenue in the South African mobile telecommunications market began declining in 2012 and has continued to decline, from R56 million in 2012, to R53 million in 2013, R50 million in 2014 and R47 million in 2015. This was largely due to the increase in the popularity of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook, which had a corresponding adverse impact on voice revenue. The decline in voice revenue was also partly been driven by cuts in MTR rates, with a declining rate of asymmetry for Cell C, from 14.6 cents of asymmetry between March 1, 2011 and March 1, 2012, to 8 cents of asymmetry between October 1, 2015 and October 1, 2016. Nonetheless, Cell C is a net payer of termination costs and thus the reduction in termination costs (as a result of reduced voice consumption and regulatory changes) contributed to a gross margin improvement. In addition, the effective price per minute (“EPPM”) has been declining at a slower rate than the decline in MTRs. Overall voice traffic is projected to increase 2 to 3% per year per user. However, revenue per user is projected to fall due to a negative revenue per minute (“RPM”) trend of 6% to 8% per year as a consequence of the increased prevalence of all-inclusive tariffs.

Since 2012, messaging revenue in the South African mobile telecommunications market has decreased, from R6.3 million in 2012, to R5.7 million in 2013, R5.2 million in 2014 and R5.0 million in 2015. The decline is in large part due to the increase in communication via OTT services. However, in 2016 this was somewhat mitigated by an increase in bulk SMS.

Mobile data usage increased by over 60% from 2014 to 2016, combined with an increase in of mobile penetration rate of approximately 1%, and higher smartphone sales growth. Revenue per megabyte, however, has declined in line with international comparisons. The following table presents the increase in annual mobile data traffic in South Africa between 2009 and 2016.

102

Annual Mobile Data Traffic (petabytes) 658

372

180 99 38 2 14

2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015

Source: Company. Data revenue growth and improved pricing conduct in the South African mobile telecommunications market is expected to drive mobile market growth, and we seek to capitalise on this growth through expansion into the mobile broadband market and the rollout of our LTE and LTE-Advanced network.

Competitive Overview

Telkom continues to be the largest provider of fixed Internet access services in South Africa, mainly by virtue of its control over the public switched telephone network (“PSTN”) architecture and position in the asymmetric (“ADSL”) market. The limited competition in ADSL has been stalled by delays in the implementation of local loop unbundling regulation, not implemented to this date despite the initial target of 2011. Telkom’s main competitor in fixed-line broadband is Neotel. Convergence trends are increasing competition in this market as we, Vodacom and MTN, are rolling out fibre networks.

Competition in the mobile market is more pronounced. Historically, Vodacom and MTN have been market leaders, with a combined estimated market share of 79.7%, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers as at December 31, 2016, and a combined market share of 85%, in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, for 2016; we are the third operator with a market share of 16% in terms of active mobile subscribers as at December 31, 2016, and 11.6% in terms of total mobile service revenue in 2016, followed by Telkom as the fourth competitor in terms of market share by both active mobile subscribers and mobile service revenue. New regulation promoting competition and lower prices have been driving the growth for us and Telkom. Revenue of MTN and Vodacom have been adversely affected by the 50% reduction in MTRs in April 2014. We have been actively targeting lower tier voice segments and prepaid voice users to build scale between 2012 and 2014, while Vodacom and MTN have focused on integrated plans and data bundles to improve revenue share.

We have incentivized our channel partners to promote our products and services over those of our competitors and in 2014, we successfully developed a hosting platform for MVNOs, which has enabled us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization, and significantly grow our revenue from our wholesale business. Active MVNOs operating via our network include FNB Connect, Virgin Mobile and MVN-X. Our ambition is to grow MVNO as a revenue channel by expanding our offering to a wider range of providers. As at December 31, 2016, we had six MVNOs and 1.4 million MVNO subscribers active on our network. MVNOs contract directly with subscribers to provide mobile services hosted on our mobile network. The MVNO partnerships allow us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks, allowing us potentially to reach a more diverse base of subscribers. For example, our MVNO relationship with FNB provides targeted access to more than 600,000 subscribers and our MVNO relationship with Virgin Mobile provides us with targeted access to more than 460,000 subscribers. We believe that the investments we have made in our focused approach to MVNO partnerships will provide us with a competitive advantage as the market continues to diversify.

We believe we have been growing subscriber market share by acquiring new customers faster than our competition and by eroding both MTN and Vodacom’s subscriber market shares. The following tables present the evolution of market share for us and our three main competitors.

103

As at December 31,

Market share (of reported active mobile subscribers) 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 (%)

Cell C ...... 16 16.2 15.3 14.5 11.6

Vodacom...... 44.6 42.5 44.1 44.9 47.2

MTN ...... 35.0 38.5 37.9 38.3 38.9

Telkom ...... 4.3 2.8 2.7 2.3 2.2

Source: Company and publicly available information.

For the year ended December 31,

Market share (of reported total mobile service revenue) 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 (%)

Cell C ...... 11.6 12.0 11.1 10.4 9.1

Vodacom...... 50.8 50.1 52.6 51.8 50.9

MTN ...... 34.2 35.8 34.6 36.6 38.7

Telkom ...... 3.4 2.1 1.7 1.2 1.3

Source: Company and publicly available information.

As at December 31, 2016, in terms of active mobile subscribers, we had an estimated 16% market share, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue we had 11.6% market share.

All four operators have deployed 2G networks covering close to 100% of the population (directly or through roaming agreements) and are currently at different stages of rolling out 3G/3.5G/LTE coverage. Vodacom, MTN and Telkom launched offerings on LTE and LTE advanced services in dense urban areas, and Cell C has rolled out LTE and LTE-Advanced services as well. Other operators, such as Neotel and iBurst, also are participating with LTE network deployments in dense urban areas, making South Africa one of the most advanced mobile communications market in Africa. However, the high prices of the LTE products, relatively limited coverage to date and scarcity of available spectrum pending further allocation by the regulator are expected to limit LTE take up, leaving 3G as the dominant technology for the foreseeable future.

Expected Growth

In 2014, the South African government published a national broadband plan setting a penetration rate target for the South African market of 90% broadband penetration rate by 2020 at speeds of 5Mbps and 50% penetration rate at speeds of 100 Mbps, compared to total broadband penetration rate of 34% in 2013. This policy reflects the government’s commitment to enabling the rollout of broadband infrastructure.

The projected growth in mobile subscribers is greater than the projected growth of South Africa’s population, which translates into an upward trend in mobile penetration forecasts. It is expected that demand in South Africa for data services will continue to grow as a result of increasing levels of social media engagement and the increasing popularity of non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP and alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging (SMS/MMS). These alternatives, such as Skype, Facebook and iPhone/iPad Messenger

104

(also known as OTT applications), are capable of providing mobile-only data users with voice and messaging services, typically at a substantially lower cost than traditional voice and messaging services. OTT applications are often offered free of charge, are accessible via smartphones and tablets, and allow their users to have access to potentially unlimited messaging and voice services over the Internet, thus bypassing more expensive traditional voice and messaging services. However, they also contribute to significant data traffic on our network and drive growth in our data services and revenue. In addition, we expect that demand in South Africa for data services will continue to increase as smartphone penetration increases, with the number of mobile handsets sold expected to increase two-fold between 2013 to 2020, with smartphones forming a larger percentage of these sales each year. As content-rich apps continue to be developed and customers increasingly seek to access to video content, we expect demand for data services to increase.

The two graphs below present the smartphone penetration and mobile penetration by operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market.

Smartphone Penetration Forecast (thousands)

15,524

12,888

8,950 29% 24%

17%

2013 2014 2015

Smartphone sales Smartphone penetration

Source: Company, Pyramid.

Mobile Penetration by Operator 67.6%

61.2% 61.9% 58.3% 57.0% 52.5% 48.4% 48.5%

39.1% 34.7%

25.7%

20.2%

4.0% 4.8% 2.9% 3.2%

2012 2013 2014 2015

Vodacom MTN Cell C Telkom

Source: Ovum.

105

OUR BUSINESS

We are the third largest of four mobile network operators in South Africa, with a market share of 11.6% based on service revenue for the year ended December 31, 2016 and a market share of 16% based on our total active mobile subscriber base of 14 million (12 million prepaid, 0.5 million postpaid, 1.0 million hybrid and 0.6 million broadband subscribers) at December 31, 2016. As at the same date, we had approximately 1.4 million wholesale subscribers.

We offer a comprehensive array of mobile voice and data communication services and a wide range of devices to individual consumers, businesses, SMEs, corporates, the South African government and wholesale (to our partners, predominantly MVNOs such as FNB, Virgin Mobile and MVN-X), with a focus on the consumer market and wholesale (MVNOs), through our LTE, LTE-Advanced, high speed packet access, 3G and 2G networks. In 2016, we expanded into the fixed-line market with the launch of our FTTH offering, C-Fibre.

Our mobile voice services include prepaid, contract (postpaid and hybrid) airtime offerings, as well as international calls and roaming services. In addition, we provide interconnection services to other telecommunications networks. Our mobile data services include mobile messaging services, including basic SMS and MMS capabilities enabling customers to send media including music, photographs and video from their handsets, as well as access to the Internet and OTT applications such as WhatsApp and Facebook. We also offer USSD services (including callback and balance enquiries). Our devices include mobile handsets, routers, data cards, dongles, PCs, tablets and USB modems. In recognition of the global trend toward significant demand for data at the expense of voice services, we are looking to expand our mobile data services to include content- based services (both exclusive and non-exclusive content) and to grow our FTTH offering to support customers demand for higher speed connectivity, as well as less expensive access to data as demand for content and streaming grows.

We market our offerings and services primarily through our nationwide distribution network of informal channels. These include super dealers and regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and unique partnerships with select entities, including most significantly, one of our principal indirect shareholders, Blue Label. Blue Label is a leading distributor of prepaid airtime, data and starter packs in South Africa. We also market our offerings and services through 196 Cell-C branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises), approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national retail chains, telesales (including our internal inbound and outbound call centres and, to a lesser extent, external call centres), online sales and MVNOs.

We employ our “Cell C” brand, which was recognized as one of South Africa’s top 50 leading brands overall (as rated by Brand South Africa for 2015 and 2016), across all of our offerings. We also market our mobile services by hosting MVNOs with their respective brands on our mobile network to target different customer segments.

While in the first decade of our operations we faced challenges in growing revenue and EBITDA, following the appointment of a new management team in 2012 and the implementation of our new customer-oriented turnaround strategy (as detailed below), we have reported growth in revenue quarter-on-quarter for 15 of the past 16 consecutive quarters ended December 31, 2016 (when comparing each quarter to the corresponding quarter in the prior year).

In 2016, we generated revenue of R14,646 million and we reported EBITDA of R3,106 billion compared to the twelve months ended December 31, 2015, where we generated revenue of R13,228 billion and we reported EBITDA of R1,948 million. See “Summary—Summary Historical Financial and Operating Data.”

The following chart sets forth a breakdown of our revenue by segment(1) for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016.

106

December 2016 Revenue by Segment

Prepaid

20% Contract

3% 49% Wholesale

28% Equipment

(2) For purposes of our revenue segmentation, we have four reportable segments that are differentiated and grouped by means of the nature of the product and services offered; we group postpaid and hybrid services as a single item (contract); equipment and other revenue includes revenue from the sale of equipment, CSTs and unsegmented revenue. We also elsewhere breakdown our revenue as between total revenue and service revenue. Our revenue segmentation differs from the segmentation of our subscriber base, which we group into prepaid, hybrid, postpaid, broadband and wholesale (predominantly MVNO subscribers) segments. While we have a separate FTTH customer base, its contribution to revenue is immaterial on a consolidated basis and we do not include it as a stand-alone reportable segment.

Between 2012 and 2016, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, we grew our market share from approximately 11% to 16%, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, we grew our market share from approximately 9.2% for 2012 to 11.6% for 2016. Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, the other three significant mobile operators in the South African market, had approximately 44.6%, 35% and 4.3% market share, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, respectively, at December 31, 2016, and approximately 50.8%, 34.2% and 3.4% market share, in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2016.

Our History and Turn-Around Strategy

In July 2001, our then principal indirect shareholder, Saudi Oger, commenced operations in the telecommunications industry when it originally established a 60/40 joint venture with a black economic empowerment (“BEE”) consortium, CellSAf, to participate in the tender for the third mobile license in South Africa. It won the tender, and we commenced commercial operations in November 2001 (as the third entrant in the South African market).

2001 – 2012. Since our inception through to 2012, we pursued a challenger operator strategy to grow market share, with a strong focus on voice communication services, particularly in the prepaid segment. We also focused on introducing data-centric offers, including mobile broadband services. We launched new products and services and began to undertake significant capital expenditures in upgrading our network. We experienced challenges in growing our postpaid and hybrid subscriber base and revenue in our contract segment, in large part due to the inadequate capitalization of our business (see “—The Cell C Recapitalization.”), legacy issues around management of vendors and network rollout delays, issues with handset availability, over-reliance on outsourcing relationships, particularly on network vendors and turnkey solutions, and an undefined marketing strategy.

107

2012 – to date. A new management team was appointed in 2012 to implement a customer-oriented turnaround strategy, centered around quality, service, innovation and human capital, with a focus on building a sustainable platform for growth. We were able to leverage OTL’s equity contribution (R2.6 billion in 2013 and R2.0 billion in 2014) together with incremental debt funding in local and foreign currency in 2013, and 2014, to implement this strategy (see “Risk Factors—Risks relating to our business and industry— In the past we have sought and obtained equity injections from our shareholder, OTL. We may not receive future equity injections from our shareholders, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.”)

We actively sought to establish ourselves as a “consumer champion” and a “value for money” brand, adopting a transparent and simple approach to pricing, in an effort to attract low-income price sensitive consumers and promote the porting of subscribers as a means for consumers to save money.

Between 2012 and 2015, we pursued aggressive pricing against our competitors, introducing value offerings and promotions targeted at further developing our prepaid subscriber base so as to increase our scale and reach in the South African market. In 2015, we shifted our previously strong focus away from aggressive pricing. As a challenger operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market, we increased our outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts with our regulators to obtain more pro-competitive regulatory treatment, including a greater degree of asymmetry in respect of MTRs, as well as challenging the incumbents’ practices of charging less for on-net calls than for off-net calls and roaming services. In a series of studies funded by the South African National Treasury, the Centre for Competition, Regulation and Economic Development (CCRED) at the University of Johannesburg found that the asymmetrical reduction in MTRs in our favour, which we had lobbied for, enabled us to be more effective competitors and saved consumers approximately R47 billion between 2010 and 2016.

Over this period, we focused on building an innovative product portfolio and undertaking significant capital expenditure to improve the stability, quality, capacity and coverage of our network. In this regard, we have insourced our network design services, optimized our costs through the redeployment of less profitable BTSs to higher revenue-generating areas, invested in higher quality equipment, reviewed our rollout strategy and further expanded our rollout into LTE and LTE-Advanced networks and the deployment of fibre across our network. Our capital expenditures margin was 13.5%, 19.7%, 19.0%, 19.6%, and 19.5% for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015 and 2016. In addition, we increased our focus on our marketing strategy and distribution channels, undertaking extensive promotions of mobile data services in an effort to capture growing demand, as well as aligning ourselves strategically with operators of OTT applications and services. We incentivized our channel partners to promote our products and services over those of our competitors and, in 2014, we successfully developed a hosting platform for MVNOs. This has enabled us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization, and significantly grow revenue from our wholesale business. We currently are the only mobile network operator that provides services via MVNOs, although certain of our competitors have publicly indicated that they are exploring such opportunities

Over this period, our new management team focused on achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies in an effort to increase our operating margins.

Our key strategic initiatives during this period included:

• strengthening our close partnership with Blue Label (which dates back to 2011). Blue Label is the largest distributor of prepaid airtime, data and starter packs in South Africa (with approximately 700,000 SIM connections a month in South Africa and revenue of approximately R26 billion based on its reported results for the year ended May 31, 2016). Blue Label boasts a local footprint of approximately 30,000 touch points (which extends to the foremost retailers, petroleum forecourts, independent retailers and wholesalers in South Africa). We incentivized Blue Label to promote our prepaid airtime and starter packs, which contributed significantly to our subscriber and revenue growth in the prepaid market: approximately 80% of our airtime recharges for the year ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them; • increasing our focus on network quality and customer experience, including the launch of our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks in 2015 and 2016, respectively, insourcing of our call centres, insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own (providing us with greater control over marketing of our products and services, availability of handsets in-store, employee training and enabling us to improve customer service and experience); we experienced a 67% increase in total data consumption in 2016 compared to 2015, which we believe stems from our improved network and rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks;

108

• aligning ourselves strategically with operators of OTT applications and services, such as Facebook and WhatsApp, including a Facebook promotional campaign for prepaid users that facilitated net additions of approximately 410,000 subscribers over the promotional period and the two months thereafter. We also provided customers with free WhatsApp messaging from October 2014 to end of August 2015, which facilitated the acquisition of new subscribers. The campaign drove further growth of data traffic on our network and generated incremental revenue growth once we started to charge for this service following the end of the promotional period; • increasing our outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts with our regulators to obtain more pro- competitive regulatory treatment, including a greater degree of asymmetry in respect of MTRs, as well as challenging the incumbents’ practices of charging less for on-net calls than for off-net calls and roaming services; • launching our operational efficiencies programme in 2014, which included, among others, a retrenchment process and the rationalization of under-performing BTSs, resulting in reduction of our operational expenditures (including the reduction in the amount paid to the incumbent operators for site rentals) and general administration costs despite the continued rollout of our network; • renegotiating the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement that allows us to route a portion of our customer traffic over Vodacom’s GSM mobile telephone network, to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) and extend the minimum term until 2020, which has enabled us to offer 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we are not able to, or do not wish to, provide coverage through our own network (typically because it is relatively more expensive for us to deploy our own network than rely on the roaming agreement due to relatively lower cost of roaming) and to be selective in our deployment of capital and strategically focus capital expenditures. This initiative resulted in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality; • launching Wi-Fi calling in 2015, the first offering of its kind in South Africa, allowing us to turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into a Cell C base station and enabling prepaid, postpaid and hybrid customers to use their Cell C line over a Wi-Fi network connection even when phone coverage is absent (locally or abroad) or when they are outside of South Africa. The service enables our customers to make and receive calls, send/receive SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even purchase bundles, within their plan rates. We believe Wi-Fi calling contributed to an increase in net additions and reduced churn in the prepaid segment and enabled us to churn high-value customers from our competitors who may otherwise have spent significant amounts on roaming services on other networks in South Africa; • entering into a the Handset Financing Arrangement, which has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets (where we were previously unable to do so) and offer higher value handsets to support growth in our postpaid segment, while freeing up an average of approximately R191.4 million per month of working capital since August 9, 2015 to December 31, 2016; and

• launching our buy-out offering in 2015, offering to buy out existing contracts of subscribers from Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, paying up to R20,000 to customers towards the costs of cancelling their contract, which has contributed to an increase in net additions in this segment.

Strengths

We believe that the following strengths will support the execution of our growth strategy.

Our status as a challenger mobile operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market positions us to take advantage of opportunities others may not.

As a challenger operator in the South African mobile telecommunications market, we believe that we are best positioned to take advantage of opportunities in our operating environment through our focus on innovation and agility, combined with our willingness to pursue outreach initiatives and lobbying efforts. These opportunities have presented themselves in the past and we expect further opportunities to present themselves in the future, including:

109

• our ability to proactively engage with our regulators and avail ourselves of regulatory and judicial remedies to help improve our competitive position in the South African mobile market, such as in respect of MTRs (as at December 31, 2016, the rates were 19 cents for calls terminating on our network and Telkom’s network and 13 cents for calls terminating on Vodacom and MTN’s networks, compared to 24 cents for calls terminating on our network and Telkom’s network and 16 cents for calls terminating on Vodacom and MTN’s networks as at October 1, 2015), pricing asymmetry, pricing of and access to infrastructure, roaming rates, handset subsidies and transparency of pricing, and access to spectrum; • our ability, as a result of our smaller scale relative to our principal competitors, to react quickly to opportunities and take advantage of new opportunities, including in our distribution and product offering, and to react in a timely and dynamic way to changing market demand; • our ability to innovate and introduce disruptive products and services in the South African market, such as Wi-Fi calling, which allows us to turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into a Cell C base station and enables customers to make and receive calls, send/receive SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even purchase bundles, within their plan rates, over a Wi-Fi network connection even when cell phone coverage is absent (locally or abroad) or when they are abroad, reducing their usage of roaming services locally and abroad; • our partnerships with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook, which positions us to drive data traffic on our network and serves as a customer acquisition tool notwithstanding the concomitant reduction in voice revenue, in respect of which we have a smaller market share than some of our competitors, allowing us to acquire customers from our competitors; • our ability to take advantage of bilateral roaming arrangements with other mobile network operators that have already deployed network coverage in outlying areas with lower population density, where it is more expensive for us to deploy our own network due to relatively lower costs of roaming, which enables us to be selective in our deployment of capital and strategically focus capital expenditures in major metropolitan areas in South Africa. This provides us with cash flow flexibility, as well as cost savings on energy, transmission, site rental and maintenance costs, and enables us to focus on providing the latest technologies and services to our subscribers; • our MVNO hosting platform, which allows us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams, with relatively low incremental administrative costs, and allow us to reach a more diverse base of subscribers; currently, we are the only mobile network operator that provides services via MVNOs, although certain of our competitors have publicly indicated that they are exploring such opportunities; and

• our ability to participate in passive infrastructure sharing, including sharing our fibre backhaul and site infrastructure with other operators, including the incumbent operators, with each operator managing and controlling their own network, which would facilitate cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we may be permitted to do so in the future, active infrastructure sharing (combining BTSs and site equipment and sharing of spectrum with another operator), which would facilitate greater cost savings and operational efficiencies. We operate in a market with attractive telecommunications sector dynamics and are well positioned to take advantage of anticipated growth in demand for data services.

South Africa is one of the most developed economies in Africa, with one of the most advanced telecommunications sectors on the continent. Historical growth in telecommunications services in South Africa has been driven primarily by the mobile sector. Unlike other telecommunications markets, South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed-line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2015 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow. We believe that this is largely due to an under-developed fixed line telecommunications infrastructure due to infrastructure investment challenges, which affects a large proportion of the population living in non-urban areas. This has led to the leapfrogging of the development of a reliable nationwide fixed network infrastructure, moving straight on to mobile voice and mobile broadband. Consequently, this has supported, and we expect will continue to support, revenue growth in the mobile market without requiring deployment of significant capital resources to develop nationwide fixed-line networks. The total number of mobile subscribers grew from approximately 68.9 million as at December 31, 2012 to approximately 89.9 million as at December 31, 2016 (source: Pyramid), implying a penetration rate of 165%. South Africa’s mobile penetration rate is expected to continue growing to 193% in 2020, according to Pyramid. The high penetration rate reflects the practice by the

110

majority of active mobile users to carry multiple SIM cards (a practice that has been encouraged by operators that actively push sales and discounting starter packs). We believe that actual penetration is lower when comparing the number of mobile users to the total population, and there is still potential room for growth as we estimate approximately 15% of the population does not have a SIM card. The potential for growth is supported by the prevalence of prepaid contracts in the subscriber mix, with an 80% / 18% split between prepaid and post paid subscribers as at December 31, 2016.

The following chart reflects the evolution of total mobile market spend (which reflects consumer outlay on mobile services, including voice, data and SMS) in South Africa between 2006 and 2016.

Mobile Market Spend (rand in billions)

Source: Company.

The South African mobile market has shown strong growth in the recent past in terms of market spend, which has continued to grow since the inception of the mobile telecommunications market in South Africa in 1993 and is expected to continue to grow across the various segments despite some of the economic headwinds affecting the country. Market spend in the South African mobile appears to be gradually improving, having grown at a CAGR of approximately 8.0% between 2006 and 2016. This trend is largely driven by increasing demand for data services, which is expected to more than offset the decline in voice revenue and SMS services as all- inclusive tariffs and OTT services become more prevalent. It is anticipated that total mobile market spend will increase at an average CAGR of 4.1% per year between 2015 and 2020, a more conservative rate of growth when compared to past growth rates (approximately 8% CAGR between 2005 and 2016).

According to Statistics South Africa’s mid-year population estimates dated August 25, 2016, the South African population, which exceeds 55 million, is expected to grow by 10% between 2015 and 2030 and by 20% between 2015 and 2050. According to Statistics South Africa, two-thirds of the population is under 35 years of age, 55% of whom are aged between 15 and 34 years old and highly technologically engaged, with widespread access to landlines, mobile phones or the Internet. We believe that these favourable youth demographics are a key driver in growing smartphone penetration and demand for mobile data and broadband services. The following chart presents a breakdown of the demographics of South Africa’s population, by age.

111

6%

30% ≤ 14 years 28% 15 - 34 years

35 - 64 years

≥ 64 years 36%

Source: Statistics South Africa.

The number of mobile handsets sold is expected to more than double between 2012 to 2020, with smartphones forming a larger percentage of these sales each year according to management estimates, Pyramid and EIU. In addition, according to a survey by GeoPoll and World Wide Worx in April 2015, South Africa amongst African countries in the number of application downloads, reflecting the high rate of smartphone adoption in the country. Digital commerce is also on the rise in South Africa, supported by growing internet penetration. Consumer research carried out by Ipsos in March 2015 showed that 22% of South African internet-enabled device owners have made purchases online in the past year and 48% expect to do so in the future (source: Ipsos study conducted on behalf of PayPal and FNB). In addition, South Africa is one of the early-adopter markets on the African continent, in which 4G/LTE technology is gaining traction.

Moreover, in 2014, the South African government published a national broadband plan setting a penetration rate target for the South African market of 90% broadband penetration rate by 2020 at speeds of 5Mbps and 50% penetration rate at speeds of 100 Mbps, compared to total broadband penetration rate of 34% in 2013. This policy reflects the government’s commitment to enabling the rollout of broadband infrastructure. The projected growth in mobile subscribers is greater than the projected growth of South Africa’s population, which translates into an upward trend in mobile penetration forecasts. It is expected that demand in South Africa for data services will continue to grow as a result of increasing levels of social media engagement and the increasing popularity of non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP, or alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging (SMS/MMS) becoming increasingly popular, such as Skype, Facebook and iPhone/iPad Messenger. These OTT applications are capable of providing mobile-only data users with voice and messaging services, typically at a substantially lower cost than traditional voice and messaging services, are often offered free of charge, are accessible via smartphones and tablets, and allow their users to have access to potentially unlimited messaging and voice services over the Internet, thus bypassing more expensive traditional voice and messaging services but contributing to significant data traffic on our network and driving growth in our data services and revenue.

Our revenue from data services as well as our broadband subscriber base have grown consistently since our broadband services were introduced in 2010, at a CAGR of 97% in terms of the volume of data traffic between 2010 and 2016, and we expect revenue from data services to exceed our voice revenue by 2018. We believe that we are well positioned to take advantage of anticipated further growth in demand for data and value-added services in South Africa. Our LTE-Advanced network, which overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks, coupled with 3G voice and data roaming services provided over Vodacom’s network, and our attractive spectrum (in respect of which we are not presently constrained) are capable of supporting high-volume data traffic at high speeds, including streaming services (such as radio and video streaming) and access to content. In addition, we believe that we are well positioned to meet growing demand for mobile data services through our continually evolving competitive data-focused offerings across all of our customer segments, such as our range of contract (postpaid and hybrid) tariff options, which are focused on more data heavy usage and targeted to smartphone users, as well as our data bundles and certain voucher options, which provide flexibility for prepaid customers that are looking to use greater amounts of data. Our strategic alignment with operators of OTT services positions us to drive data traffic on our network and serves as an acquisition tool, notwithstanding the concomitant

112

reduction in voice revenue, in respect of which we have a smaller market share than some of our competitors, allowing us to acquire customers from our competitors.

We benefit from our extensive and integrated distribution network and strategic partnerships, particularly with Blue Label and our wholesale channel.

We believe that we are well positioned for growth, having achieved significant scale since our inception, through our focus on achieving a broad distribution reach and focus on incentivizing our channel partners to promote our products and services. We believe our potential for subscriber growth has significantly increased as a result of a number of partnerships and strategic alliances, such as with key distributors (particularly, Blue Label), MVNOs, operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook and our external vendor in respect of the Handset Financing Arrangement, to improve handset availability and selection.

Our distribution network principally comprises our informal channels (including super dealers and regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and third party distributors), 196 Cell-C branded outlets (including independently-owned stores and franchises), approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national retail chains, telesales (including our internal inbound and outbound call centres and, to a lesser extent, external call centres), online sales and MVNOs. In addition, from 2015 to December 2016, we increased the number of our stores from 160 to 196 (including independently-owned stores and franchises), and we plan to further increase our independently-owned store network in the medium term, to provide us with greater control over availability of handsets and employee training to improve customer service and experience.

Prepaid:

• In our prepaid segment, we have increased our overall subscriber base and core prepaid subscriber base significantly since 2012, following the implementation of our customer-oriented turnaround strategy, with a CAGR of 18% for our prepaid subscriber base and a CAGR of 12% for our core prepaid subscriber base, from 5.3 million prepaid subscribers and 3.2 million core prepaid subscribers as at December 31, 2012 to 12 million prepaid subscribers and 6.3 million core prepaid subscribers as at December 31, 2016. We believe that we have developed an effective distribution strategy and strategic alliances in our prepaid segment, through the distribution of SIM packs on a large scale predominantly via informal and retail channels, as well as via the wholesale channel, which has significantly expanded our presence across South Africa and contributed to our strong subscriber growth. The informal channels have enabled us to add mobility to our traditional retail channels and bring customers closer to the point of purchase, resulting in increased volume and growth opportunities via our distributors’ footprint. Most significantly, our partnership with Blue Label has contributed significantly to our growth in the prepaid market (approximately 80% of our airtime recharges for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them). As our primary distributor of airtime vouchers to the prepaid segment, our distribution arrangement with Blue Label ensures that customers are able to top up their phones with relative ease. Blue Label is also able to take advantage of a network of resellers, retailers and informal points of sale across South Africa, adapted to the market purchasing habits of our target subscribers. Their presence in township and low income areas is key to reaching our prepaid subscriber base and their presence in the wholesale channel allows for access to a larger number of potential contract subscribers. Blue Label has become a significant investor in our share capital following the Completion Date and the resulting alignment of interests is expected to yield further advantages, particularly in respect of distribution. See “—Strategy—Optimise and strengthen our distribution networks, strategic relationships and key partnerships.”

• We believe the growth in our prepaid subscriber base has also benefited from partnerships and strategic alliances with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook.

Postpaid and hybrid:

• We believe that we have developed an effective distribution strategy in our postpaid and hybrid segments, through the distribution of contract products and services in our franchise channel (which accounted for approximately 47% of postpaid sales by value as at December 31, 2016), our retail channel and our wholesale channel, with a growing focus on direct sales through our own in-house sales force.

113

• Our entry into the Handset Financing Arrangement in August 2015 has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets (where we were previously unable to do so) and offer higher value handsets, increasing net additions in contract subscribers.

• We believe the growth in our postpaid and hybrid subscriber bases has also benefited from partnerships and strategic alliances with operators of OTT services such as WhatsApp and Facebook.

Wholesale:

• As at December 31, 2016, we had six MVNOs and 1.4 million MVNO subscribers active on our network. We have put significant effort into expanding our reach to customers through relationships with MVNOs, like FNB, Virgin Mobile and MVN-X. MVNOs contract directly with subscribers to provide mobile services hosted on our mobile network. We have also created a successful hosting platform for MVNOs, which allows us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization. The MVNO partnerships allow us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks, allowing us potentially to reach a more diverse base of subscribers. For example, our MVNO relationship with FNB provides targeted access to more than 600,000 subscribers and our MVNO relationship with Virgin Mobile provides us with targeted access to more than 460,000 subscribers. We believe that the investments we have made in our focused approach to MVNO partnerships will provide us with a competitive advantage as the market continues to diversify.

We believe that there are opportunities to further increase our market share in the South African mobile market, including as a result of expected growth in demand for data services, and we intend to leverage our extensive and integrated distribution network and strategic partnerships to achieve market share growth.

Our selective deployment of capital expenditures on our nationwide networks, supported by roaming agreements and our spectrum portfolio, enable us to offer, or benefit from, attractive and competitive services.

Our selective deployment of capital and strategically focused capital expenditures enable us to provide mobile voice and data services through a combination of our own LTE-Advanced network that overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks, as well as under national and international roaming agreements with telecommunications operators to allow such operators’ customers to roam on our network and our customers to roam on their networks. Our investment in developing our network has been strategically focused in major metropolitan areas in South Africa. At the national level, we benefit from the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, which enables us to route, especially in outlying areas, our customer traffic (voice and data roaming) on Vodacom’s network. We renegotiated our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement in June 2015, which has no maximum term but may be terminated no earlier than 2020 by either party subject to two years’ prior notice, to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) with significant reductions in unitary pricing per megabyte and per minute. This has enabled us to offer more cost-effective 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we do not have network coverage, resulting in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality. Our roaming arrangements with Vodacom enable us to provide national coverage in areas with lower population density, where it is more expensive for us to deploy our own network due to relatively lower costs of roaming. This provides us with cash flow flexibility, as well as costs savings on energy, transmission, site rental and maintenance costs and enables us to focus our investments on providing the latest technologies and services to our subscribers, such as the introduction of LTE and LTE-Advanced services. As at December 31, 2016, we carried approximately 90% of all traffic (85% of voice traffic and 90% of data traffic) on our own network; the balance was routed on Vodacom’s network.

Over the last few years, we have implemented various initiatives to improve the stability, quality, capacity, speed and coverage of our network with the rollout of an LTE-Advanced network that overlays our LTE, 3G and 2G networks. We believe these initiatives have resulted in an improvement in the stability, quality, capacity, speed and coverage of our network, with fewer network-related service complaints year-on-year. Our call drop rates have declined from 1.37% of all calls as of January 2014, to 0.73% of all calls as at December 31, 2016. In addition, we experienced a 67% increase in total data consumption in 2016 compared to 2015 and a 67% increase in total data consumption in the twelve months ended December 31, 2016, compared to the twelve

114

months ended December 31, 2015, which we believe stems from our improved network and rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks.

• Following a period of significant capital expenditure since 2010 (R11.6 billion between 2010 and December 31, 2016, which was funded by a combination of equity contributions from OTL and debt, our network has been upgraded and expanded to include 4,992 BTSs as at December 31, 2016 (up from 2,961 as at December 31, 2010), 4,882 of which were 3G-enabled. As at December 31, 2016, our 3G network covered 81% of the population. In addition, as at December 31, 2016, we had access to 42 BSCs and 41 RNCs across 18 locations in South Africa, respectively.

• We believe that we have optimally managed the timing of our rollout of LTE and LTE-Advanced networks, with 1,027 sites having been upgraded for LTE in 2015, as against our planned upgrade of 550 sites for the year (2,573 sites as at December 31, 2016), and 2,130 sites having been upgraded for LTE-Advanced as at December 31, 2016. Our LTE and LTE-Advanced networks cover 18.5% of the South African population as at December 31, 2016. We initially focused our LTE rollout efforts in Gauteng, KwaZulu-Natal and the Western Cape, as these areas have large urban populations and represent some of the most affluent neighbourhoods in South Africa, with coverage across these three key metropolitan areas. We also initially focused our LTE-Advanced rollout efforts in Gauteng and Cape Town, two key metropolitan areas, and KwaZulu-Natal, which included 395 LTE and 2 LTE- Advanced sites completed in 2016.

• The implementation of a regional network strategy enables us to provide coverage where it is needed most and to benefit from economies of scale. We also benefit from flexible supply arrangements with Huawei and ZTE, our principal suppliers, which we believe facilitates accelerated growth in our LTE and LTE-Advanced rollout strategy.

We have implemented further initiatives, including capacity and resiliency upgrades of our transmission network, and we have begun deploying a “dark fibre,” network, which provides us with unlimited bandwidth and leased line capacity (subject to the type of equipment used on the network), including the rollout of fibre on all LTE and LTE-Advanced sites (74% and 90% of LTE and LTE-Advanced sites, respectively, as at December 31, 2016). We have also undertaken various capacity and resiliency upgrades of our transmission network, deploying new sites, attaching generators and batteries to BTSs to ensure operation during power cuts, undertaking ongoing network testing to report areas where calls drop, modernizing our RAN equipment (including the replacement of approximately 1,212 sites from NSN to Huawei and approximately 620 sites from ZTE to Huawei). Moreover, we have undertaken a significant rationalization exercise, including the assessment of our network and decommissioning of under-performing BTSs, thereby reducing site rental and maintenance costs and transmission expenses, and allowing for the redeployment of BTSs in higher revenue generating areas.

Moreover, we have access to 76MHz of duplex spectrum, comprising 2x11MHz (900 MHz), 2x12 MHz (1,800 MHz) and 2x15 MHz (2,100 MHz) bands. We also have access to a 7 GHz fixed radio frequency spectrum license and 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network. We believe that our relative extra spectrum availability as compared to our competitors (we have the same amount of spectrum as our larger competitors, but with fewer customers, as a result of which we have more spectrum available per customer) enables us to actively promote data services to capture growing mobile data demand and gives us flexibility required to accommodate the technology shift in subscriber handsets and other devices from 2G through 3G to LTE devices.

In order to position ourselves for future growth in the fixed broadband market, we have targeted new investments in our network to allow for the launch of our FTTH offering, C-Fibre, which offers fixed broadband services over FTTH connections. We maintain a disciplined approach to expanding our fibre network and adhere to stringent project acceptance criteria, maintaining a maximum level of cost incurred per household passed before committing to a fibre build-out. Our FTTH build-out consists of a mix of fibre to the building (“FTTB”) and FTTH technology, which is ultimately implemented depending on the economics and density of the area. We began our FTTH rollout in 2016 and we believe that this fixed-line network provides us with an attractive value proposition, enabling us to benefit from the ongoing shift from other broadband technologies to FTTx as customers demand higher speed technologies, as well as cheaper access to data as demand for content and streaming grows. The rollout is currently in progress with 3 FNOs on board and 2,300 active subscribers. We see opportunities to drive revenue growth as a result of low broadband penetration in South Africa and the laying of national and international cables (South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed-line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2016 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow.

115

We have a track record of implementing initiatives to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies.

We have improved our earnings and cashflows in recent years by reducing our operating costs within our business through a number of measures, including, most significantly, proactively engaging with our regulators and more generally with industry players, as a challenger mobile operator, to achieve greater asymmetric regulatory treatment (which resulted in the evolution of asymmetric MTRs) and more pro-competitive regulatory treatment (which, for example, led to a reduction in the amount paid to incumbent operators for site rentals), as well as launching our operational efficiencies programme in 2014, which we continued to implement in 2016, pursuant to which we:

• rationalized our network expenditures, which included a programme of rationalizing under-performing BTSs and decommissioning such sites, reducing site rental and maintenance costs, substantially reducing site rentals on other sites (including via renegotiation of existing contracts and moving contracts from legacy suppliers to new suppliers), and implementing cuts in transmission expenses. We achieved a reduction in our network expenses from R1,909 million in 2014 to R1,851 million in 2015 and R1,793.9 million in 2016; • rationalized our procurement process, including setting up a committee for consideration and approval of operational expenditures, which has contributed to the reduction of operating expenses from 128.2% of our service revenue in 2014 to 124.0% in 2015 and 115.4% in 2016; • renegotiated roaming costs under our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement; • rationalized our incentivization programme in our distribution channels which led to a review of the ongoing revenue and upfront connection bonuses, introduced performance measures in respect of annual volume rebates and increased the period during which we could clawback incentive bonuses to reduce subscriber acquisition costs (“SAC”) and bad debt customers. We achieved a reduction in our bad debt expense from R268.8 million in 2014 to R174.3 million in 2015 and R92.7 million in 2016; • gradually reduced ongoing revenue payable on the device portion of monthly subscription fees to zero percent across all of our distribution channels; • discontinued our offer of high-end handsets on low-end entry-level packages; • eliminated subsidies on prepaid handsets; • rationalized our headcount, thereby increasing our total personnel costs (excluding bonuses and incentives) from R481 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2015 to R560 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016. Excluding performance bonuses (which were not made available in 2014), our total administrative expenses slightly increased from R1,896 million to R1,988 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016 compared to the twelve months ended December 31, 2015, due to the decline in salaries and wages; and

• implemented a range of measures to reduce our SAC as a percentage of our total revenue (from 8% in 2014 to 5% in 2015 and 4% in 2016), including offering lower subsidies on handsets and reallocating SAC and bad debts due to the Handset Financing Arrangement.

We have an experienced management team with a proven industry track record and further aligned interests.

We have a dedicated and experienced management team with significant prior experience in operating and managing telecommunications businesses locally and internationally, who have effectively achieved growth in revenue quarter-on-quarter for 15 of the past 16 consecutive quarters ended December 31, 2016 (when comparing each quarter to the corresponding quarter in the prior year), achieved a turnaround of our EBITDA margin from 7.4% in 2013 to 14.7% in 2015 and 21.2% in 2016, as well as successfully grown our market share between 2012 and 2016, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, from approximately 11% to 16%, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, from approximately 9.2% for 2012 to 11.6% for 2016.

Our Chief Executive Officer, Jose Dos Santos, has over 20 years of leadership and experience in the telecommunications industry, having served as part of the Vodacom management team for 8 years. Our Chief Financial Officer, Tyrone Soondarjee, joined us on 1 July 2017 and has 30 yeas of experience in the financial services industry. Our Chief Strategy Officer, Robert Pasley, has experience in finance and telecommunications since before the launch of mobile communications in South Africa, having served at Vodacom for 11 years. Our

116

management team played a pivotal role in devising and implementing our customer-oriented turnaround strategy and have focused on innovative ideas and taking swift action to allow these ideas to flow to the market quickly.

While we believe that our experienced management team has already demonstrated its ability to grow our business, for example, through rebranding, innovation, distribution channel expansion, strategic partnerships, network improvements and achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies, their investment in our shares as part of the Cell C Recapitalization should further align our interests and incentivise them to achieve our growth strategies.

Strategy

We intend to enhance revenue and cash flows by strengthening our position in the South African mobile telecommunications market and focusing on profitable growth opportunities, with the objective of becoming a profitable third operator in our market. We aim to significantly increase our share of the market by drawing customers from our competitors through strong subscriber growth and stable ARPUs, as well as achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies to improve our profitability. Based on the strengths discussed above, we believe that we are well positioned to deliver on the following strategies. We intend to continue to focus on value leadership (rather than price leadership) and innovation, providing our subscribers more content (minutes, SMS, MMS, Data) than what our competitors offer for the same price, while keeping our ARPU comparable to that of our competitors. We also intend to continue to improve the quality, capacity, speeds and coverage of our network, increase our focus on higher margin segments and our data offering, optimise our distribution channel and strategic relationships with operators of OTT services and MVNOs in particular, implement initiatives to encourage customer retention and improved customer experience and focus on maintaining and achieving further cost savings and operational efficiencies. We believe that certain segments of the mobile communications market in South Africa are largely saturated in terms of users and that increasing our market share will necessarily involve churning customers away from our competitors.

The Cell C Recapitalization, both in terms of the improvement to our balance sheet and the prospective strategic relationship with our new principal shareholder, has provided us with a compelling value proposition that we were unable to achieve with our historical balance sheet position. We expect that the significant deleveraging that has been achieved pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization will improve our operating cash flow as well as our profitability. We also expect it to better position us for sustainable growth and provide us with greater scope to further align our interests with our suppliers and distributors and forge strategic relationships with third parties, including potentially our competitors, with the ultimate objective of growing our revenue and achieving cost savings and operational efficiencies. We expect to have greater capacity to invest in growth initiatives, including capital expenditures to fund network improvements. Our improved balance sheet will reduce management’s focus on addressing our capital structure and on fund-raising efforts, enabling them to instead focus on achieving our strategies. We believe M5 and MS15’s investment in our share capital will incentivise management and our employees and in the case of management is designed to retain executives for at least five years to support the implementation of our strategy. We also believe that supporting the Cell C Recapitalization provides a compelling value proposition for Blue Label and us.

Leverage our position as a challenger operator to improve our competitive position.

We intend to leverage our position as a challenger operator in South Africa to continue to react quickly to opportunities and take advantage of new opportunities, including in our distribution and product offering, and to react in a timely and dynamic way to changing market demand. In addition, we propose to pursue opportunities to further align our interests with third parties, including operators of OTT services and content providers, to drive revenue growth and profitability. We will seek to drive further improvements in the shape and contours of the South African mobile market, to enable us to be more effective competitors and better serve consumers. To this end, we will continue to proactively engage with our regulators and avail ourselves of regulatory and judicial remedies to help improve our competitive position in the South African mobile market, such as in respect of MTRs, pricing asymmetry, pricing of and access to infrastructure and spectrum, roaming rates, handset subsidies and transparency of pricing.

117

Increase revenue market share by further developing our product offerings and evolving our revenue mix, with a focus on higher margin segments while continuing to grow our prepaid segment.

In terms of mobile service revenue, we had an estimated 11.6% market share for 2016. Our goal is to increase our revenue market share to 15-18% in the medium term and 18-20% in the longer term, by focusing on quality, service, innovation and human capital. We intend to focus on continuing to increase the quality of our subscriber base mix and achieve revenue growth in our higher margin segments, including our contracts and wholesale segments, that provide higher ARPU, lower churn and longer term revenue streams, while continuing to pursue revenue growth in our prepaid segment. We have also set up new business units and a dedicated salesforce, together with targeted marketing and distribution initiatives, aimed at acquiring high-end consumers.

Prepaid. We intend to pursue revenue growth in our prepaid segment, which has historically underpinned our revenue growth and been the central pillar of our business, accounting for 52% and 54% of our revenue (excluding equipment revenue) for the year ended December 31, 2015 and the year ended December 31, 2016, respectively. To achieve this, we will focus in particular on value leadership (rather than price leadership) and innovation, providing our subscribers more content (minutes, SMS, MMS, Data) than what our competitors offer for the same price, targeting a small increase in ARPU, and capitalizing on the anticipated increase in demand for data services, which we expect will result in small increase in ARPU in the short-to-medium term and more than offset the anticipated decline in voice and SMS traffic. We will seek to leverage our relationships and aligned interests with distributors, particularly with our incoming shareholder, Blue Label, whose interests we expect to be significantly further aligned with ours following the Cell C Recapitalization, to drive growth in this segment, and we will also seek to continue to leverage our relationships with operators of OTT services to drive data traffic. By providing high levels of service to prepaid subscribers, we aim to increase their loyalty to our brand and to migrate them to contract tariff plans. At the same time, we believe that the prepaid market, due to its attractive low entrance price will continue to remain popular in South Africa and we will continue to offer products and services that will attract new prepaid subscribers, with a particular focus on growing our core prepaid subscriber base.

Contract. We historically have suffered significant churn in our postpaid subscribers, in large part due to unfavourable customer experience with our network. With a renewed focus on growing our contracts segment, we will seek to reduce churn of postpaid subscribers from 47% as at December 31, 2016, to 17% by 2020, and churn of hybrid subscribers from 34.3% as at December 31, 2016, to 15% by 2020, through a series of initiatives. These initiatives include anticipated reductions in prices, improvements to our customer service (including through dedicated customer service initiatives such as our VIP exclusive customer service for high- spend customers) and improvements to our network to support our services (particularly in our core metropolitan areas) and improve customer perception of our network. In addition, we will seek to further optimise our distribution channels to enhance our physical presence in the market (including insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own, providing us with greater control over marketing of our products and services, availability of handsets in-store, employee training and enabling us to improve customer service and experience), leverage the Handset Financing Arrangement to improve availability of higher-end handsets (and create a more level playing field with our principal competitors), and leverage our relationships with operators of OTT services to drive data traffic (to offset expected loss of voice revenue) and churn subscribers away from our competitors.

While we will focus more on the postpaid component of our contract segment, we also intend to improve performance in our hybrid segment following weaker historical performance in an up-selling sales initiative to new and existing prepaid customers. We anticipate that changing consumer habits and increasing price consciousness within the South African mobile market may encourage potential customers to shift to hybrid products instead of pure postpaid products. We will focus on seeking to acquire hybrid subscribers from our competitors by offering better value and to grow our core base by shifting our focus away from the less valuable on-seller model to targeting retail customers.

Wholesale. We intend to significantly grow revenue in our wholesale segment, which is a highly profitable business for us due to relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks associated with wholesale arrangements. We will continue to deploy our hosting platform for MVNOs to add new MVNOs to our network and leverage their brands to access greater revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks.

Equipment. We expect our revenue from the sale of equipment (principally smartphones and tablets) to grow as we grow our contracts revenue, which we expect to be supported by the Handset Financing Arrangement.

118

Focus on further improving and expanding our network and improving customer satisfaction through operational excellence.

We believe we have a strong network infrastructure and have plans to further develop our mobile and fixed-line networks to meet the growing demand for data services, to improve customer experience and to continue to change customer perception of the quality of our network. We intend to achieve this by deploying significant further investment towards strengthening and expanding our network as well as further aligning our interests with key suppliers or our network equipment and maintaining the flexibility to tailor our investments depending on our operational performance. In the coming years, we expect to continue the historical levels of capital expenditures (though we expect these to reflect a smaller percentage of revenue as a result of our targeted revenue growth), as we transition to LTE and LTE-Advanced technology, including building 1,350 new sites by 2019 that will be active with LTE-Advanced, LTE, 3G and 2G technology; completing our targeted fibre build- out at our sites that is expected to be provided with LTE and LTE-Advanced equipment (currently 22% of our sites would require fibre to be deployed before going on air with LTE) and on our fixed-line network, and replacing existing architecture with new architecture to achieve synergies in our transmission network. We intend to continue to focus on providing LTE and LTE-Advanced coverage in key metropolitan areas where it is needed most and to benefit from economies of scale, while leveraging our existing 3G network and roaming agreements to provide coverage in outlying areas. We will consider further roaming arrangements as a function of our coverage plan while we maintain the plan of disabling access to roaming in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality.

In addition, we intend to consider suitable arrangements to further rationalise and optimise our network, including for example, further decommissioning of under-performing BTSs as well as possible passive infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we are permitted to do so in the future, active network infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in more significant cost savings and operational efficiencies as well as increased speeds. We may also consider bilateral roaming arrangements with other operators to improve network capacity.

We also intend to continue optimizing our spectrum. With the decline in traffic from 2G handsets on our 2G network (65% of all data traffic on our 2G network was generated by 3G devices as at December 31, 2016), we intend to refarm our existing 2G spectrum and reallocate it in LTE and LTE-Advanced areas and, to a lesser extent, 3G areas, to support growing demand for data services. On July 15, 2016, ICASA issued an ITA by way of the Spectrum Auction for wireless broadband spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range. This spectrum would allow us to cost-effectively increase capacity on our network, although we do not envisage requiring the spectrum in the short-to-medium-term. As we expand our range of services, we may require additional capacity. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our business and industry – Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.” The Spectrum Auction was challenged by the TPS Minister and us in August 2016 when we both launched urgent review applications in the High Court in South Africa. The applications sought to interdict ICASA from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction (“Part A of the proceedings”) pending the determination by the High Court of the legality of the ITA (“Part B of the proceedings”). Judgment in the Part A of the proceedings was handed down on September 30, 2016; the TPS Minister and we were successful in our applications and ICASA was interdicted from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction pending a determination of Part B of the proceedings. We expect Part B of the proceedings to be heard by the High Court in the second quarter of 2017. On October 3, 2016, the TPS Minister issued the White Paper that deals with the issuing of high demand spectrum and does not appear to favour an auction process. ICASA will have to consider any policies contained in the White Paper or any policies or policy directives that flow from the White Paper when it eventually issues the high demand spectrum. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating. Our ability to obtain the additional spectrum may be limited by competition or financial constraints.

A key part of our strategy involves continuing to improve customer satisfaction through operational excellence, so as to reduce churn. We will continue to strive to provide consistent, high-quality services for our customers. We will continue our brand repositioning efforts and make further investments in our customer service, implementing a number of further measures to improve customer service and experience. For example, we intend to increase our points of sale across South Africa, in particular insourcing of our franchise stores and increasing the number of stores that we own, to ensure that we have greater control over the availability of handsets and employee training, and to ensure close customer proximity. Likewise, we will continue to focus on improving the experience at all customer touch points, including contact centres, billing and end-to-end processes. Moreover, we will continue to implement and develop our churn programme (which currently comprises 21 short, medium and long-term initiatives based on an empirical root cause analysis of churn) to

119

address both voluntary and involuntary churn in our postpaid and hybrid subscriber bases. We also deploy various tools and retention deals in an effort to retain our customers. We will continue to implement our upgrade plan for priority BTS sites that suffer from the highest rates of churn.

Continue to improve our data offering to capture projected demand.

While non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP, and OTT applications as alternative technologies to mobile voice and messaging (SMS/MMS), are expected to continue putting pressure on our historical voice-led model of revenue generation, we aim to capitalize on the fast-growing penetration of smartphones and tablets in South Africa, the increased popularity of social networks, non-traditional voice services utilizing VoIP, and OTT applications, and the accompanying increased mobile data usage.

In South Africa, we have seen a strong uptake by subscribers of smartphones, and for the year ended December 31, 2016 approximately 84% of handsets sold to our contract subscribers were smartphones. In addition, we believe that the decline in prices of smartphones over time will continue to drive smartphone penetration in a market where historically smartphones were unaffordable for a majority of our subscriber base. Smartphone users typically add a data plan to their voice and SMS packages and we expect this trend to continue. We historically have been under-represented in this segment (during 2016, we believe we had the lowest proportion of total service revenue attributed to data of the four market participants), due to our low penetration of the commercial market and limited ability to offer smartphones in the period prior to our recent Handset Financing Arrangement. We expect to grow our mobile data revenue from 37% of our service revenue as at December 31, 2016, with a target of reaching approximately half of our service revenue across all products by 2020. The growth in demand for data services will be critical to the profitability of our postpaid services, with data expected to shift from ARPU of approximately R100 per month in 2016 to a target of approximately R140 per month by 2020.

We will seek to enhance our position as a leading data provider by offering new Internet of things (“IOT”) and value-added services for both the consumer and enterprise markets, streaming content services for all market segments (including content that is exclusive to us), achieving price sustainability for data, introducing entry level data-enabled devices and continuing to offer a wide range of affordable and high end smartphones and non-handset devices ranges, such as tablets, dongles and wearables, which will be facilitated by the recent Handset Financing Arrangement. For example, we recently launched our “Break The Net Cell C Reality” digital reality show proposition, which enables customers to upload videos through the “Break The Net Cell C Reality” mobile application and which designates weekly tasks to be achieved by the top 30 contestants (based on number of views). Contestants are positioned based on the number of times that their content is viewed. This proposition is the first of its kind in the South African telecommunications market and reflects our entry into the content space, as part of our efforts to produce our own unique content that is differentiated from other content providers in the market. Further, we will seek to launch our own entertainment platform in the latter part of 2017, which will bring us into the video on demand space and allow us to engage with our customer base and offer relevant content. These initiatives should provide us with an additional revenue stream and the ability to leverage mobile advertising opportunities.

In addition, we aim to capitalize on fixed line and fixed mobile substitution trends, including growing demand for higher speed technologies as well as less expensive access to data, and the accompanying increased data usage over fixed-lines. We believe that FTTH represents a potentially significant opportunity for growth, as currently only approximately 150,000 fibre lines are deployed in South Africa. We intend to leverage our partnerships with infrastructure providers to promote and extend our FTTH offering, with the aim of increasing our market share in this market. Moreover, we will continue to launch promotional and social media campaigns in an effort to drive customer acquisitions and encourage greater demand for data services. We also are seeking to leverage our LTE and LTE-Advanced technologies to tap into the fixed market, by introducing packages as an alternative to FTTH where it is not available and higher speeds and uncapped data are required to access streaming and digital services.

The trend towards growing demand for mobile data and fixed broadband is expected to stimulate the growth of mobile unique user penetration, a change in the mix of ARPU with a saturation-based reduction in voice mobile revenue and increase in data and value-added services revenue.

Optimise and strengthen our distribution networks, strategic relationships and key partnerships.

We intend to further optimise our distribution channels, with our principal focus on our distribution relationship with Blue Label and the optimization of our retail channel. The addition of Blue Label as one of our principal

120

shareholders provides Blue Label with significant incentive from a distribution perspective. We intend to work closely with Blue Label to facilitate greater operational efficiencies and provide us with opportunities to realise synergies in product distribution and market positioning, as well as information sharing. We believe the strategic partnership with Blue Label is also likely to better position us to understand and influence more of the steps required to take an innovative product or service to market and be able to offer innovation that is relevant, timely and more responsive to our customers’ needs. In addition, we would seek to benefit from their connectivity within the postpaid environment in South Africa. We also intend to further develop and leverage our telesales channel, including our internal inbound and outbound call centres, as well as our online sales channel, to increase the sale and visibility of all of our offerings. We plan to enhance our new website over the coming months, to improve customer experience with the aim of increasing conversion of online sales.

In the retail channel, we intend to rationalise our franchise model and increase our store footprint, with the aim of having approximately 20% of stores in our retail channel owned and managed by us by the end of 2016. This will improve our physical presence in the South African market and ensure that we have greater control over the availability of handsets and employee training and better proximity to our customers, enabling us to better manage customer experience and improve customer access to, and knowledge of, our product and service offerings.

In the wholesale channel, we intend to leverage our hosting platform for MVNOs to develop new strategic relationships, with the aim of significantly growing revenue in our wholesale segment.

We plan to nurture our existing partnerships, including with operators of OTT services and to continue to explore additional partnership opportunities, including with content providers, targeted at developing an innovative product and services offering, and capitalizing on anticipated growth in demand for data services.

Focus on operating our business in a lean and cost-efficient manner.

We are focused on maintaining and achieving further cost savings and operational efficiencies in our business in an effort to increase our operating margins. We plan to continue conducting a systematic review of our cost base at all levels and to implement operational efficiencies where appropriate.

Our cost structure is largely variable in nature, with approximately 30% of our cost base being fixed, 40% being partially variable and 30% being fully variable. In an effort to reduce our costs, we intend to focus on reducing the level of variable costs associated with incentivizing our distribution channels and strategic partners by leveraging our improved capital position and, in particular, our relationship with Blue Label. We will also seek to further optimise our distribution network; we expect that our distribution model will remain focused on our informal channel, with shops that utilize their footprint and dedicated instore concept, thereby minimizing our operational costs, as well as the retail channel, where we intend to increase our store footprint, with cost savings achieved in the rationalization of our franchise model being deployed towards expanding our store footprint. In addition, we will continue to further optimise and rationalise our network, principally targeting the reduction in our spend on property and site rentals, which has been significant, as well as further rationalization of under- performing BTSs and network equipment. We intend to continue actively building our own infrastructure to reduce our reliance on third-party infrastructure and, consequently, our long-term spend on property and site rentals. We may also consider suitable arrangements such as passive infrastructure sharing with other operators, to target cost savings and operational efficiencies and, to the extent that we are permitted to do so in the future, active network infrastructure sharing with other operators, which should result in more significant cost savings and operational efficiencies. Should our revenue growth not meet our expectations, we may consider scaling back on our network capital expenditures in the medium term.

We intend to control our SAC (including through growth in our wholesale channel using MVNOs to acquire and up-sell to customers at a relatively low cost to us) and continue to implement initiatives to improve our debt collection function and engagement with customers in respect of involuntary churn (to reduce our level of bad debt net of recoveries (which amounted to 2% of our service revenue in 2016)). We currently spend a significant amount on roaming arrangements (we spent R853 million on roaming arrangements for the year ended December 31, 2016) and we intend to explore alternatives to that infrastructure investment and options to reduce unitary national roaming pricing. We anticipate that we should be able to achieve further cost savings, in part driven by the shift from voice services to data services, which should reduce roaming costs.

Moreover, while we intend to continue growing our marketing and advertising spend to support our growth initiatives, we intend to reduce the share of marketing and advertising as a proportion of our service revenue (which amounted to 7% of our service revenue in 2016), which have historically been high as a result of our

121

efforts to change market perception of our brand over the past few years, by focusing increasingly on our presence in the online market.

We are on the last year of the MTR glide path for the reduction of wholesale MTRs and wholesale fixed termination rates, which provide us, as a challenger operator in the mobile market, with the advantage of asymmetric MTRs above the MTRs charged by the incumbent operators. We intend to proactively engage with our regulators when they revisit wholesale rates, and will continue to engage with ICASA to push for continued asymmetry as one of several pro-competitive measures.

We expect that the Cell C Recapitalization will also help us improve and align our interests with our partners, suppliers and distributors, including further aligning our interests with Blue Label, and forging strategic relationships with third parties to achieve cost savings and operational efficiencies.

Our Services and Products

Mobile Voice Services

Our mobile voice services include prepaid, post-paid and hybrid airtime offerings, as well as international calls and roaming services. In addition, we provide interconnection services to other telecommunications networks.

• Prepaid services using prepaid voucher top-ups. Prepaid customers do not have a subscription contract; instead, these customers purchase a Cell C starter pack containing a SIM card and activate the SIM card on the network after completing the registration process. Thereafter, prepaid customers may purchase airtime top-up vouchers from our airtime distribution channels, allowing them to control costs. Subscribers may currently choose among several different tariff options which include voice-centric and data-centric offers, with the price of prepaid voice calls and data per megabyte as well as bonus airtime/usage received varying across the tariff options. We offer prepaid subscribers choice and flexibility by allowing them to switch among tariff options on a monthly basis. The first migration per month is free; thereafter a nominal fee is charged. Our prepaid customers benefit from consistent airtime promotions where they are awarded with bonus airtime, bonus data or a mix of voice, SMS and data based on their tariff option and the denomination of their airtime recharges.

• Postpaid contract subscriptions. Postpaid customers enter into a fixed-term subscription contract with us, following a credit check. The majority of our postpaid contracts are available on a month-to month basis. Postpaid subscribers may choose the duration of their contract from a range of options including six, 12, 18 and 24 months, which allow customers to bundle a wide range of devices (such as handsets, tablets and routers) at an additional monthly fee. Our postpaid services and the prices we charge for these services vary across service packages that are targeted at different segments of our subscriber base. Most postpaid packages include basic mobile telephone services such as voice, SMS and data, and customers have access to additional services, including international roaming, international calling, data bundles, social bundles, as well as various value-added services such as taxi services, concierge services, and wireless application service provider (“WASP”) mobile content services, which use our network to deliver mobile content to customers. Our products are tailored for the specific needs of our target subscriber segments and, accordingly, different tariffs plans provide different inclusive benefits such as voice minutes, inclusive SMS and inclusive data. All plans cater for per second billing from the first second and voice rates per minute, SMS and per megabyte rates vary depending on whether the applicable plan is a voice-centric or data- centric.

• Hybrid voice services. Hybrid services share elements of both prepaid and postpaid services. Our hybrid packages involve a pre-determined contract credit limit that can be enhanced with prepaid top-up bundles at the customer’s choice.

• International calling and roaming services. International roaming enables our postpaid subscribers to make and receive calls and SMS, and use data roaming services, when traveling outside South Africa by using the networks of operators with whom we have entered into international roaming agreements. International roaming also enables us to offer network services to customers of other networks with whom we have roaming agreements while they are in South Africa. As at December 31, 2016, we had international roaming agreements with approximately 654 mobile network operators in 205 countries.

122

• Interconnection services. We provide interconnection services to the other three South African mobile telecommunications operators and to the two fixed line operators. We also provide interconnection services to a number of VoIP operators.

Mobile Data Services

Our mobile data services include mobile messaging services, including basic SMS and MMS capabilities enabling customers to send media including music, photographs and video from their handsets. We also offer USSD services (including callback and balance enquiries). We offer a wide range of prepaid, contract (postpaid and hybrid) broadband services that cater to various usage needs. We expect that by mid-2018, data will represent more than half our service revenue across all products, as a result of our capitalizing on expected market growth through expansion into the mobile broadband market and the continued rollout of an LTE network and LTE-Advanced network.

Value-added services

In addition to standard GSM telephone services, we currently offer, and are developing on a continuous basis, a variety of value-added mobile and data services to differentiate our products and increase customer usage. We focus on implementing and offering those services that are likely to be popular with our customers and which would add value to our business proposition. This includes services such concierge services, taxi and drive me home services, handset insurance, emergency airtime when customers have run out of airtime, free Facebook on internet.org, the ability to share airtime and data with other customers, WhatsApp bundles and the ability to gift a WhatsApp bundle to another customer. We also offer access to content through WASP mobile content services and social networking services. Most recently we have introduced Wi-Fi Calling, which allows our customers to turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into their very own Cell C base station to make calls, send SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even buy bundles, whether they are within South Africa or roaming internationally using their local airtime and minutes.

We will seek to enhance our position as a leading data provider by offering new IOT and value-added services for both the consumer and enterprise markets, streaming content services for all market segments (including content that is exclusive to us), achieving price sustainability for data, introducing entry level data-enabled devices and continuing to offer a wide range of affordable and high end smartphones and non-handset devices ranges, such as tablets, dongles and wearables, which will be facilitated by the recent Handset Financing Arrangement that we entered into with a third party. For example, we recently launched our “Break The Net Cell C Reality” digital reality show proposition, which enables customers to upload videos through the “Break The Net Cell C Reality” mobile application and which designates weekly tasks to be achieved by the top 30 contestants (based on number of views). Contestants are positioned based on the number of times that their content is viewed. This proposition is the first of its kind in the South African telecommunications market and reflects our entry into the content space, as part of our efforts to produce our own unique content that is differentiated from other content providers in the market. Further, we will seek to launch our own entertainment platform in the latter part of 2017, which will launch us into the video on demand space and allow us to engage with our customer base and offer relevant content. These initiatives should provide us with an additional revenue stream and the ability to leverage mobile advertising opportunities.

Devices

We offer a broad selection of handsets and related accessories from several manufacturers, including Apple, BlackBerry, HTC, Huawei, LG, Nokia, Samsung, Sony Mobile, AG, ZTE, CAT, Ruggear, Acer, Citrus, Mint, Mobile, Hurricane and Imagemobile.. These handsets range from inexpensive dual-band ultra-low-cost handsets to high-end quad-band smartphones that allow customers to roam across GSM networks globally.

CSTs

CSTs are a unique feature of the South African mobile telecommunications market and part of our licence obligations. CSTs are public pay telephones deployed in under-serviced areas, providing consumers with a regulated and reduced calling rate to national numbers, as well as international calling at market rates. We launched CSTs commercially in July 2003. Due to market dynamics in South Africa, the price for voice calls is well below the regulated CST voice price, therefore rendering the entire CST model virtually redundant.

123

FTTH Services

Our FTTH service is a layer 3 service, whereby we use open access fibre networks to serve customers with fibre available to their point of connection and we service and bill the customer. Our roll-out is therefore dependent on layer 1 and 2 operators respectively responsible for rolling out fibre throughout residential suburbs and installing the last mile connectivity to the homes. FTTH provides us with a strategic opportunity to service our customers and earn their trust, to consolidate their communications spend, including mobile, under one bill.

Tariffs

We offer our customers a variety of competitive tariff packages. Our tariffs are subject to regulatory oversight by, and notification to, ICASA.

Subscribers

As at December 31, 2016, approximately 87% of our active mobile subscribers were prepaid, 5% were postpaid and 7% were hybrid subscribers. Our primary objective is to gain scale in subscriber numbers and grow our core customer base. Customer acquisition and retention has been a focus area for us over the past few years and forms the basis for our revenue growth.

Active mobile subscriber base As at December 31, 2016 2015 (millions) Prepaid ...... 11,987,133 10,060,305 Postpaid ...... 493,756 488,542 Hybrid ...... 920,859 1,006,677 Broadband ...... 621,687 622,147 Total active mobile subscribers(1) ...... 14,023,435 12,177,671

(1) Includes (i) prepaid customers that have generated a minimum of one revenue event in the 90 days preceding the measurement date and (ii) all postpaid, hybrid, postpaid CST customers with an active contract.

As at December 31, 2016, we had approximately 1.4 million wholesale subscribers (0.5 million as at December 31, 2015). We see opportunities to drive revenue growth as a result of low broadband penetration in South Africa and the laying of national and international cables (South Africa has a relatively low rate of fixed-line telephony, with approximately 8% market penetration in terms of fixed-line connections in 2015 (source: International Telecommunications Union) and the rollout has been slow; mobile broadband services provide an alternative to fixed line broadband.

Our network

Overview

Following a period of significant capital expenditure since 2010 (R11.6 billion between 2010 and December 31, 2016), our network has been upgraded and expanded to achieve nationwide reach, with a focus on covering high density regions and relying on roaming agreements to complement our coverage in outlying areas where we do not have network coverage. We currently offer our services through our own state-of-the-art 2G GSM 900/1800 MHz and 3G high speed packet access (“HSPA+”) 900/2100 MHz mobile telephone network. In addition, we offer LTE services in South Africa’s four major metropolitan areas, including Johannesburg, Pretoria, Cape Town and Durban. LTE Advanced is offered in Johannesburg, Pretoria and Cape Town. Our network is a multi- radio network that allows us to run GSM, HSPA+ and LTE on any available spectrum frequency, with access to 4,992 BTSs as at December 31, 2016 (up from 2,961 as at December 31, 2010), 4,882 of which were 3G-enabled. As at December 31, 2016, our 2G network covered 98% of the South African population with GRPS/EDGE and our 3G network covered 81% of the population. In addition, as at December 31, 2016, we had access to 42 2G BSCs and 41 RNCs across 18 locations in South Africa, respectively, and access to 76MHz of duplex spectrum, comprising 2x11MHz (900 MHz), 2x12 MHz (1,800 MHz) and 2x15 MHz (2,100 MHz) bands. We also have access to a 7GHz fixed radio frequency spectrum license and 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network. We believe that our relative extra spectrum availability as compared to our competitors enable us to actively promote data services to capture growing mobile data demand.

124

The improvement in our network’s ability to cater for growth and improve network efficiencies, coupled with the attractive value proposition and subscriber-accretive marketing campaigns, has supported growth in our active mobile subscriber base from an estimated 6.3 million as at December 31, 2010 to14 million as at December 31, 2016.

Network development

We commenced commercial operations in November 2001 (as the third entrant in the South African market) initially relying on the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, pursuant to which we routed our customer traffic over Vodacom’s GSM mobile telephone network.

Our investment in developing our network has been strategically focused in major metropolitan areas. At the national level, we benefit from the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement, which enables us to route, especially in outlying areas, our customer traffic (voice and data roaming) on Vodacom’s network. We renegotiated our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement in June 2015, which has no maximum term but may be terminated no earlier than 2020 by either party subject to two years’ prior notice, to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) with significant reductions in unitary pricing per megabyte and per minute. This has enabled us to offer more cost-effective 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we do not have network coverage, resulting in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality. Our roaming arrangements with Vodacom enable us to provide national coverage in areas with lower population density, where it is more expensive for us to deploy our own network due to relatively lower costs of roaming. This enables us to focus our investments on providing the latest technologies and services to our subscribers, such as the introduction of LTE and LTE-Advanced services. As at December 31, 2016, we carried approximately 90% of all traffic (85% of voice traffic and 90% of data traffic) on our own network; the balance was routed on Vodacom’s network.

We fulfilled all our original license requirements (of 60% population coverage and 8% geographic area coverage) within five years after our commercial launch.

In 2012, we secured more valuable 2100 MHz 3G spectrum, which is used for our HSPA+ network. This spectrum has increased the value of our network and provides us with meaningful capacity for growth over the long term. While our network is comparable to that of Vodacom and MTN (we have equivalent spectrum to Vodacom and MTN, and have the third largest number of sites in South Africa), our network is relatively underutilized and requires further sites and capacity to make better use of our resources. We believe the network has capacity to support future growth.

In 2013, we terminated and reversed our third-party network supply agreements and managed services agreements, transferring back the ownership, responsibility and accountability with regards to network planning, rollout and maintenance. Our network key performance indicators improved and we experienced a decline in block rates (which means the percentage of calls that cannot be established out of total calls that are requested in a given period) from 2013 to 2014. Over this period, block rates dropped from 0.49% to 0.19%. During 2013, all core network projects planned for the financial year were completed and the revised rollout targets for the Mobile Backhaul Transport (“MBT”) network were exceeded. In 2013, we also signed a contract with a new vendor to take over the rollout and expansion of our network in Gauteng, a key region for us, and provide us with equipment and services in support of core backhaul and IT systems. The contract value amounts to $151 million (€ 133 million) and was fully funded by our long-term ICBC Term Loan that was put in place in 2014 (see “The Cell C Recapitalization—Debt Structure” and “Use of Proceeds”), which has been refinanced pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

In January 2014, we successfully switched off national roaming with Vodacom in the Durban CBD and the process is now being expanded into other regions. We provided notice to Vodacom to end roaming agreements in specific areas, in an effort to maximise our revenue generating capacity. This was supported by the extensive new tower rollout completed in 2014, in an effort to mitigate the impact of national roaming costs on our EBITDA. We completed the first phase of our intensive network improvement project in the Gauteng Region in the second half of 2014. This project included the harmonization of our network equipment on 1,215 BTSs in the region, as well as the replacement of out-dated technology on some of these sites. Network traffic consolidation and stability enhancements have proven to show exceptional customer feedback on quality. We have also identified various areas in Gauteng that support income-generating customers and continue to seek to

125

improve coverage and capacity. We continue with similar projects in other metro regions to sustain the stability, quality and modernization drive across the country.

As at December 31, 2016 our network in South Africa consisted of 4,992 active BTSs linked to 42 BSCs. This includes 348 new base stations built in 2014 and 200 new base stations built in 2015 and 323 new base stations built in 2016 to improve capacity and bandwidth, as we move from microwave to fibre transmission. Currently, we have 1,907 base station sites on our fibre network and we plan to have an additional 600 sites on our fibre network for the remainder of 2017, bringing approximately 74% of all of our LTE base station sites on our fibre network. These fibreized base station sites are mainly in the LTE-covered metropolitan areas of Johannesburg, Pretoria, Cape Town and Durban In addition, as at December 31, 2016, we had 205 active micro base stations offering dedicated coverage for network hotspots. Of the 4,992 base stations, we transferred to ATC the passive network infrastructure (including the related land leases) on which 1,364 of our BTSs are built and, in 2013, we renewed our agreement with ATC for the transfer of ownership and management rights in respect of an additional 482 newly built sites until June 2015. The base stations, mobile switching centres and base station controllers are interconnected by transmission links. We currently use dark fibre to provide connectivity for our core network. We have implemented a transmission system that is capable of switching and routing the traffic via a different transmission route in the event of a transmission or equipment failure. All core locations and data centers do have two different transmission routes and two sets of transmission equipment that automatically will route traffic to the redundant route from the active route in the event of a transmission or equipment failure.

We also use a combination of lines provided by Telkom, Broadband Infraco and Dark Fibre Africa as transmission to connect smaller metros to our network. The base station subsystem is controlled by thirteen media gateways (“MGWs”) and four mobile switching centres (“MSCs”), which interconnect with Telkom, Neotel, Vodacom and MTN in several locations in South Africa for voice services. International voice connectivity is provided by several international interconnect partners. The data network consists of four SGSN/MMEs and four GGSN/PGWs and connects to three cable systems (WIOCC, Seacom and WACS) for International internet connectivity. Local internet connectivity is provided by Internet Solutions.

The following chart depicts our GSM, UMTS, LTE and LTE-Advanced network coverage as at December 31, 2016.

GSM Coverage

126

UMTS Coverage

LTE and LTE-Advanced Coverage

LTE and LTE-Advanced Rollout

As the trend of substantial data growth in South Africa as a result of uptake in smartphones and the increase in social media communications via these smartphones continues, wider fibre deployment and access to high demand spectrum to launch effective LTE networks and services has increasingly more important for the cost- effective provision of mobile data services on an increased sale. In 2012, we successfully implemented a trial LTE network with transceiver stations deployed in Sandton, Pretoria, Durban and Cape Town, pursuant to which we gained technical experience. This technical experience has been applied to upgrades in our network and has assisted with the further deployment of our LTE network. In April 2016, we launched our own LTE- Advanced network, with coverage across three key metropolitan areas in South Africa. We initially focused our

127

LTE rollout efforts in Gauteng, KwaZulu-Natal and the Western Cape, as these areas have large urban populations and traditionally house some of the most affluent neighbourhoods in South Africa. We also initially focused our LTE-Advanced rollout efforts in Gauteng and Cape Town, two key metropolitan areas, and KwaZulu-Natal, with such rollout currently ongoing. The implementation of a region based network strategy enables us to provide coverage where it is needed most and to benefit from economies of scale. We also benefit from flexible supply arrangements with Huawei and ZTE, our principal suppliers, which we believe facilitates accelerated growth in our LTE and LTE-Advanced rollout strategy. As at December 31, 2016, 2,573 BTSs provide LTE services covering 18.5% of the South African population.

We continue to forge ahead with our transition to LTE technology, and we intend to deploy LTE on 1,215 existing sites and to build 1,350 new sites with LTE capability over the next three years. To date, our LTE site development has exceeded our plans, with 1,027 sites having been upgraded for LTE in 2015, as against our planned upgrade of 550 sites for the year (2,573 sites as at December 31, 2016), and 2,130 sites having been upgraded for LTE-Advanced as at December 31, 2016. We expect to upgrade an additional 584 sites (as part of the 3,059 existing sites) in central, eastern and northern regions of South Africa in 2017 as part of our acceleration strategy for deployment of LTE. In addition, we intend to refarm our spectrum (which is the reallocation of radio spectrum into smaller bands) in LTE areas to have 10MHz on 2,100MHz band for LTE and 10MHz for 3G on 900MHz. Moreover, we intend to deploy fibre on all of our LTE sites (currently 22% of our sites would require fibre to be deployed before going on air with LTE).

In the first quarter of 2015, we signed supply and service agreements with both Huawei and ZTE, which entail the rollout of more than 3,000 LTE sites in South Africa over a 4-year period (which has since commenced), which process has been significantly accelerated, to bring high-speed broadband technology to our customers in targeted areas across South Africa, expanding our coverage and providing better network speeds and service. The LTE rollout will complement our continued investment into our existing network and the rollout of additional towers to improve HSPA+ performance and increase coverage and capacity across the country. This will also enable us to improve our product offerings and grow our revenue and market presence.

Wi-Fi Calling

In October 2015, we joined major international mobile operators around the world, including Sprint, T-Mobile US and others, to launch Wi-Fi Calling. As at December 31, 2016, we were the only operator in South Africa to offer Wi-Fi Calling commercially.

With our Wi-Fi Calling, customers can turn any Wi-Fi hotspot into their very own Cell C base station to make calls, send SMSs, check voicemails and balances and even buy bundles. Our Wi-Fi Calling service is integrated with phones that support the service, such that customers continue to use their phone number and handset as they would have done when making a standard call, sending a regular SMS and/or using the USSD menus. There is no need to download any applications to make Internet-based calls. Once connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot in a hotel or café, customers can make and receive calls and messages, as though they were in South Africa, even when travelling abroad, and at the same rate they would pay as if they were in South Africa. In addition, unlike international roaming, Wi-Fi Calling does not charge customers for incoming calls. The added benefit is that we do not require prepaid roaming agreements to allow our prepaid customers to use their phones while traveling abroad as they can use their prepaid numbers anywhere in the world so long as they are connected to a WiFi hotspot.

Customers using Wi-Fi Calling are able to use their bundled contract minutes and/or prepaid airtime to make calls or send SMS messages. We also offer a Wi-Fi Calling bundle at reduced rates.

Spectrum

We believe that we possess attractive spectrum relative to our competitors due to our lower subscriber count and lower traffic carried and that we are well positioned to capitalise on the growth of data consumption and consequently penetrate the mobile broadband market.

At present, we have been allocated the following spectrum by ICASA for use on our base station network:

128

We also have access to a 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network.

We are currently not constrained with respect to our spectrum, which is capable of supporting high-volume data traffic. We believe that our relative extra spectrum availability (we have the same amount of spectrum as our larger competitors, but with fewer customers, as a result of which we have more spectrum available per customer) enables us to promote data services to capture growing mobile data demand. As we expand our range of services and/or use new technology to offer new services, we may require additional capacity in the medium- to-long term. Access to this more developed spectrum would enable us to cost-effectively push more capacity onto our network.

If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating. Access to this more developed spectrum would enable us to cost-effectively push more capacity onto our network. In addition, as we expand our range of services, we may require additional capacity in the medium-to-long term. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our business and industry – Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers” and Regulatory Framework – Spectrum Licences.”

129

Marketing, Sales and Distribution

Marketing

Our aim is to build a sustainable brand with a strong customer base. In 2015 and 2016, we were recognized as one of South Africa’s top 50 leading brands overall as rated by Brand South Africa. In the last three years, our growth has been significantly derived from the lower socio-economy community, which is characterized by lower ARPUs. We believe that the Cell C brand has been strategically positioned to achieve brand elevation for the middle to higher end of the market and we continue to focus on building the Cell C brand (in both the traditional mass market as well as to position it to appeal to a slightly more affluent consumer), to create more widespread brand affinity in an effort to generate sales and take competitive products and offers to market.

We utilise a comprehensive and integrated communications strategy that includes television, radio, Internet, press, outdoor billboards, community and national sports, arts and music sponsorship, public relations and the utilization of customer relations management tools and techniques. We build campaigns around product launches and other similar events. In 2016, we launched the following brand campaigns and sponsored the following events:

• Cell C Sharks • Miss South Africa • Southern Equitorial Ferrari Automobili Club • Cell C Take a Girl Child to Work Day • Free State Rugby • Club Newlands • E-Entertainment! • SA Swimwear Magazine • SA Lingerie Magazine • Cell C Johannesburg Classic Polo • Cell C Playing for Pink Polo • Varsity Cup Rugby • Varsity Sports Football, 7’s Rugby and Beach Volleyball • Cell C Day of Races (running races)

• Brand Campaigns:

• “Dog” ad – Released exclusively online and in selected cinemas, our controversial “Dog” TV commercial attracted widespread exposure and viral talk-ability in the first half of 2015, attracting over 700,000 YouTube views. Speaking to the frustration of South African consumers being taken advantage of at every turn, this disruptive commercial sought to establish us as the brand that has their customers’ best interests at heart.

• Believe #anythingcanhappen this summer – 2015 marked the third year of our highly successful series of “Believe” summer brand campaign, once again including an integrated digital element where customers won more than R20 million worth of prizes, including weekly R100,000 cash prizes, as well as daily airtime and data prizes. The above-the-line campaign featured a host of inspirational, high-profile, widely recognisable South African celebrities, whose life-stories are synonymous with the concept of “if you dream it and believe it, you can achieve it”.

• In terms of brand accolades, we won an industry-high five Loerie Awards, as well as one Pendoring awards.

• Social Media: We experienced negative customer-driven and sponsored social media campaigns against us in 2015 and 2016. We have been undertaking various initiatives to improve the profile of Cell C in social media, including customer engagement and continuing to improve our network.

• Our social media platforms have seen substantial growth in 2016, with Facebook showing a 60.3% growth, and Twitter a 40.4% growth, in fans. We have also widened our social media reach by becoming active on the Instagram and LinkedIn platforms in 2016.

130

• Customer engagement on our social media content has also been consistently higher than the benchmarks set by Facebook and Twitter. In 2016, our average level brand engagement on Facebook was 1.21% (Benchmark: 0.5%-1.0%), while the average for Twitter was 1.21% (Benchmark: 1.0%-2.0%)

• From March to December 2016, we experienced the lowest amount of negative brand mentions when compared to the other three mobile network operators in South Africa.

• We have had the highest percentage of responses to customer queries on social media platforms in comparison to the three major competitors, consistently improving from 59.1% in January to 80.76% in December 2016.

• Sponsorships:

• Cell C Sharks Flagship sponsorship – 2016 proved to be a challenging year for the Cell C Sharks in the third and final year of our initial sponsorship period, with the team reaching the Quarter Finals of Super Rugby, but not managing to make the Playoffs of the Currie Cup with a young and inexperienced squad in the middle of a rebuilding phase. John Smit was replaced by Gary Teichman as CEO in August 2016 and, after protracted negotiations, it was decided to renew this sponsorship for a further three years, until the end of 2019. This, following the renewed vision for the Franchise under Teichmans’ stewardship, firm in the belief that the experience gained by their young squad shows substantial promise for success in the future, under new head coach Robert du Preez’s firm leadership.

• Miss South Africa sponsorship – The sponsorship of the Miss South Africa Pageant continued in 2016 as an elegant, high-profile expression of our commitment as a brand to the empowerment of women in South Africa The pageant took place at Carnival City this year, as Sun City was undergoing an extensive renovation for the majority of the year, and Ntandoyenkosi Kunene was crowned Miss South Africa 2016. As an extension of the sponsorship, once again many of the finalists accepted the offer to intern at Cell C for a period after the pageant, thereby gaining invaluable insight into the corporate world and empowering themselves for the future. The Miss South Africa sponsorship is up for renewal and negotiations are currently underway.

• Cell C Take a Girl Child to Work Day – 2016 marked the 15th anniversary of this initiative, which affords female scholars the opportunity to spend a day in the corporate environment. It involves many South African companies and hundreds of thousands of female learners. This campaign has become so entrenched in corporate South Africa that President Zuma addressed the media on the initiative in 2014. It is now a regular annual event in the South African corporate calendar.

• Other sponsorships – In the past three years, we have also been involved in a number of other sponsorships that we believe have contributed to build Cell C brand in different market segments, which include the Southern Equatorial Ferrari Automobile Club, Varsity Cup Rugby, Varsity Sports Beach Volleyball, 7’s Rugby and Football, the Cell C Community Cup Rugby, the President’s Golf Day, Premier Interschool’s Rugby, Playing for Pink Polo, the Matric Rage Festival and the inaugural 2015 World Rugby Cape Town 7’s which in particular received special attention as the national team named BlitzBokke won the tournament.

These sponsorships have served to enhance the profile of our brand and to align it with our target audience in the contract segment.

• Product retention campaigns: In 2016, we executed a number of campaigns in an effort to improve customer retention, including among others, campaigns to improve product awareness, campaigns in connection with product launches.

Product development and Promotions

In conjunction with building brand affinity through brand campaigns and integrated sponsorships, we continue to focus on taking competitive and innovative products to market.

131

• Prepaid: We continue to drive the prepaid market with value propositions in an effort to ensure that our affinity with customers is maintained and to generate greater awareness by offering better value to our customers.

• In March 2014, we launched the Prepaid Infinity unlimited product for high-end users. This product was designed with unlimited any-net calls, 1,000 SMSs, and 1,000MB data. In May 2014, we embarked on a SUPACHARGE rationalization project, where benefits were reduced on the lower end prepaid vouchers. This aided in improving margins on the product by encouraging customers to upsell to higher-end vouchers where more value is offered. In addition, four new value vouchers were introduced, R20, R30, R60 and R120 giving customers a rand value bonus instead of minutes, SMS and data, which we believe was well received.

• In May 2014, we launched the EasyChat plan with a competitive data rate of 79 cents per MB and a R1.50 voice tariff rate was introduced. This product was positioned as a data-centric offer and customers also receive 20MB of free data on their first recharge of R10 or more in the month. In July 2014, we increased the free 20MB data to 50MB of data for a three-month promotion. Since the launch of EasyChat in May 2014, the offer has attracted more than 1.9 million customers. In 2015, the default prepaid plan for all new prepaid activations is the EasyChat plan with a voice rate of R1.50, SMS rate of 50 cents, and data rate of 99 cents per MB. Customers on this plan receive MegaBonus benefits and free WhatsApp.

• In June 2014, we introduced a 66 cents tariff plan, offering customers the then-lowest guaranteed flat call rate in the country after aggressive price reductions from certain competitors. Both competitors dropped their rates to 79 cents per minute for a promotional period. In July 2014, we dropped this rate further to 50 cents per minute due to a decrease by a competitor to 60 cents. The new MTRs announced by ICASA in September 2014 necessitated changes and we therefore adjusted the 50 cents per minute promotional call rate and reverted to 66 cents per minute on October 1, 2014. Approximately 95,000 customers joined this plan in 2014.

• In September 2014, we launched the MegaBonus promotion, which provided our customers with three times the value of their recharge to use for on-net calls, SMSs or data. In October 2014, we increased the value to four fold, providing customers with additional value (which promotion ended on December 31, 2014, whereupon the proposition reverted to three times the value) and, as at the end of November 2014, we had approximately 2.7 million customers on this plan, contributing more than one third of our prepaid revenue. The value offered on MegaBonus attracted more than 4 million customers (including a portion of our prepaid subscriber base) to move to this plan. We believe MegaBonus could yield better margins for us in future.

• In 2014, we introduced a free offering of the WhatsApp application to our subscriber base, making it available on the R1.50 EasyChat prepaid plans, as well as prepaid contracts that demonstrated growth. We were the first South African mobile operator to zero-rate over the top services. Our free WhatsApp offering was particularly successful and facilitated the acquisition of new subscribers. The campaign drove further growth of data traffic on our network and generated incremental revenue growth once we started to charge for this service following the end of the promotional period.

• In 2015, we introduced prepaid EPIC bundles, which provide customers with discounted voice bundles ranging from 60, 90 and 180 on-net minutes. Subsequent to this, we improved on our current EPIC bundles offering by extending the validity period of the EPIC daily minute bundles until midnight on the day of bundle purchase. In addition to the launch of EPIC bundles, we continued our efforts to attract additional prepaid customers by providing greater value by launching our MEGADATA promotion. MEGADATA enhanced the value given to EasyChat traffic customers by providing these customers with three times the value of free data when EasyChat customers recharge with R50 or more. MEGADATA was conceived to encourage customers on EasyChat tariff plans to recharge with higher value denominations, which contributes to our revenue growth.

• In an effort to provide prepaid customers with a wider range of offerings, “All in One” vouchers were relaunched in 2016, offering the prepaid market vouchers that include voice, SMS and data value. In addition, we launched the WOZA Weekend promotion in 2016, offering our customers

132

with free calls over the weekend on any network. The WOZA Weekend promotion successfully assisted us in acquiring new prepaid subscribers, as well as retaining existing prepaid customers.

• Contract: Since 2012, we have focused on rekindling growth in the contract segment, with the introduction of new tariffs and new handsets in order to stem the decline in postpaid revenue in the years preceding 2012. In particular, we focused on introducing tariffs that integrate the cost of handsets into the tariff and providing generous handset subsidies to our customers. In 2014, we decided to slow down the pace of growth in our contract segment to focus on addressing network quality and customer service issues that were resulting in unfavourable churn.

• In 2014, we launched an Infinity suite of products, in an effort to attract high-value customers on an any-net, unlimited postpaid offer. This was the first unlimited any-net postpaid proposition launched in South Africa. The product offers a SIM only proposition for customers to bring their own handset and take out a contract (of various lengths). It also offers unlimited calls, SMSs and 3GB data. In addition, customers were given the option to take a deal, which included a handset from a selected range. In 2014, we also launched Infinity Select, offering customers in addition to the unlimited calls, SMSs and 3GB data, a new handset upgrade every 12 months. Customers on this plan can also benefit from a free replacement handset in the event of damage. We have since launched a promotion on this product, whereby we increased the inclusive data to 10GB.

• In 2014, we launched various other offers, including Hi5, Straight Up Standard, ChatMore and SmartChat. Hi5 is a product positioned at medium value customers and the SME market segments. The product offers an on-net call rate of 75 cents to five selected numbers and 150 minutes, 150 SMSs and 150MB data with a monthly tariff subscription of R150. The uptake was limited. We also launched Straight Up Standard in 2014, which is targeted at customers who do not want to commit to a monthly tariff subscription but prefer to be on a pay-as-you-use basis. Although the value proposition does not include any inclusive value, we believe that the product performed reasonably well. ChatMore was launched with three variations; the first being SIM only along with two other packages providing inclusive benefits. As at December 31, 2016, all three variants provided the lowest guaranteed any-net, flat call rate of 79 cents per minute on per-second billing. This package continues to attract customers who want to benefit from a low call rate. SmartChat, a data centric offer proved to be popular among our subscribers, due to the increasing demand for data and take-up of smartphones. We believe that this offer helped to attract higher value customers. In addition, we introduced the voice rate at R1.50, improving margins per user from the traditional 99 cents rate.

• In 2014, we launched SmartChart TopUp, a product positioned at hybrid customers, which offers a value data package, with inclusive anytime data from 512MB to 4GB, with an out of bundle data rate of 79 cents per MB, free WhatsApp usage and 25 to 150 minutes, with a monthly tariff subscription of R99 for 1GB to R599 for 8GB of data. We also launched StraightUp TopUp in 2014, which is targeted at hybrid customers who want to benefit from the latest devices and packages, including minutes, SMS and data, with free WhatsApp usage, but prefer to be on a pay- as-you use basis. In addition, we provide existing hybrid customers with the option of adding an SMS bundle with packages ranging from 25 to 500 SMSs at tariffs ranging from R7.50 to R105. Our free WhatsApp offering was particularly successful and facilitated the acquisition of new subscribers. The campaign drove further growth of data traffic on our network and generated incremental revenue growth once we started to charge for this service following the end of the promotional period.

• In 2015, we launched our EPIC contracts, which are targeted at customers who prefer to choose how to spend their allocated airtime value between voice, SMS and data. EPIC contract plans enable us to appeal to a segment of the market that our older contracts do not cater for. EPIC contacts have been successful at generating higher value, greater out-of-bundle revenue and attracting new customers to our network. Included in the EPIC launch was the “Contract Buy Out” promotion whereby we bought out customer contracts from rival networks when a customer signed on to selected EPIC contract plans. This promotion was aimed at assisting clients that want to move to Cell C to buy themselves out of their current contracts with other networks because contract cancellation costs in South Africa tend to be prohibitively expensive.

133

• In 2016, we launched Pinnacle contracts which are aimed at attracting high-value customers that demand voice and data centric products. Pinnacle contracts have done well since their launch due to the relatively low out-of-bundle rates that are charged to customers subsequent to them breaking their bundles.

• Data: Sales on broadband packages have been slow in 2014, as customers have tended to purchase more bundles and prepaid packages.

• We increased our out-of-bundle data rates across all packages in May 2014, from 15 cents per MB to 99 cents per MB. This resulted in an initial increase in our data revenue, which then dropped and stabilized due to customers purchasing bundles. Although the increase in price created some negative publicity, we continue to try to offer competitive data products.

• We continue to focus on evolving our data bundles, and in August 2014 we introduced our DailyData bundles and NiteData bundles, which helped to improve our sales of high data bundles.

• Customers have become increasingly data-centric; this trend was evident in the growing number of broadband packages in 2015 and 2016. There has also been a sustained increase in data traffic growth over the same period as subscribers have consumed data bundles in greater numbers.

• Value-added services: We introduced a number of value-added services over the past few years, which have contributed to our total revenue.

• In 2013, we launched the C Advance service, since renamed Emergency Airtime. The C Advance service is based on an emergency airtime advance facility that allows prepaid and top-up customers to receive a pre-defined airtime amount as credit from us until their next recharge. As at December 31, 2016, more than 2.8 million unique customers were taking approximately four advances per month and, on average, 10.6 million advances are taken per month. In an effort to promote our C Advance service, we have introduced a number of campaigns, specifically targeting customers with a zero balance encouraging them to take an advance should they qualify. As at December 31, 2016, the C Advance service contributed approximately 12% of overall airtime sales. This product creates stickiness with our customers and reduces attrition of the base that is using the service.

• In December 2014, we launched our C Transfer service, which enables existing and new prepaid and contract top-up customers to conveniently send prepaid airtime to another Cell C prepaid or top-up customer’s account. Customers can transfer predefined amounts of R5, R10, R20 and R30 in a single transaction. The minimum transfer value is R5 with a maximum transfer value of R1,000 per day and a maximum transfer limit of R10,000 per month. As at December 31, 2016, approximately 390,000 unique customers were actively using this service monthly.

• In 2014, we also introduced a number of content services and introduced customers to various content clubs, ranging from dating services to Gospel quotes, traditional content and various other content services. We launched 12 new services in 2014, and introduced content service purchases via USSD in December 2014. The content portfolio continues to demonstrate healthy growth. In 2015 and 2016, we launched a greater amount of targeted services, such as street comedy. These targeted content services as helped us to widen our value proposition to customers which has led to greater content revenue growth.

• In 2014 and 2015, we provided customers with free WhatsApp messaging (from October 2014 to end of August 2015), which facilitated the acquisition of new subscribers. The campaign drove further growth of data traffic on our network and generated incremental revenue growth once we started to charge for this service following the end of the promotional period;

• In 2015, we joined major international mobile operators around the world, including Sprint, T- Mobile US and others, to launch Wi-Fi Calling. As at January 31, 2017, we were the only operator in South Africa to offer Wi-Fi Calling commercially (see “—Our network—Wi-Fi Calling”).

• In 2016, we launched our “Break The Net Cell C Reality” digital reality show proposition, which enables customers to upload videos through the “Break The Net Cell C Reality” mobile application

134

and which designates weekly tasks to be achieved by the top 30 contestants (based on number of views). Contestants are positioned based on the number of times that their content is viewed. This proposition is the first of its kind in the South African telecommunications market and reflects our entry into the content space, as part of our efforts to produce our own unique content that is differentiated from other content providers in the market. Further, we will seek to launch our own entertainment platform later this year, which will launch us into the video on demand space and allow us to engage with our customer base and offer relevant content.

• Handset and accessories sales: In 2014, a number of low, medium and high-end smart-devices became available to us, providing existing and new customers with an array of affordable devices. In 2015, we entered into the new Handset Financing Arrangement, and offered higher value handsets to support growth in our prepaid segment. Generally, the minimum term for the Handset Financing Arrangement (i.e., the period in which the ordinary 90-day termination notice may not be given) expires in May 2020.

• International calling and roaming services:

• International calling. We implemented various international calling campaigns in 2014, which provided additional international revenue to our portfolio. We implemented price increases for the top 30 international destinations in July 2014. Although the MoU on international calls are trending downwards, the increase in prices has made a positive contribution to our gross margins in 2014.

• International roaming. As at December 31, 2016, we had international roaming agreements with approximately 654 mobile network operators in 205 countries. As at the same date, more than 408 of such partners in approximately 158 countries allowed subscribers to use their data services, and more than 310 of such partners in approximately 139 countries allowed subscribers to use full 3G services on their networks.

• National roaming. We continue to use Vodacom’s network for national roaming purposes. Negotiations are currently underway to reduce the national roaming charges applicable to our subscribers roaming on Vodacom. Progress continues to be made on the call handover solution that we have required Vodacom to implement. In June 2015, we renegotiated our Vodacom National Roaming Agreement with Vodacom, to include 3G voice and data roaming services (to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provide for full use of Vodacom’s national network) and extend the minimum term until 2020, which has enabled us to offer 3G mobile coverage for customers in outlying areas where we are not able to, or do not wish to, provide coverage through our own network (typically because it is relatively more expensive for us to deploy our own network than rely on the roaming agreement due to relatively lower cost of roaming) and to be selective in our deployment of capital and strategically focus capital expenditures. This initiative resulted in an uplift in 3G traffic and improved customer experience on the one hand and, on the other hand, optimization of the use of our roaming agreement by actually disabling roaming functions in areas where our network coverage has reached sufficient capacity, stability and quality.

• Interconnection services: The call termination regime has evolved in South Africa over the last few years (see “Regulation—Regulatory Framework—Regulation of MTRs and Facilities Leasing” for further information). As at December 31, 2016, the rates were 19 cents for calls terminating on our network and Telkom’s network and 13 cents for calls terminating on Vodacom and MTN’s networks. The declining MTRs and degree of asymmetry afforded to us under the new regulations promulgated by ICASA on September 29, 2014 will negatively impact our overall margin.

Sales and Distribution

Our products and services are distributed through a variety of distribution channels, structured around six operational geographic regions, to enable us to better manage our channels, with a focus on our target customers, to facilitate growth in the scale of our subscriber base, particularly in the prepaid segment.

As at December 31, 2016, we had a developed and diversified distribution platform, consisting of:

• Informal Channels: These channels are based on points of sale outside of the traditional store-based retail channel, across various delivery mechanisms and via numerous merchants. These include super dealers and

135

regional dealers, which include street vendors, largely in townships and rural communities, and unique partnerships with select entities, including Worldstream (Econet) and Telestream, to target large expatriate communities that regularly travel from South Africa to their respective home nations or regularly communicate with their families and friends abroad. Our informal channels target the prepaid segment and have significantly expanded our presence across South Africa and contributed to our strong subscriber growth. These channels have enabled us to add mobility to our traditional retail channels and bring customers closer to the point of purchase, resulting in increased volume and growth opportunities via our distributors’ footprint. Most significantly, we have developed a close partnership with Blue Label, the largest distributor of prepaid airtime and starter packs in South Africa, with approximately 700,000 SIM connections a month and revenue of approximately R22 billion based on its reported results for the year ended May 31, 2016. Blue Label has contributed significantly to our growth in the prepaid market (80% of our airtime recharges for the year ended December 31, 2016 was generated via our partnership with them). As our primary distributor of airtime vouchers to the prepaid segment, our distribution arrangement with Blue Label ensures that customers are able to top up their phones with relative ease instead of swapping to competitor networks. Blue Label is also able to take advantage of a network of resellers, retailers and informal points of sale across South Africa, adapted to the market and purchasing habits of our target subscribers. Their presence in township and low income areas is key to reaching our prepaid subscriber base. Blue Label has become a significant investor in our share capital following the Completion Date and the resulting alignment of interests is expected to yield further advantages, particularly in respect of distribution.

• Franchise Channel: This channel included approximately 196 branded stores as at December 31, 2016 (consisting of 54 of our independently-owned branded sales centres and 142 independently owned franchise outlets branded as Cell C as at December 31, 2016). Our franchise channel targets the prepaid and contract segments. We plan to open a further forty new stores in 2017. Our top 8 franchise partners own 28 stores in KZN, 19 stores in Gauteng, 10 stores in Western Cape, 8 stores in Eastern Cape and 15 stores in the North region as at December 31, 2016. Collectively the top 8 franchise partners represent 54% of all franchise stores as at December 31, 2016.

• Retail Channel. This channel includes approximately 6,183 retail outlets situated in national chains as at December 31, 2016, predominantly for the sale of prepaid products and services to maximise our commercial reach. The two biggest retailers as at December 31, 2016 were Pepkor and Shoprite representing more than 80% of the prepaid spend in our channel. Pepkor remains the only retailer in the market with a dedicated focus on cellular products and services and represented approximately 14.8% of total prepaid spend on our products and services across all channels as at December 31, 2016. While it has traditionally partnered aggressively with one of our competitors, we believe that we have managed to form a solid business relationship with them.

• Direct sales. This channel includes both external and internal telesales channels for the acquisition and retention of customers. In the year ended December 31, 2016, we have been more focused on developing our internal inbound and outbound call centres for the acquisition of customers, while focusing on enhancing our customer retention capabilities through our external call centres. We anticipate growth in our online sales channel going forward, which will be housed within our inbound call centre operations.

• Business sales. This is a relatively new channel that was relaunched towards the end of 2014, via which we target predominantly corporate consumers and SMEs for contract sales through direct business sales consultants. This sector is extremely focussed on excellence service delivery and, with this in mind, we launched “Cell C Business Exclusive,” with a dedicated business sales team to better serve these customers.

• External service providers. This channel focuses on the contract segment and includes companies who have their own customers and receive network services from us. This channel is currently only represented by GloCell, an independent cellular service provider who bills and serves their own customers. GloCell acts as our service agent for the subscriber base that we acquired from Autopage in March 2016.

• South African government tenders. During 2015 we made considerable efforts to gain traction in public sector contracts through renewed tender processes with governmental entities. However, as at December 31, 2016 our level of progress in this channel was below our expectations. We face various challenges, including a general lack of urgency within government to progress tenders, further reductions and buy-outs being negotiated by the South African government following the award of tenders and seeing out existing

136

24-month contracts with other operators. We will continue to review and optimise this sales channel, and seek to implement various improves to our government-focused division.

• Other. This channel includes on-sellers and wholesale.

• Wholesale. This channel is mainly comprized of MVNOs with Virgin Mobile being the largest of the MVNOs. As at December 31, 2016, we had six MVNOs and 1.4 million MVNO subscribers active on our network. We have put significant effort into expanding our reach to customers through relationships with MVNOs, like FNB, Virgin Mobile and MVN-X. MVNOs contract directly with subscribers to provide mobile services hosted on our mobile network. We have also created a successful hosting platform for MVNOs, which allows us to efficiently add new MVNOs to our network with decreased need for customization. The MVNO partnerships allow us to leverage our network to access additional revenue streams with relatively low incremental administrative costs and risks, allowing us potentially to reach a more diverse base of subscribers. For example, our MVNO relationship with FNB provides targeted access to more than 600,000 subscribers and our MVNO relationship with Virgin Mobile provides us with targeted access to more than 460,000 subscribers. We believe that the investments we have made in our focused approach to MVNO partnerships will provide us with a competitive advantage as the market continues to diversify.

• Onseller Dealers. This channel principally consists of one partner, Blue Label Connect, an affiliate of Blue Label, following its acquisition of Retail Mobile Credit Specialists in 2014. This channel is focused on the hybrid segment, selling hybrid contracts to customers that do not typically meet our credit scoring criteria, whereby the dealer provides a hybrid contract to the customer and takes responsibility for the collection of subscription fees and bad debt. Given the range of attractive prepaid tariff plans on offer, including regular promotions, as well as the extensive presence of airtime sales points in the market offering convenient options to recharge airtime, many customers that were previously served by the onseller dealer channel have reverted to purchasing prepaid products and services via our informal channel.

Customer Care

Cell C provides our customers’ the ability to be serviced through a variety of channels. Customers can call, email or post on various supported social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, etc. They can also visit one of our walk-in service outlets or any of our distribution channels to receive face to face assistance.

In keeping with advancements in technology, Cell C also provides customers with the ability to service themselves via an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system or through our Cell C mobile app.

The call centres operate on a 24/7 basis and are located in Johannesburg and KwaZulu Natal. Customers have the option to be serviced in any of four different languages namely; English, Afrikaans, Zulu and South Sotho.

The current customer care operating model (implementation started in 2013) has improved the service experience offered to our customers. We have the ability to ensure our High Value customers (including more Exclusive customers) are serviced internally and our Hybrid/Prepaid customers are serviced through an efficient cost to serve outsourcing model. The outsourcing of our customer service function is limited to the management of an off-site Hybrid and Prepaid customer support centre in accordance with clearly defined parameters. At the end of 2016, Cell C won “The Best Call Centre Award” which ranked the organisation ahead of 28 other call centres across various industries. This Orange Index award emphasises that Cell C’s focus on excellent customer service has delivered to our customers.

Our Exclusive base had grown to 15,000 customers by the end of the year. The recent growth was as a result of adding additional customers who spend more than R999 on their monthly call subscriptions as well as adding customers who were defined as being influential to Cell C. These included senior executives and decision makers of companies and key stakeholders from our Government accounts.

The decision to embrace Social Media and the use of “social customer care” as a means to manage the service aspects of the brand’s reputation and credibility resulted in Cell C being continually recognised in the top 5 socially devoted companies of the “socialbakers” report across all industries in South Africa. Our social media team continue to be at the service forefront of the telecommunications industry on the “Hello Peter” forum, South Africa’s largest consumer advocacy and online business reputation management platform.

137

The “Operational Voice of the Customer Forum” was launched in order to achieve greater collaboration within our organization, to identify, resolve and improve customer experience metrics and become more customer- centric. We endeavour to engage with our customers via this forum, to deliver a better customer experience.

We launched the Cell C mobile application in January for Android devices and in May for IOS devices. This application enables customers to service themselves, and currently has been downloaded more than 90,000 times. The functionality includes usage to date, inclusive bundle information, customer profile information, invoice details and ability to recharge airtime for prepaid and top-up services (airtime, data and SMS). Customers also have the ability to link numbers making it easier to manage not only their voice but data sims as well.

It has been a positive year for Cell C as we managed to improve our “Customers willingness to recommend Cell C as a brand to friends and family” (Net Promoter Score) by 8%.

As a company, we have achieved the Consumer Net Promoter Score (CNPS) target of 35%. The overall CNPS score increased from 27% in December 2015 to 35% in December 2016.

The increase in the overall score can be attributed to an increase in Promoters and a decrease in Passive customers. There were some key actions that led to this improvement:

1. The alignment of NPS measures to Cell C’s company values;

2. Ensuring that there was a sound understanding of NPS from staff and senior management;

3. Monthly reports tracking the movement of NPS;

• Tracking the top reasons for promotion and detraction by month and previous year;

• Customer verbatim comments shared with respective Senior Leadership team members;

4. The introduction of the Voice of the Customer Forum to track issues/opportunities through to resolution/completion;

5. Awareness of NPS results was shared throughout the organisation in monthly customer information sessions, the monthly executive meeting and a monthly email to the Senior Leadership team;

6. Loyalty Campaign offering data rewards for our promoters.

As part of our focus to reduce our churn rate (late 2015) we established a churn reduction programme of short, medium and long-term initiatives (based on an empirical root cause analysis of churn) to address both voluntary and involuntary churn in our contract (postpaid and hybrid) subscriber bases. To date we have achieved the following:

• Established Churn (15%) as a companywide KPI and implemented various cross functional churn reduction and CX improvement management forums; • Resolved 87% of priority 1 and 93% of priority 2 BTS sites identified in the initial analysis (and ongoing); • Implemented special retention tariffs and reduced subsidies on devices associated with ‘financiers’; • Improved both our credit scorecards (ongoing) and user limit management, and implemented collections management system (Tallyman) to improve collections; • Launched a Tariff Analyser to offer advice and guide staff to assist our upgrading subscribers and • Launched phase 1 of a new campaign management and churn prediction system (to improve active base management).

By the end of the year, we reduced churn in our two largest and richest regions (Gauteng and Western Cape) by over 5% and reduced ASPU associated with churn by 4%.

138

Suppliers

Our network utilises standard equipment that is available from a limited number of suppliers, principally NSN, ZTE and Huawei. ZTE is a key partner and, in certain regions, it is our exclusive supplier of 2G/3G/LTE radio access network equipment. Huawei was selected as our second network equipment supplier in 2013. During 2014, our BTS RAN equipment was replaced in 1,212 sites in the Gauteng region and a further 620 sites from ZTE to Huawei in the Western Cape region. See “Certain Contracts Relating to the Operation of Our Business” for a discussion of our material supply contracts.

In 2015, we signed new supply agreements with both ZTE and Huawei, to deploy an additional 1,350 sites by 2019 (591 with ZTE and 783 with Huawei) that will be active with LTE-Advanced, LTE, 3G and 2G technology. As at December 31, 2016, approximately 58% and 42% of our installed BTSs were supplied by Huawei and ZTE, respectively. Notably, our network expansion is also financed through financing provided by Huawei and ZTE and our Wi-Fi calling service is financed through Huawei. See “Certain Contracts Relating to the Operation of Our Business” for a discussion of our material supply contracts.

Procurement

The B-BBEE Codes of Good Practice became operational on February 9, 2007 and were gazetted in the South African government’s Gazette No. 29617. BEE ratings range from levels 1 to 8 and help to categorise the BEE contributor status and thus compliance with the requirements in terms of Broad Based Black Economic Empowerment or B-BBEE. Businesses with good BEE rating levels benefit from access to preferential procurement and government licenses and businesses with a level 1 to level 4 rating are considered as fully compliant. In 2015, we improved our BEE rating from level 4 to level 3, as a result of which we receive 110% procurement recognition. This rating is valid until July 10, 2017. The new Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Chharter was gazetted on November 7, 2016; we are currently assessing the impact of the ICT Sector Codes.

Through the implementation of strategic sourcing and contract management, coupled with an in-depth review and implementation of strategies in various areas of our business in 2016, we have achieved a combination of direct and indirect savings on the year-to-date purchase order value in respect of purchases we have made from a third party.

Joint ventures

Our joint ventures include FibreCo, an independent fibre network operator offering bespoke high capacity data transmission solutions for operators, service providers and enterprises nationwide, in which we held a 33% stake as at December 31, 2016, and Mobile Number Portability Company Proprietary Limited, which administers the porting of mobile numbers across several mobile networks in South Africa, in which we held a 20% stake as at the same date.

• FibreCo is a joint venture between ourselves, Convergence Partners Management Proprietary Limited and Dimension Data South Africa. It was created to develop an open-access long-haul terrestrial fibre optic- broadband network as a solution to the deficit in South Africa’s national transmission infrastructure. Each of the parties holds a 33.33% equity share. FibreCo’s network is being rolled out in 3 phases. It will, ultimately, connect the key urban centres across South Africa with fibre optic cable. In December 2013, FibreCo completed construction on 3 out of the 4 phases for Phase 1 when a fibre link, which connected Johannesburg, Bloemfontein, East London and Cape Town went live. This link spans over 2,000kms and is already serving several customers including British Telecom, Dimension Data, Cell C and Liquid Telecoms and generating revenue for the company. Construction of the Cape Town to Durban route, the last part of Phase 1, is in advanced planning stage and will complete a fully redundant ring connecting the key urban centres in the country, which is the vision of Phase 1, but which has not yet been actioned to commence. Thereafter, this will be the platform on which FibreCo will densify its network to provide a national fibre network. FibreCo is in the process of planning subsequent phases of its roll-out and international fibre optic network. We are currently evaluating transmission options with a view of optimizing our use of existing and planned fibre back haul facilities in support of a range of strategic network role imperatives. The delivery of FibreCo’s footprint into the market realized significant savings and allowed for FibreCo to swap its footprint with other fibre providers, providing FibreCo with access to more than 4,000 km of long-haul fibre.

139

• FibreCo’s shareholder agreement required each shareholder, including us, to provide maximum shareholder funding of R110 million each, to cover the initial phase of construction. As at December 31, 2016, each shareholder (including us) had provided or committed to an amount of R63 million in the form of shareholder loans or guarantees under the terms of the shareholders agreement, plus an advance of R20 million which was repaid in February 2017. We have also signed an Indefeasible Right of Use Agreement with FibreCo totalling R180 million for six fibre pairs on the Johannesburg to Cape Town link. The contract is for 20 years and includes a variable operations and maintenance component payable by Cell C to FibreCo for maintenance of the fibre pairs purchased.

• We are engaged with the Number Portability Company on the implementation of new MVNOs utilizing the unique routing codes.

Competition

The South African mobile network telecommunications market is concentrated among four operators— Vodacom, which is owned by Vodafone Group Plc; MTN, which is owned by MTN Group Limited; Telkom; and Cell C. We are the third largest of four mobile network operators in South Africa. Between 2012 and 2016, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, we grew our market share from approximately 11% to 16%, and in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, we grew our market share from approximately 9.2% for 2012 to 11.6% for 2016. Vodacom, MTN and Telkom, the other three significant mobile operators in the South African market, had approximately 44.6%, 35% and 4.3% market share, in terms of reported active mobile subscribers, respectively, at December 31, 2016, and approximately 50.5%, 35.8% and 3.4% market share, in terms of reported total mobile service revenue, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2016.

Competitors such as Vodacom and MTN have significant market presence, operating capabilities and other resources that are substantially greater than Cell C and, and this market concentration may increase, potentially significantly. More generally, we may increasingly face competition from new technologies in South Africa, particularly following the introduction of LTE, such as VoIP, Wi-Fi, wire-band wireless and converged offers may provide an alternative to mobile, for both voice and data transmission and could have an adverse effect on our results of operations.

Given the maturity in the South African mobile market, there has been a trend towards strategic partnerships and consolidation. The sector has been subject to transactions that have reduced competition. We submitted a complaint to the Competition Commission in October 2013 against certain competitors for practices of charging less for on-net than for off-net calls, which we allege amounted to an abuse of dominance (see “—Legal Proceedings and Contingent Liabilities—Flat rate initiatives”).

Community Initiatives

We have supported strategic community service initiatives since we launched in 2001 and, in an effort to further support such initiatives, we established the Cell C Foundation, a registered non-profit company, in 2013. The Foundation’s strategy is purpose driven and guided by various factors, including the Millennium Development Goals and Government priorities, the meeting of the requirements of the ICT Sector Charter and embracing the principles and values of the Broad-Based BEE Codes of Good Practice and addressing the real needs of the communities in which we operate. The Cell C Foundation continues to promote, among others, gender equity, including via its support of the “Take a Girl Child to Work Day” and the “Technogirl Entrepreneurship Programme.”

Intellectual Property

We are the registered owner of the trademark “Cell C” in South Africa with respect to telecommunications- related devices and services, as well as the registered owners of the trademarks associated with our products and services. We have also registered our internet web domain name, www.cellc.co.za.

Insurance

We believe that we are insured against all major risks. Our insurance coverage includes, but is not limited to, all of our assets and business interruption; public liability; directors’ and officers’ liability; group personal accident; travel; construction risk; sabotage and terrorism; and employment practices liability.

140

Employees

In a continued effort to streamline our business, avoid duplication of functions and enhance efficiencies, we embarked on an optimization process in 2014, which continued into 2015. This necessitated finding the appropriate balance between significant headcount reduction and sustained operational performance. The retrenchment process resulted in a 22.6% reduction in our total headcount since December 31, 2013.

The following table provides a breakdown of our employees as at the periods indicated:

As at December 31, 2016 2015 2014 Full-time ...... 1,596 1,499 1,113 Part-time ...... 676 532 1,062 Total ...... 2,272 2,031 2,175

In 2015, due to a legislative initiative, we offered a number of part-time employees permanent employment, which resulted in the significant decline in part-time employees and increase in full-time employees from 2014.

Our employees are not subject to any collective bargaining agreements.

Legal Proceedings and Contingent Liabilities

We are not involved in any material litigation arising in the normal course of business.

Other than as set forth below, we believe that pending claims and actions, either individually or in aggregate, will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

CellSAf Litigation

On November 24, 2016, CellSAf issued a summons in the High Court of South Africa against Cell C, Blue Label and various other parties to the Cell C Recapitalization. See Risks Relating to the Cell C Recapitalization– CellSAf and/or its shareholders or representatives may take actions to delay or prevent the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization for further details.

Porting. We have lodged a semi-urgent interdict application, asking the High Court to prevent Vodacom and MTN from obstructing their customers from porting their numbers to us. We believe that if these individual and business subscribers port to our network, we will be able to substantially grow our share of contract subscribers in the South African market. Vodacom settled with Cell C and stopped its obstructive practices, whereas MTN defended the matter. The High Court found in Cell C’s favour on September 6, 2016 and ordered MTN to stop its obstructive practices pending a determination by ICASA on the matter. ICASA have yet to set the matter down for hearing.

Property

As at December 31, 2016, we had 20 corporate property leases located across South Africa, consisting of nine office parks, one call centres, four warehouses, two switching centres and our head-office campus located in Johannesburg, which was completed in November 2013. The head office, or Cell C Campus, consists of four buildings: the main building, the warehouse, the data centre and the customer care centre.

In 2015, we exited our leased property at Menlyn Office Park and we moved our staff into our new headquarters. The lease expires in November 2017 but we are currently subletting the property.

We intend to renew all our leases, with exception of our lease at Menlyn Office Park that we exited in 2015.

In 2014, we successfully moved all warehouse employees into our new warehouse at Cell C. The warehouse has been fully operational since June 2014.

In addition to our office and warehouse facilities, almost all our BTSs are on sites leased from third parties. As at December 31, 2016, we had access to 4,992 active BTSs. Of these, approximately 4,181 are subject to site-

141

sharing agreements with other operators or tower companies. MTN and Vodacom share 732 sites and 827 sites, respectively, with us (see “Certain Contracts Relating to the Operation of Our Business––Vodacom Site Sharing Agreement”), and 323 are subject to a site-sharing arrangement with Telkom. The passive network infrastructure (including the related land leases) on which 1,276 of our BTSs are built and the ownership and management right in respect of 1,821 sites have been transferred to ATC as part of the Tower Transactions and are subject to the site leasing arrangement with ATC.

142

CERTAIN CONTRACTS RELATING TO THE OPERATION OF OUR BUSINESS

Supply Agreements, ATC SPA and ATC Master Lease, ATC Guarantee

On December 29, 2009, we entered into a network supply agreement with ZTE (the “ZTE NSA”) regarding various construction works and services, including relating to our BTS sites, to be provided by ZTE. On July 29, 2013, ZTE and ourselves entered into a completion agreement, which amended the scope of ZTE’s responsibilities under the ZTE NSA. On December 17, 2014, we entered into an agreement on the closure of network supply with ZTE, documenting the termination of the ZTE NSA.

On February 20, 2010, we entered into a network supply agreement with NSN (the “NSN NSA”) regarding various construction works and services, including relating to our BTS sites, to be provided by NSN. On November 30, 2012, we entered into a completion and settlement agreement, which addresses our relationship with NSN going forward.

On August 1, 2010, we entered into a master services agreement with Atos Origin (Pro) Ltd (“Atos”), which became effective on November 26, 2010, pursuant to which Atos was appointed to supply certain solution designs, tests and project management, which includes the architecture solution for our Wi-Fi Calling services. In order to rationalize the chain of supply of certain services, we subsequently appointed Huawei as general contractor for certain services under the FSA, as defined below. As a consequence, with regards to Wi-Fi Calling, Atos is engaged by Huawei as subcontractor in terms of the FSA.

On November 15, 2013, we entered into a Frame Supply Agreement (the “FSA”) with Huawei, and on March 30, 2015, we entered into a second Frame Supply Agreement (the “FSA2”) with Huawei, both relating to, inter alia, the supply of RAN equipment, the expansion and upgrade of our LTE network nationwide, the upgrade and expansion of our MBT network and microwave network, the evolution of our core networks (including improvement of capacity and performance) and the upgrade of our existing IT network. The FSA has a 5-year term; the FSA2 has a 4-year term.

On April 1, 2015, Cell C entered into a supply agreement with ZTE, relating to, inter alia, the supply of components of our RAN, including capacity upgrades to our BSTs and radio network controllers, the upgrade and expansion of our LTE network nationwide and the replacement of existing indoor and outdoor solutions and microwave network equipment, over the 2015 to 2018 period.

Following our entry into the ZTE NSA and the NSN NSA, we decided to sell and lease back certain BTS sites under a sale and purchase agreement dated November 4, 2010 (“ATC SPA”), with Cell C Tower Company, Cell C Towers Management Proprietary Ltd (formerly Micawber 797 (PTY) Ltd. (trading as ATC South Africa Wireless Infrastructure Proprietary Limited, “TowerCo”), Friedshelf 1228 (PTY) Ltd. (the “Buyer”), ATC and OTL. Pursuant to this agreement, we conveyed and transferred certain BTS sites to TowerCo and all shares in TowerCo, which were held by us, to the Buyer. It was also agreed that the parties to the ATC SPA would enter into the ATC Master Lease, pursuant to which we lease back the respective sites from TowerCo. As further agreed in the ATC SPA, on March 7, 2011, we, TowerCo, ATC and OTL entered into a supply agreement regarding NSN and a supply agreement regarding ZTE (the “Supply Agreements”) under which we agreed to cause NSN and ZTE, respectively, to convey certain sites being constructed by them to TowerCo; TowerCo agreed to purchase those additional sites.

Pursuant to the terms of the Supply Agreements, TowerCo was not obligated to purchase more than an aggregate of 1,800 sites from us. Both Supply Agreements terminated on June 30, 2015.

Upon the closing of any site conveyance pursuant to the Supply Agreements, any such site became subject to the site leasing arrangement under the ATC Master Lease.

As security for our obligations owed to ATC under the ATC Master Lease, OTL has provided the ATC Guarantee, which guarantee falls away once our debt to EBITDA leverage ratio reaches or falls below 3.75x. OTL has the benefit of an irrevocable and unconditional indemnity from Cell C under the OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement, for any and all claims that TowerCo may bring against OTL under the ATC Guarantee. The OTL/Cell C Indemnity Agreement is conditional on the effectiveness of the Implementation Agreement. See “The Cell C Recapitalization.”)

Site Sharing Agreements

143

Vodacom Site Sharing Agreement

On December 19, 2001 (the “Vodacom Effective Date”), we and Vodacom entered into a Site Sharing Agreement (the “Vodacom Agreement”) under the terms of which Vodacom agreed to share the Vodacom BTS sites located in metropolitan areas on the condition that for each Vodacom BTS located in the metropolitan areas which we wished to share, we had a similar BTS site located in a metropolitan areas which Vodacom wished to share. For BTS sites outside of metropolitan areas, no reciprocity was required. However, as per addendum dated October 22, 2002, we agreed that if the visiting party has no similar BTS sites inside a metropolitan area that the other party wants to share, the visiting party may share such site on the same terms and conditions, mutatis mutandis, that apply to sites located outside metropolitan areas. Furthermore, if both parties have a BTS site outside of a metropolitan area which the respective other party wants to share, the parties will share such BTS site on the same terms and conditions, mutatis mutandis, that apply to shared sites in metropolitan areas. There are certain circumstances under which the parties will not be bound to site sharing, reciprocal or otherwise, including, but not limited to (a) the mast at the BTS site cannot accommodate additional load, (b) the introduction of new technologies to or the upgrade of the BTS site render the BTS site unable to accommodate additional load, and (c) the sharing of sites will be against applicable laws.

The Vodacom Agreement makes provision for payment of certain rentals for the BTS sites, which are differentiated on whether they fall within or outside the metropolitan areas. The Agreement makes further provision for payment of electricity, administrative charges and interest in the event of late payments.

The Vodacom Agreement came into operation on the Vodacom Effective Date and, following an initial period of five years, will endure indefinitely, subject to either party having the right to terminate the Agreement upon one year’s written notice to the other party.

MTN Site Leasing Agreement

On February 22, 2002 (the “MTN Leasing Effective Date”), we entered into a Site Leasing Agreement with MTN (the “MTN Leasing Agreement”). This agreement differs from the MTN Infrastructure Sharing Agreement dated October 26, 2001, in that there is no pairing of BTS sites. Either party may apply to the other to share a BTS site. There are certain circumstances under which a party may withhold its approval to site sharing, including, but not limited to (a) the mast at the BTS site cannot accommodate additional load, (b) the introduction of new technologies to or the upgrade of the BTS site render the BTS site unable to accommodate additional load, and (c) the sharing of sites would be against applicable laws.

The MTN Leasing Agreement makes provision for payment of certain rentals for the BTS sites, which are differentiated on whether they fall within or outside major metropolitan areas, metropolitan areas and non- metropolitan areas, as well as whether each site is accessible by road, and makes further provision for payment of electricity, administrative charges and interest in the event of late payments.

The MTN Leasing Agreement came into operation on the MTN Leasing Effective Date and will endure indefinitely, or until such time as either party’s licence is terminated for whatsoever reason.

On January 31, 2011, we entered into an amendment, assignment and accession agreement, pursuant to which TowerCo also became a party to the MTN Leasing Agreement. This was crucial for the sale and leaseback transaction with ATC pursuant to the ATC SPA.

Neotel Site Sharing Agreement

On January 15, 2008, we entered into a site sharing agreement with Neotel (the “Neotel Site Sharing Agreement”) under which both parties agree to share sites with each other. Either party may apply to the other to share a site, but neither party has an obligation to lease a site to the other party. The agreement will continue until the last lease has been terminated.

Telkom Site Sharing Agreement

On April 2, 2013 (the “Telkom Sharing Date”), we entered into a site sharing agreement with Telkom, pursuant to which we can apply for BTS sites we want to lease; unlike other site sharing agreements, this site sharing agreement is not reciprocal. The initial term expires five years after the Telkom Sharing Date, but Telkom may elect to extend the term for five additional years.

144

Eaton Co-Location Agreement

On February 17, 2012, we entered into a co-location agreement with Eaton Towers Proprietary Limited (“Eaton”), under which Eaton leases BTS sites to us and also provides certain services on these sites. The agreement will continue until the last lease has been terminated.

Roaming and Interconnection Agreements

Vodacom National Roaming Agreement

To provide full geographic coverage comparable to that of Vodacom and MTN, we entered into a long-term national roaming agreement with Vodacom in October 2001. This agreement was replaced with a new agreement with Vodacom, effective April 1, 2004, as amended on May 22, 2013, June 8, 2015 and May 9, 2016 (as amended and supplemented, the “Vodacom National Roaming Agreement”). We subsequently amended the Vodacom National Roaming Agreement on May 9, 2016, including to extend the minimum term until 2020, to reduce applicable rates and to include 3G data roaming on Vodacom’s 3G/UMTS network. The Vodacom National Roaming Agreement enables us to offer the same coverage as Vodacom and provides full use of Vodacom’s national network, with no maximum term.

Telkom Interconnection Agreement

We entered into an interconnection agreement with Telkom in 2001 (the “Telkom Interconnection Agreement”) to facilitate connectivity for voice and data services between our mobile switched telecommunications network and Telkom’s PSTN. In addition, the agreement addresses billing for interconnection services and creation and maintenance of the technical interfaces required to support interconnection. This agreement governs mobile-to-fixed MTRs.

The fixed-to-mobile MTRs for commercial calls subsequently became subject to regulation by ICASA from March 1, 2011 and from October 1, 2014. Currently, the Cell C to Telkom MTR is: R0.10 per minute for in area calls and R0.15 per minute between area calls. The Telkom to Cell C MTR is 0.10 per minute for all calls. These rates will decrease annually from October 1 each year until 2017 to a final MTR of R0.10 for all calls terminated by Cell C customers on Telkom’s network and R0.19 for all calls terminated on by Telkom on Cell C’s network. The Telkom Interconnection Agreement provides that Telkom’s interconnection agreements with Vodacom and MTN apply, mutatis mutandis, between Telkom and Cell C.

Vodacom and MTN Interconnection Agreements

On October 9, 2001, we entered into an Interconnection Agreement with Vodacom and a similar agreement was entered into with MTN on October 29, 2001. ICASA introduced call termination regulations as from March 1, 2011 and most recently issued new call termination regulations effective October 1, 2014. Currently, the MTR payable by us to Vodacom and MTN is R0.13 per minute and the MTR payable by MTN and Vodacom to us is R0.19 per minute. These MTRs decrease annually from October 1, each year until October 1, 2017 to a final MTR of R0.13 per minute payable by us to Vodacom and MTN and an MTR of R0.19 per minute payable by MTN and Vodacom to us.

Other material contracts

Blue Label Airtime Agreement

On February 27, 2013, we entered into a binding term sheet (the “Airtime Agreement”) with Blue Label, pursuant to which Blue Label purchases prepaid airtime from us. The Airtime Agreement is effective for four years and nine months from June 1, 2013. The Airtime Agreement sets out the commercial terms of our arrangement with Blue Label, including with respect to incentives. The Airtime Agreement provides for the application of certain clauses of an airtime distribution agreement entered into between Cell C and the Blue Label Subsidiary, dated December 7, 2009, to the Airtime Agreement, mutatis mutandis. Subject to certain exceptions, we are generally restricted from offering any more favourable or preferential terms to any third parties in connection with the purchase of airtime from us.

We are currently in the process of negotiating further arrangements with Blue Label.

145

Handset Financing Arrangement

On August 3, 2015, we entered into an amendment and restatement agreement (the “Handset Financing Agreement”) with Comm Equipment Company Proprietary Limited (“Comm FinCo”) and Comm Equipment Trading Company Proprietary Limited (“Comm TradeCo”), which amended and restated an existing product procurement and financing agreement dated May 8, 2015. The Handset Financing Agreement became effective on August 6, 2015.

Pursuant to the terms of this agreement, Comm TradeCo supplies us with handsets and devices such as mobile phones and tablets. We can elect to sell such products to Comm FinCo. CommFinCo is able to finance its purchases of handsets from us by paying Comm TradeCo directly, or, if we have already paid Comm TradeCo for such handsets, by paying us. Therefore, as part of the Handset Financing Arrangement, handsets linked to activation of subscriber contracts (by a franchisee or telesales) are effectively sold back to the vendor, and we recognize equipment revenue for the handsets sold back.

An eligible customer may enter into an agreement with Comm FinCo and us to finance the purchase of its handset over a two-year period, payable in monthly instalments. Subscribers are responsible for the principal component of the amount financed, and we pay the interest charge on behalf of the subscriber (which we report as interest expense). We also provide a subsidy, administration fees and margin fees (which fees are accounted for in our finance costs) to Comm FinCo (which we report as financing costs, and which depends on the tariff that is combined with the handset and the length of the contract), which reduces the principal component of the amount financed. In addition, we provide a guarantee to Comm FinCo of the amounts payable by the customers, which would cover any amounts not recovered by them. For certain handsets, we take full risk in respect to any bad debt arising from subscribers, and for other handsets, we are liable to pay the bad debt on the handset receivable based on certain pre-agreed terms. An actuarial based calculation of the estimated fair value of the guarantee is reflected on our balance sheet, and to the extent we are required to make payments under the guarantee due to subscriber defaults, it is reflected as part of finance costs.

The Handset Financing Agreement does not prescribe a fixed term; each party may terminate the agreement upon 90 days’ written notice to the other parties, which notice may not be given prior to May 6, 2020.

The Handset Financing Agreement has enabled us to better meet customer demand for handsets (where we were previously unable to do so) and offer higher value handsets to support growth in our postpaid segment, while freeing up an average of approximately R191.4 million per month of working capital since August 9, 2015 to December 31, 2016.

ITC Master Framework Agreement

On August 5, 2016, we entered into a Master Framework Agreement (the “ITC MFA”) with International Tower Company Proprietary Limited (“ITC”), pursuant to which ITC, through its subcontractors, may provide us with property services such as site acquisition and site construction. ITC will build passive infrastructures for us on a build to suit basis and, in general, build BTS towers independently from the network operators. With regards to the towers built on a build to suit basis, we will lease these towers for a period of ten years, in which we manage the sites and may lease them to co-locators. After this period the ownership of the relevant tower will be transferred to us. We intend to be supplied by ITC with 1,000 sites. As of 31 December 2016, 555 sites have been constructed by ITC and a further 195 sites are planned for 2017. The ITC MFA terminates after five years but the parties may extend the term for 12 months at a time.

146

REGULATION

The following is a summary of the most relevant regulations applicable to our operations and is not intended to be a comprehensive description of such regulations.

Overview

The Independent Communications Authority of South Africa (“ICASA”) regulates the telecommunications industry (also referred to as the information, communications and technology industry) in South Africa and is our principal regulator. A number of far-reaching changes have been made to the legislation governing South Africa’s telecommunications industry over the last decade, with much of the detail left to ICASA’s implementation. The Department of Telecommunications and Postal Services (“DTPS”) issues policies that are then given effect by way of regulations issued by ICASA. Although ICASA has been issuing regulations over time, much remains unaddressed. The DTPS is entitled to continuously revise policies, and may impose new or different policies at any point in the future, and has a history of policy changes.

All telecommunication services in South Africa have been liberalized or are in the process of being liberalized. The only restriction on entry into the market is the requirement to hold a service and/or network license issued by ICASA to provide telecommunications services or operate a network.

Telecommunications Industry Regulator

ICASA was established in July 2000 under the terms of the Independent Communications Authority of South Africa (ICASA) Act, 2000. ICASA took over the functions of two previous regulators, the South African Telecommunications Regulatory Authority and the Independent Broadcasting Authority.

ICASA derives its mandate from several statutes, including: the ICASA Act, 2000; the ICASA Amendment Act, 2006; the ICASA Amendment Act 2 of 2014, the Broadcasting Act, 2002; and the Electronic Communications Act (“EC Act”), 2005, as amended in 2007 and 2014. ICASA also regulates the Postal sector in terms of the Postal Services Act, 1998.

ICASA is responsible primarily for:

• making regulations that govern electronic communications, broadcasting and postal industries;

• conduct enquiries into any matter with regard to the objects of the Act, regulations and compliance;

• issuing licenses to providers of telecommunication services and broadcasters;

• planning, administers controlling and managing the use and licensing of frequency spectrum;

• monitoring the telecommunications environment and enforcing compliance with rules, regulations and policies, as well as license conditions;

• hearing and deciding on disputes and complaints brought by the industry or members of the public against licensees; and

• protecting consumers from unfair business practices, poor quality services and harmful or inferior products.

Regulatory Framework

EC Act and related regulations

We operate within South Africa primarily under the EC Act, which came into effect on July 19, 2006, as amended by the Electronic Communications Amendment Act 1 of 2014, which came into force on May 21, 2014. The EC Act is the primary legislation regulating the electronic communications industry in South Africa. The EC Act covers a wide range of matters, including licensing, access, infrastructure rights, the management and assignment of frequency, markets and competition and universal service. It replaced the Telecommunications Act, 1996. However, all regulations made by ICASA under the Telecommunications Act remain in force until amended or repealed by ICASA under the EC Act.

147

The ICASA regulations under which we operate set forth rules and requirements with respect to, among other things, radio frequency spectrum, applicable minimum standards for end-users and subscribers, numbering, general license fees, universal service fees, code of conduct, interconnection, facilities leasing, mobile number portability, call termination, approvals for equipment and compliance procedures.

There is a general prohibition against the provision of telecommunication services without a license issued in accordance with the EC Act. The EC Act introduced a horizontal licensing framework, which includes individual, class licenses and licence exemptions. The licensing framework is technology neutral, meaning that operators may use any type of network they wish.

Service licenses

ECNS and ECS provided over ECNS are licensed separately under the EC Act. An ECNS license authorises the holder to rollout and operate a physical network. An ECS license authorises holders to provide services to customers over their own or someone else’s network using numbers from the national numbering plan. ECNS licensees can enter into commercial arrangements with other licensees to allow them to use the networks operated by the ECNS licensees. ECNS licensees wholesale network capacity to ECS licensees for resale and do not deal with the public. They operate physical networks made of facilities such as fibre or BTSs. ECS licensees, on the other hand, offer retail services to the public (and may also provide wholesale services for resale to third parties) and operate virtual networks, such as virtual private networks and MPLS networks. Frequently, telecommunications providers hold both types of service licenses.

Since it is possible to lease network capacity from a third party, new competitors can enter the telecommunications market without building their own infrastructure. Licensees, including Cell C, must, on request, interconnect with and lease electronic communications facilities to any other licensee, unless such request is unreasonable, and must enter into interconnection agreements and facilities leasing agreements for this purpose. Where the parties are unable to reach an agreement, the EC Act confers on ICASA the power to intervene and propose, or impose, terms and conditions for the interconnection agreement or the facilities leasing agreement, or refer the matter to the Complaints and Compliance Committee for resolution. ICASA must review any interconnection agreement and any facilities leasing agreement to determine whether it is consistent with the regulations and, if the agreed terms are not consistent with the regulations, direct the parties to agree on new terms and conditions. The EC Act also empowers ICASA to impose pro-competitive conditions on operators found to have SMP in a market or market segments that have ineffective competition, which may affect the manner in which facilities are leased by such operators, and the charges thereof, including the leasing of facilities at or near the long run incremental cost of those facilities. This also includes the termination rates charged by such operators in the case of interconnection.

There are two classes of licenses, an individual license and a class license. Individual licenses are required to provide services that have a significant impact on socio-economic development. Individual licensees will include ECNS of national or provincial scale and voice telephony ECS that use numbers allocated by ICASA. License applications for individual licenses may only be made in response to an invitation from ICASA. ICASA may only issue such invitations after a policy direction issued by the Minister of the DTPS. As such, there is a degree of political control over competition at a network level. The ECNS license and the ECS license that we hold are individual licenses.

Class licenses will include ECNS of municipal scale, data ECS and voice ECS where numbers are sub-allocated by licensees. Due to an amendment to the EC Act pursuant to the Electronic Communications Amendment Act 2014, licenses applied for after May 21, 2014 are limited in scope to a district or municipal municipality (i.e., they have the same geographic scope of application as class ECNS licenses).

Individual ECNS and ECS licenses are issued for 20 years; class ECNS and ECS licenses are issued for ten years. All service licenses can be renewed upon payment of a renewal fee. Licenses may be amended, surrendered, assigned, ceded or transferred upon ICASA’s approval and the payment of a transfer application fee.

A third grouping of regulatory permissions is exemptions from licensing. Certain services are regarded as being of limited socio-economic importance and can be provided on a license-exempt basis following the approval of an application for a license exemption by ICASA.

Our individual ECNS and ECS licenses became effective in January 2009 and are valid until January 2029. ICASA published final amended Process and Procedures regulations and amended Standard Terms and

148

Conditions for IECNS and IECS licences regulations. These regulations provide for the processes that ICASA and licensees will follow when dealing with a change in control and transfer and change in shareholding of such licences.

Spectrum licenses

In addition to service licensing, if a telecommunications provider intends to use radio frequency spectrum, that provider must obtain a radio frequency spectrum license from ICASA. An ECNS license is required before the licensee will be entitled to apply for a radio frequency spectrum license. All radio equipment used by spectrum licensees must be of a type approved by ICASA and all prescribed technical standards must be followed.

The governing regulations are the Radio Frequency Spectrum Regulations (2001), introduced by ICASA to combine all spectrum regulation from as far back as 1979 into a single regulation. ICASA has also issued regulations setting out bands which may be used without a frequency license, subject to certain technical restrictions. The most important of these bands for telecommunications purposes are the 2.4GHz ISM band, the 5.4GHz Outdoor Hiperplan band and the 5.8GHz ISM band, used extensively for the provision of Wi-Fi services in rural areas. In addition, ICASA recently introduced the Radio Frequency Spectrum Regulations (2015).

Radio frequency spectrum licenses may be granted by ICASA on a competitive basis in respect of spectrum for which demand exceeds supply. In the past, ICASA has followed a first come, first served approach for awarding licenses. However, the Radio Frequency Spectrum Regulations, 2015, identify mechanisms to be employed in assigning frequency in bands where demand exceeds supply and allow ICASA to use beauty contests or auctions or any other licensing mechanism deemed appropriate by ICASA, for awarding licenses.

Pursuant to these regulations, ICASA issued an ITA on July 15, 2016, by way of the Spectrum Auction. This spectrum would allow us to cost-effectively increase capacity on our network, although we do not envisage requiring the spectrum in the short-to-medium-term. As we expand our range of services, we may require additional capacity. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our business and industry – Spectrum limitations may adversely affect our ability to provide mobile services to our customers or to gain new customers.” The Spectrum Auction was challenged by the TPS Minister and us in August 2016 when we both launched urgent review applications in the High Court in South Africa. The applications sought to interdict ICASA from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction (“Part A of the proceedings”) pending the determination by the High Court of the legality of the ITA (“Part B of the proceedings”). Part A of the proceedings was heard by the High Court on September 27 and 28, 2016 and judgment was handed down on September 30, 2016. The TPS Minister and we were successful in our applications and ICASA was interdicted from proceeding with the Spectrum Auction pending a determination of Part B of the proceedings. We expect Part B of the proceedings to be heard by the High Court in the second or third quarters of 2017. On February 9, 2017, ICASA published a notice in the Government Gazette whereby it indefinitely deferred the timeframe for the Spectrum Auction. On October 3, 2016 the TPS Minister issued its White Paper that deals with the issuing of high demand spectrum and does not appear to favour an auction process. ICASA will have to consider any policies contained in the White Paper or any policies or policy directives that flow from the White Paper when it eventually issues the high demand spectrum. Our ability to obtain the additional spectrum may be limited by competition or financial constraints. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating.

Spectrum licenses are generally granted for a year and are renewable upon the payment of a license fee. Radio frequency spectrum licenses may not be transferred without ICASA’s prior permission.

We currently have access to 76MHz of duplex spectrum, comprising 2x11MHz (900 MHz), 2x12 MHz (1,800 MHz) and 2x15 MHz (2,100 MHz) bands. We also have been allocated a 7GHz fixed radio frequency spectrum license which allows us access to approximately 99 adhoc 7GHz Microwave (MW) Links and nationally allocated 10.5 GHz, 15 GHz and 38 GHz (MW) fixed link network licenses to support our microwave transmission network. The nationally allocated spectrum licences enable us to rapidly deploy links for backhaul purposes at any location as a primary user. We renew both our access and MW spectrum licences annually at a cost of approximately R48,516,106 per year, which fee increases annually at the rate of consumer price inflation, which permits us to use the spectrum for the year in which the payment was made.

It is possible, going forward, that ICASA might strictly monitor usage of assigned frequency spectrum and may impose a “use it or lose it” approach. ICASA and the then Department of Communications have conducted a

149

spectrum usage audit but the results have not been communicated yet and no further guidance has been provided.

BEE requirements

Applicants for individual service licenses and holders of radio frequency spectrum licenses are generally required to have a minimum of 30% of their equity held by historically disadvantaged individuals, meaning people of colour, women and people with disabilities. Following the Completion Date, we expect that our effective BEE ownership will exceed the 30% target threshold set by ICASA, making us the only mobile operator in South Africa to exceed this threshold. This should be a beneficial factor for purposes of future bids for spectrum and more generally in securing business contracts.

Ownership restrictions

All licensees must be either citizens or entities registered in South Africa with their principal place of business in South Africa. However, there are no restrictions on the ownership of the shares of the licensed entities.

Regulatory fees

Annual license fees are payable to ICASA with respect to service licenses, in accordance with the ICASA General License Fees Regulations (2012), as amended. The new licensing fee regime is now based on a revenue-linked formula (as opposed to the former formula based on net profit). The fees are set at 0.15% of license revenue up to R50 million, 0.2% for license revenue of more than R50 million and up to R100 million, 0.25% for license revenue of more than R100 million and up to R500 million, 0.3% for license revenue of more than R500 million and up to R1,000 million, and 0.35% there above. We expect to be liable to pay ICASA in the region of R30 to R50 million annually.

In addition, licensees are required to pay a contribution to the Universal Service and Access Fund (an entity designed by the South African government to fund development of services in rural areas), amounting to 0.2% of annual turnover derived from licensed services.

Regulation of MTRs and Facilities Leasing

MTRs are the amounts that operators charge each other to terminate voice calls on their networks. Under Chapters 7 and 8 of the ECA, every licensee is obligated to interconnect upon request and every ECNS licensee must provide facilities upon request, on terms negotiated, unless the request is unreasonable (economically or technically or does not promote the efficient use of electronic communications network services). ICASA may exempt licensees from their obligations, but only if they do not have SMP. Interconnection and facilities leasing agreements entered into between licensees must be filed with ICASA before they can come into force. Call termination is the only market in which ICASA has exercized its powers to impose pro-competitive terms and conditions—including pricing obligations—under Chapter 10 of the ECA. With the objective of lowering the cost to communicate in South Africa, ICASA published its first set of regulations, the Call Termination Regulations (2010), which became effective in March 2011. These regulations introduced a three-year glide path for the reduction of wholesale MTRs and wholesale fixed termination rates. The regulations also provided both us and Telkom, as the smaller operators in the industry, with the advantage of an asymmetric MTR above the MTRs charged by our competitors, Vodacom and MTN. Asymmetric MTRs are intended to be a pro-competitive remedy, which effectively transfers revenue from the dominant operators to the less dominant operators, to enable smaller operators to become sustainable in the long run. Fees were accordingly reduced in March 2011, 2012 and 2013 in accordance with the Call Termination Regulations (2010), as detailed below. However, we were permitted to charge an asymmetric wholesale call termination rate, which allowed us to charge rates 20%, 15% and 10% above the MTR in March 2011, 2012 and 2013, respectively. This occurred after ICASA determined that it was necessary to impose additional pro-competitive terms and conditions on MTN and Vodacom in the mobile market and on Telkom in the fixed-line market, in order to correct market failures identified as a lack of provision of access, the potential for discrimination between licensees offering similar services, a lack of transparency, and inefficient pricing.

In 2012, we urged the South African government and ICASA to review the MTR regime, with the intention of extending and increasing the asymmetry in MTRs for the benefit of the smaller operators. Following a public consultation process, ICASA published its revized call termination regulations in February 2014 (the “Interim Call Termination Regulations”). ICASA’s Interim Call Termination Regulations were challenged by the dominant operators. In March 2014, the Johannesburg High Court ruled that the Interim Call Termination

150

Regulations were unlawful and invalid. However, the ruling stipulated that in the interests of the consumer, the invalidity of the Interim Call Termination Regulations would be suspended for a period of six months, as, in the absence of a regulation, there would have been a regulatory vacuum. Consequently, the Interim Call Termination Regulations continued to apply during this six-month period. ICASA then prepared a cost model (using the long-run incremental cost plus model as the standard) to determine the MTRs and asymmetry. ICASA published the Final Call Termination Regulations for the period October 1, 2014 to September 30, 2017. On September 29, 2014, revised final MTRs were implemented for the period October 1, 2014 to September 30, 2017, reflecting a lower level of asymmetry than we had obtained from April 1, 2014 but a higher level of asymmetry than we had obtained prior to that date. The table below illustrates the change in MTR rates that we have paid, and been required to pay to Vodacom and MTN, in the periods under review, as well as the MTR rates that we will be required to pay until October 1, 2017.

March 1, March 1, March 1, April 1, 2014 – October 1, October 1. October 1, 2011 - 2012 2012 - 2013 2013 - 2014 October 1, 2014 2014 - 2015 2015 - 2016 2016 - 2017 (ZAR cents per minute, unless otherwise indicated) (unaudited) Cell C Pays to Vodacom/MTN ...... 73.0 56.0 40.0 20.0 20.0 16.0 13.0 Cell C Receives ...... 87.6 64.4 44.0 44.0 31.0 24.0 19.0 Asymmetry ...... 14.6 8.4 4.0 24.0 11.0 8.0 6.0

In an attempt to obtain increased asymmetry, we lodged a review application with the South African High Court during December 2014 to challenge the Final Call Termination Regulations based on procedural and substantial flaws in these regulations. In March 2016, we withdrew this application, as the lengthy court process had rendered it redundant due to the regulation coming to an end in 2017.

As MTRs are set to decrease year-on-year, this will impact our overall margin if incoming interconnect revenue and interconnect costs are significantly different.

ICASA has started a process to review the MTR regime post October 1, 2017. Cell C is participating in this process and has requested further asymmetry but the outcome of this process is not certain.

Numbering and MNP

ICASA is responsible for the management of the National Numbering Plan and the issuing of allocations of numbers to licensees. This is done under the Numbering Plan Regulations 2016. We have been granted a total of 44 million numbers by ICASA. The latest Numbering Plan regulations require licensees to implement (i) toll free services, where the charge to subscribers are free and the origination fees are recovered from the toll free providing licensee (implemented by September 24, 2016), (ii) a premium rate service code of conduct and the migration of premium rate services to the 09X range, (iii) the implementation of 14 digit machine related services in the 096/7/8 X range by 24 March 2017 and (iv) the strategy for the harmonization, at industry level, of short codes services by 24 March 2018.

Mobile number portability enables a subscriber to switch among mobile phone operators while retaining its original mobile phone number and was first introduced in South Africa in 2006. ICASA has published a number portability enquiry document for comment by October 28, 2016.

Consumer Compliance

ICASA published the End-user and Subscriber Service Charter regulations on April 1, 2016. These regulations impose a minimum set of standards for licensees to ensure that certain quality of service parameters are met when providing electronic communications services to end-users and subscribers. These regulations impact on service delivery from various business units within Cell C. We are required to report twice annually on network quality and the handling of consumer complaints. Lastly, these regulations mandate a methodology for interacting with the end-user and subscriber on a face-to-face basis.

National Broadband Policy

The “National Broadband Policy 2013—South Africa Connect: Creating Opportunities, Ensuring Inclusion” proposed by the then Department of Communications was approved by the South African Cabinet on December

151

4, 2013. It contains a number of phased targets to be achieved over a period of time until 2030. The initiatives include a requirement that by 2030 every citizen should have access to broadband communications services offering a minimum download speed of 100 Mbps (additional targets apply between 2015 and 2030 for citizens, schools, health facilities and South African government services). These targets are to be reviewed periodically and supplemented by pricing and quality of service targets as well as speed of installation and fault repair parameters. No regulatory measures have yet been issued by ICASA in this respect and the industry remains in a regulatory vacuum.

Interception and Monitoring

The South African government has passed legislation aimed at assisting law enforcement agencies to combat crime and terrorism by intercepting and monitoring electronic communications. The primary act is the Regulation of Interception of Communications and Provision of Communication-related Information Act 70 of 2002 (“RICA”), which regulates the interception or monitoring of communications. However, it also sets out specific provisions with regard to electronic communications service licensees.

RICA obliges electronic communication service providers to obtain, verify and store certain customer details before activating a SIM card on their networks, including names, identity numbers and addresses. RICA also requires that information be stored for five years after the service to the customer terminates. By June 30, 2011, all telecommunications providers were required to have recorded and stored the required information in respect of all customers with active SIM cards on their systems.

We met the deadline and registered all customers with active SIM cards. We have incurred and will continue to incur costs from RICA’s collection, verification and storage requirements.

Universal service obligations

We are subject to universal service and access obligations (“USOs”) under our spectrum license. The Universal Service and Access Agency of South Africa was established under the EC Act to promote the goals of universal access and universal service in under-serviced areas in South Africa.

Our license obligations (as contained in our Radio Frequency Spectrum License for the Use of 900 & 1800 MHz RFS as well as for the Use of 2100 MHz RFS) with regard to USOs have partially been met.

Our prior USOs were as follows:

• rollout of 52,000 community service telephones (CSTs) (we exceeded this target but have since reduced the number of deployed CSTs);

• provision of 2.5 million SIM card connection packages (we did not meet this target); and

• provision of 125,000 units of terminal equipment delivered according to implementation plan as approved by ICASA (we provided 26,666 such units).

The USOs were amended in 2014 and our performance requirement with regards to the current USOs is now to provide full Internet access as well as substantial hardware to 1,500 public schools (300 schools per year over a period of five years), including 140 institutions for people with disabilities. We advized ICASA that these amendments were not lawfully made and ICASA has agreed to remove the additional obligations and undertake an assessment to determine what obligations should be attached to ECNS and ECS licenses instead. We expect this process to be completed by March 31, 2017, failing which, we will take necessary legal steps to accomplish this. However, until such time as the obligations are removed we are attempting to meet them. As at the reporting deadline of April 30, 2017, we have rolled out 900 schools in line with our USOs. ICASA have imposed a target of 1,500 schools on Cell C which is to be achieved by March 2019. We plan to roll out a further 300 schools before March 2018, and the final 300 schools will be rolled out by March 2019.

ICASA and other institutions such as the Portfolio Committee on Telecommunications and Postal Services have recently begun to monitor the current delivery of licensees against the current USOs and we are engaging with the authorities in an attempt to reduce this obligation.

152

ICASA Amendment Act 2014

This Act was finalized and enacted on May 16, 2014. It addresses some of ICASA’s functions in an effort to make it more transparent and accountable, including through the provision of clarity on aspects of its powers and to improve its efficiency. We submitted comments on those issues in the proposed bill that we considered to be most critical (including the independence of ICASA, appointment of Councillors, the role of the ICASA CEO and funding of ICASA’s operations).

Consumer Protection Act (“CPA”)

On March 31, 2011, the CPA came into effect, and CPA regulations came into effect on April 1, 2011. This legislation has significantly changed how business is conducted in South Africa. The CPA provides for:

• fundamental consumer rights;

• fair and reasonable marketing;

• fair and honest dealing;

• fair, just and reasonable terms and conditions; and

• fair value, good quality and safety.

The CPA applies to all transactions for goods and services between a supplier and a consumer in South Africa, and applies to all industries involved in the supply of goods and services. Sanctions for non-compliance include fines and imprisonment.

The National Consumer Commission has been established to oversee the CPA and address consumer complaints. The National Consumer Commission has launched investigations in respect of subscriber agreements, international roaming, handset subsidies and consumer complaints.

The CPA impacts our business in a variety of ways. For example:

Promotional competitions.

• The CPA prohibits premium-rated SMSs for promotional competitions.

• Additional information must be disclosed in competitions and rules have to be available to the National Consumer Commission (see below) and to any participant on request and without cost.

Marketing campaigns.

• The CPA prohibits certain marketing practices including bait and negative option marketing.

• Using the word “free” is not allowed if the consumer is going to pay for a service or good.

• Advertising and marketing materials must be in plain and simple language.

• No false or misleading advertisements are allowed.

• A retailer is not allowed to display any goods for sale without displaying the price.

Contract terms.

• Under the CPA, the maximum contract period is 24 months, unless a longer period is expressly agreed with the consumer and the supplier can show a demonstrable financial benefit to the consumer.

• Consumers (only natural persons) are able to cancel fixed term contracts on 20 business days’ notice.

153

• Upon early cancellation of a fixed term contract, the consumer remains liable to pay for amounts owed up to date of cancellation and the supplier may impose a reasonable cancellation penalty. The reasonable penalty may not exceed a reasonable amount and in determining the reasonable amount the supplier must take a list of factors into consideration (Regulation 5(2)). We have decided to base the cancellation penalty on the value of the handset.

• Consumer documents have to be in plain and simple language.

• The CPA imposes restrictions on the terms that may be included in contracts and particular terms, such as indemnities or limitations of liability carry special notice reauirements to be enforceable.

Vouchers

• Prepaid vouchers must be valid for a period of three years, however, unused airtime, SMSs and data can expire after a reasonable period.

Cooling-off period for direct marketing

• Consumers can cancel their contract entered into by direct marketing within five business days of delivery of goods or commencement of the service by sending a notice of cancellation to us.

• The consumer can return goods and will remain liable for usage charges incurred. Consumers must be refunded within 15 business days.

Bundling and transaction records

• Consumers must receive a sales record including details of all goods and services supplied to them.

• Value of goods should be reflected separately on the sales record as the cancellation penalty applied by us is linked to the value of the goods.

• Consumers should not be forced to buy bundled goods and services unless there is an economic benefit to the consumer or the goods and services can be sold separately.

Exchange Controls

Our ability to transfer funds (or provide guarantees) out of South Africa and to enter into agreements which require or potentially require the transfer of funds out of South Africa (for example, any debt financing agreement involving repayment to a foreign lender) is subject to South African exchange control regulations. The SARB and in particular its Financial Surveillance Department, has been delegated the authority to administer the South African exchange control system. The Financial Surveillance Department has wide discretion that is exercized in accordance with the exchange control regulations and in particular its exchange control manuals in line with the policy guidelines laid down by the South African Minister of Finance. Any cash flows out of South Africa or financial obligations incurred to non-residents are regulated by exchange control regulations.

The Companies Act

The Companies Act was adopted by parliament and came into force on May 1, 2011 and replaced the previous Companies Act, 61 of 1973, in its entirety.

The Companies Act introduced a number of fundamental changes to the South African company law regime. Amongst other things, it: (i) abolished the concept of par value shares (although there is no compulsory conversion to no par value shares for an existing company); (ii) replaced the existing concept of a separate memorandum and articles of association with a single constitutional document, namely the memorandum of incorporation; (iii) introduced a new capital maintenance regime based on solvency and liquidity; (iv) created greater flexibility for companies in determining their governance structures; (v) codified the common law fiduciary duties and liabilities of directors; (vi) introduced a new statutory merger procedure and made changes to existing procedures such as schemes of arrangement; (vii) introduced a new appraisal rights remedy for shareholders who oppose certain actions taken by a company (including entering into schemes of arrangement,

154

mergers or sales of business), allowing them to require a company to buy their shares at “fair value” in certain circumstances; and (viii) introduced the concept of “business rescue” for financially distressed companies.

Regulatory developments and matters

• Public hearings, policy and regulatory discussions. During the course of 2013, Cell C participated in public hearings and provided inputs to the policy and regulatory discussions, particularly addressing issues that affect the public interest including price transparency, competition, international mobile telecommunications services, legislative amendments, pass-through to consumers as a result of reducing MTRs, and the importance of retaining asymmetry to avoid market failure. This includes discussions with the DoC, ICASA and other licensed operators in regard to the proposed Frequency Migration regulations. We contributed to the finalization of the road map that has identified new spectrum bands in the sub 1GHz spectrum range that will ensure additional radio frequency spectrum for IMT services using mobile technologies such as LTE and LTE-Advanced. ICASA agreed to the inclusion of our migration proposal as part of the final regulations (which would provide it with access to contiguous spectrum in the 900 MHz band). The DTPS has yet to publish a final radio frequency policy that will include the methodology for access to 800 MHz spectrum, 700 MHz spectrum and 2,600 MHz spectrum (i.e. an auction or beauty contest or any other mechanism as determined by legislation). In addition, in 2016, we participated in hearings held by parliament’s portfolio committee on telecommunications & postal services to discuss possible regulation of over-the-top (OTT) services, such as WhatsApp or Skype. We intend to continue to oppose such regulation, which Vodacom and MTN have repeatedly suggested should be implemented as we believe that it could adversely impact the industry and consumers.

• Consultations. A number of important consultations were launched by ICASA in 2014 or were continued from the previous year. The Broadband Value Chain review forms part of the Cost to Communicate Programme launched by ICASA in June 2013. We have made submissions to ICASA in this review to indicate where and in what way we believe bottlenecks in the supply chain and take-up of broadband services in South Africa could be mitigated or eliminated. Other initiatives in this Programme include submission of detailed information for reporting by ICASA to the International Telecommunications Union (ITU), local loop unbundling and the review of MTRs (discussed above). We participated in the local loop unbundling consultation, although it appears that ICASA may relaunch the investigation into local loop unbundling in the following financial year. In 2016, we submitted comments on the proposed Dynamic Spectrum Assignment (DSA) on a geo-location basis, expressing our concerns about the timing of, and general need for, this proposal, and urged ICASA, in order to promote greater open access to spectrum and to consider the possible leasing, sharing and trading of spectrum.

• ICASA Quality of Service Reports. ICASA published various Quality of Service Reports in 2014, 2015 and 2016, after conducting drive tests in various ministerial districts of South Africa of all mobile operators. In the absence of an agreed industry methodology for these tests, it was difficult for us to provide meaningful responses to these reports. However, we engaged with ICASA in identifying shortcomings with these reports, which required addressing. We further engaged with the SABS/ICASA/Industry experts in developing a standard for conducting these drive tests for GSM monitoring.

• ICT Policy Review: The ICT policy review has been ongoing since 2012. The National Integrated Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Green Paper was published for comment in early 2014 and the National Integrated ICT Discussion Paper was published in November 2014. The objective of these papers was to start the policy review process that will radically transform the ICT sector to ensure its sustainable contribution to economy growth in South Africa. On October 3, 2016, the TPS Minister issued a National Integrated ICT Policy White Paper (“White Paper”) that deals with the issuing of high demand spectrum and does not appear to favour an auction process. ICASA will have to consider any policies contained in the White Paper or any policies or policy directives that flow from the White Paper when it eventually issues the high demand spectrum. If, and when, ICASA issues the high demand spectrum licenses in the 700MHz, 800MHz and 2.6GHz range, we will consider participating. Our ability to obtain the additional spectrum may be limited by competition or financial constraints.

• Minister of Communications: At the Ministerial level, parts of the portfolio for the previous Minister of Communications was changed in 2014, by the introduction of a TPS Minister. Under the new dispensation, although ICASA reports to the Minister of Communications, the TPS Minister is responsible for policy regarding telecommunications operators.

155

• ICASA Initiatives: We continue to participate in initiatives led by ICASA and the relevant Ministries, namely the review of sector policy, which has reached the stage of a Green Paper on ICT, and broadband rollout, in connection with the South Africa Connect Policy of December 2013. We have also assisted Research ICT Africa in its review of broadband prices and the value chain, a project intended to identify bottlenecks in the rollout and the take-up of broadband services in South Africa and consider the price of these services.

• Further Regulatory Challenges: We continue to challenge the incumbent operators to ensure that consolidation or practices that exploit pre-existing positions of dominance by competitors in the South African mobile market is monitored and limited. In October 2013, we submitted a complaint to the Competition Commission on the basis that certain competitors’ practices of charging less for on-net than for off-net calls amounts to an abuse of dominance. The alleged abuse of dominance takes the form of (i) excessive pricing (we believe that the price such competitors charge for off-net calls is excessive, given the price that they can charge for on-net calls), and (ii) exclusionary practices the Competition Commission formalized a decision to investigate this matter. More recently, we and other participants challenged ICASA’s approval of Vodacom’s intended acquisition of licensees issued to Neotel as part of the Vodacom acquisition of Neotel; the High Court ruled in favor of the parties challenging the approval. Ultimately, Vodacom did not proceed with its acquisition of Neotel, which it had restructured to exclude the spectrum licenses.

• Mobile Termination Rates (MTRs): Following the publication of the Final Call Termination Regulations in September 2014, which provided a significantly reduced asymmetry to that which we requested, we lodged a review application with the High Court in December 2014, to challenge the Final Call Termination Regulations based on procedural and substantive flaws. We later withdrew this application in March 2016, as the lengthy court process had rendered it redundant due to the regulation coming to an end in 2017. ICASA has started a process to review the MTR regime post October 1, 2017. Cell C is participating in this process and has requested further asymmetry but the outcome of this process is not certain.

• Other Measures: We are pressing, through ICASA platforms and the media, for other pro-competitive interventions to be undertaken by ICASA. We recently responded to a consultation by ICASA on competition in the ICT sector in general and have been campaigning for the amendment of the regulations on mobile number portability and other pro-competitive measures to be taken in relation to MTRs, increased transparency in pricing, and mandatory access on reasonable terms to be given to essential facilities when owned or operated by dominant players.

156

MANAGEMENT

Cell C is governed by resolutions of its Board of Directors, its executive management team and, where required by its Articles of Association (which following the Cell C Recapitalization, was replaced with its Memorandum of Incorporation), its shareholders agreement, by resolution of its shareholders or otherwise by applicable law.

Board of Directors

The Board is responsible for Cell C’s general management, including the setting of our strategy and co-ordination and generation supervision, with the exception of those matters that are designated by law or by our Articles of Association (or Memorandum of Incorporation following the Cell C Recapitalization) as being the exclusive responsibility of the shareholders. Our Articles of Association requires that the Board consist of at least one member. Appointments to the Board are ordinarily made on the recommendation of the Nominations Committee and the process is both formal and transparent. Appointments to the Board can, however, be made by our shareholders in accordance with the terms of our Articles of Association (or Memorandum of Incorporation following the Cell C Recapitalization).

Following the Completion Date, the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation provides that the Board of Directors is to consist of no more than 11 directors. The Amended Memorandum of Incorporation provides that:

• Blue Label shall be entitled to appoint four Directors;

• Net1 shall be entitled to appoint two Directors;

• For as long as SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 collectively hold 25% or more of the shars in the Isssuer, they shall be collectively entitled to appoint one director;

• the shareholders shall nominate for appointment as Directors the then current Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of Cell C; and

• the Board of Directors will appoint two independent Directors.

The independent Directors so appointed shall meet the requirements set out in the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation.

The Chairman of the Board (who will also chair meetings of the shareholders) is appointed by Blue Label. The Chairman has been appointed from one of the members of the Board of Directors and shall not have any second or casting vote.

A shareholder that is entitled to nominate a Director is also entitled to request the removal, and if they so choose, request the replacement of that Director. Each Director will serve for an indefinite period or for a term as set out in the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation.

The Board is currently composed of 10 members, seven of whom are non-executive directors, withKuben Pillay serving as non-executive, independent chairman of the Board. The chairman of the Board has primary responsibility for leading the Board and ensuring its effectiveness. The roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer are separated and there is a clear division of responsibilities within the Company, ensuring a balance of power and authority.

157

The table below sets forth the members of the Board appointed on 15 August 2017. The Board is in the process of appointing the second independent Board member.

Year of Name(1) Position Appointment Non-executive Chairman of Kuben Pillay the Board 2017 Non-executive Deputy Lawrence Nestadt Chairman of the Board 2017 Bretty Levy Non-executive Director 2017 Mark Levy Non-executive Director 2017 Herman Kotze Non-executive Director 2017 Joe Mthimunye Non-executive Director 2017 Christopher Seabrooke Non-executive Director 2017 Jose Dos Santos Executive Director 2017 Robert Pasley Executive Director 2017 Tyrone Soondarjee Executive Director 2017

The address of the directors is that of the registered office of the Issuer.

Biographies

Kuben Pillay was appointed as a member and Non-Executive Chairman of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. Mr Pillay previously served on the boards of several public and private companies, including Primedia – first as CEO, and then as Chairman – and as Chairman of the Mineworkers Investment Company. An attorney by trade, Mr Pillay currently serves on the boards of Transaction Capital Limited and the Outsurance Group of Companies.

Lawrence Nestadt was appointed as a Non-Executive Director Deputy-Chairman of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. Mr Nestadt is a co-founder and former director of Investec Bank Limited and is the Chairman of Blue Label Telecoms Limited, Dis-Chem Pharmacies Limited, Universal Partners Limited, Executive Chairman of Global Capital Proprietary Limited, as well as Chairman of other unlisted companies such as Morecorp Group, Melrose Motor Holdings, SellDirect and National Airways Corporation.

Brett Levy was appointed as Non-Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. He is a joint Chief Executive Officer of Blue Label. Mr. Levy has an impressive entrepreneurial history having founded and operated many small businesses in the early 1990s. He has been involved across a wide range of industries, including the distribution of fast-moving consumer goods and insurance replacements for electronic goods. Mr. Levy’s business achievements have earned him a number of prestigious nominations, accolades and awards. These include the ABSA Bank Jewish Entrepreneur of the Year Award (2003) and the ABSA Jewish Business Achiever Non-Listed Company Award (2007), which he won jointly with his brother Mark. Mr. Levy was nominated as an Ernst & Young World Entrepreneur SA Finalist for 2007. In 2010, he received the Liberty Life Award for a Remarkable Success Story in the David Awards and was a finalist in the Top Young Entrepreneur category of the African Access National Business Awards. In 2011, he shared with Mark the Top Entrepreneur accolade in the African Access National Business Awards. Brett joined the board of Blue Label on its establishment in 2007 and is a director of various local and global Blue Label group companies.

Mark Levy was appointed as Non-Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. He is a joint Chief Executive Officer of Blue Label. Mr. Levy graduated with a BCompt degree from Unisa in 1993. After some years as a commodities trader, he decided to pursue a goal of becoming an entrepreneur, which skill and strength he has applied over the past several years in spearheading Blue Label’s impressive organic and acquisitive growth and expansion in international markets. His business achievements are frequently recognised. Together with his brother Brett Levy, Mark received the ABSA Jewish Business Achiever Non-Listed Company Award (2007). He was nominated as an Ernst & Young World Entrepreneur SA Finalist for 2007. In 2010, Mark was voted Top IT Personality of the year by ITWeb and was a finalist in the Top Young Entrepreneur category of the African Access National Business Awards. In 2011, he shared with Brett the Top Entrepreneur accolade in the African Access National Business Awards. Mr. Levy joined the

158

board of Blue Label on its establishment in 2007 and is a director of various local and global Blue Label group companies.

Herman Kotzé was appointed as a Non-Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. Herman Kotzé was appointed as Chief Executive Officer of Net1 on June 1, 2017 after having served as Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer. From January 2000 until June 2004, and he served on the board of Aplitec as Group Financial Director. Mr Kotzé joined Aplitec in November 1998 as a strategic financial analyst. Prior to joining Aplitec, Mr. Kotzé was a business analyst at the Industrial Development Corporation of South Africa. He holds a bachelor of commerce honors degree, a postgraduate diploma in treasury management, a higher diploma in taxation, completed his articles at KPMG, and is a member of the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants.

Joe Mthimunye was appointed as Non-Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. Mr. Mthimunye qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1993. In 1996, he co-founded Gobodo Incorporated, an accounting practice with eight other partners which, in time, became the largest black-owned accounting firm in South Africa. In 1999, Mr Mthimunye led a management buy-out of Gobodo Corporate Finance from the accounting firm and re-branded it AloeCap Proprietary Limited. He is currently Executive Chairman of AloeCap and serves on the board of directors of Invicta Limited and all the non-listed companies in which AloeCap Private Equity is invested..

Christopher Seabrooke was appointed as Non-Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. Mr. Seabrook is the Chief Executive Officer and a director of Sabvest Limited, an investment holding company which is listed on the JSE. He also serves as a non-employee director of the following JSE listed companies: Brait SE, Chrometco Limited, Datatec Limited, Massmart Holdings Limited, Metrofile Holdings Limited and Transaction Capital Limited. Chris is a member of The Institute of Directors in South Africa. Formerly, Mr Seabrook was the Chairman of the South African State Theatre and the Deputy Chairman of each of the National Arts Council and the Board of Business and Arts South Africa. He holds degrees in Economics and Accounting from the University of Natal and an MBA from the University of Witwatersrand.

Jose Dos Santos has been appointed as Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. He is the Chief Executive Officer of the Issuer.

Robert Pasley has been appointed as Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. He is the Chief Strategy Officer of the Issuer.

Tyrone Soondarjee has been appointed as Executive Director of the Board in 2017 following the Cell C Recapitalization. He is the Chief Financial Officer of the Issuer.

See below for biographies in respect of Jose Dos Santos, Robert Pasley and Tyrone Soondarjee.

Board Committees

Under our Memorandum of Incorporation, the Board of Directors may delegate any of its powers to a committee of directors. In order to assist the Board to discharge its duties and in line with legislative and regulatory compliance requirements, the Board has constituted the following committees:

• Audit and Risk Committee, which comprises Mr Joe Mthimunye, Mr Chris Seabrooke, Mr Robert Pasley and the new independent director in the process of being appointed, to assist the Board of Directors on financial reporting, internal financial controls, external and internal audit functions as well as statutory and regulatory compliance;

• Remuneration Committee, which is comprised of Mr. Kuben Pillay, Mr Chris Seabrooke and Mr Herman Kotze, to consider and recommend to the Board for approval our remuneration strategy and policy, including (a) the policy regarding executive remuneration, (b) positioning relative to the market regarding total remuneration levels, (c) the approval of the remuneration levels of executives and senior executives and (d) review and approval of performance-related incentive schemes;

• Social and Ethics Committee, which comprises Mr Joe Mthimunye, Mr Chris Seabroke, Mr Robert Pasley and the new independent director in the process of being appointed.

159

Board Practices

Our Board of Directors acts as the focal point for, and is the custodian of, corporate governance in the Group. The Board oversees processes designed to ensure that each business area and every employee of the Group is responsible for acting in accordance with sound corporate governance principles in their relationships with management, shareholders and other stakeholders.

The Board is required to meet a minimum of four times a year. During 2016, the Board formally met four times. The non-executive directors meet independently of management after each Board meeting.

The Board supports the King IV Report on Governance for South Africa, 2016, which, it believes, has resulted in a maturing of the approach to governance and has taken into account the concerns and issues of its wider stakeholder community and applies the principles as set out in the King III code wherever possible. The Board is committed to the highest standards of corporate governance with sound governance principles remaining its top priority.

Conflicts of Interests

The Company Secretary proactively manages the records of the Director’s disclosure and interest on a quarterly basis. A Register of Declarations is maintained. This process helps the company to monitor and track any potential conflict of interest.

As at December 31, 2016, no potential conflicts of interest were reported. We believe that there are no conflicts of interests between the duties owed by members of the Board of Directors to the Issuer and their private interests.

As described in “Board of Directors,” the Amended Memorandum of Incorporation provides that, subject to holding the requisite percentage of Cell C’s issued share capital, certain future shareholders of Cell C following the Completion Date are entitled to appoint Directors to the Board. The appointment of Directors by a shareholder may give rise to actual or potential conflict of interests.

Internal Control Systems

Our Board of Directors is ultimately responsible for our system of internal controls, while management is responsible for designing, implementing and monitoring the internal controls. The internal control system is based on the COSO and COBIT (IT) internal control frameworks.

The internal control system contributes to ensuring protection of our assets (including information assets), effectiveness and efficiency of our operations, reliability of financial information and compliance with laws and regulations. We believe that adequate segregation of duties and control responsibilities has been established and maintained in all functional areas of the Group. In general, custodial, processing/operating and accounting responsibilities are separated to promote independent review and evaluation of our operations.

Records of the company are maintained in accordance with established and approved record retention policies. Costs and expenses of all operating units are maintained under budgetary control.

Management is responsible for designing appropriate policies and procedures to help ensure that our objectives and goals are not negatively impacted by internal or external risks.

Other control activities include: approvals, authorizations, verifications, reconciliations, and reviews of operating performance, security of assets and segregation of duties.

We have an independent, objective internal audit function that assesses the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal controls in the company using a risk based approach.

Management

The members of senior management are responsible for the day-to-day management of Cell C in accordance with the instructions, policies and guidelines set by the Board.

160

The table below sets forth the key members of Cell C’s senior management:

Name Position Year of appointment Jose Dos Santos Chief Executive Officer 2014 Tyrone Soondarjee Chief Financial Officer 2017 Robert Pasley Chief Strategy Officer 2012 Dana Bakker Chief Technical Officer 2013 Graham Mackinnon Chief Legal Officer 2010 Sharhaad Kajee Chief Property and Procurement Officer 2012 Michelle Beetar Chief Customer Experience Officer 2016 Juliet Mhango Chief Human Resources Officer 2017 Nihmal Marrie Chief Digital Officer 2017 Bjorn Flormann Chief Executive: Wholesale Business 2012 Surie Ramasary Chief Executive: Content 2012 Serenta Govender Executive: Legal and Group Company Secretary 2010

The address of the executive officers is that of the registered office of Cell C.

Jose Dos Santos brings to Cell C over 20 years of leadership and experience in the telecommunications sector. Mr. Dos Santos started his career in sales, using his smarts and tenacity to grow his impressive resume, including positions such as National Sales Manager for Alcatel, a position he held from 1992 to 1994. From there he was appointed Marketing Manager at Altech Autopage and held a position as Alternate Director for Message Link. In 1999, Mr. Dos Santos was appointed the Managing Director at Altech Autopage Cellular, South Africa’s dominant Service Provider. Mr. Dos Santos is no stranger to Cell C, as he formed part of the initial team that started the company in 2001. He was then Managing Director of Cell C Service Provider Company. Mr. Dos Santos then spent several years outside South Africa, primarily in Tanzania and Mozambique where his good understanding of the low-end and emerging markets resulted in the conceptualization and implementation of innovative products. During his six years at Vodacom Mozambique, Mr. Dos Santos turned the company into one of the top providers in the country. In 2011, Dos Santos was named one of Africa’s top 10 telecoms leaders by Africa focused publication ITNewsAfrica. The award was based on his executive achievements and the performance of Vodacom Mozambique during his tenure. Subsequent to this he joined Cell C as the Chief Commercial Officer under the leadership of Alan Knott-Craig. He was appointed as acting CEO following Knott-Craig’s ill health. The Board appointed him permanent CEO in May 2014.

Tyrone Soondarjee brings 30 years of experience in the financial services industry to Cell C. He was most recently the financial director at Sasfin Group, a position he has held since 2010, prior to which he served as the group’s chief financial officer. Throughout his tenure there he also served on several boards within the Sasfin group. Previously, Mr Soondarjee held several executive level positions at the Deloitte & Touche Group, and was the financial director at TNBS Mutual Bank. He is a qualified chartered accountant and received a BComt Honours degree from Unisa. Mr Soondarjee joined Cell C on 1 July 2017.

Robert Pasley has an honours degree in theoretical physics and is a chartered accountant with the ICAEW in the UK. Robert has combined his experience in finance and telecommunications since before the launch of mobile communications in South Africa. He completed his articles with Coopers & Lybrand in the UK where he spent four years before taking up a career-development secondment to South Africa in 1991. In South Africa he consulted to various local technology companies, including Telkom on the company’s billing systems. It was then, in 1993, that Robert was offered full time employment at Vodacom, prior to their commercial launch in 1994 and he became intimately involved in their business from the preparation of their original business plans. Since then he was instrumental in several large-scale business acquisitions in the telecommunications space. He remained part of this team until 2000 as Group Executive of Finance, when he was appointed as Director of Corporate Strategy, a role he kept until 2004 when he resigned from Vodacom to pursue his own consulting business. He has subsequently consulted with various telecommunications companies, including Vodacom, Telkom and MTN. Mr. Pasley joined Cell C in 2012 as Chief Strategy Officer and served as Chief Financial Officer from 2013 until 2017.

Dana Bakker started with Cell C on October 1, 2013 as Executive: National Operations Centre (NOC) and was promoted to Chief Technical Officer in December 2014. Prior to joining Cell C he held the position of Chief Technical Officer: Vodacom Mozambique. Dana also held the position of Managing Executive of Operations at Vodacom Tanzania for four years. He has extensive experience in both network and IT environments. Dana has an Electrical Engineering Degree and Masters in Business Management from the University of Johannesburg.

161

Graham Mackinnon built his career at MTN for 12 years during its high-growth phase before joining Cell C in February 2010 as the Group General Counsel. He was promoted from Chief Legal Counsel to Chief Legal Officer in April 2012. Mr. Mackinnon now leads a new structure, which includes Cell C’s legal team, the company secretary, the regulatory department and information security function. He completed his studies at the University of Witwatersrand, and is an admitted attorney in South Africa and solicitor (non-practicing) in England and Wales.

Sherhaad Kajee is a strategic negotiator with a solid commercial record in the South African and African ICT sectors. In his 11 years at Vodacom, seven of which serving as Managing Executive: Procurement and Facilities Management, he achieved savings of over R100 million, per year, on administrative overheads over a four-year period. Mr. Kajee joined Cell C in 2012.

Michelle Beetar joined Cell C as Chief Customer Experience Officer in October 2016. Her mandate is to unite the organization, embedding the processes and behaviours required to continue to help Cell C evolve towards being the first in the industry for customer service. Ms Beetar is a seasoned executive with a reputation for operational performance and instilling people-centric cultures. She was previously the Managing Director of Experian South Africa and in the past 15 years also served as Managing Director of Novell SA, CEO of MWeb Commercezone and Industry Director at Oracle. Ms Beetar holds a BComm Economics degree from the University of the Witwatersrand.

Juliet Mhango was appointed as Chief Human Resources Officer on 1 September 2017. She joined Cell C from Life Healthcare, where she was Group HR Executive since 2015. Juliet has also held high-level positions at various financial services businesses. Ms Mhango holds a BA in Industrial Psychology from the University of Witwatersrand and a Master of Business Leadership from UNISA.

Nihmal Marrie was appointed Chief Digital Officer in August 2017. He joined Cell C from the Liberty Group where he served as Divisional Director: Digital and Customer Value Proposition. Before joining Liberty, Mr Marrie was Head of Business Development at the Old Mutual Group. Mr Marrie holds a Bachelor of Business Science from the University of Cape Town, with Honors in Finance and Accounting.

Björn Flormann joined Cell C as Chief Commercial Officer in August 2011, took on the role of Chief Executive: Wholesale Business with effect from October 1, 2012. Wholesale business is a stand-alone division. Its key mandate is to establish and manage partnerships with entities such as Virgin Mobile, banks, retailers and others that would like to offer mobile services as a quasi MVNO.

Surie Ramasary was promoted to Chief Executive: Content in June 2017. She joined Cell C in March 2012 as Executive Head: Product & Services responsible for the management and development Cell C’s product portfolio. Previously, Ms Ramasary was Head of Products & Services at MTN Zambia and held various positions within MTN leading up to that appointment. She holds a Bachelor of Commerce in Marketing from the University of Pretoria.

Serenta Govender joined Cell C in August 2010 as Senior Legal Manager: Marketing and IP and was promoted to Executive: Legal and Group Company Secretary in May 2014. As a Senior Associate at Webber Wentzel, she gained extensive experience in litigation and was an advisor on matters relating to copyright and advertising laws. She has been involved in the ICT sector since 2007. Serenta holds an LLB Law degree from the University of Kwa-Zulu Natal.

Our Company Secretary is Serenta Govender. The address of the company secretary is that of the registered office of the Issuer.

Compensation

The total remuneration of directors and executive officers in 2016 was R0.7 million and R63.9 million, respectively.

162

PRINCIPAL SHAREHOLDERS

As at the date of these Listing Particulars, Cell C’s share capital consists of 500,000,000 ordinary shares, including 475,000,000 Class A ordinary shares and 25,000,000 Class B ordinary shares, each having one vote per share. See “The Cell C Recapitalization – Equity Structure” for a discussion of the terms of the two classes of ordinary shares. Immediately following the Completion Date::

• members of our senior management (collectively, M5) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 25,000,000 Class B ordinary shares);

• MS15 (through which Cell C employees beneficially own shares in Cell C and which is expected to qualify as being held by historically disadvantaged individuals for BEE purposes) beneficially own 5% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 25,000,000 Class A ordinary shares);

• Blue Label (via a subsidiary) beneficially owns 45% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 225,000,000 Class A ordinary shares);

• Net1 beneficially owns 15% of our ordinary shares (in the form of 75,000,000 Class A ordinary shares;

• three South African incorporated special purpose vehicles, SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3, beneficially own 11.8%, 16% and 2.2%, respectively of our ordinary shares (in the form of 150,000,000 Class A ordinary shares ); and

• each of SPV1, SPV2, and SPV3 are wholly owned by 3C, therefore, having diluted 3C’s indirect beneficial interest to 30%.

The table below illustrates the ownership of our shares following the Completion Date:

Number of ordinary shares Percentage of held ordinary shares Blue Label...... 225,000,000 Class A 45 3C (through SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 ...... 150,000,000 Class A 30 Net1 75,000,000 Class A 15 MS15 ...... 25,000,000 Class A 5 M5 ...... 25,000,000 Class B 5 Total ...... 100.0 100

163

RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

The following describes transactions entered into by Cell C with Blue Label or any of its affiliates or other entities in which Cell C has a controlling interest or over which Cell C has significant influence, and which we believe are material to Cell C or to the other party. See note 26 to our Interim Financial Statements.

Transactions between Cell C and Blue Label

On February 27, 2013, we entered into the Airtime Agreement with Blue Label, pursuant to which Blue Label purchases prepaid airtime from us. The Airtime Agreement is effective for four years and nine months from June 1, 2013. The Airtime Agreement sets out the commercial terms of our arrangement with Blue Label, including with respect to incentives. See “Certain Contracts Relating to the Operations of Our Business.”

For the twelve months ended December 31, 2016, Blue Label had purchased an aggregate value of R6,873.20 in airtime from Cell C.

Furthermore, in the context of the Cell C Recapitalization, Cell C agreed to provide Blue Label the right to submit proposals for our procurement of services and products in the areas of business where Blue Label group companies are active. Cell C has agreed to pay Blue Label an amount of R20 million per month, for a period of 24 months from the Completion Date in respect of (i) any savings arising from the provision by Blue Label of such services and products on an arm’s length basis relative to what existing service providers are charging Cell C; plus (ii) incremental revenue that we generate from our arrangements with Blue Label. To the extent that we do not achieve R480 million of such savings and/or incremental revenue in the 24-month period, Blue Label has agreed to reimburse us for the shortfall. Cell C has also agreed to provide marketing support to Blue Label for the promotion and distribution of our products in the amount of R5 million per month.

Transactions with joint ventures

FibreCo’s shareholder agreement required each shareholder, including us, to provide maximum shareholder funding of R110 million each, to cover the initial phase of construction of its fibre optic-broadband network. As at December 31, 2016, each shareholder (including us) had provided or committed to an amount of R63 million in the form of shareholder loans or guarantees under the terms of the shareholders agreement, plus an advance of R20 million which was repaid in February 2017. We have also signed an Indefeasible Right of Use Agreement with FibreCo totalling R180 million for six fibre pairs on the Johannesburg to Cape Town and Bloemfontein to East London links. The contract is for 20 years and includes a variable operations and maintenance component payable by Cell C to FibreCo for maintenance of the fibre pairs purchased

We intend to purchase further services from FibreCo, including hosting and power services relating to the above mentioned routes, and build further routes to connect other metros areas of South Africa.

164

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER INDEBTEDNESS

The following summary of certain provisions of our indebtedness does not purport to be complete and is subject to, and qualified in its entirety by reference to, all of the provisions of the underlying documents, including the definitions of certain terms therein that are not otherwise defined in these Listing Particulars. The following summary presents information about our indebtedness, on a pro forma basis, giving effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016. See “The Cell C Recapitalization.”

Overview

As at December 31, 2016, our Total Debt (which includes accrued and unpaid interest and prepaid upfront fees but excludes out obligations under finance leases, including the interest component), and Net Debt, on a pro forma basis, was approximately R6,143 million ($447 million) and R6,000 million ($437 million), respectively, on a consolidated basis, none of which would have been indebtedness of non-guarantor subsidiaries.

Our interest expense for the 12 months ended December 31, 2016, on a pro forma basis, was approximately R1,064 million ($77 million).

After giving pro forma effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, 2016, the amount of debt guaranteed by the Guarantors was the equivalent of $447 million in respect of Cell C’s obligations.

The agreements under which we borrow funds contain a number of different covenants, events of defaults and remedies that impose operating and financial restrictions on us. Certain covenants relate to our financial performance, such as the level of earnings, debt, assets. Other covenants limit, and in some cases prohibit, us, from, among other things, incurring additional indebtedness, selling or disposing of any assets (not in the ordinary course of business) and creating any security interest on our shares, assets and revenue. A failure to comply with these covenants would constitute a default under the relevant agreements and could trigger cross-payment default or cross-acceleration provisions under these agreements. In the event of such a default, our obligations under one or more of these agreements, including the Notes, could become immediately due and payable or require lender consents or amendments (which we have obtained in the past and are likely to need to obtain in the future), in each case based on measures tied to results of operations and levels of indebtedness.

The following table presents a breakdown of our Total Debt as at December 31, 2016, after giving pro forma effect to the Arrangement and the Cell C Recapitalization, as if each had occurred on December 31, December.

Amount outstanding as at December 31, 2016 (Original currency Facility/Instrument millions) ($ millions)(a)

Unsecured debt...... - - Secured debt ...... Notes (a) ...... 2,474 180

CDB Facilities 1,724 125 ICBC Facilities 997 73 DBSA Facility 181 13 Nedbank Facility 767 56 Total Debt (pro forma) ...... 6,143 447

(a) Converted into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate of R13.7372 = $1.00.

CDB Facilities

165

We have amended and restated the existing term CDB Facility dated 29 June 2011, under which CDB made available to the Company a total committed facility of $360 million and, in respect of which, $271,335,419.93 was outstanding but partially repaid on the Completion Date, resulting in amounts outstanding under the amended and restated facility in the US Dollar equivalent of ZAR 1,724,000,000.

The amounts outstanding as at the Completion Date shall be repaid in two equal payments at 21 January 2020 and the third anniversary of the Completion Date.

The loans bear a floating interest rate of LIBOR plus a margin per annum, which will be 345 bps. Interest shall be paid at six month intervals or such other period as may be agreed between the parties.

The facility contains various covenants, including information covenants, financial covenants, general covenants in events of default and remedies that could limit Cell C’s financial and operational flexibility. Upon a change of control of Cell C, or an illegality event, the facility will be cancelled in full and all outstanding amounts may become immediately payable. Cell C will be required to pay such amounts into a mandatory prepayment account, which amounts may be applied by the Security Trustee towards prepayment and otherwise under the Intercreditor Agreement and other finance documents.

The CDB Facilities share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holders and other Senior Lenders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

ICBC Facilities

We have entered into new ICBC Facilities, with commitments of R997 million, pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization.

The loan shall be repaid in two equal instalments at 21 January 2020 and the third anniversary of the Completion Date.

The loans bear a floating interest rate of LIBOR plus a margin per annum, which will be 345 bps. Interest shall be paid at six monthly intervals or such other period as may be agreed between the parties.

The facility contains various covenants, including information covenants, financial covenants, general covenants in events of default and remedies that could limit Cell C’s financial and operational flexibility. Upon a change of control of Cell C, or an illegality event, the facility will be cancelled in full and all outstanding amounts may become immediately payable. Cell C will be required to pay such amounts into a mandatory prepayment account, which amounts may be applied by the Security Trustee towards prepayment and otherwise under the Intercreditor Agreement and other finance documents.

The ICBC Facilities share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holders and the other Senior Lenders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

DBSA Facility

We have amended and restated the DBSA Facility, refinancing partially the existing DBSA indebtedness with total committed facility to the Company of R325 million, pursuant to the closing of the Cell C Recapitalization.

The loan was partially repaid on the closing date, and the loans of R181 million outstanding under the amended and restated facility shall be repaid in two equal instalments at thirty months after the Completion Date and the third anniversary of the Completion Date

The loans bear a floating interest rate of 6 months JIBAR plus a margin per annum, which will be 500 bps. Interest shall be paid every six months or such other period as may be agreed between the parties.

The facility contains various covenants, including information covenants, financial covenants, general covenants in events of default and remedies that could limit Cell C’s financial and operational flexibility. Upon a change of control of Cell C, or an illegality event, the facility will be cancelled in full and all outstanding amounts may become immediately payable. Cell C will be required to pay such amounts into a mandatory prepayment account, which amounts may be applied by the Security Trustee towards prepayment and otherwise under the Intercreditor Agreement and other finance documents.

166

The DBSA Facility shares in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holder and other Lenders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

Nedbank Facility

We have entered into a new Nedbank Facility, under which a new term facility of ZAR756 million plus a deferred payment of R11 million (six months post Completion Date) has been made available to the Company to partially refinance amounts outstanding under existing Nedbank, pursuant to the Cell C Recapitalization..

The loan shall be repaid in two instalments at thirty months and thirty six months.

The loan bears a floating interest rate of 6 months JIBAR plus a margin per annum, which will be 500 bps. Interest shall be paid every six months or such other period as may be agreed between the parties.

The facility contains various covenants, including information covenants, financial covenants, general covenants in events of default and remedies that could limit Cell C’s financial and operational flexibility. Upon a change of control of Cell C, or an illegality event, the facility will be cancelled in full and all outstanding amounts may become immediately payable. Cell C will be required to pay such amounts into a mandatory prepayment account, which amounts may be applied by the Security Trustee towards prepayment and otherwise under the Intercreditor Agreement and other finance documents.

The Nedbank Facility shares in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holders and the other Senior Lenders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

Notes Hedging Arrangement

The Issuer used its commercially reasonable efforts to hedge its currency risk in respect of the principal and interest on the Notes and the CDB Facilities (the “Hedge”). The Hedge has been concluded with one or more counterparties (the “Hedge Counterparties”) under certain trade confirmations (the “Hedge Agreement”).

The ability of the Hedge Counterparties to take certain actions under the Hedge Agreement, including the ability to terminate the Hedge and to enforce the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral are limited in certain circumstances in accordance with the provisions of the Intercreditor Agreement.

The Hedge Counterparties share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with the Holders, on the terms set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

Security and Guarantees

Following the Completion Date, the Issuer’s obligations under the Trust Deed and the Notes are fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed, on a joint and several senior secured basis, by Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008017/07), Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2001/008003/07) and Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 2009/04432/07) (the “Guarantors”), (each, a “Guarantee” and together, the “Guarantees”). Pursuant to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, the Issuer undertakes to procure that any new subsidiary of the Issuer becomes a Guarantor, subject to certain exceptions. See “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”.

Following the Completion Date, the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Trust Deed and the Guarantees, as applicable, are secured by first ranking security interests (the “First Ranking Security Interests”) on an equal and rateable basis with the lender(s) under the CDB Facilities, the ICBC Facilities, the Nedbank Facility and the DBSA Facility (the lenders under such facilities having acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (such facilities, together, the “Senior Facilities” and such lenders, together, the “Senior Lenders”) and counterparties to certain hedging obligations (such counterparties having acceded to the Intercreditor Agreement) (such hedging obligations the “Hedging Arrangement” and such counterparties, the “Hedge Counterparties”, in collateral that consists of substantially all of the existing and after-acquired personal property and the other assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (as defined below), to the extent such assets are assignable (such rights and interests, together with all other rights, interests and assets that from time to time secure the Notes and the Guarantees (as defined below), the “Completion Date Collateral”);.

167

The Senior Lenders, the Hedge Counterparties, the Trustee and certain other senior finance parties (“Secured Creditors”) also share in the First Ranking Security Interests in the Collateral, on an equal and rateable basis with Holders.

The First Ranking Security Interests were not granted directly to the Holders or the Trustee for the Holders. Instead, the security interests have been granted to a special purpose vehicle, the Security SPV, and the Security SPV in turn provides a guarantee to the Trustee, the Senior Lenders and the Hedge Counterparties, guaranteeing the obligations of the Issuer and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Senior Facilities and the Hedging Arrangement (“SPV Guarantee”). The Trustee is not, therefore, entitled to take any enforcement action with respect to the security interests in our assets other than through the guarantee from the Security SPV.

The Issuer and the Guarantors have entered into an amended and restated counter indemnity agreement in terms of which they have agreed, among other things, to indemnify the Security SPV against all and any claims which may be made against the Security SPV by the Security Trustee under the SPV Guarantee (the “Counter Indemnity”).

The First Ranking Security Interests have been granted by way of:

• Special Notarial Bond(s), which have hypothecated specified network equipment in favour of the Security SPV and provides a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

• a Cession and Pledge in Security, which pledges and cedes all the shares of the Guarantors held by the Issuer in favour of the Security SPV and provides a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

• Cessions in Security, which cedes in security and provides the Security SPV with a first-ranking security interest in the following assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors (to the extent such assets are assignable): authorizations and licences; leases; agreements; trade receivables; insurance proceeds; bank accounts; investments and contractual claims. Our licenses may not be assigned without the consent of ICASA and many of our network agreements, leases and other agreements may prohibit assignment entirely or require the consent of the counterparty in order to grant a security interest in the agreements.

• General Notarial Bonds, which hypothecated all moveable and incorporeal assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors. The General Notarial Bonds merely confers a preferred right, such right ranking in priority only to the rights of unsecured creditors, to the Security SPV in respect of the assets of the Issuer and the Guarantors that have not otherwise been pledged.

• a Trademark Deed of Security in terms of which the Issuer pledges all its registered and pending trademarks in favour of the Security SPV and provides a first-ranking security interest in such assets.

For further information regarding the security package granted in respect of the Notes, see “Terms and Conditions of the Notes”.

Intercreditor Agreement

The Issuer, the Trustee, the Security SPV and the Security Agent (as defined below) have entered into an intercreditor agreement with, inter alios, the agents and lender(s) under the CDB Facilities, the ICBC Facilities, the Nedbank Facility and the DBSA Facility and the Security Agent that governs the relationships and relative priorities among, inter alia, the Senior Lenders and the Trustee on behalf of itself and the Holders (the “Intercreditor Agreement”).

The Intercreditor Agreement sets out, among other things, the relative ranking of and priority of payment of the Issuer’s indebtedness, the relative ranking and priority of the First Ranking Security Interests, when payments can be made in respect of certain indebtedness, when enforcement actions can be taken in respect of such indebtedness, when enforcement actions can be taken in respect of the Collateral, the terms pursuant to which subordinated liabilities will be subordinated and when security and guarantees will be released to permit a sale of the Collateral.

The Intercreditor Agreement contains provisions relating to future indebtedness that may be incurred by the Issuer, provided that it is not prohibited by the terms of the Trust Deed and any other agreement or instrument to which the Issuer is a party, which may rank pari passu with the Notes and be secured by the Collateral. The

168

Intercreditor Agreement provides, subject to the provisions regarding permitted payments and application of proceeds following an enforcement event, that the right and priority of payment of all present and future liabilities and obligations under the Senior Facilities, Hedging Arrangement, the Notes and any other permitted pari passu debt ranks pari passu in right and priority of payment without any preference between them. These liabilities rank ahead of any subordinated liabilities. The Issuer and the Guarantors may not make any payments of the subordinated liabilities at any time prior to the full discharge of all senior liabilities, including under the Senior Facilities and Hedging Arrangement and the Notes. The Intercreditor Agreement does not purport to rank the subordinated liabilities among themselves.

Under the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders are required to share recovery proceeds with the other secured creditors and are subject to restrictions on their ability to enforce the First Ranking Security Interests. In the event of enforcement of the Collateral, the Holders will receive proceeds from the Collateral on a pro rata basis with the lender(s) under each Senior Facility. Any additional Senior Lenders and Hedge Counterparties that become parties to the Intercreditor Agreement also share in the Collateral on a pari passu basis to the extent of obligations owed under the Secured Credit Facilities or Hedging Arrangement to which they are party. The senior creditors may take any security other than the Collateral or any guarantee, indemnity, surety or other assurance against loss from the Group if such security or other assurance against loss is shared with all senior creditors pari passu. The subordinated creditors may not take any security or any guarantee, indemnity, surety or other assurance against loss from the Group at any time prior to the full discharge of all senior liabilities. The Intercreditor Agreement also provides for the passage of an agreed standstill period for certain enforcement actions relating to the Collateral and agreed voting thresholds based on one or more percentages of the aggregate amount of indebtedness secured thereby. In addition, under the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Holders will receive proceeds from the enforcement of the Collateral only after certain amounts owing to the Security Agent, the Trustee, any receiver and certain creditor representatives have been repaid in full.

As a result of the voting provisions set out in the Intercreditor Agreement, certain amendments and waivers under the Intercreditor Agreement and in relation to the Collateral will have to be consented to by the required majority of Holders, and the required majority of the Senior Lenders. The required majority will vary with the type of amendment or waiver being sought. The Intercreditor Agreement provides that the Security Trustee will serve as the security agent (the “Security Agent”) for the secured parties under the Notes, the Revolving Facility, and any additional secured debt permitted to be incurred, and will act only as provided for in the Intercreditor Agreement.

In accordance with the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, the Security Agent shall act or, as the case may be, shall instruct the Security SPV to act in accordance with any instructions given to it by the relevant Senior Creditors or, if so instructed by the relevant Senior Creditor, refrain or, as the case may be, instruct the Security SPV to refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Security Agent or, as the case may be, Security SPV.

By accepting a Note, a Holder is deemed to have agreed to and accepted the terms and conditions of the Intercreditor Agreement, any supplements, amendments or modifications thereto, and any future intercreditor agreement required under the Trust Deed, and to have authorized the Trustee to enter into it on its behalf. The preceding description is a concise summary of certain provisions that are contained in the Intercreditor Agreement. It does not restate the Intercreditor Agreement in its entirety nor does it describe provisions relating to the rights and obligations of holders of other classes of the Issuer’s or Guarantors’ debt. As such, we urge you to read the Intercreditor Agreement because it, and not the preceding discussion, defines the rights of the Holders.

169

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

The following, save for any paragraphs in italics and subject to modification and completion, are the terms and conditions of the Notes, which will be set out in a schedule to the Trust Deed.

The U.S.$184,002,000 aggregate principal amount of 8.625% First Priority Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (the “Notes”) of Cell C Proprietary Limited (the “Issuer”) are (a) constituted by, and subject to, and have the benefit of the trust deed dated 2 August 2017 (as amended or supplemented from time to time, the “Trust Deed”) between the Issuer, Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited (“Cell C Service”), Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited and Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited and each other Subsidiary of the Issuer that becomes a guarantor in accordance with Condition 6(f) (Certain Covenants – Additional Guarantors) (together, the “Guarantors”) and BNY Mellon Corporate Trustee Services Limited as trustee (the “Trustee”, which expression includes all persons for the time being appointed as trustee or trustees under the Trust Deed) for the Holders (as defined in Condition 1 (Definitions)) of the Notes under the Trust Deed; and (b) the subject of a paying agency agreement dated 2 August 2017 (as amended or supplemented from time to time, the “Paying Agency Agreement”) between the Issuer, The Bank of New York Mellon SA/NV, Luxembourg Branch as registrar (the “Registrar”, which expression includes any successor registrar appointed from time to time in connection with the Notes), The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as principal paying agent (the “Principal Paying Agent”, which expression includes any successor principal paying agent appointed from time to time in connection with the Notes) and transfer agent (the “Transfer Agent”, which expression includes any successor transfer agent appointed from time to time in connection with the Notes), the other paying and transfer agents appointed under it (together with the Principal Paying Agent and the Transfer Agent, the “Paying and Transfer Agents” and which expression includes any successor or additional paying or transfer agents appointed from time to time in connection with the Notes) and the Trustee.

Certain provisions of these Conditions are summaries of the Trust Deed, the Paying Agency Agreement and the Transaction Security Documents and subject to their detailed terms. The Holders are bound by, and are deemed to have notice of, all the provisions of the Note Documents that are applicable to them. Copies of the Note Documents are available for inspection during normal business hours and upon reasonable notice at the Specified Offices (as defined in the Paying Agency Agreement) of each of the Paying Agents. References herein to the “Agents” are to the Registrar and the Paying and Transfer Agents and any reference to an “Agent” is to any one of them.

1. Definitions

Terms defined in the Trust Deed shall, unless otherwise defined herein or the context requires otherwise, bear the same meanings herein.

In addition, as used in these Conditions:

“Anniversary” means an anniversary of the Issue Date;

“Blue Label Airtime Arrangements” means the arrangements entered into between Blue Label Telecoms Limited and Cell C Service from time to time pursuant to which Blue Label Telecoms Limited

170

agrees to purchase airtime from Cell C Service for an aggregate cash consideration of up to ZAR1,400,000,000 (which airtime cannot be utilised by Blue Label Telecoms Limited) and Cell C Services agrees to, inter alia, reacquire such airtime by no later than the first anniversary of the date of last purchase of such airtime;

“Cash Equivalents” means cash equivalents as interpreted by IFRS;

“EBITDA” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated operating profit or loss of the Group measured by reference to the most recent four consecutive fiscal quarters immediately prior to the determination date (excluding the results from discontinued operations):

(a) before taxation;

(b) before deducting any interest, commission, fees, discounts, prepayment fees, premiums or charges and other finance payments relating to Indebtedness whether paid, payable or capitalised by any Group member (calculated on a consolidated basis) in respect of that Measurement Period;

(c) not including any accrued interest owing to any Group member;

(d) before taking into account any Exceptional Items;

(e) after deducting the amount of any profit (or adding back the amount of any loss) of any Group member which is attributable to minority interests;

(f) before taking into account the Group's share of the profits or losses (after finance costs and Taxes) of any investment or entity (which is itself not a Group member (including associates and Joint Ventures)) in which any Group member has an ownership interest;

(g) before taking into account any unrealised or realised gains or losses on any financial instrument;

(h) before taking into account any gain or loss arising from an upward or downward revaluation of any other asset; and

(i) excluding the charge to profit represented by the expensing of share options, in each case, to the extent added, deducted or taken into account (in each case not more than once), as the case may be, for the purposes of determining operating profits or loss of the Group before taxation, and after adding back any amount attributable to the amortisation or depreciation of assets of Group members;

“Exceptional Items” means any material items of an unusual or non-recurring nature which represent gains arising on or losses including those arising on:

(a) the restructuring of the activities of an entity and reversals of any provisions for the cost of restructuring;

171

(b) disposals, revaluations or impairment of non-current assets;

(c) all costs and expenses relating to the Recapitalisation; and

(d) disposals of assets associated with discontinued operations;

“Fibreco” means Fibreco Telecommunications Holdings Proprietary Limited, a company (registration number 20101018931/07) with limited liability incorporated under the laws of the South Africa whose registered office is at 1 Protea Place, Sandown, Sandton 2196, South Africa;

“Finance Charges” means, for any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the accrued interest, commission, fees, discounts, prepayment fees, premiums or charges and other finance payments in respect of Indebtedness whether paid or payable by any Group member (calculated on a consolidated basis) in respect of the relevant Measurement Period:

(e) including any upfront fees or costs;

(f) including the interest (but not the capital) element of payments in respect of Finance Leases;

(g) taking no account of any realised or unrealised gains or losses on any financial instruments; and

(h) excluding capitalised costs, but including the amortisation relating to any such capitalised costs included in the consolidated income statement of the Group during the relevant Measurement Period;

“Finance Lease” means any lease or hire purchase contract, a liability under which would, in accordance with IFRS, be treated as a balance sheet liability (other than a lease or hire purchase contract) which would in accordance with IFRS in force prior to 1 January 2019 have been treated as an operating lease);

“First Measurement Period” means the period from (and including) the Issue Date to immediately before the first Anniversary;

“GEM” means the Global Securities Market of the Irish Stock Exchange;

“Group” means the Issuer and its consolidated Subsidiaries;

“Holder” and “Holders” have the meaning ascribed to them in Condition 2(b) (Form, Denomination and Title – Title);

“IFRS” means the International Financial Reporting Standards, as adopted in South Africa;

“Indebtedness” means any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

“Indebtedness for Borrowed Money” means any Indebtedness of any Person for or in respect of (a) moneys borrowed and debit balances at banks or other financial institutions; (b) amounts raised by

172

acceptance under any acceptance credit or bill discounting facility (or dematerialised equivalent); (c) amounts raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument; (d) amounts raised pursuant to any issue of shares of such Person, which are expressed to be redeemable; (e) the amount of any liability in respect of leases or hire purchase contracts which would, in accordance with generally accepted accounting standards in the jurisdiction of incorporation of the lessee, be treated as finance or capital leases; (f) the amount of any liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred primarily as a means of raising finance or financing the acquisition or construction of the relevant asset or service or the agreement is in respect of the supply of assets or services and payment is due more than 60 days after the date of supply; (g) any Treasury Transaction; and (h) amounts raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement or the sale of receivables or other assets on a “with recourse” basis) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

“Indebtedness Guarantee” means, in relation to any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of any Person, any obligation of another Person to pay such Indebtedness, including (without limitation) (a) any obligation to purchase such Indebtedness; (b) any obligation to lend money, to purchase or subscribe shares or other securities or to purchase assets or services in order to provide funds for the payment of such Indebtedness; (c) any indemnity against the consequences of a default in the payment of such Indebtedness; (d) any other agreement to be responsible for repayment of such Indebtedness, including bonds, standby letters of credit or bank guarantees or other similar instruments issued in connection with the performance of contracts; and (e) any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of any Person secured by a security interest over any of the first mentioned Person's assets, the amount of such Indebtedness; “Interest Cover Ratio” means, for any Measurement Period, the ratio of (a) EBITDA to (b) Net Finance Charges;

“Issue Date” means 2 August 2017;

“Joint Venture” means any joint venture entity, whether a company, unincorporated firm, undertaking, association, joint venture or partnership or any other entity;

“Legal Reservations” means:

(a) the principle that equitable remedies may be granted or refused at the discretion of a court and the limitation of enforcement by laws relating to insolvency, reorganisation and other laws generally affecting the rights of creditors;

(b) the time barring of claims under the Limitation Acts 1980 and the Foreign Limitation Periods Act 1984, the possibility that an undertaking to assume liability for or indemnify a person against non- payment of UK stamp duty may be void and defences of set-off or counterclaim;

(c) similar principles, rights and defences under the laws of any relevant jurisdiction; and

173

(d) any other matters which are set out as qualifications or reservations as to matters of law of general application in the legal opinions to be issued on or about the Issue Date;

“Material Adverse Effect” means an event of circumstance which has a material adverse effect on:

(a) the ability of the Issuer or any Guarantor to perform their, respective, payment and other material obligations under the Note Documents; or

(b) the validity or enforceability of any of the Note Documents or the rights or remedies of the Trustee and/or the Noteholders under any of the Note Documents;

“Maturity Date” means 2 August 2020;

“Measurement Period” means the First Measurement Period, Secondment Measurement Period or the Third Measurement Period;

“Net Debt” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the Group members for or in respect of Indebtedness at that time but:

(a) excluding any obligation or part of an obligation of a Group member to the extent such obligation or (as the case may be) relevant part thereof is collateralised in full by cash of any Group member;

(b) including, in respect of the Finance Leases only, their capitalised value only; and

(c) excluding any obligations of a Group member to any Shareholder to the extent such obligations are fully subordinated in rank and priority of payment to the obligations of the Group member in respect of the Notes in accordance with the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once and deducting the aggregate amount of unrestricted cash and Cash Equivalents held by any member of the Group at that time;

“Net Debt to EBITDA Ratio” means, for any Measurement Period, the ratio of (a) Net Debt outstanding on the last day of that Measurement Period to (b) EBITDA for that Measurement Period;

“Note Documents” means the Trust Deed, the Paying Agency Agreement, the Intercreditor Agreement and the Transaction Security Documents;

“Net Finance Charges” means, for any Measurement Period, the Finance Charges for that Measurement Period after deducting any interest income payable in that Measurement Period to any member of the Group reported in the consolidated income statement of the Group;

“Permitted Security Interest” means any Security Interest:

(a) created by way of a pledge cession, charge or similar instrument of the shares or assets of Fibreco or any of its Subsidiaries;

174

(b) constituting cash pooling, netting or set-off arrangements entered into by a Group member in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements:

(i) in respect of any Treasury Transactions; and

(ii) for the purpose of netting or setting-off debit and credit balances of the Group members or cash pooling of the Group;

(c) over or affecting any asset acquired by any Group member after the Issue Date if:

(i) the Security Interest was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a Group member;

(ii) the principal amount secured has not been increased (other than by reason of capitalisation of interest) in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that asset by a Group member; and

(iii) the Security Interest is removed or discharged within 12 months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

(d) arising under any title transfer or retention of title, hire purchase or conditional sale arrangement or arrangements having a similar effect in respect of goods supplied to a Group member in the ordinary course of business and on the supplier’s standard or usual terms and not arising as a result of any default or omission by any Group member (in any case, excluding floating charges);

(e) arising under any title transfer or retention of title, hire purchase or conditional sale arrangement by operation of the Blue Label Airtime Arrangements in accordance with their terms;

(f) over or affecting the Group’s investments (including, without limitation, shares) in Joint Ventures;

(g) arising as a consequence of any Finance Lease which is Permitted Indebtedness;

(h) being liens arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of the business of the Issuer or any of its Subsidiaries;

(i) arising in the ordinary course of the business of the Issuer or any of its Subsidiaries and which is necessary in order to enable the Issuer or such Subsidiary to comply with any mandatory or customary requirement imposed on it by any regulatory authority of competent jurisdiction in connection with the Issuer or such Subsidiary's business;

(j) granted by the Issuer or any Guarantor to secure Indebtedness under or in respect of the Notes or any Note Document;

(k) existing on the Issue Date or arising out of the exchange, refinancing, extension, renewal or refunding of any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee secured by a

175

Security Interest either existing on or before the Issue Date or permitted by any of the above exceptions, provided that the Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee thereafter secured by such Security Interest does not exceed the amount of the original Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee and such Security Interest is not extended to cover any property not previously subject to such Security Interest;

(l) not included in any of the above categories of "Permitted Security Interest" and securing (together with any other Security Interests not included in any of such categories) Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantees in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee with an aggregate principal amount at any time not exceeding U.S.$1,000,000 (or its equivalent in any other currency or currencies at that time);

(m) creating in respect of the Permitted Indebtedness referred to in (ii) in Condition 6(a); and

(n) constituting cash collateral provided in respect of any Treasury Transaction.

“Recapitilisation” means the overall equity and debt restructuring of the Group, substantially based on the terms set out in the umbrella restructuring agreement dated 27 February 2017 (as amended from time to time); a “Release Event” shall occur:

(a) in relation to a Guarantor who was required to become a Guarantor in accordance with Condition 6(f) (Certain Covenants – Additional Guarantors), if at any time while the Notes remain outstanding there is no Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of the Issuer (other than the Notes) or any of its Subsidiaries which is guaranteed by such Guarantor;

(b) in relation to any Guarantor, following any sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of such Guarantor (including by way of merger, consolidation, amalgamation or combination) to a person that is not (either before or after giving effect to such transaction) the Issuer; and

(c) if, as a result of a change in law taking effect after the date upon which the relevant Subsidiary became a Guarantor, it has become unlawful for any Guarantor to perform or comply with its obligations under or in respect of its Guarantee;

“Repo” means a securities repurchase or resale agreement or reverse repurchase or resale agreement, a securities borrowing agreement or any agreement relating to securities which is similar in effect to any for the foregoing and, for purposes of this definition, the term “securities” means any capital stock, share, debenture or other debt or equity instrument, or other derivative, whether issued by any private or public company, any government or agency or instrumentality thereof or any supranational, international or multilateral organisation;

176

“Second Measurement Period” means the period from (and including) the first Anniversary to immediately before the second Anniversary;

“Senior Financial Indebtedness” means any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee owed by the Issuer to any Senior Secured Lender;

“Shareholders” means the holders of the issued and paid up share in the capital of the Issuer from time to time;

“Shareholders’ Agreement” means the shareholders’ agreement entered into by the Shareholders as part of the Recapitalisaton;

“Share Capital” means, with respect to any Person, any and all shares, interests, partnership interests (whether general or limited), participations, rights in or other equivalents (however designated) of such Person’s equity, any other interest or participation that confers the right to receive a share of the profits and losses, or distributions of assets of, such Person and any rights (other than debt securities convertible into or exchangeable for share capital), warrants or options exchangeable for or convertible into such Share Capital, whether now outstanding or issued after the Issue Date;

“South Africa” means the Republic of South Africa;

“Technical Insolvency” means, with respect to the Issuer and any Guarantor, a circumstance where the liabilities of the Issuer or any Guarantor exceed their, respective, assets, notwithstanding which the Issuer or any Guarantor is able to pay their, respective, debts as they become due in the ordinary course of business;

“Third Measurement Period” means the period from (and including) the second Anniversary to immediately before the Maturity Date; and

“Treasury Transactions” means any derivative transaction (including a Repo) entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price.

2. Form, Denomination and Title

(a) Form and Denomination

The Notes are in registered form, without interest coupons attached, and shall be serially numbered. The Notes shall be issued in denominations of U.S.$1,000 in nominal amount and integral multiples of U.S.$1,000 in excess thereof (each, an “authorised denomination”).

(b) Title

Title to the Notes will pass by transfer and registration as described in Condition 3 (Registration) and Condition 4 (Transfers). The Holder (as defined below) of any Note shall (except as otherwise required by law or as ordered by a court of competent jurisdiction) be treated as its

177

absolute owner for all purposes (whether or not it is overdue and regardless of any notice of ownership, trust or any other interest therein, any writing thereon (other than a duly executed transfer thereof in the form endorsed thereon) or any notice of any previous loss or theft thereof) and no person shall be liable for so treating such Holder.

Upon issue, the Notes will be evidenced by a global certificate (the “Note Certificate”) substantially in the form scheduled to the Trust Deed. The Note Certificate will be registered in the name of a nominee for, and deposited with, a common depositary for Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg, and will be exchangeable for individual definitive Certificates only in the circumstances set out therein.

In these Conditions, “Holder”, “holder” and “Noteholder” means the person in whose name a Note is registered in the Register (as defined below) (or, in the case of joint Holders, holders or Noteholders, the first named thereof) save that, for so long as such Notes or any part thereof are represented by a Note Certificate registered in the name of the common depositary (or its nominee) for Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg or, in respect of Notes in definitive form held in an account with Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg, each person who is for the time being shown in the records of Euroclear or Clearstream, Luxembourg (other than Clearstream, Luxembourg, if Clearstream, Luxembourg shall be an accountholder of Euroclear, and Euroclear, if Euroclear shall be an accountholder of Clearstream, Luxembourg) as the holder of a particular principal amount of the Notes shall be deemed to be the holder of such principal amount of such Notes (and the registered holder of the relevant Note shall be deemed not to be the holder) for all purposes other than with respect to the payment of principal or interest on such principal amount of such Notes. Voting, giving consents and making requests pursuant to the Note Documents shall be the rights which shall be vested, as against the Issuer and the Trustee, solely in such common depositary and for which purpose such common depositary shall be deemed to be the holder of such principal amount of such Notes in accordance with and subject to its terms and the provisions of the Trust Deed, and “Holders”, “holders” and “Noteholders” shall be construed accordingly.

3. Registration

The Issuer shall procure that the Registrar will maintain a register (the “Register”) at the Specified Office of the Registrar in respect of the Notes in accordance with the provisions of the Paying Agency Agreement. A certificate (each, a “Note Certificate”) will be issued to each Noteholder in respect of its registered holding. Each Note Certificate will be numbered serially with an identifying number which will be recorded in the Register.

4. Transfers

(a) Subject to Condition 4(d) and Condition 4(e), a Note may be transferred in whole or in part upon surrender of the relevant Note Certificate, with the endorsed form of transfer (the “Transfer Form”) duly completed, at the Specified Office of the Registrar or any Transfer Agent, together with such evidence as the Registrar or, as the case may be, such Transfer Agent may require to

178

prove the title of the transferor and the authority of the individuals who have executed the form of transfer; provided, however, that a Note may not be transferred unless the nominal amount of Notes transferred and (where not all of the Notes held by a Holder are being transferred) the nominal amount of the balance of Notes not transferred are authorised denominations. Where not all the Notes represented by the surrendered Note Certificate are the subject of the transfer, a new Note Certificate in respect of the balance of such Notes retained will be issued to the transferor.

(b) Within five business days of the surrender of a Note Certificate in accordance with Condition 4(a), the Registrar will register the transfer in question and deliver a new Note Certificate of the same nominal amount as that of the Notes transferred to each relevant Holder at its Specified Office or, as the case may be, the Specified Office of any other Agent or (at the request and risk of any such relevant Holder) by uninsured first class mail (airmail if overseas) to the address specified for the purpose by such relevant Holder. For purposes of this Condition 4(b), “business day” means a day on which commercial banks are open for business (including dealings in foreign currencies) in the city where the Registrar and (if applicable) the relevant Agent have their respective Specified Offices.

(c) The transfer of a Note will be effected without charge by the Registrar or any other Agent but against such indemnity as the Registrar or, as the case may be, such Agent may require in respect of any tax or other duty of whatsoever nature which may be levied or imposed in connection with such transfer.

(d) Noteholders may not require transfers to be registered during the period of 15 calendar days ending on the due date for any payment in respect of the Notes.

(e) All transfers of Notes and entries on the Register are subject to the detailed regulations concerning the transfer of Notes scheduled to the Paying Agency Agreement, a copy of which will be made available as specified in the preamble to these Conditions. The regulations may be changed by the Issuer with the prior written approval of the Trustee and the Registrar. A copy of the current regulations will be mailed (at the cost of the Issuer) by the Registrar to any Noteholder who requests in writing a copy of such regulations.

5. Status and Security

(a) Status

The obligations under the Notes are unconditional, direct, unsubordinated and (as described in Condition 5(b)) secured obligations of the Issuer and each Guarantor. The Notes will at all times rank pari passu among themselves. Any Default Interest (as defined in Condition 8(f) (Payments – Default Interest and Payment Delay) due and payable will rank after any principal which is due and payable under the Notes. If and to the extent that the Collateral is and would be insufficient to satisfy the obligations of the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantors in respect of the Notes in full, the Notes will rank pari passu in right of payment with all other present and future

179

unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of the Issuer or, as the case may be, the Guarantors, save for such obligations as may be preferred by mandatory provisions of applicable law.

(b) Security

As continuing security for the payment of all sums due under the Notes and the Guarantees, the Issuer and the Guarantors have created, in favour of the Security SPV, the Transaction Security. The Security SPV will provide a guarantee to the Security Trustee (for and on behalf of the Trustee, the Noteholders, the Security Trustee and the Senior Secured Lenders) as a means of providing the Trustee, the Noteholders, the Security Trustee and the Senior Secured Lenders with the benefit of any sale of the Collateral upon an enforcement action and the Security SPV will be indemnified by the Issuer in respect of such guarantee, which indemnity will be secured by the Collateral.

While the Security Trustee has exclusive authority to direct enforcement of the Transaction Security through the Security SPV, the Security Trustee may only act on the instructions from, among others, the Trustee and the Senior Secured Lenders, as set out in the Intercreditor Agreement.

6. Certain Covenants

The following covenants of the Issuer shall apply on and from the Issue Date for so long as any of the Notes remains outstanding (as defined in the Trust Deed).

(a) Limitation on debt incurrence

The Issuer will not, and will not permit any of its Subsidiaries to, create, issue, incur, assume, guarantee or in any manner become directly or indirectly liable with respect to or otherwise become responsible for, contingently or otherwise, the payment of (individually and collectively, to “incur” or, as appropriate, an “incurrence”) any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee; provided that the Issuer and any of Subsidiaries will be permitted to incur any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee if:

(i) after giving effect to the incurrence of such Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee and the application of the proceeds thereof, on a pro forma basis, no Potential Event of Default (as defined in the Trust Deed) or Event of Default would occur or be continuing;

(ii) at the time of such incurrence and after giving effect to the incurrence of such Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee and the application of the proceeds thereof, the Net Debt to EBITDA Ratio of the Issuer is equal to or less than (i) 4.00 to 1.00, for the First Measurement Period; (ii) 3.50 to 1.00, for the Second Measurement Period; and (iii) 3.00 to 1.00, for the Third Measurement Period; and

180

(iii) at the time of such incurrence and after giving effect to the incurrence of such Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee and the application of the proceeds thereof, the Interest Cover Ratio of the Issuer is equal to or more than (i) 1.75 to 1.00, for the First Measurement Period; (ii) 2.00 to 1.00, for the Second Measurement Period; and (iii) 2.25 to 1.00, for the Third Measure Period.

This Condition 6(a) will not, however, prohibit the following (together, the “Permitted Indebtedness”):

(i) the incurrence of any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee approved by an Extraordinary Resolution;

(ii) the incurrence by the Issuer or of its Subsidiaries of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee under credit facilities drawn solely for the purpose of meeting the Issuer’s or any Subsidiaries’ capital expenditure and/or working capital requirements, in an aggregate principal amount at any one time outstanding not to exceed U.S.$500,000,000;

(iii) any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee outstanding on the Issue Date;

(iv) all transactions carried out to comply with any applicable laws or regulations (including any foreign exchange rules or regulations) of any governmental or other regulatory authority for any purpose to enable the Issuer or any Guarantor to lawfully exercise its rights or perform or comply with its obligations under the Notes, the Note Documents or to ensure that those obligations are legally binding and enforceable or that all necessary agreements or other documents are entered into and that all necessary consents and approvals of, and registrations and filings with, any such authority in connection therewith are obtained and maintained in full force and effect; and

(v) the incurrence of any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee in respect of the refinancing or replacement in full of the Indebtedness created pursuant to the Notes and provided that the arrangements in respect of the application of the proceeds for such refinancing towards repaying the Notes has been approved by the Trustee.

(b) Negative Pledge

The Issuer shall not, and shall not permit any of its Subsidiaries to, create, incur, assume or permit to arise or subsist any Security Interest, other than a Permitted Security Interest, upon the whole or any part of its undertakings, assets or revenues, present or future, to secure (i) any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of the Issuer, any such Subsidiary or any other Person or (ii) any Indebtedness Guarantee in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of any Person, unless, at the same time or prior thereto, the Issuer's obligations under the Notes and the Trust Deed are

181

secured equally and rateably therewith (to the satisfaction of the Trustee) or have the benefit of such other arrangement as may be approved by an Extraordinary Resolution.

(c) Preservation of Security Interests

The Issuer and the Guarantors shall ensure that the Transaction Security shall at all times be in full force and effect. In addition, neither the Issuer nor the Guarantors shall take or omit to take any action that would have the result of materially impairing the Transaction Security and the Issuer and the Guarantors will not grant any person other than the Security SPV for the benefit of the Noteholders, the Trustee, the Security Trustee and the Senior Secured Lenders any interests whatsoever with respect to the Collateral.

(d) Listing

For so long as the Notes remain outstanding, the Issuer shall use all reasonable endeavours to maintain the listing of the Notes on the GEM (including by making all the disclosures required by the GEM to maintain such listing) but, if it is unable or not permitted to do so, having used such endeavours, or if the maintenance of such listing is agreed by the Trustee to be unduly onerous and the Trustee is satisfied that the interests of the Noteholders would not be thereby materially prejudiced, instead use its reasonable endeavours to obtain and maintain a listing of the Notes on another stock exchange or exchanges to be approved in writing by the Trustee and give notice of the identity of such other stock exchange or exchanges or securities market or markets to the Noteholders.

(e) Restriction on Dividends

The Issuer shall not declare or make, or incur any liability to declare or make (i) any payment of any dividend or other distribution (whether in cash or in kind) in respect of the Share Capital of the Issuer; or (ii) any payment on any shareholders’ loan, in each case except as, and on the terms, permitted by the Shareholders’ Agreement.

This Condition 6(e) will not, however, restrict or prohibit any payment (i) approved by an Extraordinary Resolution or (ii) any payment to Blue Label Telecoms Limited in connection with the Blue Label Airtime Arrangements.

(f) Additional Guarantors

(i) The Issuer shall procure that any of its Subsidiaries which is or becomes a guarantor in respect of any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of the Issuer or any of its other Subsidiaries becomes (and, until released in accordance with the Conditions, will continue to be) a Guarantor, unless such Subsidiary is prohibited or restricted from providing a guarantee with respect to the Notes by law or is otherwise prevented or restricted from providing a guarantee as a result of general corporate or contractual restrictions applicable to such Subsidiary, in each case after the Issuer has used its best endeavours (without

182

requiring the Issuer to procure any change in jurisdiction of incorporation of such Subsidiary or the purchase of any minority shareholder interest in such Subsidiary) to enable such Subsidiary to provide a Guarantee not subject to any restrictions or limitations;

(ii) If a Subsidiary of the Issuer is required to become a Guarantor pursuant to Condition 6(f), the Issuer shall procure the delivery to the Trustee of: (i) a deed of guarantee in favour of the Trustee duly executed by the relevant Subsidiary under which it becomes a Guarantor under these Conditions; (ii) a supplemental trust deed duly executed by the relevant Subsidiary pursuant to which it agrees to be bound by the provisions of the Trust Deed and the Paying Agency Agreement; and (iii) an officers' certificate of the relevant Subsidiary certifying that the giving of the guarantee by the Guarantor will not breach any applicable law to which such Guarantor is subject, and, upon delivery of such documents, the relevant Subsidiary shall be deemed to have become a Guarantor;

(iii) If (i) a Release Event has occurred with respect to a Guarantor; and (ii) no Event of Default pursuant to Condition 12 (Events of Default) has occurred and is continuing or would occur as a consequence of such release, then the relevant Guarantor may be released from its obligations under its Guarantee;

(iv) As a condition to any release as aforesaid, the Issuer shall deliver to the Trustee an officers' certificate certifying that the above conditions to release have been satisfied. The Trustee shall accept the officers' certificate together, if applicable, with the supporting documents mentioned above as sufficient evidence of the occurrence of such Release Event, in which event it shall be conclusive and binding on the Noteholders and each relevant Guarantor shall be immediately and effectively released from its obligations under its Guarantee; and

(v) The Issuer shall promptly notify the Noteholders of the release of any Guarantor pursuant to this Condition 6(f).

7. Interest

7.1 The Notes bear interest on their outstanding principal amount from and including the Issue Date to but excluding the Maturity Date at the rate of 8.625 per cent. per annum (the “Rate of Interest”), payable semi-annually in arrear on 1 June and 1 December in each year (each an “Interest Payment Date”). 7.2 Each Note will cease to bear interest from and including its due date for redemption unless, upon due presentation, payment of the principal in respect of the Note is improperly withheld or refused or unless default is otherwise made in respect of payment. In such event, interest will continue to accrue until whichever is the earlier of: (a) the date on which all amounts due in respect of such Note have been paid; and

(b) seven days after the date on which the full amount of the moneys payable in respect of such Notes has been received by the Trustee or the Paying Agent and notice to that effect has been given to

183

the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices) (except to the extent that there is any subsequent default in payment).

7.3 The amount of interest payable on each Interest Payment Date shall be calculated per U.S.$1,000 in principal amount of the Notes. If interest is required to be paid in respect of a Note on any other date, it shall be calculated by applying the Rate of Interest to the Calculation Amount, multiplying the product by the Day Count Fraction, rounding the resulting figure to the nearest cent (half a cent being rounded upwards) and multiplying such rounded figure by a fraction equal to the authorised denomination of such Note divided by the Calculation Amount, where “Calculation Amount” means U.S.$1,000 and “Day Count Fraction” means, in respect of any period, the number of days in the relevant period divided by 360 (the number of days to be calculated on the basis of a year of 360 days with twelve 30-day months).

8. Payments

(a) Record Date

Each payment in respect of a Note will be made to the Person shown as the Holder in the Register at the close of business (in the place of the Registrar's Specified Office) on the business day (in such place) prior to the due date for such payment (the “Record Date”).

(b) Payments

Each payment in respect of the Notes pursuant to these Conditions will be made by transfer to a United States dollars account maintained by the payee with a bank that can process payments in United States dollars.

(c) Payments Subject to Fiscal Laws

Payments will be subject in all cases to (i) any fiscal or other laws and regulations applicable thereto in the place of payment, but without prejudice to the provisions of Condition 10 (Taxation) and (ii) any withholding or deduction required pursuant to an agreement described in Section 1471(b) of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (the “Code”) or otherwise imposed pursuant to Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code, any regulations or agreements thereunder, any official interpretations thereof, or (without prejudice to the provisions of Condition 10 (Taxation)) any law implementing an intergovernmental approach thereto.

(d) Payment on a Business Day

If the due date for payment of any amount in respect of any Note is not a business day in the place of payment, the Holder thereof shall not be entitled to payment in such place of the amount due until the next succeeding business day in such place. A Holder of a Note shall not be entitled to any interest or other payment in respect of any delay in payment resulting from the due date for a payment not being a business day. For purposes of this Condition 8(d), “business day” means any day on which commercial banks are open for business (including dealings in foreign currencies)

184

in London, Johannesburg and New York City and, in the case of surrender (or, in the case of partial payment only, endorsement) of a Note Certificate, in the place in which the Note Certificate is surrendered (or, as the case may be, endorsed).

(e) Agents

In acting under the Paying Agency Agreement and in connection with the Notes, the Agents act solely as agents of the Issuer and (to the extent provided therein) the Trustee and do not assume any obligations towards or relationship of agency or trust for or with any of the Noteholders. The Issuer reserves the right (with prior written approval of the Trustee) at any time to vary or terminate the appointment of any Agent and to appoint a successor principal paying agent or registrar and additional or successor paying agents and transfer agents; Notice of any change in any of the Agents or in their Specified Offices shall promptly be given to the Trustee and to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices).

(f) Default Interest and Payment Delay

If the Issuer or, as the case may be, any Guarantor fails to pay any of the principal of the Notes when the same becomes due and payable under these Conditions, interest (“Default Interest”) shall accrue on the overdue sum at the rate of 2% per annum from the due date. Default Interest shall accrue on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a 360-day year consisting of 12 months of 30 days each.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, so long as the Note Certificate is held on behalf of Euroclear, Clearstream, Luxembourg or any other clearing system, each payment in respect of the Note Certificate will be made to the person shown as the holder in the Register at the close of business of the relevant clearing system on the Clearing System Business Day before the due date for such payments, where “Clearing System Business Day” means a weekday (Monday to Friday, inclusive) except 25 December and 1 January .

9. Redemption and Purchase

(a) Scheduled Redemption

Unless the Notes have been previously purchased and cancelled as herein provided, the Notes will be redeemed in full on the Maturity Date at their principal amount.

(b) Optional Redemption

The Issuer shall be entitled to redeem all or part of the Notes at any time, without any premium or penalty at their principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest, provided that, the Issuer gives not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to Noteholders (which notice shall be irrevocable and shall oblige the Issuer to redeem the Notes specified in such notice on the relevant redemption date).

185

(c) Partial Redemption

If the Notes are to be redeemed in part only on any date in accordance with Condition 9(b) (Optional Redemption):

(i) in the case of Definitive Notes, the Notes to be redeemed shall be selected by the drawing of lots, subject to compliance with applicable law, the rules of each competent authority, stock exchange and/or quotation system (if any) by which the Notes have then been admitted to listing, trading and/or quotation and the notice to Noteholders referred to in Condition 9(b) (Optional Redemption) shall specify the serial numbers of the Notes to be redeemed; and

(ii) in the case of Notes represented by a Note Certificate, the Notes shall be redeemed (so far as may be practicable) pro rata to their principal amounts, subject always to compliance with all applicable laws and the requirements of any listing authority, stock exchange or quotation system on which the relevant Notes are listed, traded or quoted.

(d) Redemption for Taxation Reasons

If the Issuer (or, if a Guarantee is called, the relevant Guarantor) satisfies the Trustee immediately before the giving of the notice referred to below that, on the occasion of the next payment in respect of the Notes, it would be unable to make such payment without having to pay additional amounts as described in Condition 10 (Taxation), and such requirement to pay such additional amounts arises by reason of a change in, or amendment to, the laws or regulations of South Africa or any political sub-division or taxing authority thereof or therein having power to tax, or any change in the application or official interpretation of such laws or regulations or in any applicable double taxation treaty or convention, which change or amendment becomes effective on or after Issue Date, and such requirement cannot be avoided by the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be) taking reasonable measures available to it (such measures not involving any material additional payments by, or expense for, the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be)), the Issuer may, at its option, on any Interest Payment Date having given not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices), redeem all, but not some only, of the Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof together with interest accrued to the date of redemption, provided that the date fixed for redemption shall not be earlier than 90 days prior to the earliest date on which the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be) would be obliged to pay such additional amounts or make such withholding or deduction, as the case may be, were a payment in respect of the Notes (or the Guarantee, as the case may be) then due. Prior to the publication of any notice of redemption pursuant to this Condition 9(d), the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be) shall deliver to the Trustee a certificate signed by any one director of the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be) stating that the requirement referred to above cannot be avoided by the Issuer (or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be) taking reasonable measures available to it and the Trustee shall be entitled to accept such certificate as sufficient evidence of

186

the satisfaction of the condition precedent set out above in which event it shall be conclusive and binding on Noteholders.

(e) Purchase

The Issuer, any Guarantor or any of the Issuer’s affiliates may at any time purchase or procure others to purchase for its account the Notes in the open market or otherwise and at any price. Any Notes so purchased, while held by, or on behalf of, any Person (including but not limited to the Issuer or any Guarantor) for the benefit of the Issuer or any Guarantor, in each case as beneficial owner, shall not entitle the holder to vote at any meeting of Noteholders and shall not be deemed to be outstanding for the purposes of meetings of Noteholders or for the purposes of any Written Resolution or for the purposes of calculating quorums at meetings of the Noteholders or for the purposes of Condition 14 (Meetings of Noteholders; Modification and Waiver).

(f) Cancellation of Notes

All Notes which are redeemed or purchased pursuant to this Condition 9 shall be cancelled and may not be reissued or resold, and notice to that effect shall be given to Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15(a) (Notices – To the Noteholders).

10. Taxation

All payments in respect of the Notes by the Issuer or any Guarantor shall be made free and clear of, and without withholding or deduction for, any taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges (together, the “Taxes”) of whatsoever nature imposed levied, collected, withheld or assessed by or within South Africa or any political subdivision or any authority thereof or therein having power to tax, except to the extent that any such withholding or deduction is required by law. In that event, the Issuer (or, as the case may be, the Guarantor) shall pay such additional amounts of principal and interest as will result in the receipt by the Holders of the amounts which would otherwise have been received by them in respect of the Notes had no such withholding or deduction been required, except that no such additional amounts shall be payable in respect of Notes presented for payment:

(a) by or on behalf of a holder who is liable to such taxes or duties in respect of such Notes by reason of his having some connection with South Africa other than the mere holding of such Note; or

(b) by or on behalf of a holder who would not be liable or subject to such deduction or withholding by making a declaration of non-residence or other claim for exemption to a tax authority; or

(c) more than 30 days after the Relevant Date except to the extent that the holder would have been entitled to such additional amounts on presenting such Note for payment on the last day of such period of 30 days; or

187

(d) by or on behalf of a holder who would have been able to avoid such withholding or deduction by satisfying any statutory or procedural requirements (including, without limitation, the provision of information).

For the purpose of these Conditions, “Relevant Date” means whichever is the later of (i) the date on which such payment first becomes due and (ii) if the full amount payable has not been received by the Paying Agent on or prior to such due date, the date on which (the full amount plus any accrued interest having been so received) notice to that effect has been given to the Holders.

11. Prescription

Claims in respect of principal and interest shall become void unless the relevant Note Certificates are surrendered for payment within ten years (in the case of principal) and five years (in the case of interest) from the Relevant Date, as defined in Condition 10 (Taxation).

12. Events of Default

The Trustee at its sole discretion may, and if so requested in writing by the Holders of not less than one- quarter of the nominal amount of the Notes then outstanding or if so directed by an Extraordinary Resolution shall (subject in each case to being indemnified and/or provided with security and/or pre- funded to its satisfaction):

(i) give notice to the Issuer and the Security Trustee that the Notes are and they shall become due and payable at their principal amount, without further action or formality; and/or

(ii) exercise any or all of its rights, remedies, powers or discretions under the Trust Deed,

if any of the following events (each, an “Event of Default”) occurs at any time after the Issue Date (any prior occurrence being disregarded for all purposes of this Condition 12):

(a) Non-Payment

(i) the Issuer fails to make any payment of principal in respect of the Notes on the due date therefor and such default continues for a period of 15 Business Days; or

(ii) the Issuer fails to make any payment of interest in respect of the Notes or any amount due under Condition 10 (Taxation) on the due date therefor and such default continues for a period of 30 days;

(b) Cross-Default

(i) there is an event of default (however described) by the Issuer in respect of any Senior Financial Indebtedness which has not been remedied or waived by the relevant Senior Secured Lender in accordance with the terms of such Senior Financial Indebtedness; or

188

(ii) the Issuer or any Guarantor fail to make any payment due under any Indebtedness for Borrowed Money of the Issuer or any Indebtedness Guarantee,

provided that, no Event of Default will occur pursuant to this Condition 12(b) if the aggregate amount of the relevant Indebtedness for Borrowed Money or Indebtedness Guarantee is less than U.S.$10,000,000 (or its equivalent in any other currency).

(c) Breach of Other Obligations

the Issuer or any Guarantor is in default in the performance, or is otherwise in breach, of any covenant, obligation, undertaking or other agreement under any Note Document and, where such default or breach is, in the opinion of the Trustee, capable of remedy, such default or breach is not remedied within 30 days after notice thereof has been given to the Issuer or, as the case may be, the relevant Guarantor by the Trustee, and the Trustee certifies that it is of the opinion in its sole discretion that such default or breach is materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders; or

(d) Bankruptcy and Insolvency

other than solely with respect to a Technical Insolvency:

(i) any court of competent jurisdiction enters a decree or order for the appointment of a receiver, administrator or liquidator (other than in respect of a solvent liquidation) in any insolvency, rehabilitation, readjustment of debt, marshalling of assets and liabilities or similar arrangements in respect of the Issuer or any Guarantor or all or substantially all of its, respective, properties, having an aggregate market value of more than U.S.$10,000,000, and such proceeding, decree or order shall not have been vacated or shall have remained in force undischarged or unstayed for a period of 60 days or is otherwise frivolous or vexatious; or

(ii) the Issuer or any Guarantor shall institute proceedings under any applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law now or hereafter in effect to be adjudicated a bankrupt or shall consent to the filing of a bankruptcy, insolvency or similar proceeding against it or shall file a petition or answer or consent seeking reorganisation under any such law or shall consent to the filing of any such petition, or shall consent to the appointment of a receiver, administrator or liquidator or trustee or assignee in bankruptcy or liquidation (other than in respect of a solvent liquidation) of the Issuer or any Guarantor or in respect of its, respective, property, having an aggregate market value of more than U.S.$10,000,000, or shall make an assignment for the benefit of its creditors generally, or shall otherwise be unable or admit its inability to pay its debts as they become due, or the Issuer any Guarantor commences proceedings with a view to the general adjustment of its, respective, Indebtedness;

189

(e) Invalidity or Unenforceability

it is or becomes unlawful for the Issuer to perform or comply with all or any of its material obligations under or in respect of the Notes or Note Documents (to the extent that they relate to the Notes), or all or any of the obligations of the Issuer set out in the Notes or the Note Documents (to the extent that they relate to the Notes) shall be or become unenforceable or invalid, in each case, in any material respect;

(f) Repudiation and Rescission

subject to the Legal Reservations, the Issuer or any Guarantor rescinds or purports to rescind or repudiates or purports to repudiate, in whole or in part, any Note Document or any of the Transaction Security;

(g) Material Proceedings

any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings have been started or (to the best of the Issuer’s knowledge and belief having made due and careful enquiry) threatened against the Issuer which are reasonably likely to be adversely determined and if so determined would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect;

(h) Currency Control Regulations

any change in the applicable law of any relevant jurisdiction with respect to any foreign exchange or currency regulations, restrictions or controls occurs which would have a Material Adverse Effect;

(i) Audit Qualification

the Auditors qualify their report on the audited consolidated financial statements of the Group in a manner which has or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect;

(j) Material Adverse Effect

any event or circumstance (other than those specifically set out in this Condition 12) shall exist and be continuing which has or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect and such event or circumstance, if capable of remedy, is not remedied within 30 days of the earlier of (a) the Trustee giving notice to the Issuer; and (b) the Issuer becoming aware of such event or circumstance; or

(k) Expropriation

the authority or ability of the Issuer or any Guarantor to conduct its business is limited or wholly or substantially curtailed by any seizure, expropriation, nationalisation, intervention, restriction or other action by or on behalf of any governmental or regulatory authority or other person.

190

13. Replacement of Notes

If any Note is lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed, it may be replaced at the Specified Office of the Registrar or any other Agent having its Specified Office in London, subject to all applicable laws and stock exchange requirements, upon payment by the claimant of the expenses incurred in connection with such replacement and on such terms as to evidence, security, indemnity and otherwise as the Issuer may reasonably require. Mutilated or defaced Notes must be surrendered before replacements will be issued.

14. Meetings of Noteholders; Modification and Waiver

(a) Meetings of Noteholders

The Trust Deed contains provisions for convening meetings of Noteholders to consider any matters affecting their interests, including the modification of any provision of these Conditions or the Trust Deed and the waiver of any of the Issuer's obligations. Any such modification or waiver may be made if sanctioned by an Extraordinary Resolution. Such a meeting may be convened by the Trustee or the Issuer, or by the Trustee upon the request in writing of Noteholders holding not less than 10 per cent. of the nominal amount of the outstanding Notes. The quorum at any meeting convened to vote on an Extraordinary Resolution will be one or more persons holding or representing a clear majority of the nominal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding, or, at any adjourned meeting, one or more persons being or representing Noteholders whatever the nominal amount of the Notes for the time being outstanding so held or represented; provided, however, that certain proposals (including any proposal to change any date fixed for payment of any amount in respect of the Notes, to reduce or cancel the amount payable on any date in respect of the Notes, to change the currency of payment under the Notes, to substitute the Issuer's successor in business or any of its Subsidiaries in place of the Issuer as issuer and principal obligor in respect of the Notes and as principal obligor under the Trust Deed, to direct the Security Trustee to instruct the Security SPV to release or discharge (prior to the Maturity Date) the Transaction Security or to change the quorum requirements relating to meetings or the majority required to pass an Extraordinary Resolution (each a “Reserved Matter”)) may only be sanctioned by an Extraordinary Resolution passed at a meeting of Noteholders at which one or more persons holding or representing not less than 75 per cent. or, at any adjourned meeting, 25 per cent. of the nominal amount of the outstanding Notes form a quorum. Any Extraordinary Resolution duly passed at any such meeting shall be binding on all the Noteholders, whether present or not.

(b) Written Resolution

A resolution in writing will take effect as if it were an Extraordinary Resolution if it is signed (i) by or on behalf of persons holding not less than 75 per cent. of the nominal amount of the outstanding Notes or (ii) if the Noteholders have been given at least 21 days' notice of such resolution, by or on behalf of persons holding not less than 75 per cent. of the nominal amount of the outstanding Notes. Such a resolution in writing may be contained in one document or several

191

documents in the same form, each signed by or on behalf of one or more Noteholders. The Issuer shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify, in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices), the Noteholders of any written resolution taking effect.

(c) Modification Without Noteholders' Consent

The Trustee may, without the consent of the Noteholders, agree (i) to any modification of the Notes (including these Conditions) or the Trust Deed (other than in respect of a Reserved Matter) or any of the other Note Documents which is, in the opinion of the Trustee in its sole discretion, not materially prejudicial to the interests of Noteholders and (ii) to any modification of the Notes (including these Conditions) or the Trust Deed or any of the other Note Documents which is of a formal, minor or technical nature, or made to correct a manifest error or to comply with mandatory provisions of law. In addition, the Trustee may, without the consent of the Noteholders, authorise or waive any proposed breach or breach of the Notes, the Trust Deed (other than a proposed breach or breach relating to the subject of a Reserved Matter) or any of the other Note Documents if, in the opinion of the Trustee, the interests of the Noteholders will not be materially prejudiced thereby. Any such modification, waiver or authorisation shall be binding on all the Noteholders and, unless the Trustee agrees otherwise, shall be promptly notified to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices).

15. Notices

(a) To the Noteholders

Notices to Noteholders will be sent to them by first class mail (or its equivalent) or (if posted to an overseas address) by airmail at their respective addresses on the Register. Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given or served two days in the case of inland post or seven days in the case of overseas post after dispatch.

Until such time as any definitive certificates are issued and so long as the Note Certificate is held in its entirety on behalf of Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg any notice to the Noteholders shall (notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this Condition 15) be validly given by the delivery of the relevant notice to Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg, for communication by the relevant clearing system to entitled accountholders in substitution for notification as required by the Conditions and shall be deemed to have been given on the date of delivery to such clearing system.

(b) To the Issuer and the Guarantors

Notices to the Issuer and the Guarantors will be deemed to be validly given if delivered in English to the Issuer at Corner Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090 South Africa and clearly marked on their exterior “Urgent — Attention: Chief Legal Officer” (or at such other address and for such other attention as may have been notified to the Noteholders in accordance

192

with Condition 15(a) (Notices - To the Noteholders)) and will be deemed to have been validly given, if given during normal business hours, on such day of delivery or, if given after normal business hours, at the opening of business on the next day on which the Issuer’s principal office is open for business.

(c) To the Trustee and Agents

Notices to the Trustee or any Agent will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered to the Specified Office, for the time being, of the Trustee or the Specified Office, for the time being, of such Agent and will be validly given, if given during normal business hours, on such day of delivery or, if given after normal business hours, at the opening of business on the next day on which such office is open for business.

16. Trustee

(a) Indemnification

Under the Trust Deed, the Trustee is entitled to be indemnified and relieved from responsibility in certain circumstances and to be paid its fees, costs and expenses in priority to the claims of the Noteholders. In addition, the Trustee is entitled to enter into business transactions with the Issuer and any entity relating to the Issuer without accounting for any profit.

The Trustee's responsibilities are solely those of trustee for the holders of the Notes on the terms of the Trust Deed. Accordingly, the Trustee makes no representations and assumes no responsibility for the validity or enforceability of the Notes or for the performance by the Issuer of its obligations under or in respect of the Notes and the Note Documents, as applicable.

(b) Exercise of Power and Discretion

In connection with the exercise of any of its powers, trusts, authorities or discretions (including but not limited to those referred to in these Conditions and the Trust Deed), the Trustee shall have regard to the interests of the Noteholders as a class and, in particular, shall not have regard to the consequences of such exercise for individual Noteholders resulting from their being for any purpose domiciled or resident in, or otherwise connected with, or subject to the jurisdiction of, any particular territory or taxing jurisdiction. The Trustee shall not be entitled to require, and no Noteholder shall be entitled to claim, from the Issuer or (in the case of a Noteholder) the Trustee any indemnification or payment in respect of any tax consequence of any such exercise upon individual Noteholders.

(c) Enforcement; Reliance

The Trustee may at any time, at its sole discretion and without notice, institute such proceedings as it thinks fit to enforce its rights under the Trust Deed but it shall not be bound to do so unless:

193

(i) it has been so requested in writing by the Holders of at least one-quarter of the nominal amount of the outstanding Notes or has been so directed by an Extraordinary Resolution; and

(ii) it has been indemnified and/or secured and/or pre-funded to its satisfaction.

The Trust Deed provides that the Trustee may, at any time, or, in making any determination under these Conditions or the Trust Deed, act on the opinion or advice of, or information obtained from, any expert, auditor, lawyer or professional entity, without further enquiry or evidence, subject to receiving indemnification in respect of such fees. The Trustee will not be responsible for any loss, liability, cost, claim, action, demand, expense or inconvenience which may result from it so acting.

Neither the Trustee nor any Noteholder may proceed directly in respect of the Transaction Security.

Until the Trustee has actual knowledge or express knowledge to the contrary, the Trustee may assume that no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred.

The Trust Deed provides that the Issuer is required to deliver to the Trustee, pursuant to, and in the circumstances detailed, in the Trust Deed, a certificate of the Issuer signed by any Authorised Signatory that there has not been and is not continuing any Event of Default or any Potential Event of Default or other breach of these Conditions or the Trust Deed. The Trustee shall be entitled to rely without liability on such certificates. The Trustee shall not be responsible for monitoring any of the covenants and obligations of the Issuer set out in these Conditions and shall be entitled to rely upon the information provided pursuant to these Conditions and the Trust Deed and to assume, unless it has actual knowledge or receives express notice to the contrary, that the Issuer is complying with all covenants and obligations to which it is subject herein and therein.

(d) Failure to Act

No Noteholder may proceed directly against the Issuer unless the Trustee, having become bound to do so, fails to do so within a reasonable time and such failure is continuing.

(e) Retirement and Removal

Any Trustee may retire at any time on giving at least two months' written notice to the Issuer without giving any reason or being responsible for any costs occasioned by such retirement and the Noteholders may by Extraordinary Resolution remove any Trustee, provided that the retirement or removal of a sole trust corporation will not be effective until a trust corporation is appointed as successor Trustee and if the Issuer fails to do so within 30 days of such notice of retirement, the Trustee will be entitled to appoint a successor. If a sole trust corporation gives notice of retirement or an Extraordinary Resolution is passed for its removal, the Issuer will use all reasonable endeavours to procure that another trust corporation be appointed as Trustee. In the

194

event of any change of the Trustee, notice of such change shall be given to the Noteholders by the Issuer in accordance with Condition 15 (Notices). If the Issuer fails to appoint a new Trustee within 30 days following the notice or Extraordinary Resolution referred to in this Condition 16(e), the Trustee (failing which, the Noteholders) may do so.

(f) Substitution

No substitution of either the Issuer's successor in business or any of its Subsidiaries in place of the Issuer as issuer and principal obligor in respect of the Notes and as principal obligor under the Trust Deed is permitted unless approved by an Extraordinary Resolution.

17. Currency Indemnity

If any sum due from the Issuer in respect of the Notes or under the Trust Deed or any order or judgment given or made in relation thereto has to be converted from the currency (the “first currency”) in which the same is payable under these Conditions, the Trust Deed or such order or judgment into another currency (the “second currency”) for the purpose of (a) making or filing a claim or proof against the Issuer, (b) obtaining an order or judgment in any court or other tribunal or (c) enforcing any order or judgment given or made in respect of the Notes or in respect thereof under the Trust Deed, the Issuer shall indemnify each Noteholder against any loss suffered as a result of any discrepancy between (i) the rate of exchange used for such purpose to convert the sum in question from the first currency into the second currency and (ii) the rate or rates of exchange at which such Noteholder may in the ordinary course of business purchase the first currency with the second currency upon receipt of a sum paid to it in satisfaction, in whole or in part, of any such order, judgment, claim or proof. This indemnity constitutes a separate and independent obligation of the Issuer and shall give rise to a separate and independent cause of action.

18. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

No Person shall have any right to enforce any term or condition of the Notes or any of the Note Documents under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999, but this does not affect the right or remedy of any Person which exists or is available apart from such Act.

19. Governing Law and Jurisdiction

(a) Governing Law

The Notes and the Note Documents, excluding the Transaction Security Documents, and any non- contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with them are governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, English law.

(b) Jurisdiction

195

The Issuer and each Guarantor agrees that the Courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute, claim, difference or controversy, arising from or connected with the Notes (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with the Notes) or the consequences of their nullity (a “Dispute”). The Issuer and each Guarantor agrees that the Courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle any Dispute and, accordingly, that it will not argue to the contrary.

(c) Appropriate Forum

The Issuer and each Guarantor has irrevocably waived any objection which it might now or hereafter have to the courts of England being nominated as the forum to hear and determine any proceedings (the “Proceedings”) and agrees not to claim in any Proceedings that any such court is not a convenient or appropriate forum.

(d) Agent for Service of Process

The Issuer and each Guarantor has agreed that the process by which any Proceedings in England are begun may be served on it by being delivered to Law Debenture Corporate Services Limited of 5th Floor, 100 Wood Street, London EC2V 7EX for the attention of the Directors, or, if different, its registered office for the time being. If for any reason the Issuer or any Guarantor does not have such an agent in England, it will promptly appoint a substitute process agent and notify in writing the Trustee and the Noteholders of such appointment. Nothing herein shall affect the right to serve process in any other manner permitted by law.

(e) Consent to Enforcement, etc.

The Issuer and each Guarantor has consented generally in respect of any Proceedings to the giving of any relief or the issue of any process in connection with such Proceedings, including (without limitation) the making, enforcement or execution against any property whatsoever (irrespective of its use or intended use) of any order or judgment which may be given in such Proceedings.

(f) Waiver of Immunity

To the extent that the Issuer or any Guarantor may in any jurisdiction claim for itself or its assets or revenues immunity from suit, execution, attachment (whether in aid of execution, before judgment or otherwise) or other legal process and to the extent that such immunity (whether or not claimed) may be attributed in any such jurisdiction to the Issuer or its assets or revenues, the Issuer and each Guarantor has agreed, in connection with any Proceedings, not to claim and has irrevocably waived such immunity to the full extent permitted by the laws of such jurisdiction.

196

BOOK-ENTRY; DELIVERY AND FORM

Registered Notes

Except as set forth below, the Notes have been issued in registered, global form (a “Global Note”) in minimum denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof.

In relation to the Global, references in the Terms and Conditions of the Notes to "Noteholder" are references to the person in whose name such Global Note is for the time being registered in the Register which, for so long as the Global Note is held by or on behalf of the common depositary (or its nominee) for Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg and/or any other relevant clearing system, will be that common depositary (or its nominee) for that common depositary (or its nominee).

Each of the persons shown in the records of Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg and/or any other relevant clearing system as being entitled to an interest in a Global Note (each an "Accountholder") must look solely to Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg and/or such other relevant clearing system (as the case may be) for such Accountholder's share of each payment made by the Issuer or any Guarantor to the holder of such Global Note and in relation to all other rights arising under such Global Note. The extent to which, and the manner in which, Accountholders may exercise any rights arising under the Global Note will be determined by the respective rules and procedures of Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg and any other relevant clearing system from time to time. For so long as the relevant Notes are represented by a Global Note, Accountholders shall have no claim directly against the Issuer or any Guarantor in respect of payments due under the Notes and such obligations of the Issuer and any Guarantor will be discharged by payment to the holder of such Global Note.

Payments of principal, interest and any other amount in respect of a Global Note will, in the absence of provision to the contrary, be made to the person shown on the Register (as defined in Condition 3 (Registration)) as the registered holder of the relevant Global Note. None of the Issuer, any Guarantor, any Paying Agent, the Registrar or any transfer agent will have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records relating to or payments or deliveries made on account of beneficial ownership interests in a Global Note or for maintaining, supervising or reviewing any records relating to such beneficial ownership interests. Payments of principal, interest or any other amount in respect of definitive registered note will, in the absence of provision to the contrary, be made to the person(s) shown on the Register on the relevant Record Date (as defined in Condition 8(a) (Payments – Record Date)) immediately preceding the due date for payment in the manner provided in the “Terms and Conditions of the Notes.”

Interests in a Global Note in registered form will be exchangeable (free of charge), in whole but not in part, for definitive registered notes without receipts, interest coupons or talons attached either (i) upon not less than 45 days’ written notice from Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg (acting on the instructions of any holder of an interest in such Global Note) to the Registrar as described therein), (ii) upon the occurrence of an Exchange Event or (iii) at any time with the consent of the relevant Issuer.

General

Any reference herein to Euroclear and/or Clearstream, Luxembourg shall, whenever the context so permits, be deemed to include a reference to any additional or alternative clearance system approved by the relevant Issuer and the Paying Agent.

In the event that a Global Note is exchanged for definitive notes, such definitive notes shall be issued in the minimum denomination of the Notes, and any specified integral multiples, only. Noteholders who hold Notes in the relevant clearing system in amounts that are not integral multiples of a minimum denomination may need to purchase or sell, on or before the relevant date of exchange, a principal amount of Notes such that their holding is an integral multiple of the minimum denomination.

197

TAXATION

This is a general overview of certain United States federal income tax and South African tax considerations in connection with an investment in the Notes. This overview does not address all aspects of United States federal income tax laws or those of South Africa and does not discuss any state or local tax considerations. While this overview is considered to be a correct interpretation of existing laws in force on the date of these Listing Particulars, there can be no assurance that those laws or the interpretation of those laws will not change. This overview does not discuss all of the income tax consequences that may be relevant to an investor in light of such investor’s particular circumstances or to investors subject to special rules, such as regulated investment companies, certain financial institutions or insurance companies. You are advized to consult their tax advisors with respect to the tax consequences of the purchase, ownership or disposition of the Notes (or the purchase, ownership or disposition of beneficial interests therein) as well as any tax consequences that may arise under the laws of any state, municipality or other taxing jurisdiction.

FATCA

Pursuant to certain provisions of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (“FATCA”), a “foreign financial institution” may be required to withhold on certain payments it makes (“foreign passthru payments”) to persons that fail to meet certain certification, reporting, or related requirements. Cell C may be a foreign financial institution for these purposes. A number of jurisdictions (including the jurisdiction of Cell C) have entered into, or have agreed in substance to, intergovernmental agreements with the United States to implement FATCA (“IGAs”), which modify the way in which FATCA applies in their jurisdictions. Under the provisions of IGAs as currently in effect, a foreign financial institution in an IGA jurisdiction would generally not be required to withhold under FATCA or an IGA from payments that it makes. Certain aspects of the application of the FATCA provisions and IGAs to instruments such as the Notes, including whether withholding would ever be required pursuant to FATCA or an IGA with respect to payments on instruments such as the Notes, are uncertain and may be subject to change. Even if withholding would be required pursuant to FATCA or an IGA with respect to payments on instruments such as the Notes, such withholding would not apply prior to 1 January 2019 and Notes issued on or prior to the date that is six months after the date on which final regulations defining “foreign passthru payments” are filed with the U.S. Federal Register generally would be “grandfathered” for purposes of FATCA withholding unless materially modified after such date (including by reason of a substitution of Cell C).

Proposed Financial Transaction Tax (FTT)

On 14 February 2013, the European Commission published a proposal for a Directive for a common FTT in Belgium, Germany, Estonia, Greece, Spain, France, Italy, Austria, Portugal, Slovenia and Slovakia (the participating Member States). However, Estonia has since stated it will not participate.

The proposed FTT has a very broad scope and could, if introduced in its current form, apply to certain dealings in the Notes (including secondary market transactions) in certain circumstances. Primary market transactions referred to in Article 5(c) of Regulation (EC) No 1287/2006 are expected to be exempt.

Under current proposals the FTT could apply in certain circumstances to persons both within and outside of the participating Member States. Generally, it would apply to certain dealings in the Notes where at least one party is a financial institution, and at least one party is established in a participating Member State. A financial institution may be, or be deemed to be, "established" in a participating Member State in a broad range of circumstances, including (a) by transacting with a person established in a participating Member State or (b) where the financial instrument which is subject to the dealings is issued in a participating Member State.

The FTT proposal remains subject to negotiation between the participating Member States and the scope of any such tax is uncertain. Additional EU Member States may decide to participate.

Prospective Holders are advised to seek their own professional advice in relation to the FTT.

South African Taxation Capitalized terms used in this section headed "South African Taxation" shall bear the same meanings as used in the “Description of Notes,” except to the extent that they are separately defined in this section or clearly inappropriate from the context.

198

The comments below are intended as a general guide to the relevant tax laws of South Africa as at the date of these Listing Particulars. The contents of this section headed "South African Taxation" do not constitute tax advice and do not purport to describe all of the considerations that may be relevant to a prospective subscriber for or purchaser of any Notes. Prospective subscribers for or purchasers of any Notes should consult their professional advisors in this regard.

Withholding Tax Under current taxation law in South Africa, all payments made under the Notes to South African tax resident Holders will be made free of withholding or deduction for or on account of any taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges in South Africa save as disclosed below. As from March 1, 2015, a withholding tax on South African-sourced interest (see the section on "Income Tax" below) paid to or for the benefit of a foreign person applies at a rate of 15% of the amount of interest in terms of section 50A-50H of the Income Tax Act, 1962 (the "Income Tax Act"). The withholding tax could be reduced by the application of relevant double taxation treaties. Section 50D of the Income Tax Act exempts interest paid in respect of any debt instrument listed on a recognized exchange. The Irish Stock Exchange qualifies as a recognised exchange, and therefore, subject to any future legislative changes, the interest paid on the Notes will not be subject to interest withholding tax. A foreign person will also be exempt from the withholding tax on interest if:

(a) that foreign person is a natural person who was physically present in South Africa for a period exceeding 183 days in aggregate during the twelve-month period preceding the date on which the interest is paid; or (b) the debt claim in respect of which that interest is paid is effectively connected with a permanent establishment of that foreign person in South Africa, if that foreign person is registered as a taxpayer in South Africa. Foreign persons are subject to normal South African income tax on the interest sourced in South Africa unless exempted under Section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act (please refer to the section on "Income Tax" below).

Securities Transfer Tax (STT) No STT is payable on the issue or transfer of Notes (bonds) under the Securities Transfer Tax Act, 2007, because a Note (bond) does not constitute a “security” (as defined) for the purposes of that Act.

Value-Added Tax (VAT) No VAT is payable on the issue or transfer of Notes. A Note (bond) constitutes a "debt security" as defined in section 2(2)(iii) of the South African Value-Added Tax Act, 1991 (the "VAT Act"). The issue, allotment, drawing, acceptance, endorsement or transfer of ownership of a debt security is a financial service in terms of section 2(1)(c) of the VAT Act, which is exempt from VAT in terms of section 12(a) of the VAT Act. Commissions, fees or similar charges raised for the facilitation, issue, allotment, drawing, acceptance, endorsement or transfer of ownership of Notes (bonds) that constitute "debt securities" will however be subject to VAT at the standard rate (currently 14 per cent.), except where the recipient is a non-resident as contemplated below. Services (including exempt financial services) rendered to non-residents who are not in South Africa when the services are rendered, are subject to VAT at the zero rate in terms of section 11(2)(l) of the VAT Act.

Income Tax Under current taxation law effective in South Africa, a "resident" (as defined in section 1 of the Income Tax Act) is subject to income tax on his/her worldwide income. Accordingly, all Holders who are "residents" of South Africa will generally be liable to pay income tax, subject to available deductions, allowances and exemptions, on any interest earned pursuant to the Notes. Non-residents of South Africa are subject to income tax on all income derived from a South African source (subject to domestic exemptions or relief in terms of an applicable double taxation treaty). Interest income is from a South African source if that amount: (a) is incurred by a South African tax resident, unless the interest is attributable to a permanent establishment which is situated outside of South Africa; or

199

(b) is derived from the utilization or application in South Africa by any person of any funds or credit obtained in terms of any form of "interest-bearing arrangement". The Issuer is a South African tax resident and the Notes constitute an "interest-bearing arrangement". Accordingly, the interest paid to the Holders is from a South African source and subject to South African income tax unless such income is exempt under section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act (see below). Under section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act, interest received by or accruing to a Holder who, or which, is not a tax resident of South Africa during any year of assessment is exempt from income tax, unless:

(a) that person is a natural person who was physically present in South Africa for a period exceeding 183 days in aggregate during the twelve month period preceding the date on which the interest is received or accrued by or to that person; or (b) the debt from which the interest arises is effectively connected to a permanent establishment of that person in South Africa. If a Holder does not qualify for the exemption under section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act, exemption from, or reduction of any South African income tax liability may be available under an applicable double taxation treaty. Purchasers are advized to consult their own professional advisors as to whether the interest income earned on the Notes will be exempt under section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act or under an applicable double taxation treaty. Under section 24J of the Income Tax Act, broadly speaking, any discount or premium to the principal amount of a Note is treated as part of the interest income on the Note. Section 24J of the Income Tax Act deems interest income to accrue to a Holder on a day-to-day basis until that Holder disposes of the Note. The day-to-day basis accrual is determined by calculating the yield to maturity and applying this rate to the capital involved for the relevant tax period. Interest as defined in section 24J of the Income Tax Act (including the premium or discount) may qualify for the exemption under section 10(1)(h) of the Income Tax Act. Specific provisions relating to the fair value taxation of financial instruments for "covered persons" (as defined in section 24JB of the Income Tax Act) have been enacted and were effective from January 1, 2014. Holders should seek advice as to whether this provision may apply to them. Holders are advised to consult their own professional advisors to ascertain whether the abovementioned provisions may apply to them. To the extent that the disposal of the Note gives rise to an "adjusted gain on transfer or redemption of an instrument" or an "adjusted loss on transfer or redemption of an instrument" (as envisaged in section 24J of the Income Tax Act), the normal principles are to be applied in determining whether such adjusted gain or adjusted loss should be subject to income tax in terms of the Income Tax Act.

Capital Gains Tax Capital gains and losses of residents of South Africa on the disposal of Notes are subject to capital gains tax, unless the Notes are purchased for re-sale in the short term as part of a scheme of profit making, in which case the proceeds will be subject to income tax. Any discount or premium on acquisition which has already been treated as interest for income tax purposes, under section 24J of the Income Tax Act will not be taken into account when determining any capital gain or loss. If the Notes are disposed of or redeemed prior to or on maturity, an "adjusted gain on transfer or redemption of an instrument", or an "adjusted loss on transfer or redemption of an instrument", as contemplated in section 24J of the Act, must be calculated. Any such adjusted gain or adjusted loss is deemed to have been incurred or to have accrued in the year of assessment in which the transfer or redemption occurred. The calculation of the adjusted gain or adjusted loss will take into account, inter alia, all interest which has already been deemed to accrue to the Holder over the term that the Note has been held by the Holder. Under section 24J(4A) of the Income Tax Act, where an adjusted loss on transfer or redemption of an instrument realized by a Holder of a Note includes any amount representing interest that has previously been included in the income of the Holder, that amount will qualify as a deduction from the income of the Holder during the year of assessment in which the transfer or redemption takes place and will not give rise to a capital loss. Capital gains tax under the Eighth Schedule to the Income Tax Act will not be levied in relation to Notes disposed of by a person who is not a resident of South Africa unless the Notes disposed of are attributable to a permanent establishment of that person in South Africa.

200

To the extent that a Holder constitutes a "covered person" (as defined in section 24JB of the Income Tax Act) and section 24JB applies to the Notes, the Holder will be taxed in accordance with the provisions of section 24JB of the Act and the capital gains tax provisions would not apply. Holders are advised to consult their own professional advisors as to whether a disposal of Notes will result in a liability to capital gains tax.

Definition of Interest

The references to "interest" above mean "interest" as understood in South African tax law. The statements above do not take any account of any different definitions of "interest" or "principal" which may prevail under any other law or which may be created by the Terms and Conditions of the Notes or any related documentation.

201

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTIONS

The distribution of these Listing Particulars in certain jurisdictions may be restricted by law. Persons into whose possession these Listing Particulars comes are required by each of the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Trustee to inform themselves about, and to observe, any such restrictions. No action has been or will be taken in any jurisdiction by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Trustee in relation to the Arrangement that would permit a public offering of securities. None of the securities referred to in these Listing Particulars shall be issued or transferred in any jurisdiction in contravention of applicable law.

United States

The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the Securities Act and may not be offered or sold within the United States or to, or for the account or benefit of, U.S. persons, except in certain transactions exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act. Terms used in this paragraph have the meanings given to them by Regulation S under the Securities Act. The Notes are subject to U.S. tax law requirements and may not be offered, sold or delivered within the United States or its possessions or to a United States person, except in certain transactions permitted by U.S. tax regulations. Terms used in this paragraph have the meanings given to them by the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986 and regulations thereunder.

United Kingdom

The offer of the Notes may only be communicated to persons in the United Kingdom in circumstances where section 21(1) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 does not apply to Cell C.

EEA

These Listing Particulars are not a prospectus for the purposes of the Prospectus Directive.

The Notes will only be offered to persons in member states of the EEA who are "qualified investors" within the meaning of Article 2(1)(e) of the Prospectus Directive. These Listing Particulars and its contents should not be acted upon in any member state of the EEA by persons who are not qualified investors.

202

DISCLOSURE IN TERMS OF THE COMMERCIAL PAPER REGULATIONS

Disclosure Requirements in terms of paragraph 3(5) of the Commercial Paper Regulations, published in terms of the Banks Act, under Government Notice number 2172 in Government Gazette number 16167, dated 14 December 1994.

Paragraph 3(5)(a): The ultimate borrower is the Issuer.

Paragraph 3(5)(b): The Issuer is a going concern and can in all circumstances be reasonably expected to meet its commitments under the Notes.

Paragraph 3(5)(c): The auditor of the Issuer is KPMG, Inc.

Paragraph 3(5)(d): As at the date of this issue: (a) the Issuer has not issued any other commercial paper other than the Notes; and (b) it is not anticipated that the Issuer will issue additional commercial paper during the remainder of its current financial year.

Paragraph 3(5)(e): All information that may reasonably be necessary to enable the investor to ascertain the nature of the financial and commercial risk of its investment in the Notes is contained in these Listing Particulars.

Paragraph 3(5)(f): There has been no material adverse change in the Issuer’s financial position since the date of its last audited financial statements dated December 31, 2016.

Paragraph 3(5)(g): Application will be made to have the Notes listed on the Global Exchange Market of the Irish Stock Exchange.

Paragraph 3(5)(h): There were no proceeds since the Notes were exchanged in part for the Existing Cell C Notes as part of the Cell C Recapitalization.

Paragraph 3(5)(i): The Notes are secured.

Paragraph 3(5)(j) KPMG, Inc., the statutory auditors of the Issuer, have confirmed that nothing has come to their attention to cause them to believe that this issue of Notes does not comply in all material respects with the relevant provisions of the Commercial Paper Regulations.

203

TRANSFER RESTRICTIONS

Because the following restrictions will apply with respect to the Notes, purchasers of the Notes are advised to consult legal counsel prior to making an offer, resale, pledge or transfer of any of the Notes. References to Notes in this section should, as appropriate, be deemed to refer to the Notes themselves and/or beneficial interests therein.

The Notes may be transferred only in accordance with the provisions set out below. Any purported purchase or transfer of the Notes in violation of these requirements will be void and without any legal effect whatsoever. Each purchaser of Notes understands and acknowledges that the Issuer may also require the sale of its Notes held by persons that fail to provide the certifications specified below or otherwise comply with the requirements set forth below.

The Notes have not been, and will not be, registered under the Securities Act or with any securities regulatory authority of any state or other jurisdiction in the United States, and the Notes may not be offered or sold within the United States (as defined in Regulation S) or to, or for the account or benefit of, U.S. persons, unless registered under the Securities Act or pursuant to an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and applicable state or local securities laws. The Notes are not being offered in the United States or to U.S. persons. All offers and sales of the Notes outside the United States will be made to non-U.S. persons in compliance with Regulation S.

Notice to Regulation S Investors

Each purchaser of the Notes pursuant to Regulation S will be deemed to have represented and agreed that it has received a copy of these Listing Particulars and such other information as it deems necessary to make an informed investment decision and that:

(A) The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the Securities Act or with any securities regulatory authority of any state of the United States and may not be offered, sold, pledged or otherwise transferred, directly or indirectly, other than in accordance with the restricted legend in paragraph (D) below;

(B) Such purchaser is purchasing the Notes in an “offshore transaction”;

(C) The Notes have not been offered to it by means of any “directed selling efforts” as defined in Regulation S; and

(D) The purchaser understands that the Global Note and any certificated notes issued upon transfer or exchange of beneficial interests therein will bear a restricted legend to the following effect (unless the Issuer determines otherwise in accordance with applicable law):

THIS NOTE HAS NOT BEEN AND WILL NOT BE REGISTERED UNDER THE U.S. SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED (THE “SECURITIES ACT”), OR WITH ANY SECURITIES REGULATORY AUTHORITY OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES, AND MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR DELIVERED IN THE UNITED STATES OR TO, OR FOR THE ACCOUNT OR BENEFIT OF, ANY U.S. PERSON, UNLESS SUCH NOTE IS REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OR AN EXEMPTION FROM THE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS THEREOF IS AVAILABLE; and

(E) The Issuer shall not recognise any offer, sale, pledge or other transfer of the Notes made other than in compliance with the above-stated restrictions.

204

EXCHANGE CONTROLS

The information below is not intended as legal advice and it does not purport to describe all of the considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser of Notes. Prospective purchasers of Notes that are non-South African residents or emigrants from the Common Monetary Area are urged to seek further professional advice in regard to the purchase of Notes. For the purposes of the discussion below, the Common Monetary Area means South Africa, Lesotho, Namibia and Swaziland.

Exchange controls restrict the export of capital from South Africa, Namibia and the Kingdoms of Swaziland and Lesotho (the “Common Monetary Area”). These exchange controls are administered by the Financial Surveillance Department of the SARB (the “FSD”) and regulate transactions involving South African residents (including South Africa resident companies). The basic purpose of these exchange controls is to mitigate the decline of foreign capital reserves in South Africa. Our advisors anticipate that South African exchange controls will continue to operate for the foreseeable future. The South African government has, however, committed itself to gradually relaxing exchange controls and significant relaxation has occurred in recent years. It is the stated objective of the authorities to achieve equality of treatment between residents and non-residents in relation to inflows and outflows of capital. The gradual approach towards the abolition of exchange controls adopted by the South African government is designed to allow the economy to adjust more smoothly to the removal of controls that have been in place for a considerable period of time.

The issuance and sale of the Notes and any payment of interest including the payment of interest by the issue of Notes or principal in respect thereof, requires the approval of FSD. We have obtained the approval of the FSD for:

• the issuance and sale of the Notes; and

• the payment of interest in cash.

Our approval from the FSD requires that an application be made to the FSD for the redemption of any additional notes issued to pay interest on the Notes and/or any Additional Amounts at the maturity thereof, which application will require that we provide to the FSD, a reconciliation of the additional notes issued to pay interest on the Notes and/or Additional Amounts against all Notes to be redeemed at maturity.

We will be required to obtain the approval of the FSD for any redemption of any Notes prior to their maturity, including upon a change of control.

Non-residents of the Common Monetary Area

Non-residents of the Common Monetary Area may purchase, hold and transfer the Notes without FSD approval.

Residents of the Common Monetary Area

Under the terms of the FSD approval for the Notes, no South African entity or institution nor any offshore subsidiary or branch operation of a South African entity or institution is allowed to participate in or underwrite the Notes without the prior specific approval of the FSD.

Emigrants from the Common Monetary Area

Emigrants from the Common Monetary Area may not purchase Notes using “blocked” rand amounts without appropriate FSD approval. For purposes of this paragraph, “blocked” rand amounts mean funds denominated in rand which may not be transferred out of South Africa or paid into the bank account of a non-South African resident.

205

SERVICE OF PROCESS AND ENFORCEABILITY OF CIVIL LIABILITIES

The Issuer is a company incorporated in, and under the laws issued by, South Africa. The Issuer’s directors and executive officers reside in South Africa. The Issuer’s assets are located in South Africa. As a result, you may have difficulties effecting service of process in the United States upon the Issuer or its directors and officers in connection with any lawsuits related to the Notes, including actions arising under the federal securities laws of the United States, or enforcing against any of them judgments obtained in U.S. courts predicated upon civil liability provisions of the federal securities laws of the United States. In addition, there is doubt as to the enforceability in South Africa, in original actions or actions for the enforcement of judgments of U.S. courts, of civil liabilities predicated solely upon the federal securities laws of the United States.

Choice of law

In any proceedings for the enforcement of the obligations of any South African party, the South African courts will generally give effect to the choice of foreign law as contemplated in the Notes as the governing law thereof.

Jurisdiction

Subject as set out below, any party’s (i) irrevocable submission under the Notes to the jurisdiction of a foreign court; and (ii) agreement not to claim any immunity to which it or its assets may be entitled, is generally legal, valid, binding and enforceable under the laws of South Africa, and any judgment obtained in the foreign jurisdiction will be recognized and be enforceable by the courts of South Africa without the need for re- examination of the merits. The appointment by any party of an agent in the foreign court to accept service of process in respect of the jurisdiction of the foreign courts is generally valid and binding on that party.

Under South African law, a court will not accept a complete ouster of jurisdiction, although generally it recognises party autonomy and gives effect to choice of law provisions. However, jurisdiction remains within the discretion of the court and a court may, in certain instances, assume jurisdiction provided there are sufficient jurisdictional connecting factors. South African courts may, in rare instances, choose not to give effect to a choice of jurisdiction clause, if, for example, such choice is contrary to public policy. Proceedings before a court of South Africa may be stayed if the subject of the proceedings is concurrently before any other court.

Recognition of foreign judgments

Subject to obtaining the permission of the South African Minister of Trade and Industry under the Protection of Businesses Act, 1978, an authenticated judgment obtained in a competent court of jurisdiction other than South Africa will be recognized and enforced by ordinary action in accordance with procedures ordinarily applicable under South African law for the enforcement of foreign judgments; provided, that the judgment was pronounced by a proper court of law, was final and conclusive (in the case of a judgment for money, on the face of it), has not become stale, and has not been obtained by fraud or in any manner opposed to natural justice or contrary to the international principles of due process and procedural fairness, the enforcement thereof is not contrary to South African public policy and the foreign court in question had jurisdiction and competence according to the applicable rules on conflict of laws. A foreign judgment will probably not be recognized in South Africa if the foreign court exercized jurisdiction over the defendant solely by virtue of an attachment to found jurisdiction or on the basis of domicile alone. South African courts will not enforce foreign revenue or penal law and South African courts have, as a matter of public policy, generally not enforced awards for multiple or punitive damages. Permission from the Minister of Trade and Industry will similarly not be granted if it would result in the recovery of excessive damages.

Where obligations are to be performed in a jurisdiction outside South Africa they may not be enforceable under the laws of South Africa to the extent that such performance would be illegal or contrary to public policy under the laws of South Africa, or the foreign jurisdiction or to the extent that the law precludes South African courts from granting extra territorial orders.

Under the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards Act, 1977 (the “Enforcement Act”), any foreign arbitral award may, subject to the provisions of sections 3 and 4 thereof, be made an order of court by any court. Any such award which has been made an order of court pursuant to the provisions of the Enforcement Act may be enforced in the same manner as any judgment or order to the same effect (subject to the provisions of the Protection of Business Act, 1978, which apply mutatis mutandis to foreign arbitral awards). See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to the Notes, the Guarantees, our Indebtedness and the Structure— The Issuer is incorporated in South Africa and you may not be able to enforce foreign judgments against the Issuer.”).

206

Effect of Liquidation on Civil Proceedings

In general and subject to certain exceptions, civil proceedings (including arbitration proceedings) instituted by or against an insolvent are automatically stayed on the liquidation of the insolvent’s estate until the appointment of a Trustee. A plaintiff wishing to continue with such proceedings against the insolvent must give notice of its intention to do so within a period of four weeks from the date of the appointment of the liquidator (which usually takes place at first meeting of creditors), in accordance with the provisions of the Insolvency Act, failing which, the proceedings shall be considered to have been abandoned unless the court directs otherwise. In circumstances where the court finds that there was a reasonable excuse for a failure to give the requisite notice, it has a discretion to allow a plaintiff to continue with proceedings on such conditions as it thinks fit. Execution against the insolvent’s assets is similarly stayed.

207

LISTING AND GENERAL INFORMATION

Authorization

Cell C and the Guarantors have each obtained all necessary consents, approvals and authorizations in connection with the issue and performance of the Notes and the Guarantees, respectively. The issue of the Notes were duly authorized by a resolution of the Board of Directors of Cell C dated 19 July 2017. The Guarantees by the Guarantors were authorized by (i) a resolution of Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited’s board of directors; (ii) a resolution of Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited’s board of directors; and (iii) a resolution of Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited’s board of directors, each dated 21 July 2017.

Listing

There is currently no public market for the Notes. These Listing Particulars have been approved as “Listing Particulars” by the Irish Stock Exchange in connection with the Arrangement. Application has been made to have the Notes admitted to the Official List of the Irish Stock Exchange and to trading on the Global Exchange Market, however no assurance can be given that such application will be accepted. References in these Listing Particulars to the Notes being “listed” (and all related references) will mean that the Notes have been admitted to the Official List and have been admitted to trading on the Global Exchange Market. The Global Exchange Market is not a regulated market pursuant to the provisions of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (Directive 2004/39/EC). We expect that admission of the Notes to the Official List and to trading on the Global Exchange Market will be granted on or about 20 September 2017, subject only to the issue of the Notes. The estimated total expenses related to the admission of the Notes to trading on the Global Exchange Market are €6,540.

There is no assurance that the Notes will be listed and admitted to trade on the Global Exchange Market.

Listing Agent

Arthur Cox Listing Services Limited is acting solely in its capacity as listing agent for the Issuer in connection with the Notes and is not itself seeking admission of the Notes to the Global Exchange Market.

Clearing Systems

The Notes have been accepted for clearance and settlement through the facilities of Euroclear and Clearstream.

The ISIN for the Notes is XS1634003831. The Common Code for the Notes is 163400383 .

No significant change; no material adverse change

Other than the Recapitalization as set out above in “The Cell C Recapitalization” there has been no significant change in the financial or trading position of the Group since December 31, 2016.

There has been no material adverse change in the prospects of the Issuer since December 31, 2016.

Governmental, legal or arbitration proceedings

Other than as set out in “Overview of our Business—Legal Proceedings and Contingent Liabilities” there have been no governmental, legal or arbitration proceedings (including any such proceedings which are pending or threatened of which the Issuer and the Group are aware), during a period covering at least the previous 12 months which may have, or have had in the recent past, significant effects on the Issuer’s and/or the Group’s financial position or profitability.

There have been no governmental, legal or arbitration proceedings (including any such proceedings which are pending or threatened of which the Security SPV is aware), during a period covering at least the previous 12 months which may have, or have had in the recent past, significant effects on the Security SPV’s financial position or profitability.

Auditors

208

Our auditors for each of the financial years ended December 31, 2015 and 2016 were KPMG. KPMG audited our 2016 Financial Statements and 2015 Financial Statements included in these Listing Particulars, as stated in the reports appearing herein. The business address of KPMG is 85 Empire Road, Parktown 2193, South Africa.

South African Commercial Paper Regulations

The Issuer is required to make the disclosure pursuant to paragraph 3(5) of the exemption notice published in terms of the South African Banks Act, 1990 (the “Banks Act”) under Government Notice 2172 in Government Gazette 16167 of 14 December 1994 exempting the designation of certain activities from falling within the meaning of “the business of a bank” (as that term is defined in the Banks Act).

Organizational Information

The Issuer, a public company organized under the laws of South Africa, was incorporated on April 6, 1999 under the registration no. 1999/007722/06 pursuant to the 1973 Companies Act, since replaced by the Companies Act. The Issuer’s contact telephone number at this address is +27 11 324 4000.

The Guarantors are:

• Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of the South Africa, which was incorporated on April 6, 2001 under the registration no. 2001/008017/07 pursuant to the 1973 Companies Act. Its principal place of business and registered business address is The Waterfall Campus, Cnr Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa. Its telephone number is +27 841 944 000. Its directors are Graham Mackinnon, Mazen Abou Chakra, Jose Dos Santos and Robert Pasley.

• Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of South Africa, which was incorporated on April 6, 2001 under the registration no. 2001/008003/07 pursuant to the 1973 Companies Act. Its principal place of business and registered business address is The Waterfall Campus, Cnr Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa. Its telephone number is +27 841 944 000. Its directors are Graham Mackinnon, Mazen Abou Chakra, Sherhaad Kajee and Robert Pasley.

• Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of South Africa, which was incorporated on November 9, 2009 under the registration no. 2009/004432/07 pursuant to the 1973 Companies Act. Its principal place of business and registered business address is The Waterfall Campus, Cnr Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa. Its telephone number is +27 841 944 000. Its directors are Graham Mackinnon, Mazen Abou Chakra and Robert Pasley.

All of the Group’s subsidiaries are Guarantors. As at and for the twelve months ended December 31, 2016, Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, represented R1,518 million, or 13%, of our net assets and R10,593 million, or 341%, of our EBITDA. This is the case because a portion of the revenue flows initially to the subsidiary, while substantially all of the balance of the revenue flows to the Issuer. Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, alongside the Issuer, offers a comprehensive array of mobile voice and data communication services, including value-added services, to prepaid, postpaid, hybrid and broadband subscribers in the consumer market. For a discussion of risks that could impact on Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited’s Guarantee, see “Risk Factors.” As of the Completion Date, the obligations of Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, in its capacity as a Guarantor, under the Notes, the Trust Deed and the Guarantees, as applicable, are secured by the First Ranking Security Interests on an equal and rateable basis with the Senior Lenders under the Senior Facilities and the Hedge Counterparties to the Hedge Arrangement in the Collateral, that include substantially all of the existing and after-acquired personal property and the other assets of Cell C Service Provider Company Proprietary Limited, to the extent such assets are assignable.

The Security SPV is Micawber 405 (RF) Proprietary Limited, a limited liability company organized under the laws of South Africa, which was incorporated on January 5, 2005, under the registration no. 2005/000465/07. Its principal place of business is 3rd Floor, 200 on Main, Cnr Main and Bowwood Roads, Claremont, South Africa, 7708. Its director is John Richard Parker Doidge. The registered business address of the director of the Security SPV is 3rd Floor, 200 on Main, Cnr Main and Bowwood Roads, Claremont, South Africa, 7708.

209

There are no conflicts of interests between the Board of Directors’ duties to the Security SPV and the Board of Directors’ private interests or other duties.

The shares in the Security SPV are held in trust by TMF Corporate Services (South Africa) (Pty) Ltd, a South African private company with registration number 2006/013631/07 (“TMF”). The administrator, TMF administers the Security SPV in terms of an arrangement governing the administration of the Security SPV. The beneficiaries of the trust which holds the Security SPV are the Trustee for the Holders and other lenders to the Issuer.

The Security SPV was created to address the fact that South African law restricts the ability of offshore trustees, such as the Trustee for the Notes, to take security in South African assets. The Security SPV is an independent entity, and there is no relationship between the Security SPV and any members of the Group.

Cell C’s Equity Investees

Mobile Number Portability Company Proprietary Limited (referred to in our corporate structure chart as “Number Portability Company”) and Newshelf 1138 Proprietary Limited t/a Fibreco Telecommunications Holdings Proprietary Limited (“FibreCo”) are equity investments of the Issuer and are not subsidiaries. The Issuer shares in the profits and losses of these joint ventures but has no control over these entities.

Cell C Subsidiaries

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Issuer. The Issuer controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. The financial statements of the Issuer’s subsidiaries are included in our consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases.

Information regarding the Issuer’s subsidiaries is presented below.

Subsidiary Registered Office Third-party Interest (%) Cell C Service Provider Proprietary Limited The Waterfall Campus, Cnr 0% Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa Cell C Property Company Proprietary Limited The Waterfall Campus, Cnr 0% Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa Cell C Tower Company Proprietary Limited The Waterfall Campus, Cnr 0% Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090, South Africa

210

Documents

For so long as the Notes are listed on the Official List of the Irish Stock Exchange and admitted to trading on the Global Exchange Market, copies of the following documents will be available in physical form for inspection at the registered office of Cell C and at the specified offices of the Paying Agents for the time being in London:

• the memorandum of incorporation of Cell C along with all its amendments;

• the Financial Statements, together with the audit reports in connection therewith. Cell C currently prepares audited consolidated accounts on an annual basis;

• the Trust Deed;

• the Paying Agency Agreement;

• the Guarantees;

• the Security Documents; and

• these Listing Particulars.

Documents Incorporated by Reference

No document or content of any website is incorporated by reference in these Listing Particulars.

Material Contracts

Except as disclosed in these Listing Particulars, Cell C has not entered into any material contract outside the ordinary course of its business that could result in Cell C being under an obligation or entitlement that is material to its ability to meet its obligations in respect of the Notes.

Language

The language of these Listing Particulars is English. Certain legislative references and technical terms have been cited in their original language in order that the correct technical meaning may be ascribed to them under applicable law.

Post-Issuance Information

Cell C does not intend to provide any post-issuance information in relation to this issue of Notes except as required by the rules of the Irish Stock Exchange and the Trust Deed.

211

TERMINOLOGY

Evolving Terminology

The communications industry relies on global and regional standards for equipment manufacturers and service providers. These standards allow interoperability between communications devices and networks, provide roaming for customers, and provide economies of scale for manufacturers and service providers.

The Internet continues to have a profound impact on communications. The IP and related standards define the way in which data is located and exchanged across the Internet. The Internet first impacted users in providing services such as email and browsing of the World Wide Web. Advances in coding and compression techniques mean that IP is increasingly becoming the standard way in which VoIP and video (including IPTV) services are provided. Portals such as Facebook have extended basic communications into centralized virtual places for social networking. Websites and mobile applications have become the standard way for businesses to reach and interact with their customers.

Fixed networks provide the backbone for transmission of voice, data and video around the world. Advances in fibre optic technologies are providing ever increasing communication capacities. IP provides efficient switching and routing. Fixed access networks were originally developed using copper cable for voice (telephony). Broadband now provides for high speed IP access using DSL, coaxial cable (first used for cable TV), optic fibre, and wireless (most notably Wi-Fi).

Mobile networks were originally developed to provide voice services. First generation mobile networks established the technology of “cellular” networks in which continuous communications are provided to mobile users by a collection of radio towers (“base stations”) each providing service to users within a cell area with “handover” between cells when users change location. While these first generation networks became popular with business customers in first world economies, costs were prohibitive for the majority of residential customers.

Second generation (“2G”) mobile networks and associated handsets have achieved the global economies of scale that has led to mass adoption by customers. This has most notably been achieved by the GSM standard, particularly through standardization of spectrum frequencies and roaming arrangements, and to a lesser extent by the CDMA standard. 2G networks were again originally developed for voice communications, and apply digital compression techniques to achieve cost efficiency. Standards also included Short Messaging (sometimes called “texting”) which has proven extremely popular with many users. Extensions now provide low and medium speed data services (GPRS and EDGE) and these are adequate for occasional messaging and web browsing purposes, and for simple machine to machine communications (such as metering). 2G mobile is now a ubiquitous mobile service across the world.

3G mobile networks were originally developed to support video calling as well as voice, and to more cost effectively handle high volumes of mobile users. HSPA has subsequently been introduced and has led to the expansion of high speed mobile broadband data services. The dominant 3G standard is UMTS (also sometimes called WCDMA). 3G services have been launched in most major economies with focus on major population centers and transport routes. Nearly all 3G handsets also support 2G for backwards compatibility, and this is important for roaming and for service continuity in rural areas, where 2G is often the only mobile service available.

4G/LTE/LTE-Advanced mobile networks have been developed to optimize support for data through very high speeds, low latency (delay) and high overall system capacities. The higher performance of 4G is especially beneficial to smartphone and tablet users, and to mobile operators who have heavily loaded 3G networks. The primary 4G standard is LTE and this is starting to be deployed in many countries. Some of the techniques used in 4G have been reverse engineered into 3G to provide higher speeds and this has resulted in some high speed 3G network services (e.g., those based on the HSPA+ standard) being marketed as 4G.

Actual data speed and throughput available to any given user in a mobile network can vary quite widely depending on radio coverage (primarily inflected by distance from the nearest cell tower and obstructions such as building walls) and the number of other competing users active in the same radio cell.

Definitions

212

bps (bits per second) ...... A data transmission rate.

broadband ...... Refers to high speed and cable broadband Internet access.

broadband service ...... A communications service for content requiring high-speed transmission rates such as video transmission.

BSCs ...... Base station controllers.

BTSs ...... Base transceiver stations.

churn ...... A measure of customer turnover due to subscription disconnections as a result of terminations by customers; switching by customers to competing services; terminations by the service provider due to customer non-payment; and, in the case of mobile communications services, expirations of prepaid cards.

CST ...... Community service telephones (through the deployment of manned public pay telephones in under-serviced areas across South Africa, providing consumers with a regulated and reduced calling rate to national numbers as well as international calling at market rates).

EC Act ...... Electronic Communications Act 26 of 2005 of South Africa, which came into effect on July 19, 2006, as amended by the Electronic Communications Amendment Act 1 of 2014 of South Africa, which came into force on May 21, 2014.

ECNS ...... Electronic Communications Network License.

ECS ...... Electronic Communications Service License.

EDGE ...... EDGE, or Enhanced GPRS, is an evolution of GPRS and enables throughput at rates that are three to four times faster than GRPS. fibre ...... A method of telecommunication using the transmission of information by sending pulses of light through an optical fibre cable.

Final Call Termination Regulations ...... The final call termination regulations published by ICASA on September 30, 2014, for the period October 1, 2014 to September 30, 2017.

GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) . A GSM-based packet-switched data transmission technology standard, established by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute, in which BTSs can be directly connected to the Internet, thus bypassing the switching systems typically used to connect mobile traffic to fixed networks. GPRS provides users of mobile communications services better data access capability with virtually instant and permanent connections, as well as speeds up to ten times higher than GSM.

GSM (Global System of Mobile A digital mobile telecommunications system standardized by the Communications)...... European Telecommunications Standards Institute based on digital transmission and cellular network architecture with roaming in use throughout Europe, Japan and in various other countries. GSM systems operate in the 900 MHz (GSM 900) and 1800 MHz (GSM 1800, also referred to as DCS 1800) frequency bands.

GSM 900 and GSM 1800 ...... See “GSM.”

213

hotspot ...... Access points that enable customers to access the Internet through Internet-enabled devices.

HSPA+ ...... High Speed Packet Access.

ICASA ...... The Independent Communications Authority of South Africa.

ICT ...... Information and communications technology. interconnection ...... The linking of telecommunications networks used by the same or different persons in order to allow the users of the services or networks of one person to communicate with the users of the services or networks of the same person or of another person, or to access services provided by another person.

Interim Call Termination Regulations .. The revized call termination regulations published by ICASA in February 2014, following a public consultation process, subsequently replaced by the Final Call Termination Regulations. international roaming ...... Provision of roaming services in the domestic market to subscribers of a competing operator’s network. See “roaming.”

LTE ...... An abbreviation for Long-Term Evolution, commonly marketed as 4G LTE, is a standard for wireless communication of high-speed data for mobile phones and data terminals. LTE is based on the GSM/EDGE and UMTS/HSPA network technologies, increasing the capacity and speed using a different radio interface together with core network improvements. The standard is developed by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).

LTE-Advanced ...... LTE-Advanced is a mobile communication standard and a major enhancement of the LTE standard. LTE-Advanced was formally submitted as a candidate 4G system to ITU-T in late 2009 and was standardized by the 3GPP in March 2011 as 3GPP Release 10. The main functionalities introduced by LTE-Advanced are carrier aggregation increase bandwidth, enhanced use of multi-antenna techniques and support for relay nodes.

MB ...... A unit of computer data commonly used to measure data storage or transfer.

Mbps (Megabits per second) ...... A data transmission rate. One Mbps equals 1 million bps.

MBT network ...... Mobile Backhaul Transport network.

MHz (Megahertz) ...... A measure of frequency. One MHz equals 1,000,000 cycles per second.

MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) A standard defined for use in advanced wireless terminals that allows users to send and receive messages containing various kinds of multimedia content, such as images, audio and video clips, with a “non-real- time” transmission.

MoU ...... Minutes of use.

214

MPLS (Multiprotocol Label A standards-approved technology for speeding up network traffic flow Switching)...... and making it easier to manage. MPLS involves setting up a specific path for a given sequence of packets, identified by a label put in each packet, thus saving the time needed for a router to look up the address in order to forward the packet to the next node.

MTRs (mobile termination rates) ...... A tariff chargeable by operators for incoming calls terminating on their mobile networks.

MVNO (mobile virtual network A wireless communication service provider that does not own the operator) ...... wireless network infrastructure over which it provides services to its customers. off-net ...... Calls that originate on an operator’s network and for which the customer makes a call to another mobile number that resides with a different network provider. on-net ...... Calls that stay on an operator’s network or a customer private network from beginning to end. penetration rate ...... The total number of subscribers for a carrier divided by the population that it serves expressed as a percentage. postpaid...... Services that are offered to customers with a minimum contract period of which they are bound. prepaid ...... Services that are prepaid by customers who do not have a subscription contract.

RAN (radio access network) ...... A mobile telecommunications system that implements a radio access technology.

RICA ...... Regulation of Interception of Communications and Provision of Communication-related Information Act 70 of 2002 of South Africa. roaming ...... The mobile telecommunications feature that permits subscribers of one network to use their mobile handsets and telephone numbers when in a region covered by another operator’s network.

SAC (subscriber acquisition cost) ...... Represents incentives and rewards related to customer acquisitions, connection bonuses, terminal subsidies and SIM card kit rebates paid to vendors and service providers.

SIM (subscriber identity module) ...... An electronic card inserted into a GSM phone that identifies the user account to the network, handles authentication and provides data storage for user data such as phone numbers and network information. It may also contain applications that run on the phone.

SMS (short message service) ...... A mobile communications system that allows users to send and receive alpha-numeric messages of up to 160 characters from one mobile handset to another via a short message service centre.

Switch ...... A device used to set up and route telephone calls either to the number called or to the next switch along the path. They may also record information for billing and control purposes. termination rate ...... See “MTRs.”

215

UMTS (Universal Mobile The third-generation broadband mobile communications standard. Telecommunications System) ...... UMTS utilises Code Division Multiple Access, or CDMA, technology and has the speed and capacity to handle multimedia transmissions. A UMTS system offers mobile telephony, messaging services, wireless access to the Internet and other multi-media services at higher speeds than GSM systems.

USOs ...... Universal service and access obligations.

Vodacom National Roaming A national roaming agreement entered into between us and Vodacom Agreement ...... in South Africa that allows us to route a portion of our customer traffic over Vodacom’s GSM mobile telephone network.

VoIP ...... Voice over Internet Protocol, in which voice traffic is carried over Internet Protocol rather than a circuit-switched network.

Wi-Fi (wireless fidelity) ...... The generic term used to refer to any type of IEEE 802.11 radio frequency network, in which signals are sent over radio frequencies using wireless network cards and hubs to provide wireless network access.

216

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements of Cell C Limited as of December 31, 2016 and 2015 and for the years then ended

Report of the Independent Auditors...... F-11 Consolidated Balance Sheets ...... F-12 Consolidated Income Statements ...... F-13 Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity ...... F-14 Consolidated Cash Flow Statements...... F-15 Accounting Policies ...... F-16 Notes to the Annual Financial Statements ...... F-16

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements of Cell C Limited as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 and for the years then ended

Report of the Independent Auditors...... F-70 Consolidated Balance Sheets ...... F-74 Consolidated Income Statements ...... F-75 Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity ...... F-76 Consolidated Cash Flow Statements...... F-77 Accounting Policies ...... F-78 Notes to the Annual Financial Statements ...... F-78

217

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-8 F-9 F-10 F-11 F-12 F-13 F-14 F-15 F-16 F-17 F-18 F-19 F-20 F-21 F-22 F-23 F-24 F-25 F-26 F-27 F-28 F-29 F-30 F-31 F-32 F-33 F-34 F-35 F-36 F-37 F-38 F-39 F-40 F-41 F-42 F-43 F-44 F-45 F-46 F-47 F-48 F-49 F-50 F-51 F-52 F-53 F-54 F-55 F-56 F-57 F-58 F-59 F-60 F-61 F-62 F-63 F-64 F-65 F-66 F-67 F-68 F-69 F-70 F-71 F-72 F-73 F-74 F-75 F-76 F-77 F-78 F-79 F-80 F-81 F-82 F-83 F-84 F-85 F-86 F-87 F-88 F-89 F-90 F-91 F-92 F-93 F-94 F-95 F-96 F-97 F-98 F-99 F-100 F-101 F-102 F-103 F-104 F-105 F-106 F-107 F-108 F-109 F-110 F-111 F-112 F-113 F-114 F-115 F-116 F-117 F-118 F-119 F-120 F-121 F-122 F-123

REGISTERED OFFICE OF CELL C LIMITED Cell C Limited Corner Maxwell Drive and Pretoria Main Road, Buccleuch, 2090 South Africa

LEGAL ADVISORS TO THE ISSUER

As to English and U.S. law As to South African law Norton Rose Fulbright LLP Norton Rose Fulbright South Africa Inc. 3 More London Riverside 15 Alice Lane, London Sandton, Johannesburg SE1 2AQ South Africa, 2196 United Kingdom

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS KPMG Inc. 85 Empire Road Parktown, Johannesburg Private Bag 9, Parkview South Africa, 2122

LISTING AGENT Arthur Cox Listing Services Limited Earlsford CentreEarlsfort Terrace Dublin 2 Ireland

PRINCIPAL PAYING AGENT The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch One Canada Square London E14 5AL United Kingdom

REGISTRAR AND TRANSFER AGENT The Bank of New York Mellon SA/NV,Luxembourg Branch Polaris-Vertigo Building 2-4 rue Eugéne Ruppert L-2453 Luxembourg Grand Duchy of Luxembourg

TRUSTEE BNY Mellon Corporate Trustee Services Limited One Canada Square London E14 5AL United Kingdom

LEGAL ADVISORS TO THE TRUSTEE White & Case LLP 5 Old Broad Street London EC2N 1DW United Kingdom